ISSN 0006 8241 = Bothalia Bothalia ’N TYDSKRIF VIR PLANTKUNDIGE NAVORSING A JOURNAL OF BOTANICAL RESEARCH Vol. 18,2 Oct./Okt. 1988 BOTANICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE • DEPARTMENT OP AGRICULTURE AND WATER SUPPLY • REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA NAVORSINGSINSTITUUT VIR PLANTKUNDE • DEPARTEMENT VAN LANDBOU EN WATERVOORSIENING • REPUf JFK VAN SUID-AFRIKA PUBLICATIONS OF THE BOTANICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE PUBLEKASIES VAN DIE NAVORSINGSINSTITUUT VIR PLANTKUNDE Obtainable from the Division of Agricultural Information, De- partment of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X144, Pretoria 0001, Republic of South Africa. A current price list of all available publications will be issued on request. BOTHALIA Bothalia is named in honour of General Louis Botha, first Premier and Minister of Agriculture of the Union of South Africa. This house journal of the Botanical Research Institute is devoted to the furtherance of botanical science. The main fields covered are taxonomy, ecology, anatomy and cytology. Two parts of the journal and an index to contents, authors and subjects are publish- ed annually. Verkrygbaar van die Afdeling Landbou-inligting, Departement van Landbou en Watervoorsiening, Privaatsak X144, Pretoria 0001, Republiek van Suid-Afrika. ’n Geldige lys van alle beskik- bare publikasies kan aangevra word. Bothalia is vernoem ter ere van Generaal Louis Botha, eerste Eerste Minister en Minister van Landbou van die Unie van Suid-Afrika. Hierdie lyfblad van die Navorsingsinstituut vir Plantkunde isgewy aan die bevordering van die wetenskap van plantkunde. Die hoof- gebiede wat gedek word, is taksonomie, ekologie, anatomie en sitologie. Twee dele van die tydskrif en ’n indeks van die inhoud, outeuxs en onderwerpe verskyn jaarliks. MEMOIRS OF THE BOTANICAL SURVEY OF SOUTH AFRICA MEMOIRS VAN DIE BOTANIESE OPNAME VAN SUID-AFRIKA The memoirs are individual treatises usually of an ecological ’n Reeks van losstaande omvattende verhandelings oor vernaam- nature, but sometimes dealing with taxonomy or economic lik ekologiese, maar soms ook taksonomiese of plantekonomiese botany. onderwerpe. THE FLOWERING PLANTS OF AFRICA / DIE BLOMPLANTE VAN AFRIKA This serial presents colour plates of African plants with ac- companying text. The plates are prepared mainly by the artists at the Botanical Research Institute. Many well-known botanical artists have contributed to the series, such as Cythna Letty (over 700 plates), Kathleen Lansdell, Stella Gower, Betty Connell, Peter Bally and Fay Anderson. The Editor is pleased to receive living plants of general interest or of economic value for illustration. From Vol. 50, one part of twenty plates is published annually. A volume consists of two parts. The publication is available in Eng- lish and Afrikaans. Hierdie reeks bied kleurplate van Afrikaanse plante met bygaan- de teks. Die skilderye word meestal deur die kunstenaars van die Navorsingsinstituut vir Plantkunde voorberei. Talle bekende bota- niese kunstenaars het tot die reeks bygedra, soos Cythna Letty (meer as 700 plate), Kathleen Lansdell, Stella Gower, Betty Con- nell, Peter Bally en Fay Anderson. Die Redakteur verwelkom lewende plante van algemene belang of ekonomiese waarde vir afbeelding. Vanaf Vol. 50 word een deel, bestaande uit twintig plate, jaarliks gepubliseer. ’n Volume bestaan uit twee dele. Die publikasie is beskikbaar in Afrikaans en Engels. FLORA OF SOUTHERN AFRICA / FLORA VAN SUIDELIKE AFRIKA A taxonomic treatise on the flora of the Republic of South Africa, Ciskei, Transkei, Lesotho, Swaziland, Bophuthatswana, South West Africa/Namibia, Botswana and Venda. The FSA contains descriptions of families, genera, species, infraspecific taxa, keys to genera and species, synonymy, literature and limited specimen citations, as well as taxonomic and ecological notes. Also available in the FSA series are the following: ’n Taksonomiese verhandeling oor die flora van die Republiek van Suid-Afrika, Ciskei, Transkei, Lesotho, Swaziland, Bophu- thatswana, SWA/Namibie, Botswana en Venda. Die FSA bevat beskrywings van families, genusse, spesies, infraspesifieke taksons, sleutels tot genusse en spesies, sinonimie, literatuur, verwysings na enkele eksemplare, asook beknopte taksonomiese en ekologiese aantekeninge. Ook beskikbaar in die FSA-reeks is die volgende: The genera of southern African flowering plants by/deur R.A. Dyer, Vol. 1 Dicotyledons (1975); Vol. 2 Monocotyledons (1976). Keys to families and index to the genera of southern African flowering plants by/deur R.A. Dyer (1977). Plant exploration of southern Africa by Mary Gunn & L.E. Codd. Obtainable from/Beskikbaar van: A. A. Balkema Marketing, Box/Posbus 317, Claremont 7735, RSA. PALAEOFLORA OF SOUTHERN AFRICA / PALAEOFLORA VAN SUIDELIKE AFRIKA. A palaeoflora on a pattern comparable to that of the Flora of southern Africa. Much of the information is presented in the form of tables and photographic plates depicting fossil popula- tions. Now available: ’n Palaeoflora met ’n uitleg vergelykbaar met die van die Flora van suidelike Afrika. Baie van die inligting word aangebied in die vorm van tabelle en fotografiese plate waarop fossiele populasies afgebeeld word. Reeds beskikbaar: Molteno Formation (Triassic) Vol. 1 Introduction. Dicroidium by/deur J.M. & H.M. Anderson. Prodromus of South African Megafloras. Devonian to Lower Cretaceous by/deur J.M. & H.M. Anderson. Obtainable from/Beskikbaar van: A. A. Balkema Marketing, Box/Posbus 317, Claremont 7735, RSA. Republic of South Africa Republiek van Suid-Afrika BOTHALIA ’N TYDSKRIF VIR PLANTKUNDIGE NAVORSING A JOURNAL OF BOTANICAL RESEARCH Volume 18,2 Editor/ Redakteur: O.A. Leistner Assisted by B.A. Momberg D.F. Cutler B. de Winter P.H. Raven J.P. Rourke M.J. Werger Editorial Board / Redaksieraad Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, UK Botanical Research Institute, Pretoria, RSA Missouri Botanical Garden, St Louis, USA National Botanic Gardens, Kirstenbosch, RSA University of Utrecht, Utrecht, Netherlands Editorial Committee / Redaksiekomitee B. de Winter D.J.B. Killick O.A. Leistner B.A. Momberg M.C. Rutherford J.C. Scheepers ISSN 0006 8241 Issued by the Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001, South Africa Uitgegee deur die Navorsingsinstituut vir Plantkunde, Departement van Landbou en Watervoorsiening, Privaatsak X101, Pretoria 0001, Suid-Afrika 1988 Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/bothaliavolume1818unse_0 CONTENTS - INHOUD Volume 18,2 1. A revision of the genus Prionanthium (Poaceae: Arundineae). GERR1T DAV1DSE 2. Studies in the genus Riccia (Marchantiales) from southern Africa. 10. Two new white-scaled species of the group ‘Squamatae’: R. argenteolimbata and R. albornata. O.H. VOLK, S.M. PEROLD and T. BORNEFELD ,-5 3. Taxonomy and leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa: the Dura group. G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL and R.P. ELLIS 165 4. The Oxygonum dregeanum complex (Polygonaceae). G. GERMISHUIZEN 2 73 5. Notes on African plants: Brassicaceae. Heliophila cornellsbergia, a new species from the Richtersveld. B.J. PIENAAR and A. NICHOLAS 183 Ericaceae. Coilostigma zeyherianum — a correction. E.G.H. OLIVER Geraniaceae. The correct author citation for Pelargonium section Otidia. P. VORSTER Orchidaceae. Additions to the synonymy of Eulophia schweinfurthii. A. V. HALL jg^ Polygonaceae. Reinstatement of Oxygonum acetosella Welw. G. GERMISHUIZEN jg7 6. Fusarium tricinctum (Fungi: Hyphomycetes) in South Africa- morphology and pathogenicity. SANDRA C. LAMPRECHT, W.F.O. MARASAS, P.S. VAN WYK and P.S. KNOX-DAVIES .... 189 7. Leaf anatomy of the South African Danthonieae (Poaceae). XVII. The genus Chaetobromus . R.P. ELLIS j 95 8. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 1 . Characterization of major vegetation units. B-E. VAN WYK, P.A. NOVELLIE and C.M. VAN WYK 211 9. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 2. An annotated checklist of ferns and seed plants. B-E. VAN WYK, C.M. VAN WYK and P.A. NOVELLIE 221 10. A synopsis of the plant communities of Swartboschkloof, Jonkershoek, Cape Province. D.J. McDONALD 233 11. A checklist of the flowering plants and ferns of Swartboschkloof, Jonkershoek, Cape Province. D.J. McDONALD and M. MORLEY 261 12. Threatened plants of the eastern Cape: a synthesis of collection records. D.A. EVERARD 271 13. Description of a proteoid-restioid stand in Mesic Mountain Fynbos of the south-western Cape and some aspects of its ecology. G. DAVIS 279 14. Miscellaneous notes: The plant number scale — an improved method of cover estimation using variable-sized belt tran- sects. R.H. WESTFALL and M.D.PANAGOS 289 15. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL, W.G. WELMAN, G. GERMISHUIZEN, E.'RETIEF, B.J. PIENAAR, C. REID, L. FISH, J. VAN ROOY, C.M. VAN WYK, E.KALAKE and STAFF 293 16. Annual report of the Botanical Research Institute 1987/88 305 17. Obituary: Hermann Merxmuller (1920— 1988). JURKE GRAU (Translation: O.A. Leistner) 325 18. Book reviews 329 Bothalia 18,2: 143-153 (1988) A revision of the genus Prionanthium (Poaceae : Arundineae) GERRIT DAVIDSE* Keywords: Arundineae, Cape, chromosome numbers, conservation, Poaceae, Prionanthium, taxonomic revision ABSTRACT Prionanthium is revised and three species are recognized. All three species have a chromosome number of n =7. The genus is unusual in having multicellular, secretory glands on the glumes and a wide range of inflorescence types. Prionanthium is considered to be arundinoid on the basis of its leaf anatomy, ciliate ligule, spikelet mor- phology and, less strongly, chromosome number. Its chromosome number, multicellular glands, two florets per spikelet, type of palea and rachilla extension relate it more closely to Pentaschistis than to any other extant arundinoid genus. A fully illustrated taxonomic account is presented. UITTREKSEL Prionanthium word hersien en drie spesies word onderskei. A1 drie spesies het ’n chromosoomgetal van n =7. Die genus is buitengewoon omdat dit meersellige afskeidingskliere op die glumas het en verskillende tipes bloei- wyses het. Op grond van die blaaranatomie, gesilieerde tongetjie, blompakkiemorfologie en, in ’n mindere mate, chromosoomgetal behoort Prionanthium tot die Arundineae. Die chromosoomgetal, meersellige kliere, twee blommetjies per blompakkie, tipe palea en ragillaverlenging dui eerder op ’n verwantskap met Pentaschistis as met enige ander bestaande genus in die tribus. ’n Volledige taksonomiese beskrywing word gegee. INTRODUCTION Prionanthium , a genus of three annual species, found only in the Cape Province, is one of the rarest grass gene- ra of southern Africa and one of the species has been listed as endangered (Hall & Veldhuis 1985). The total number of separate populations known is 14. While col- lecting cytological specimens of grasses from the Cape, we were able to locate populations of all three species and this stimulated the following taxonomic revision. Ellis (in prep.) will report in detail on the leaf blade anatomy. HISTORICAL review The genus Prionanthium was first described by Des- vaux (1831), who was unable to relate it to any other genus known to him. He named the only species/*, rigi- dum and gave its distribution as ‘India Oriental’, (India and the East Indies). This was clearly an error, for the illustration that he provided clearly indicates that P. ri- gidum is the Cape species now known as P. dentatum. Prionanthium was undoubtedly based on Thunberg’s collection from the Cape, the only collection known of the species until 1975, although this collection was not specifically cited by Desvaux. However, Thunberg’s collection had already been described by Linnaeus the Younger (1781) as Phalaris dentata so that the correct name for the type species, as pointed out by Henrard (1941), is Prionanthium dentatum (L. f.) Henrard. Nees (Lindley 1836) redescribed the genus as Prio- nachne, basing it on the second known species, P. eck- lonii, and later (Nees 1841) illegitimately renamed Prio- nachne as Chondrolaena . * Missouri Botanical Garden, P.O. Box 299, St Louis, Missouri 63166, USA. MS. received: 1988.03.30. The third species, P. pholiuroides , was described by Stapf (1899). For more than two centuries, the genus was asso- ciated with a mixture of genera (often recognized as subtribes (cf. Pilger 1954; Zotov 1963)) that would be termed avenoid and arundinoid in modern terms (cf. Clayton & Renvoize 1986). Following Hubbard’s (1948) formal recognition of the tribe Danthonieae, Chippindall (1955) was the first to explicitly and exclusively associate Prionanthium with arundinoid genera in the modem sense of Clayton & Renvoize (1986). This placement has been followed by De Wet (1956), Brown (1977), Ren- voize (1981, 1986), Clayton & Renvoize (1986) and Watson et al. (1 986). MORPHOLOGY There are several morphological features which merit discussion beyond that provided in the formal descrip- tions of the taxonomic section. Multicellular, presumably secretory, glands occur on the glumes of all three species. They are of two kinds: stalked in P. dentation (Figures 1A, B; 2C) and P. eck- lonii (Figure 1C, D) and sessile in P. pholiuroides (Figures IE, F, H; 2D). The stalked glands are approximately cylindrical in shape with sloping bases. They are com- posed of 16 rows of cells in circumference. The apex is rounded with a shallow, basin-like depression in the centre surrounded by a low, heavily cutinized lip. The apices of the glands illustrated for P. ecklonii (Figure ID) have apparently been slightly distorted through shrinkage. At the bottom of the basin-like depression is a rectangular grid formed by the raised, rigid, anti- clinal adjacent cell walls of small, square cells (Figure 1H). The stalks of the glands tend to be longer toward the apex of the glume in both P. dentatum (Figure 1A) and/*, ecklonii (Figure 1C). 144 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 1. — Multicellular, secretory glands of Prionanthium. A-B, Prionanthium dentatum, Davidse 33394, on keel of glume: A, inner view of glume with stalked glands along the keel, X 20; B, stalked glands, X 100. C-D, P. ecklonii, Davidse 34018 : C, inner view of glume with stalked glands along the keel, X 20; D, stalked glands, X 100. E-H, P. pholiuroides : E-F, H, sessile glands on keel of glume, Davidse 33983 ; E, inner view of glume, X 20; F, sessile glands, X 100; G, Davidse 34053, glandless glume, keel with only prickles, X 100; H, close-up of sessile gland from Figure IF, X 360. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 145 FIGURE 2. — Morphology of Prionanthium species. A, habit of P. ecklonti, Davidse 34018. B-D, inner view of glumes: B, P. ecklonti, Davidse 34018\ C, P. dentatum, Davidse 33394 ; D, P. pholiuroides, Duthie sn. The sessile glands of P. pholiuroides are basically elliptical in outline to nearly circular in the smaller ones (Figure IF, H). The cutinized Up arises directly from the surface of the glume and is more massive than in P. dentatum and P. ecklonti. The central depression of the gland has the same type of grid as the other two species (Figure IF, H). The glands occur primarily along the midnerve of both glumes, but they are completely absent in some plants of three populations of P. pholiuroides (Struis- baai, Davidse 34048, 34053 (Figure 1G); Stellenbosch Flats, Duthie 1 76 7; Gordons Bay, Parker 3745). In one other population ( Duthie s.n. in PRE-39169) of this species, they may occur on some of the lateral nerves in addition to the midnerve (Figure 2D). Multicellular, secretory glands are rare in the Poaceae as a whole, but they occur in about half of the species of Pentaschistis, an arundinoid genus centred primarily in South Africa. In the glandular Pentaschistis species, mul- ticellular, secretory glands occur on the leaves and in- florescence branches as well as on the glumes. Further- more, in addition to stalked and sessile, multicellular glands, sunken glands also occur, for example in the leaf blade of P. angustifolia (Nees) Stapf and P. setifolia (Thunb.) McClean (Ri\ Ellis pers. comm.). For comparison, glands of two species of Pentaschistis were examined in detail. In P. airoides (Nees) Stapf, the glands on the inflorescence branches are fundamentally similar to those of Prionanthium pholiuroides in being sessile with a prominent, heavily cutinized Up, surround- ing a central depression with a reticulate grid (Figure 3A). In the marginal, sessile leaf glands of P. aspera, the internal structure of the depression is more elaborate. The longitudinal cell walls of the grid in the central de- pression have developed to a size approximately half as large as the lip, and so form prominent ribs (Figure 3B). Evidently, Pentaschistis has a more diverse array of glands, although at least one kind is fundamentally similar to those of Prionanthium. Multicellular glands also occur in many species of Eragrostis where they are always sessile, in the Clavelli- gera group of Panicum, where they are prominently stalked, and in Sporobolus heterolepis (A. Gray) A. Gray, where they are raised bands on the pedicels (Bessey 1884). In some Eragrostis species the basic structure is quite similar to that of Prionanthium (Nicora 1941), whereas those of Panicum are quite different with long, slender stalks supporting a spherical cluster of paren- chyma cells and have been termed multicellular glandu- lar macrohairs (Kabuye & Wood 1969). The function of the glands in Prionanthium is not known. In some freshly collected specimens of P. pholi- uroides the glands were glistening with a thin layer of moisture which I assume to indicate active secretion. In very glandular species of Pentaschistis, such a &P. aspera (Thunb.) Stapf, P. angulata (Nees) Adamson,/*, angusti- folia (Nees) Stapf and others, the plants may be sticky and/or produce an unpleasant smell. The volatile sub- stance that is produced is not known. I did not detect any kind of odour in any species of Prionanthium. In Pentaschistis, at least in those species that produce it 146 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 3. — Multicellular, secre- tory glands of Pentaschistis . A, Pentaschistis airoides, Davidse 34006 , sessile gland on pedicel, X 310; B, Pen- taschistis aspera, Ellis 5439, sessile gland on leaf margin, X 310. copiously, the volatile substance may be an anti-herbivore mechanism. It is possible that in Prionanthium the glands produce a sticky substance that would allow mature spikelets with caryopses to be dispersed through ad- hesion to animals. I could not investigate this matter because all populations that I observed in the field were too young. Inflorescences in Prionanthium display a distinct re- duction series. The inflorescence of P. dentatum is the most unspecialized. It is a condensed panicle that is superficially spike-like. The short panicle branches are tightly appressed to the axis of the panicle. In P. ecklonii most of the inflorescence branches are reduced to pedicels only and they occur in pairs, one short-pedicelled (near- ly sessile) the other longer-pedicelled. Only at the base of vigorous inflorescences is one order of elongated in- florescence branches developed, and the spikelets are paired on these branches, except for the apex, as they are on the main rachis of the inflorescence. Towards the apex of the inflorescence the paired arrangement is lost and the spikelets are solitary. In P. pholiuroides the solitary arrangement of the spikelets is maintained throughout the inflorescence. In very depauperate speci- mens of this species the inflorescence may be reduced to a few, or exceptionally, to a single spikelet. Except for the non-disarticulating rachis, the structure of a P. ecklonii inflorescence superficially resembles a typical andropogonoid raceme, in that the spikelets are paired and borne unilaterally. As inmost Andropogoneae the glumes have a much firmer texture than the lemmas and there are two functional florets. The inflorescence of P. pholiuroides is clearly even further reduced. The existence of this transitional series of inflores- cence types in a small genus is remarkable and clearly demonstrates how racemose inflorescence types in the Poaceae can readily arise through a series of progressive reductions from the paniculate condition. That this has happened repeatedly in the Poaceae is evident from the fact that of the 40 tribes recognized in the family by Clayton & Renvoize (1986), 24 have a racemose type of inflorescence in at least one of their constituent species. The lodicules of Prionanthium are fleshy, cuneate, shallowly one or three-lobed, lack microhairs or cilia at the apex (Figure 4A— D), and generally have two vas- cular bundles. They clearly fall within the variation range encountered in the Arundineae (Tomlinson 1985; Clay- ton & Renvoize 1986). In P. dentatum (Figure 4 A) the lodicules have a more prominent lateral lobe than those in P. pholiuroides (Figure 4B) and P. ecklonii (Figure FIGURE 4. — Lodicules of Prio- nanthium species. A, P. den- tatum, Davidse 33394, in- ner and outer view of a pair of lodicules with cut- off, hairy lemma at the base, X 150; B, P. pholiu- roides, Spies 3678, inner view of old, slightly dis- torted lodicule, X 150. C-D, P. ecklonii, Davidse 34018: C, inner view of lodicule, X 175; D, pair of lodicules at the base of the palea with lemma and ovary cut off, X 85. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 147 4C, D), and, in comparison to these two species, their point of attachment is further away from the palea, i.e., they are positioned more toward the dorsal side of the lemma. The lodicules of the latter two species are very similar. The fruit of Prionanthium has never been described. That of P. dentatum still remains unknown but in both P. pholiuroides (Figure 5A, B) and P. ecklonii (Figure 5C, D) it is a caryopsis with the pericarp fused to the seed coat. It is narrowly lanceolate in outline, slightly convex on the embryo side and grooved on the hilum side. The hilum is linear. In P. pholiuroides the hilum groove is nearly as long as the caryopsis and is uniformly deep (Figure 5B). In P. ecklonii the hilum groove is V2— ■ */„ as long as the caryopsis and is deep in the lower half of the caryopsis but rather shallow in the upper half (Figure 5D). The embryo is V4-3/10 as long as the caryopsis. The caryopsis is held loosely between the lemma and palea. In all respects the caryopsis morphology is typical of arundinoids. The manner is which the spikelet disarticulates at caryopsis maturity is, however, not entirely typical of arundinoids. As is the norm in the subfamily, disarticu- lation takes place between the florets, and the glumes are long-persistent. However, the florets containing the caryopsis are not shed immediately but each of the two florets of a spikelet is held between the incurved margins of the subtending glume. Although the process of dis- articulation has not been observed beyond this point in the field, inferences from mature plants of P. ecklonii and P. pholiuroides which contained a high percentage of mature caryopses in their spikelets, suggest that the following events are probable: the florets containing the caryopses remain enclosed within the glumes for a long time after the caryopses have matured and after the plants have died. Presumably the glumes break off simply due to mechanical wear as the plants disintegrate during the dry season. Mature inflorescences, with most spikelets bearing caryopses, which were soaked in water did not show any noticeable hygroscopic activity of the glumes or florets under laboratory conditions. Further- more, it is likely that the upper floret breaks off first since the upper glume is very prominently hinged and breaks off more easily than the lower one. This process seems consistent with the tougher, chartaceous nature of the glumes compared with the delicate, hyaline florets, and this suggests that the function of protecting the caryopsis has been taken over from the lemmas and paleas by the glumes. CYTOLOGY No chromosome counts have ever been reported for any species of the genus. Young inflorescences were col- lected in Camoy’s fixative in the field. Anthers were squashed in aceto-carmine to which a small amount of iron-acetate was added. Photomicrographs of chromo- some complements were made with a Reicherdt Univar microscope. All species had n = 7 with regular bivalent pairing and no meiotic irregularities (Table 1; Figure 6A— D). The only chromosomal irregularity was the occurrence of a small B-chromosome in one sample ( Davidse 34048 ) of P. pholiuroides (Figure 6E, F). Besides its small size, it stained slightly lighter and behaved differently from the normal bivalents (Figure 6E, F), three characteristics that define B-chromosomes (Jones & Rees 1982). The B-chromosome did not line up on the metaphase I plate (Figure 6F), but since no micronuclei were observed in the tetrads at the end of the second division it appears that the B-chromosome is randomly incorporated into any one of the tetrad nuclei. Due to a paucity of fixed material in the right stage of meiosis, it was not possible to study the behaviour of the B-chromosomes at the two meiotic anr bases nor in pollen meiosis. Although B- FIGURE 5. — Caryopses of Prio- nanthium species. A-B, P. pholiuroides, Ellis 5482A : A, embryo side; B, hilum side. C-D, P. ecklonii, Ellis 5503 A: C, embryo side; D, hilum side. All X 17. 148 Bothalia 18,2(1988) TABLE 1. — Chromosome numbers of Prionanthium species Species Chromosome no. Locality and voucher P. dentatum (L. f.) Henrard P. ecklonii (Nees) Stapf P. pholiuroides Stapf n=7 CAPE. — 3319 (Calvinia): 16 km S of Nieuwoudtville (-AC), Davidse 33394. n = 7 CAPE. — 3218 (Clan william): 45 km N of Citrusdal (-BD), Davidse 34018, Spies 3693. n=7 CAPE. — 3318 (Cape Town): 17 km W of Malmesbury (-BC), Davidse 33983, Spies 36 78. n = 7 + IB CAPE. — 3420 (Bredasdorp): 6 km N of Struisbaai (-CA), Davidse 34048. chromosomes are generally considered to be genetically inert, they often affect fertility, especially when present in high numbers (Jones & Rees 1982). Nevertheless, their occurrence in the population with the most variable spikelet morphology is noteworthy. Although this varia- tion is probably due to simple segregation and recombi- nation, the possibility of a B-chromosome effect cannot be entirely ruled out without further research. \ fc* o m, m * A f 4 »• • H* s, * j*B‘ 0 0 to • ¥ , # « * % s « • c ♦ l*t • c D i i k 4 1 % < ' « E F FIGURE 6. — Meiotic chromo- somes of Prionanthium spe- cies. A-B, P. dentatum, Davidse 33394, n = 7 : A, diakinesis; B, metaphase II. C, P. ecklonii, Davidse 34018, diakinesis, n = 7. D-F, P. pholiuroides'. D, Davidse 33983, anaphase I, n = 7; E-F, Davidse 34048 ; E, diakinesis, n =7 + IB; F, metaphase I, B-chromo- some excluded from the metaphase plate. Arrows point to B-chromosome. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 149 GENERIC RELATIONSHIPS Although Chippindall (1955) expressed reservations about the classification of Prionanthium in the Danthon- ieae (= Arundineae, cf. Clayton & Renvoize 1986), it has not been challenged since that time (De Wet 1956; Ren- voize 1981; Watson et al. 1986; Clayton & Renvoize 1 986). 1 agree with this assessment based on data from leaf anatomy, gross morphology and chromosome number. Leaf anatomy has previously been studied by De Wet (1956) and Renvoize (1981, 1986) in P. pholiuroides and Watson et al. (1986) in an unspecified species. (Al- though De Wet (1956) noted that he had studied P. eck- lonii anatomically, the specimen that he cites as a voucher apparently is one of the Duthie collections made in the Stellenbosch Flats and actually represents P. pholiuroides. His reference to ‘type’ is inexplicable if interpreted as ‘type collection’ since none of the Prionanthium type collections originated in the Stellenbosch area. Perhaps he meant to indicate the kind or ‘type of P. ecklonii originating in Stellenbosch’, which, as I have just indi- cated, represents P. pholiuroides .) A detailed study of leaf blade anatomy will be presented by Ellis (in prep.). From the published results it is clear that Prionanthium is typically arundinoid in its anatomy. It has anon-Kranz leaf anatomy that typifies most arundinoid genera, in- cluding double bundle sheaths, non-radiate mesophyll with a maximum lateral cell count greater than four, adaxial ribs, bulliform cell groups not associated with colourless cells, finger-like microhairs with tapering distal cells, domed subsidiary cells and sinuous long cells in the abaxial epidermis, and dumbbell-shaped to nodular silica bodies. Two unusual features for the subfamily were noted by Renvoize (1986): 1, the chlorenchyma extends between the outer bundle sheath and upper sclerenchyma girders or between upper and lower scle- renchyma girders, a feature also noted by Watson et al. (1986); 2, the upper and/or lower epidermal cells are large and thin-walled. Although unequivocally arun- dinoid, the anatomical evidence available to date is not sufficient for a detailed comparison with other possibly related genera. All Prionanthium species have a ciliate ligule, a characteristic that is shared with all other arundinoid genera recognized by Clayton & Renvoize (1986). The relationship of Prionanthium to other arundinoid genera has only been explicitly discussed by Clayton & Renvoize (1986: 165), who consider it to be one of the primitive arundinoid genera, along with Tribolium, Urochlaena, Elytrophorus, Spartochloa, Notochloe, Zen- keria, Piptophyllum, and Styppeiochloa. They based this assessment on the short glumes and multinerved lemmas with entire tips of these genera. Furthermore, they (Clayton & Renvoize 1986: 171) noted that ‘P. dentatum hints at a distant relationship with Tribolium ’, without indicating on which character(s) they made this judgement. Presumably they suggested this relationship because P. dentatum has the most fully developed panicle of the three species and its proportionally short and broad spikelets superficially resemble those of the Lasiochloa alliance of Tribolium. Four spikelet characters point to a relationship be- tween Prionanthium and Pentaschistis : the occurrence of well differentiated multicellular glands, two florets per spikelet, a small rachilla extension above the upper floret, and similar paleas. Since multicellular glands are rare in the family, I consider this character especially important in relating Prionanthium to Pentaschistis. Although Prionanthium and Pentaschistis share a number of features, their relationship is not a close one, as many differences in spikelet characteristics demon- strate. Of the three characters explicitly mentioned by Clayton & Renvoize (1986) as typical of the primitive Arundineae, Prionanthium does not differ strongly from Pentaschistis in two: 1, short glumes (in both genera the glumes are as long as the spikelet and are as long as or longer than the uppermost floret); 2, awnless lemmas (all species of Prionanthium , 10 out of ±65 species of Pentaschistis ); 3, multinerved lemmas (3— 5-nerved in Prionanthium and 5— 11-nerved in Pentaschistis). The primary basic chromosome number of the Arun- dinoideae has been considered to be x = 12 (Clayton & Renvoize 1986). However, it is more likely that this is a secondary base number derived by polyploidy, since a number of arundinoid genera are now known with n = 6: Tribolium (Davidse et al. in preparation, not x = 7 as in- correctly reported by De Wet 1960 ), Merxmuellera and Karroochloa (as Danthonia, De Wet 1954, 1960; Du Plessis & Spies 1988; Spies & Du Plessis 1988), Chinoch- loa (as Danthonia, Singh & Godward 1963), Schismus (numerous reports, the latest Faruqi & Quraish 1979; Du Plessis & Spies 1988 and Spies & Du Plessis 1988) and Pseudopentameris (Spies & Du Plessis pers. comm.). Stebbins (1956) and Hunziker & Stebbins (1987) also consider x = 6 to be the basic chromosome number of the Arundinoideae. Less common base numbers in the subfamily are x = 7 and 13 in Pentaschistis (Tateoka 1965; Hedberg & Hedberg 1977). Prionanthium with n = 7 has a number that is unusual for arundinoids but one that is matched at the diploid level, n = 7, in part of the genus Pentaschistis (De Wet 1954, 1960; Du Plessis & Spies 1988; Spies & Du Plessis 1988). There is also a resemblance between the two genera in the size of the chromosomes, among the largest chromosomes in the subfamily. CONSERVATION STATUS All three species of Prionanthium have been included in the South African red data book (Hall & Veldhuis 1985). The status of both P. ecklonii and P. dentatum (as P. rigidum ) is listed as uncertain, whereas P. pholiu- roides is listed as endangered. From the fieldwork and herbarium research that I conducted, it is apparent that P. pholiuroides is the most widely distributed of the three species (Figure 7). The population of P. pholiu- roides reported on by Hall & Veldhuis (1985) was re- visited on 21 September, 12 October and 16 November 1987 and still existed as a population of thousands of individuals. However, the local distribution was very spotty and clumped. Similar sites only a few kilometers away lacked any sign of P. pholiuroides. It had also managed to establish itself in a small area of disturbance along the roadside. The main population grows in a heavily over-grazed depression invaded by introduced species of Acacia. 150 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 7. — Distribution of Prionanthium dentatum, ★ ; P. ecklonii, ♦; P. pholiuroides, •. We discovered a modest range extension for this species ( Davidse 34048, 34053). Its total distributional range, although very disjunct, is approximately 250 km, and not 60 km as noted by Hall & Veldhuis (1985). At this new site, the species grew on a limestone outcrop, especially in small sandy soil pockets on the eroded limestone. This indicates that its habitat requirements may not be quite as specialized as believed by Hall & Veldhuis (1985). It seems quite probable that the spe- cies has been largely eliminated from localities such as the Stellenbosch Flats, which have been extensively urbanized. It was common there from the 1920s to at least the 1940s, judging by the Duthie and Rehm col- lections, and although I believe it likely that some plants may still exist in the flats between Gordon’s Bay, Cape Town and Stellenbosch, these are likely to be so few and isolated that the species must for practical purposes be considered extinct in this area. Thus, although the species is on the whole rare, it may not be in immediate danger of extinction. TAXONOMY Prionanthium Desv., Opuscules sur les sciences physiques et naturelles: 65, t.4, fig. 3 (1831); Stapf: 455 (1899); Chippindall: 271 (1955); R.A. Dyer 2: 833 (1976); Watson et al.: microfiche 3 (1986); Clayton & Renvoize: 170 (1986). Type: P. rigidum Desv. =P. den- tatum (L. f.) Henrard. Prionachne Nees in Lindley: 447 (1836). Chondro- laena Nees: 133 (1841), nom. superfl. pro Prionachne. Type: P. ecklonii Nees = Prionanthium ecklonii (Nees) Stapf. Annuals. Leaves linear; ligule a ciliate membrane. In- florescence a spike-like panicle or a secund raceme or spike bearing solitary or paired, subsessile or short-pedicellate spikelets. Spikelets 2-flowered with a small rachilla ex- tension, laterally compressed, keeled; disarticulation above the glumes and between the florets. Glumes sub- equal, with the lower slightly longer than the upper, as long as the spikelets, slightly asymmetrical, keeled, rigidly chartaceous and 5— 8-nerved in the centre, mem- branous to hyaline marginally, long persistent after spikelet maturity and each individually enclosing one of the florets at caryopsis maturity; bases coriaceous and hinged, the upper more prominently hinged than the lower; keels usually with prominent, multicellular glands. Florets bisexual. Lemmas hyaline, 3— 5-nerved, subequal, nearly as long as or slightly shorter than the glumes, covering the palea wings but not the palea keels at spike- let maturity. Paleas nearly as long as or slightly shorter than the lemmas, 2-nerved and 2-keeled, the back and wings hyaline, narrow, the keels prominent, thickened, well developed, exposed at spikelet maturity. Lodicules 2, cuneate, fleshy, glabrous, shallowly 1- or 3-lobed. Stamens 3. Ovary glabrous; styles 2, separate; stigmas plumose, laterally exserted. Caryopsis narrowly lanceo- late in outline, convex on the embryo side, shallowly grooved on the hilum side, especially toward the base; hilum linear; embryo ± '/4 as long as the caryopsis. By contrast, P. dentatum and P. ecklonii appear to have a much more limited distribution and on this basis must be considered to be endangered. Not surprisingly for annual species, samples of P. pho- liuroides {Ellis 5482 A) and P. ecklonii {Ellis 5503A) collected in November 1987 showed good caryopsis production. In both species, at random, five spikelets from five different plants were examined for caryopsis production in both the upper and lower florets. In P. pholiuroides the lower florets had 92% caryopsis pro- duction and the upper 88% . In P. ecklonii 96% of the lower florets and 92% of the upper florets produced caryopses. All three species appear to be able to exist in areas of moderate disturbance such as that encountered in the typical grazed veld of the Cape. All three species also grew on roadsides which may actually undergo less dis- turbance than adjacent grazed veld since animals general- ly do not have access to roadsides. However, road con- struction projects could have drastic effects on these small roadside populations since the vegetation may be completely scraped off by heavy machinery at any time. A genus of three species endemic to the Cape Province. Key to species la Florets pubescent 1 . P. dentatum lb Florets glabrous: 2a Spikelets solitary; inflorescence usually unbranched; glands on glume keels sessile or slightly stalked, rarely absent 3. P. pholiuroides 2b Spikelets paired except solitary near the apex of the inflorescence; inflorescence (except in depaupe- rate specimens) with appressed branches at the base; glands on glume keels conspicuously stalk- ed 2. P. ecklonii 1. Prionanthium dentatum (L. f) Henrard in Blumea 4: 530 (1941). Type: Cape, Bockland, 1773, Thunberg s.n. (UPS, holo.— PRE, microf.!; PRE, frag- ment!; BM!,K!,MO!). Phalaris dentata L. f.: 106 (1781); Thunberg: 19 (1794). Phleum dentatum (L. f.) Pers. 1: 79 (1805). Chilochloa dentata (L. f.) Trin.: 168 (1824), nom. nud., 1: t. 73 (1827). Prionan- thium rigidum Desv.: 65 (1831); Stapf: 455 (1899). Lasiochloa pectinata Trin.: corr. & emend, t. 73 (1836), nom. illeg. superfl. pro Phalaris dentata L. f. Chondrolaena dentata (L. f.) Steud. : 355 (1840). Prionachne dentata (L. f.) Nees: 134 (1841), pro syn. Chondrolaena phalaroides Nees. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 151 Culms 30-430 mm tall, unbranched or branched only at the base, glabrous. Sheaths short-pubescent; ligule 0,5- 1,4 mm long, the membrane 0,05—0,2 mm long, the cilia 0,4— 1,3 mm long; blades 15-105 x 0,5— 3,0 mm, short-pubescent. Inflorescence a condensed, cylindrical spike-like panicle, 5-75 mm long, reduced to a single spikelet in depauperate individuals; rachis cylin- drical, pubescent; branches tightly appressed to the rachis, shortened upward; pedicels short stumps or to 1 mm long. Spikelets 3,2— 5,2 mm long, not obviously borne in pairs, laterally arranged; glumes 5— 7 -nerved, the side facing the rachis pubescent (Figures 1 A, 2C), the hyaline margin broader than the chartaceous centre, the keel with prominent stalked glands, the tip shortly awn- pointed; lemmas evenly pubescent, 3-nerved, shortly awn-pointed; paleas glabrous on the margins, pubescent on the back; anthers 1,8— 2,3 mm long. Chromosome number : 2n = 14 (Figure 6A, B). Only known from the Nieuwoudtville area of the western Cape at an elevation of ± 700 m in Western Mountain Karoo (Figure 7). Vouchers: Davidse 33394, 33396; Ellis 2452, 5416, 5417. Nees (1841) and Chase & Niles (1962), among others, considered Thunberg’s (1794) Phalaris dentata to be new and different from the Phalaris dentata of Linnaeus (1781). This is incorrect because both names are based on Thunberg’s collection from ‘Bockland’ (= Bokkeveld). This is clear from Juel’s (1918) account explaining how Linnaeus published hundreds of new species based on Thunberg’s Cape collections. I interpret Thunberg’s usage to be based on Linnaeus’s (1781) name without proper attribution and using a different and original descrip- tion. For this reason, I consider all other combinations made with the epithet dentatum to be based on Lin- naeus’s (1781) initial usage of this name. Until Ellis re-collected it in 1975, this species was only known from the type collection made by Thunberg in 1773. Thunberg’s collection, however, was a large one and a number of duplicate specimens were distributed to other herbaria so that very good type material exists. 2. Prionanthium ecklonii (Nees) Stapf in Flora capensis 7: 456 (1899); Chippindall: 271 (1955). Type: ‘C. b. sp.’ (Cape of Good Hope). Lectotype (chosen here): ad Olifantsrivier fluviam alt. I, Clan william, Ecklon s.n. (MO!; BM, isolecto.!; PRE, fragment!; US, isolecto.!). Prionachne ecklonii Nees in Lindley: 448 (1836). Chondro- laena phalaroides Nees: 134 (1841), nora. illeg. superfl. pro Pri- onachne ecklonii. Chondrolaena phalaroides Nees var. dentata Nees: 134 (1841). Culms 190—370 mm tall, usually branched, purple, glabrous. Sheaths puberulous or glabrous, usually ciliate. Ligule 0,3— 0,6 mm long, the membrane 0,05-0,1 mm long, the cilia 0,3— 0,5 mm long; blades 40-160 x 0,5— 1,5 mm, glabrous or appressed pubescent. Inflorescence an inconspicuously secund spike-like raceme or panicle, 15—95 mm long; rachis cylindrical, glabrous to sparsely puberulent; branches 30 mm long, tightly appressed to the main rachis; pedicels unequal stumps. Spikelets 4;4_6,1 mm long, usually borne in pairs in the middle part of the inflorescence, solitary toward the apex of the inflorescence and its branches, laterally arranged, the pairs borne alternately; glumes 5— 8-nerved, the side facing the rachis pubescent, narrower, 1— 3-nerved, the side away from the rachis usually broader and glabrous, sometimes sparsely pubescent, 3— 4-nerved, the midrib with prominent, stalked multicellular glands; lemmas hyaline but herbaceous at the tip, sometimes scaberu- lous on the midrib, otherwise glabrous, 3-nerved; paleas glabrous, usually bilobed at the apex, sometimes sparsely ciliate at the apex; anthers 2,9— 3,9 mm long; caryopsis 2,5— 3,2 mm long, the hilum V2 — 4/s as long as the cary- opsis (Figure 5D). Chromosome number'. 2n = 14 (Figure 6C). Only known from the south-western Cape Province at low elevations, rare, in Coastal Renosterveld (Figure 7). Vouchers: Davidse 34018; Drege s.n.; Ecklon s.n.; Ecklon & Zeyher s. n. ; Spies 36 93. This species was until recently only known from three collections, two made by Ecklon and one by Drege. When Nees (in Lindley 1836) described Prionachne eck- lonii, he did not indicate a type and only a general geo- graphical distribution was provided. However, from his use of Ecklon’s name as the epithet and the fact that all three of the collections had been available to him by 1836 (Gunn & Codd 1981), it is clear that he was basing his species on these collections. This is confirmed from a later publication (Nees 1841), dedicated to Drege, Ecklon and Zeyher, where he redescribed and renamed this species as Chondrolaena phalaroides with two varieties, var. dentata and var. edentula, and explicitly cited the Ecklon and Drege collections. He also referred to his 1836 treatment of Prionachne in the synonymy. Unfor- tunately he did not directly refer to P. ecklonii but made the new, but illegitimate, combination Prionachne den- tata. This new synonym was based on Linnaeus’s (1781) Phalaris dentata, which was also cited in synonymy, but was in fact misapplied. The fact that Nees explicitly states that he was publishing a substitute name for his Prionachne indicates that he considered Chondrolaena phalaroides and Prionachne ecklonii to be the same species. Accordingly I have chosen to lectotypify Prio- nanthium ecklonii with the Ecklon collection from the Olifantsrivier. This preserves the usage that Stapf (1899) initiated in his excellent treatment of the genus in Flora capensis. Nees (1841) did not truly understand the differences between the two species that had been collected by this time. This is apparent from the fact that he synonymiz- ed Phalaris dentata (= Prionanthium dentatum ) with his new species Chondrolaena phalaroides (= Prionanthium ecklonii ). When he renamed Prionachne ecklonii as Chondrolaena phalaroides, he recognized two varieties, var. dentata and var. edentida. Under var. dentata he listed all but one of the combinations and usages of this name, including his own illegitimate new combination, Prionachne dentata. He excluded Thunberg’s (1794, 1813) interpretation of Phalaris dentata because he felt that Thunberg’s description, which was substantially ■different from that of Linnaeus (1781), could not apply to the same species. In fact, Thunberg’s descriptive state- ments queried by Nees, spike ‘subpaniculatum’ and 'glumas ovatas’, do apply to Prionanthium dentatum, especially in contrast to the inflorescence and glume 152 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) shapes of P. ecklonii. Actually, Thunberg’s entire glume description (glumae ovatae, concavae, glabrae, bimargi- natae vel cinctae, intra marginem linea duplici aut tri- plici elevata, viridi, sinuato-serratae) applies very well to the two glumes considered as a single unit. Further- more, Thunberg (1794) explicitly cites the locality of the collection (crescit in Bockland) which leaves no doubt that it was based on his own collection from the Cape, which was, as noted before, also studied by Lin- naeus (1781). Nees’s var. edentula should be referred to Prionan- thium pholiuroides (see the discussion following that species). 3. Prionanthium pholiuroides Stapf in Flora capensis 7: 456 (1899). Chippindall: 271 (1955). Type: Cape, Fish Hoek Valley, damp hollow, Nov. 1897, Wolley Dod 3394 (K, holo.!; BM!, BOL!, MO!, PRE!). Chondrolaena phalaroides Nees var. edentula Nees: 134 (1841). Type: not located, probably destroyed at B. Prionachne pholiuroides (Stapf) Phillips: 6, t.63 (1931). Culms 40—250 mm tall, usually branched, purple, glabrous. Sheaths glabrous; ligules 0,3— 0,9 mm long, the membrane 0,1— 0,3 mm long, the cilia 0,2— 0,7 mm long; blades 15—70 x 0,5— 1,5 mm, glabrous below; scaberulous above. Inflorescence a secund, 2-ranked spike, 15—60 mm long; rachis triquetrous, curved out- ward at spikelet insertion, glabrous to scaberulous; pedi- cel reduced to a stump. Spikelets 3,1— 7,0 mm long, the terminal one longest, usually borne singly and alternate- ly on the rachis, the lateral side of the lower glume of each spikelet appressed to the rachis; glumes 7— 8-nerved, the midrib and sometimes some or all the nerves with prominent sessile glands, rarely eglandular with prickles on the keels (Figure 1G), glabrous, except pubescent on the inner side of the lower glume, rarely also puberulent on the outer side of the lower glume or completely glabrous; lemmas hyaline but herbaceous in the middle toward the apex and slightly scabrous, otherwise glabrous, the lower 3-5-nerved, the upper 3-nerved; paleas gla- brous; anthers 1,8-3, 5 mm long. Caryopsis 2, 5-3,0 mm long, the hilum nearly as long as the caryopsis (Figure 5B). Chromosome number : 2n = 14 and 14 + IB (Figure 6D— F). Only known from the Cape Province, at low eleva- tions, rare, primarily in shallow depressions that tempo- rarily collect water (Figure 7). Vouchers: Anderson 8; Davidse 33983; Duthie 1767; Ellis 5434; Rehm 6054. When Nees (1841) described Chondrolaena phalaroi- des var. edentula, he described the glumes as non-dentate (i.e., lacking stalked, multicellular glands) and the spike- lets as entirely alternate (i.e., spikelets borne singly on the rachis). This description applies well to Prionanthium pholiuroides, especially when contrasted to P. ecklonii. Nees also noted that he only saw a fragment of this taxon, intermixed with other specimens. Presumably this fragment was included with one of the three cited specimens, although he does not specify which one. All three were presumably destroyed since all his Poaceae specimens were acquired by B in 1855 (Stafleu & Cowan 1981). I have not seen similar fragments or specimens among duplicates of the Ecklon and Drege collections that I have examined. Nees suspected it to represent a new species, but, presumably because of the fragmentary nature of the specimen, decided to recognize it at a lower rank. A recently discovered population near Struisbaai ( Davidse 34048, 34053 ) is quite variable in spikelet morphology. It has the smallest spikelets of all known populations, 3, 1-5, 2 mm versus 4, 5-7,0 mm for all others. However, more importantly, individual plants within the population have spikelets with glumes that vary from completely eglandular and glabrous to those that are typically glandular and pubescent on the inner side, to glandular-glabrous, or eglandular-pubescent. Since these plants are seemingly segregating for these characters, these variations are not taxonomically re- cognized. The Malmesbury population represented by Davidse 33459 is variable with regard to glabrous and pubescent spikelets. The only population, apparently now extinct, with glands on nerves other than the mid- nerve of the glumes, is the Stellenbosch Flats population sampled by Duthie from 1925 to 1928. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank the Department of Agriculture and Water Supply for the fellowship which enabled me to conduct this research in South Africa and the Botanical Research Institute, for research facilities. I am grateful to B. de Winter and M. de Winter for their very generous hospital- ity during my time in South Africa. I thank R.P. Ellis and J.J. Spies for their helpful assistance in all aspects of my stay in South Africa. I also thank S.S. Brink, G. Condy, J. Davidse, H.duPlessis, J.D.Dwyer, H.Ebertsohn, A. Fellingham, L. Fish, R.E. Gereau, G.E. Gibbs Russell, H.P. Linder, E.G.H. Oliver, S.M. Perold, C. Reid for assistance in the fieldwork, research, and preparation of the manuscript. I thank the curators of BM, BOL, K, MO, PRE, STE, and US for making their specimens avail- able for study. REFERENCES BESSEY, C.E. 1884. Glands on a grass. American Naturalist 18: 420-421. BROWN, W.V. 1977. The Kranz syndrome and its subtypes in grass systematics. Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club 23: 1-97. CHASE, A. & NILES, C.D. 1962. Index to grass species. Vol. 3. Hall, Boston. CHIPPINDALL, L. 1955. A guide to the identification of grasses in South Africa. In C. Meredith, The grasses and pastures of South Africa. Central News Agency, Cape Town. CLAYTON, W.D. & RENVOIZE, S.A. 1986. Genera graminum. Kew Bulletin Additional Series 13: 1-389. DESVAUX, A.-N. 1831. Opuscules sur les sciences physiques et naturelles. Pavie, Angers. DE WET, J.M.J. 1954. The genus Danthonia in grass phylogeny. American Journal of Botany 41: 204-211. DE WET, J.M.J. 1956. Leaf anatomy and phylogeny in the tribe Danthonieae. American Journal of Botany 43: 175-182. DE WET, J.M.J. 1960. Chromosome numbers and some mor- phological attributes of various South African grasses. American Journal of Botany 47 : 44-49. DU PLESSIS, H. & SPIES, J.J. 1988. Chromosome studies on African plants. 8. Bothalia 18: 119—122. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 153 DYER, R.A. 1976. The genera of southern African flowering plants. Vol. 2. Botanical Research Institute, Pretoria. ELLIS, R.P. in prep. Leaf anatomy of Prionanthium (Poaceae: Arundineae). Bothalia. FARUQUI, S.A. & QURAISH, H.B. 1979. Studies on Libyan grasses. V. Population variability and distribution of Schismus arabicus and S. barbatus in Libya. Pakistan Jour- nal of Botany 1 1 : 167-172. GUNN, M. & CODD, L.E. 1981. Botanical exploration of south- ern Africa. Balkema, Cape Town. HALL, A.V. & VELDHUIS, H.A. 1985. South African red data book. Plants — fynbos and karoo biomes. South African National Scientific Programmes Report No. 117: 1-160. HEDBERG, I. & HEDBERG, O. 1977. Chromosome numbers of afroalpine and afromontane angiosperms. Botaniska notiser 130: 1-24. HENRARD, J.T. 1941. Notes on the nomenclature of some gras- ses. Blumea 4: 496-538. HUBBARD, C.E. 1948. Gramineae. In J. Hutchinson, British flowering plants. Gawthorn, London. HUNZKER, J.H. & STEBBINS, G.L. 1987.’ ChromosomaTevo- lution in the Gramineae. In T.R. Soderstrom, K.W. Hilu, C.S. Campbell & M.E. Barkworth, Grass systematics and evolution. Smithsonian Institute Press, Washington DC. JONES, R.N. & REES, M. 1982. B-chromosomes. Academic Press, London. JUEL, H.O. 1918. Plantae thunbergiame. A.-B Akademiska Bok- handeln, Uppsala. KABUYE, C.H.S. & WOOD, D. 1969. A first record of multicel- lular glandular hairs in the Gramineae. Botanical Journal of the Linnean Society 62: 69-70. LINDLEY, J. 1836. A natural system of botany. Longman, London. LINNAEUS, C. 1781. Supplementum plantarum. Impensis or- phanotrophei, Brunsvigae. NEES AB ESENBECK, C.G. 1841. Florae africae australioris il- lustrationes monographicae. Prausnitzianis, Glogaviae. NICORA, E.G. 1941. Contribution al estudio histologico de las glandulas epidermicas de algunas especies de Eragrostis. Darwiniana 5 : 316-321. PERSOON, C.H. 1805. Synopsis plantarum. Carol. Frid. Crame- rum, Paris. PHILLIPS, E.P. 1931. An introduction to the study of the South African grasses. Central News Agency, Johannesburg. PILGER, R. 1954. Das System der Gramineae. Botanische Jahr- biicherl6: 281-384. RENVOIZE, S.A. 1981. The subfamily Arundinoideae and its position in relation to a general classification of the Gram- ineae. Kew Bulletin 36: 85-102. RENVOIZE, S.A. 1986. A survey of leaf-blade anatomy in gras- ses VIII. Arundinoideae. Kew Bulletin 41: 323-342. SINGH, D.N. & GODWARD, M.B.E. 1963. Cytological studies in the Gramineae. II. Heredity 18: 538-540. SPIES, J.J. & DU PLESSIS, H. 1988. Chromosome studies of African plants. 6. Bothalia 18: 111-114. STAFLEU, F.A. & COWAN, R.S. 1981. Taxonomic literature. VoL 3. Bohn, Scheltema & Hoekema, Utrecht. STAPF, O. 1899. Gramineae. In W.T. Thiselton-Dyer, Flora capensis 7: 310-750. Reeve, London. STEBBINS, G.L. 1956. Cytogenetics and evolution of the grass family. American Journal of Botany 43: 890-905. STEUDEL, E. 1840. Nomenclator botanicus, Edn 2. Vol. 1. Cottae, Stuttgartiae. TATEOKA, T. 1965. Chromosome numbers of some grasses from Madagascar. Botanical Magazine, Tokyo 78: 306—311. THUNBERG, C.P. 1794. Prodromus plantarum capensium. Ed- man, Uppsala. THUNBERG, C.P. 1813. Flora capensis. Litteris Joh. Fr. Edman, Upsaliae. TOMLINSON, K.L. 1985. Comparative anatomical studies in Danthonia sensu lato (Danthonieae: Poaceae). Aliso 11: 97-114. TRINIUS, C.B. 1824. De graminibus unifloris et sesquifloris. Im- pensis Academiae imperialis scientiarum, Petropoli. TRINIUS, C.B. 1827. Species graminum. Vol. 1. Impensis Aca- demiae imperialis scientiarum, Petropoli. TRINIUS, C.B. 1836. Species graminum. Vol. 3. Impensis Aca- demiae imperialis scientiarum, Petropoli WATSON, L., DALLWITZ, M.J. & JOHNSTON, C.R. 1986. Grass genera of the world: 728 detailed descriptions from an automated database. Australian Journal of Botany 34: 223-230. ZOTOV, V.D. 1963. Synopsis of the grass subfamily Arundin- oideae in New Zealand. New Zealand Journal of Botany 1: 78-136. SPECIMENS EXAMINED Adamson 3268 (3) BOL, BM, NBG; Anderson 8 (3) BOL, K, MO, PRE, STE. Davidse 33394 (1) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; 33396 (1) MO, PRE; 33459 (3) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; 33983 (3) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; 34018 (2) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; 34048 (3) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; 34053 (3) BOL, MO, NBG, PRE; Drege s.n. (2) BM, K, MO, NBG, PRE; Duthie 176 7 (3) BOL, PRE, STE; 1 795 (3) PRE, STE; s.n. (3) PRE. Ecklon s.n. (2) BM, MO, NBG, PRE, US; Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (2) PRE; Ellis 2452 (1) PRE; 2453 (1) K, PRE; 5416 (1) PRE; 5417 (1) PRE; 5433 (3) PRE; 5434 (3) PRE; 5435 (3) PRE; 5482A (3) MO; 5503A (2) MO; Esterhuysen s.n. (3) BOL. Parker 3745 (3) BOL, K, NBG. Rehm 6054 (3) BM, K, PRE; Ronaasen s.n. (3) NBG. Spies 36 78 (3) PRE; 3693 (2) PRE. Thunberg s.n. (1) BM, K, MO, PRE. Wolley Dod 3394 (3) BM, BOL, K, MO, PRE. Zeyher s.n. (as Pappe s.n.) (3) BOL, NBG, PRE. Note added in proof Stalked, multicellular glands also occur on the back of the lower lemma in many species of Panicum sect. Stolonifera [Zuloaga, F.O. & Sendulsky, T. 1988. A revi- sion of Panicum subgenus Phanopyrum section Stoloni- fera (Poaceae: Paniceae). Annals of the Missouri Botani- cal Garden 75: 420— 455] of tropical America. Although the walls of the stalk are similar to those of Prionanthium, the central depression is nearly smooth and lacks the rectangular grid. It is probable that these Panicum glands are secretory, but this has not yet been conclusively demonstrated. Bothalia 18,2: 155-163 (1988) Studies in the genus Riccia (Marchantiales) from southern Africa. 10. Two new white-scaled species of the group ‘Squamatae’: R. argenteolimbata and R. albornata O.H. VOLK*, S.M. PEROLD** and T. BORNEFELD*** Keywords: Marchantiales, new species, nothopolyploidy, Riccia, southern Africa, taxonomy ABSTRACT Two new white-scaled species, R. argenteolimbata and R. albornata have been isolated by one of us (Volk). R. argenteolimbata has a compact thallus with stiff, regular scales and apolar spores, whereas R. albornata has a somewhat more spongy structure of the thallus, large, frilly, hyaline scales and polar spores. UITTREKSEL Twee nuwe spesies met wit skubbe, R. argenteolimbata en R. albornata is deur een van ons (Volk), gei'soleer. R. argenteolimbata het ’n kompakte tallus, met stywe, ewe-groot skubbe en apolere spore, terwyl R. albornata ’n ietwat meer sponserige tallus-bou, groot, gekartelde, hialiene skubbe en polere spore het. 1. Riccia argenteolimbata Volk & Per old, sp. nov. Thallus dioicus, perennis, parvus, in vivo glaucescens- opacus, in sicco albidus; squamis argenteis quasi limbatis, inde nomen. From usque ad 7 mm longa, 0,7— 1 ,2(— 2,0) mm lata, 0,6— 0,9 mm crassa, 1 — 1,5(— 2)-plo latior quam crassa, asymmetrice furcata, lobis extremis brevibus, obovato-ligulatis, subacutis, marginibus acutis, lateribus costae rectis; pagina superior subplana, longe sulcata. Squamae rigidae, dense imbricatae, semiorbiculatae, inte- gerrimae, marginem frondis minutim superantes, calce incrustatae, albae vel plusminusve subfuscae. Sporae apolares, subglobosae, sine ala, 80-120(-130) pm dia- metro, rufo-bruneae, ornamentatione reticulata, 12—15 (-16) foveolis in diametro. Chromosomatum numerus n = 8; 9; 16; 20; 24. TYPES.— SWA/Namibia, 2116 (Okahandja): Marien- hof (Dunroamin) (OK 289) (— BD), alt. 1 550 m, schluff- reicher, stark kalkhaltiger, grauer Boden der ‘Vlakte’, zeitweise durchfeuchtet, pH 7,8, 1974.03.28, Volk 00910 (M, holo.). 2217 (Windhoek): Hatsamas (WIN 92) (-DC), alt. 1 870 m, ebene Treppenstufen im Blau- kalk, staubiger, schluffreicher, kalkhaltiger Boden, pH 7,8, mit Oropetium capense, 1974.01.31, Volk 00 762 (M, para.). Thallus dioicous (Figure 1 A, B), perennial, gregarious or single and scattered, rarely in rosettes; mostly asym- metrically bi- or trifurcate, branches medium to widely divergent, obovate-ligulate (Figures 1A, B; 2 A), 2—7 mm long, 0,7-l,2(-2,0) mm broad, 0,6-0, 9 mm thick, 1 — 1 ,5( — 2) times broader than thick, segments short, apex wedge-shaped (Figure 2B); sulcus conspicuous and long (Figure 1A, B, E), its sides convex, becoming flatter proximally (Figure 1H1-3); dorsally dull greenish grey, * Botanische Anstalten d. Univ., Wurzburg D8700, Germany, BRD. ** Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001, RSA. *** Am Reelein 1, Hochberg D8706, Germany, BRD. MS. received: 1988.02.01. not shiny, sometimes brown along the margin; margins acute, flanks steep, dark-coloured, covered by silvery grey scales, hence the specific epithet; ventral surface rounded, green or reddish brown, apically with arched, narrow, brown bands across (Figure 1G); when dry, dorsally greyish white, margins lip-like tightly inflexed and flanks densely covered by regularly arranged, ap- pressed, stiff scales (Figure 1C). Anatomy of thallus : dorsal epithelium bistratose, upper layer of cells rarely intact, but when intact, inflated, ± 20-35 x 30-40 pm, capped with deposits of calcium, (Figure II), soon col- lapsed, forming so-called ‘ring’ -cells, which appear thick- walled (Figures 1 J, centre; 2C, D), the lateral walls double and raised; second layer of epithelial cells with- out chloroplasts, short-rectangular, 25-37 x 22—32 gm, upper transverse and lateral walls thicker, the latter gradually thinning out below (Figure II); from above, dorsal cells arranged in regular, honeycomb pattern, air pores mostly triangular and quadrangular, small, (Figures 1 J, 2D); assimilation tissue (chlorenchyma) compact, about '/2 the thickness of thallus, cells rect- angular, 40—50 x ± 32 pm, in columns of about 8—10 cells, enclosing very narrow, usually 4-sided air canals; storage tissue almost '/2 the thickness of thallus. Rhi- zoids 12—23 pm wide, mostly smooth. Scales generally only marginally, sometimes entirely white, base silvery mauve becoming dark grey-brown more proximally (Figure IB, C, E, F, K), closely imbricate, stiff, 600— 800 x ± 500 pm, projecting about 100 pm above thallus margin (Figure 2E, F), rounded, edge smooth, cell surfaces heavily encrusted with calcareous deposits (Figure 1L); in body of scale, cells 50-90 x 25—30 gm, hexagonal or nearly isodiametric, corners angled, cell walls appear thick; at margins cells smaller, quadrate to brick-shaped, ± 22 x 27 pm. Antheridia with short, hya- line necks. Archegonia with dark purple necks. Sporangia usually single, bulging slightly dorsally, each containing 200-450 spores, rarely sporulating. Spores 80-120 (-130) gm in diameter, reddish brown to almost black, semi-opaque to opaque; globular to subglobular, apolar, wing and triradiate mark absent (Figure 3A, B), peri- phery tuberculate (Figure 3D, E), ornamentation reticu- 156 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 1. — Riccia argenteolimbata. Morphology and anatomy. A, female thallus with two sporangia, turgid; B, male thallus with antheridial necks, turgid; C, as B, dry, scales with dark bases; D, bulbil; E, turgid, scales white; F, same specimen as E, dry; G, transverse bands on ventral surface; Hl-3, transverse sections from apex to base; I, part of section with de- posits on turgid and collapsed epithelial cells, (‘ring’ cells with thickened walls); J, horizontal section at different levels: left, top of epithelium with triangular air pores; centre, base of epithelial cells; right, chlorenchyma with four-sided air canals; K, scale; L, calcium deposits on outer surface of scale; (A-L by Volk). A, E, G, Volk 00910 ; B, D, H3, Volk 00765\ HI, Volk 84-713; H2, 1-L, Volk 881a. Scale bars: A-H=lmm; I, J, L =50 urn; K = 100 jim. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 157 feld & Grillenberger 1987). The same degree of notho- polyploidy, represented by two different chromosome patterns within one species, occurs in R. argenteolim- bata (Figure 4B, C) and in R. albolimbata (Bornefeld unpublished). The karyotype with n = 20 (Figure 4D) seems to have developed from the one with n = 24 (Figure 4C) by the loss of the four D, chromosomes. The loss of a group of homologous chromosomes has also been observed in Targionia lorbeeriam (Bornefeld 1987). Further investigations may yield still other karyotypes of R. argenteolimbata . Because of the vari- ability of chromosome numbers in some Riccia species, this character does not seem to be suitable for the definition of a species. Chromosome numbers (Number of counts in brackets) n = 8 : Volk 86-930 pp (3), Volk 86-934 (5), S.M. Perold 772 (3) n = 9 : Volk 86-930 pp (4), Volk 86-934 (3) n = 16: S.M. Perold 727 (2) n = 20: Volk 81-164/165 (4) n = 24: with one A chromosome: Volk 81-164/ 165 (8), Volk 81-1 70 (2), Volk 81-1 72 (3), Volk 86-922 (2); with two A chromosomes: Volk 81-204 pp (2); Volk 00912 (5) FIGURE 2. — Riccia argenteolim- bata. Morphology and ana- tomy. A, dorsal view of dichotomous branch; B, wedge-shaped apex and groove; C, dorsal cells with only a few not collapsed; D, dorsal cells collapsed, showing cell walls and small pores; E, stiff scales at thallus margin; F, more enlarged view of marginal dorsal cells and scales. (SEM micrographs by Perold). (A-F, S.M. Perold 772). Scale bars on A-F =100 /urn. late with 1 2 — 1 5( — 1 6) round to angular areolae across diameter (Figure 3C, D), 3-7 Atm wide, ridges thick (Figure 3A, F), raised at nodes into conical or truncate processes (Figure 3E). Chromosome numbers n = 8; 9; 16; 20; 24 (Figure 4A, B, C, D). Riccia argenteolimbata is one of eight southern Afri- can Riccia species for which several karyotypes are known. Four of the six karyotypes of R. argenteolim- bata (Figure 4A-D) are given in their original arrange- ment and sorted according to chromosome types (Borne- feld 1984). The karyotype with n = 8 (Figure 4A) re- presents the basic set in the genus Riccia and is common to the majority of the species. The karyotype with n = 9 possesses one additional B> chromosome; that with n = 16 has two B, , two Cj and four Dj chromosomes. As is evident from Figure 4B and 4C, the triploid karyotypes of R. argenteolimbata are not achieved by threefold multiplication of the basic set, but by differential multi- plication of the diverse chromosome types. For this phenomenon, which is unique to Riccia, the term ‘notho- polyploidy’ was earlier suggested (Bornefeld 1984). The decreasing size of homologous chromosomes does not occur by chance; it is also found in the other genera of the Marchantiales and becomes more noticeable as the number of homologous chromosomes increases (Borne- 158 Riccia argenteolimbata Volk & Perold, sp. nov., dif- fers from the other Riccia species with white scales by being dioicous, by the compact texture of the thallus, the closely imbricate, stiff, white or greyish white scales, often with darker coloured bases, and by the globular or subglobular, apolar spores. Among the Volk specimens 881, 883 and 11906, which Arnell (1957) identified as R. albosquamata, thalli of R. argenteolimbata are also present; however, his de- scription of R. albosquamata, as well as the type speci- men Volk 452, and most definitely its triangular-globular, polar spores, do not correspond with/?, argenteolimbata (Perold in press). Arnell appears to have been uncertain about the distinguishing characters of the white-scaled species and misidentifled them several times. R. argenteolimbata is found at altitudes of 1 000— 2 000 m above sea level, in summer rainfall areas with an annual precipitation of at least 200 mm. It prefers a sunny position, is calciphilous and often grows on grey- ish turf soils with a high dust content, overlying lime- rich beds, calcrete, crystalline limestone, or dolomite, or on alluvium on steep river banks. These soils may be- come periodically waterlogged for short intervals when it rains. Soil pH values are high: of 96 samples tested, 36% fell between 7,0 and 7,4; 39% between 7,5 and 7,9 and Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 25% above 7,9 (Volk). The species is often associated with R. trichocarpa, R. albolimbata, R. atropurpurea, Cyanophyceae and with crustaceous lichens. It has so far been found only in Zambezian areas occupied by the Sudano-Zambezian floral element (Volk 1966), in the northern parts of SWA/Namibia and a few localities in Botswana, north-western and south-western Transvaal, central Orange Free State and northern Cape Province (Figure 5). In some recent collections, e.g. Volk 85-775 and 86-930, very small plants are mixed with plants of normal size. The difference in size seems to be genetical- ly determined, as it persists in cultivation experiments and the small specimens may represent a different sub- species. During the dry season from April onwards, R. argenteo- limbata tends to form bulbils or turions for perennation and dispersal (Figure ID) (Volk 1984); these are very loosely attached to the soil, brown material accumulates in the walls of the peripheral cells, which then form a resistant covering, the assimilation columns shorten and fatty oils appear in the storage tissue. SPECIMENS EXAMINED S.W.A./NAMIBIA. — 1815 (Okahakana): Etosha, Bitter- water (-CC), Volk. 01389 (M). 1816 (Namutoni): Olifants- bad (-AA), Volk 81-174 (M, PRE); Etosha, Okerfontein FIGURE 3. — Riccia argenteolim- bata. Spores. A, ?proximal face; B, side view; C, ?dis- tal face; D, ?distal face, with crowding of truncate papillae at areolar nodes in centre; E, more enlarged view of areolae; F, ?distal face. [A-E, SEM micro- graphs; F, LM (light micro- scope) micrograph by Pe- rold.] (A, B, D, Volk 8 5- 7 73b-, C, E, F, Volk 84-713.) Scale bars on A-E = 50 Mm; diameter of spore on F, ± 100 Mm. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 159 u cc Cc FIGURE 4. — Riccia argenteolim- bata. Karyotypes. A, karyo- type with n = 8 and chro- mosome formula where A, BB, CC, DD, E represent the basic set in the genus Riccia', B, nothotriploid set with one A chromo- some and U2 chromosome (this karyotype seems to be the most widespread one) ex Bomefeld 1984 (by courtesy of J. Cramer in der Gebriider Bomtrae- ger Verlagsbuchhandlung, Berlin-Stuttgart, FRG); C, nothotriploid set with two A chromosomes and lack- ing U2 chromosome; D, karyotype with n = 20 re- sembles that of 2C, but the four Dj chromosomes have been lost (the sequence from A to D possibly cor- responds to an evolution- ary line). (A-D by Borne- feld) (A, S.M. Perold 772; B, Volk 81-J72 p.p.; C, Volk 81-204 p.p.; D, Volk 81-164/165.) Scale bar: A— D = 1 /rm. )C« ci C2 c'2 « << « D1 Dg ©<» jr • i « O c D « I (-DD), Volk 81-164 (M, PRE). 1915 (Okaukuejo): Etosha between Okaukuejo and Okandehoe (-AA), E. Retief 1422a (PRE); Etosha, Sprokieswoud (-BA), Volk 81-172 (M); Okau- kuejo (-BB), Volk 00912, 81-204 (M). 1916 (Gobaub): Etosha, Gemsbokvlakte (-AA), E. Retief 1493a (PRE); Smook 5118 (PRE); OU 449 (-AC), Volk 5116 (M); Halali (-BA), Smook 5138 (PRE); Elandsdraai (-CA), Volk 81-170 (M); GR 412 (-CB), Volk 00749 (M); OU 179 (-CD), Volk 00975 (M); GR 398 (-DB), Volk 00744 (M); OU 359 (-DC), Volk 81-1 77a (M). 1917 (Tsumeb): Otjikoto Lake (-AB), Smook 5159 (PRE); Volk 81-156 (M, PRE); GR 45 (-DB), Volk 81-151b (M, PRE); GR 154 (-DC), Volk 00454 (M). 1918 (Grootfontein): GR 729 (—AC), Volk 81-146 (M, PRE); Volk 84-705 (M). 2014 (Wel- witschia): OU 419 (-BA), Volk 5137 (M). 2016 (Otjiwarongo): OU 193 (-AA), Volk 00977 (M); OU 132 (-AA), Volk 5135 (M); Outjo Dist., 20 km W of Khorixas (- AA), Long & Rae 921 (E); OU 187 (—BA), Volk 86-860 p.p. (M); OTJ 23 (-CA), Volk 00462 (M); OTJ 97 (-CC), Volk 84-713 (M). 2017 (Water- berg): GR 98 (-AA), Hoffmann PRE-CH 4514 (PRE); Volk 00453, 84-692, 84-721, 85-773, 85-775, 86-930, 86-933, 86-934 (M); OTJ 147 (-CA), Volk 881 p.p., 883 p.p. (M, PRE). 2116 (Okahandja): OM 46 (-AA), Gibbs Russell & Smook 5240 (PRE); OM 37 (-AA), Volk 85-853 (M); OK 240 (-BD), Volk 00910 (M); OK 34/44 (-CA), Volk 11906 p.p. (M); OK 22 (-DA), Volk 5170 (M); OK 252 (-DA), Volk 00469 (M). 2117 (Otjosondu): OK 105 (-DB), Volk 6169 (M). 2118 (Steinhau- sen): OK 107 (-DB), Volk 86-922 (M); OK 113 (-DB), Volk 6212a (M); GO 252 (-DB), Volk 00507 (M). 2217 (Windhoek): Avis Dam (-CA), Volk 00752 (M); Rietfontein (-CD), \olk 81-265 p.p. (PRE); WIN 92 (-DC), Volk 00591, 00761, 00762, 00764, 00765 (M). 2316 (Nauchas): Windhoek Dist., Gamsberg Mountains, 130 lan SW of Windhoek (-AD), Long & Rae 946 (E); WIN 46 (-BA), Volk 81-200 (M). 2317 (Rehoboth): GIB 113 (— BB), Volk 01291 (M). 2416 (Maltahohe): MAL 19 (-BB), Volk 6386, 6439, 6860 (M); MAL 91 (-BD), Volk 6856 (M); 2417 (Mariental): GIB 6 (-BA), Volk 5268 (M). 2418 (Stampriet): Gochas, Auob River (-DD), Hardy 6586a (PRE). BOTSWANA.— 1921 (Aha Hills): Ngamiland Dist., Aha Hills, hill on N side near E end of range' (-CC), Long & Rae 834, 160 842 (E). 2123 (Pink Pan); Central Kalahari Game Res., Decep- tion Pan (-BD), Henderson 659 (PRE). TRANSVAAL. — 2228 (Maasstroom): Alldays, 55 km W of, on road to Swartwater (—DA), S.M. Perold 766, 767, 769, 772 (PRE); Gregory Halt, 19 km NW of Alldays, near bridge (-DB), S.M. Perold 737 p.p. (PRE); opposite Bulkop Store, on calcrete (-DC), S.M. Perold 793 p.p., 794 (PRE). 2327 (Ellisras): Farm Franschhoek, 29 NW of Villa Nova (-BD), Smook 4231 (PRE). 2329 (Petersburg): Vivo, 15 km N of (-AB), S.M. Perold 727, 728 (PRE). 2428 (Nylstroom): between Groenvallei and Roed- tan, Farm Zoetkoppies (-BB), S.M. Perold 339 p.p. (PRE). 2725 (Bloemhof): Farm Leeufontein, 10 km W of Wolmaransstad (-BB), A.E. van Wyk 5753 p.p. (PRE). O.F.S. — 2825 (Boshof): Farm Goede Hoop (-CA), Volk 81-204 p.p., 81-210 p.p. (M, PRE). 2827 (Senekal): 5 km S of turnoff to Willem Pretorius Wildtuin (-AC), S.M. Perold 957 (PRE). 2926 (Bloemfontein): nr Eagle’s Nest, Bloemfontein (-AA), Potts 7003B-E (BLFU). CAPE. — 2922 (Prieska): Farm Erfrust, N bank of Orange River, between Prieska and Koegasbrug (-BC), Smook 4487 (PRE). FIGURE 5. — Distribution map of R. argenteolimbata, ■; and R. albomata, 0, in southern Africa. 2. Riccia albomata Volk & Perold, sp. nov. Thallus monoicus, mediocris, viridis; in sicco albidus, nitidus. From usque ad 12 mm longa, 1,5— 2,0(-4,0) mm lata, 1,0— 2,0 mm crassa, triplo latior quam crassa, bi- vel trifurcata; lobis terminalibus brevibus, valde di- vergentibus, late ligulatis, apice rotundato emarginato, in partibus junioribus profunde acuteque sulcatis; cellulae dorsales epithelii grandes, ad 60 pm diametro, saepe duas columnas chlorophylloferas obtegentes; chlorenchyma dimidio crassitudinis thalli, canalae aeriferae ad 80 /urn latae ab 6 columnis chlorophyllosis circumcinctae; costa subplana, lateribus oblique in margines acutes excurren- tibus, viridibus vel purpureis. Squamae magnae, crispatae, calce incrustatae, vel hyalinae, marginem frondis exce- dentes, dense imbricatae, basi saepe coloratae. Sporae polares, ± 100 pm diametro, alatae, ± irregulariter reti- culatae, foveolis 2,5 pm latis, saepe imperfectis. Ricciae albolimbatae similis, sed ornamentatione sporarum et conformatione epithelii et chlorenchymatis differt. Chromosomatum numerus n = 15. TYPE. — Cape Province, 2921 (Kenhardt): ± 10 km westl. Kenhardt, an der Strasse nach Kakamas (—AC), Bothalia 18,2 (1988) alt. 970 m, grobsandiger, schluffreicher, rotbrauner Gra- nitzersatz am Fuss von Batholithen, pH 7,1, mitR. oka- handjana S. Amell undMoosen, 1981.01.15, Volk 81-081 (M, holo.). Thallus monoicous (Figures 6A, 7B), perennial, in crowded gregarious patches, not in rosettes; branches sim- ple or bi- to trifurcate, symmetric or asymmetric, usually widely divergent, oblong, (4— )5—9(— 12) mm long, 1,5— 2,0(-4,0) mm broad, 1,0— 2,0 mm thick, 1,2— 2,5 or more times broader than thick; apex rounded, obtuse, emarginate, sulcus deep apically (Figures 6A; 7A, B, C), gradually becoming shallow and wide, flattening out proximally (Figure 6B1— 4); dorsally green, shiny, older surfaces and edges yellowish or whitish green; margins acute, slightly attenuate, flanks sloping obliquely outward, violet or green; ventral surface flat to rounded, green; when dry, greyish white and margins inflexed with large, frilly, hyaline or lime-encrusted, white scales covering most of dorsal surface. Anatomy of thallus : dorsal epithelial cells globose or mammillate (Figures 6C; 7C, D), 30-40(-50) x 40-60 pm, often spanning two columns of assimilation cells be- neath (Figure 6C, D, centre), surface occasionally lightly dusted with fine calcium carbonate deposits (Figure 7F), towards margins and in older parts cells frequently col- lapsed (Figure 7E); air pores narrowly rectangular or wider near the margins and 5 or 6-sided, positioned over wide, mostly 6-sided air canals, up to 80 pm wide (Figure 6D); assimilation tissue (chlorenchyma) about V2 the thickness of thallus, cells short-rectangular, 40—50 x ± 30 pm wide, in columns of 6— 8(— 10) cells; storage tissue about \ the thickness of thallus, cells ± 50 jum wide. Rhizoids mostly smooth, some tuberculate, ± 20 pm wide. Scales imbricate, rounded, margin smooth, project- ing ± 50—100 pm above margin of thallus, those at apex hyaline, more proximal ones white, sometimes with red- dish purple bases, large, up to 1 250 x 750 pm, cells oc- casionally lime-encrusted, walls thick, 4— 6-sided, 75—85 (—100) x 35—50 pm in body of scale; brick-shaped, ± 35 x 60 pm wide (Figure 6E) in margin. Antheridia with prominent hyaline necks projecting along midline. Arche- gonia with purple necks scattered singly along either side of midline. Sporangia containing ±300 spores each, cover- ing tissue with large pores, disintegrating when ripe and leaving capsules exposed in hollow. Spores large, (85—) 95— 105(— 115) pm in diameter, straw-coloured or yel- low to brown, semi-transparent to opaque; triangular- globular, polar, with wing up to 5 pm wide (Figure 8A, B), notched or perforated at angles, margin finely crenu- late, distal face ± reticulate with 14 — 16(— 20) small, deep areolae across the diameter, about 2,5 pm wide (Figure 8C, D, F); areolar walls ± 2,5 pm thick, raised into pro- cesses at the nodes (Figure 8E) and frequently anasto- mosing to form short convoluted ridges (Figure 8C, D); proximal face with triradiate mark distinct, about 30— 40 small areolae on each of 3 facets (Figure 8A). Chromo- some number n = 1 5 (Figure 6F). This unusual haploid set with 1 5 chromosomes (Figure 6F) is known only in R. albomata ( Volk 81-081 — 15 counts); Volk 84-667 p.p. — 4 counts). The chromo- some formula of this set contains, in addition to the basic set, 2B, , 2C| and 3D, chromosomes. Vegetatively R. albomata is not easily distinguished from R. albolimbata, but it never grows in rosettes, the Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 161 FIGURE 6. — Riccia albomata. Morphology and anatomy. A, fresh thalli with sporangia, archegonial and antheridial necks; Bl— 4, transverse sections of branch at different distances from apex to proximal part; C, enlargement of transverse section through dorsal epithelium (showing wide cells) and through assimilation tissue; D, horizontal section at different levels: left, air pores and epithelial cells; in centre, position of air pores over air canals with epithelial cells extending over columns of chlorenchyma; right, chlorenchyma with air canals; E, scale; F, chromosomes. (A-E by Volk; F by Bomefeld) (A-D, F, Volk 81-081; E, Volk 84-667). Scale bars: A, B = 1 mm; C, D =50 |um; E =100 um; F = 1 Mm. 162 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 7. — Riccia albomata. Morphology and anatomy. A, dorsal view of apex and groove with partly inflexed margins and large scales; B, archegonial and antheridial necks; C, dorsal cells in groove; D, more enlarged view of dorsal cells at groove; E, dorsal cells and air pores toward margin; F, dorsal cells with deposits (SEM micrographs by Pe- rold). (A, B, E, F, Oliver 8854a; C, D, Morley CH4525.) Scale bars on A— F = 100 Mm. hyaline scales are larger and frillier, the dorsal epithelial cells are also larger, the air canals wider and generally en- closed by six columns of cells and the spore ornamentation is markedly different with numerous small, irregular areolae and convoluted ridges on both faces. The distri- bution areas of the two species do not appear to overlap either, except for two localities in the central Cape. R. argenteolimbata is generally a smaller plant, with regular, stiff white scales, a mat, glaucous grey dorsal surface and apolar spores; it is also dioicous. R. albomata is a rare endemic species infrequently collected at altitudes of 500—1 500 m above sea level. It appears to be confined to those regions of the Cape Pro- vince (Figure 5) which are influenced by, or generally receive sparse winter rains of at least 125 mm per annum. Generally it grows on reddish brown or light brown, coarse, gravelly soil, derived from granite or quartzite, on koppies or on slopes, in full sun or in light shade of small shrubs or thorn trees. The soil pH values are 7,0— 8,0 (Volk). It is sometimes associated with other Riccia spp., e.g. R. okahandjana S. Arnell and with mosses, e.g. Desmatodon convolutus (Brid.) Grout and Funaria spp. SPECIMENS EXAMINED CAPE. — 2820 (Kakamas): Aughrabies Nat. Park, Oranje- kom (-CB), Volk 84-667 (M, PRE). 2917 (Hondeklipbaai): 36 km S of Springbok, on road to Kamieskroon (-DD), S.M. Perold 1445 (PRE). 2921 (Kenhardt): 10 km W of Kenhardt (-AC), Volk 81-081 (M, PRE). 3119 (Calvinia): E of Slagberg, midway between Nieuwoudtville and Loeriesfontein, Farm Koringhuis (-AB), S.M. Perold 1800, 1801 (PRE); NE of Nieuwoudtville, Groothoek, on Soetlandsrivier (-AD), Oliver 8854a (PRE). 3123 (Victoria West): Farm Rietpoort, 34 km N of Victoria West, on slope (-AA), Smook 6961 (PRE); Farm Kalkfontein, 48 km NE of Victoria West, on flat gravel plain (-AA), Smook 6990 (PRE). 3125 (Steynsburg): White Ridge (-AC), Duthie 5149 (BOL). 3218 (Clanwilliam): Bidouw, Farm Mertenhof (-BB), Oliver 1463 (BOL). 3222 (Beaufort West): Beaufort West, on small koppie (-BC), Steyn 5487 (BOL). 3319 (Worcester): Rabiesberg, Farm Doringkloof (-DA), Morley CH4525 (PRE); Nuy (-DA), Morley 362 (PRE). 3420 (Bredas- dorp): De Hoop, in pass on road from Wydgelee to De Hoop (-AD), Fellingham 746a (PRE). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Sincere thanks are due to the Curators of Botanische Staatssammlung, Munchen and Bolus Herbarium, Uni- versity of Cape Town, for the loan of specimens and to the many people who kindly collected specimens for us, especially Botanical Research Institute staff members, Dr G.E. Gibbs Russell, Messrs D. Hardy, E.G.H. Oliver, Mrs L. Fish (nee Smook), Misses E. Retief, L. Hender- son and M. Morley as well as to the Hoffmann family, Farm Oros, SWA/Namibia. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 163 FIGURE 8. — Riccia albomata. Spores. A, proximal face; B, side view of proximal face; C, D, F, distal face; E, more enlarged view of areolae near margin on distal side. (A-E, SEM micrographs; F, LM (light microscope) micrograph by Perold.) (A-D , Oliver 5149; E, F, Volk 84-667 .) Scale bars on A-E =50 /am; dia- meter of spore on F, ± 100 /am. REFERENCES ARNELL, S. 1957. Hepaticae collected in South West Africa by Prof. Dr O.H. Volk. Mitteilungen ms der botanischen Staatssammlung, Miinchen 16: 262-272. ARNELL, S. 1963 Hepaticae of South Africa, pp. 411. Swedish National Scientific Research Council, Stockholm. BORNEFELD, T. 1984. Chromosomenanalyse der Gattung Ric- cia von SUd- und SW-Afrika und allgemeine Bemerkungen zur Zytogenetik der Lebermoose. Nova Hedwigia 40: 313-328. BORNEFELD, T. 1987. The natural system of the Marchantiales based upon cytogenetical and morphological evidence. Nova Hedwigia 45 : 41-52. BORNEFELD, T. & GRILLENBERGER, Chr. 1987. Some as- pects of size in chromosome analysis of liverworts (Mar- chantiales). Nova Hedwigia 44: 91-100. PEROLD, S.M. in press. Studies in the genus Riccia (Marchantiales) from southern Africa. 12. Riccia albolimbata and the status of R. albosquamata. Bothalia. VOLK, O.H. 1966. Die Florengebiete von Siidwestafrika. Journal SWA Wissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Windhoek 20: 25-58. VOLK, O.H. 1983. Vorschlag fur eine Neugliederung der Gattung Riccia L. Mitteilungen ms der botanischen Staatssamm- lung, Miinchen 19: 453—465. VOLK, O.H. 1984. Pflanzenvergesellschaftungen mit Riccia- Allan in Siidwestafrika (Namibia). Vegetatio 55: 57-64. VOLK, O.H. 1984. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Marchantiales in Siidwestafrika (Namibia). Nova Hedwigia 39: 117-143. Bothalia 18,2 : 165-171 (1988) Taxonomy and leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa: the Dura group G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL* and R.P. ELLIS* Keywords: Capensis, Ehrharta, leaf anatomy, Mountain Fynbos, Poaceae, taxonomy ABSTRACT The Dura species group in the genus Ehrharta Thunb. is differentiated morphologically by the perennial habit and the very large, awned, subglabrous spikelets and anatomically by the occurrence of tanniniferous cells and wax platelets obscuring the stomatal pores. The Dura group consists of two species, E. dura Nees ex Trim and E. microlaena Nees ex Trim, which occur only in Mountain Fynbos. The group shows no clear morphological or anatomical relationship with other species groups in the genus in southern Africa. UITTREKSEL Die Dura-spesiegroep in die genus Ehrharta Thunb. word morfologies deur die meerjarige groeiwyse en die besonder groot, genaalde, ylbehaarde blompakkies onderskei en anatomies deur die aanwesigheid van tannien- selle en wasplaatjies wat die huidmondjieporiee verberg. Die Dura-groep bestaan uit twee spesies, E. dura Nees ex Trim en E. microlaena Nees ex Trim, wat slegs in Bergfynbos voorkom. Die groep vertoon geen duidelike mor- fologiese of anatomiese verwantskap met ander spesiegroepe in die genus in suidelike Afrika nie. INTRODUCTION Previous papers in this series have outlined the seven provisional species groups for Ehrharta in southern Afri- ca, and dealt with the Setacea and Villosa groups (Gibbs Russell & Ellis 1987; Ellis 1987a, 1987b; Gibbs Russell 1987a, 1987b). The Dura group is a small, apparently isolated group composed of only two species, E. dura Nees ex Trin. and E. microlaena Nees ex Trim The two species are distinguished morphologically from other Ehrharta species by correlation of perennial habit, large spikelets 9—17 mm long and awned sterile lemmas with glabrous sides, keel and margins. The spikelet plan of the Dura group is shown in Figure 1 . Anatomically the Dura group is distinguished within Ehrharta by the presence of tanniniferous cells and by wax platelets obscuring the stomatal pores. The spikelets and leaves of the species have a characteristic olive-green colour that is distinctive and may result from the dark tannins in the intercostal long cells of the epidermis. The species differ from each other principally in awn length and in leaf blade shape and width. Both species occur only in Mountain Fynbos. The two species in the group present no nomenclatural difficulties because they were described by Trinius (1839) in the same publication, and other authors have consis- tently followed this treatment (Nees 1841; Steudel 1853; Stapf 1900; Chippindall 1955); thus neither species has synonyms. The same treatment is followed here. This singularly simple situation is undoubtedly a reflection of the distinctness of the Dura group within Ehrharta and the unusually low degree of intraspecific variation present. It is more difficult to assess to what degree the simplicity of treatment also results from the infrequent collection of the species due to their restrict- * Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001. MS. received: 1987.12.02. ed and specialized distribution and habitat and the fact that they are apparent in vegetation only after fire. However, lectotypification of the names is necessary. Trinius (1839) published descriptions of both species in his treatment of the tribe Phalarideae without citing any specimens. However, Trinius ascribed both names to Nees, presumably because he had obtained specimens from Nees with manuscript names. Two years later, Nees (1841) also published descriptions, for which he claimed authorship, in his treatment of all southern African gras- ses. Specimens of both species clearly labelled in Nees’ handwriting exist in several herbaria. The Drege specimen of each species in the Herbarium, Komarov Botanical Institute, Leningrad (LE) is designated as lectotype, be- cause these specimens were seen by Trinius who first published a description. Two previous studies, Engelbrecht (1956) and Tateoka (1963), have covered some aspects of leaf anatomy of this group, and their findings are in accord with the de- tailed results presented here. FIGURE 1. — Spikelet of E. dura ( Ellis 5457, PRE): a, whole spikelet; b, glumes; c, first sterile lemma; d, lemma of fertile floret; e, palea of fertile floret; f, second sterile lemma; all X 2. 166 METHODS Methods adopted for previous papers in this series were followed here, both for the taxonomic and the anatomical studies. The descriptions and keys were pre- pared through the DELTA computer system for handling descriptive data (Dallwitz 1984). TAXONOMY Key to species Leaves with blades expanded, 4-10 mm across, lanceolate; basal sheaths persistent, hard, reddish brown; awns 2-16 mm long E. dura Leaves with blades reduced, setaceous, to 1 mm across; basal sheaths eventually deciduous, membranous, light brown or whitish; awns 13-25 mm long . . . E. microlaena 1. Ehrharta dura Nees ex Trin. in Phalaridea, Me- moires de l’Academie imperial des Sciences de St-Peters- burg, ser. 6, 5: 13 (of reprint) (1839); Nees: 218(1841); Steudel: 5 (1853); Stapf: 665 (1900); Chippindall: 37 (1955); Smook & Gibbs Russell: 55 (1985). Type: Drege, Du Toit’s Kloof, 3 000 ft, (LE!, lecto., here de- signated; K!,P!). Perennial, erect, forming large leafy tufts, rarely long- rhizomatous. Rhizomes woody, with glabrous, thickened cataphylls. Culms several to many, to 800 mm long, 4 mm across, herbaceous, crowded, unbranched, hollow. Young shoots intravaginal. Leaves mostly basal, culm leaves with blades well developed, sheaths not overlap- ping; leaves auriculate, auricles produced from top of sheath; basal sheaths flabellate and slightly twisted, tight, persistent, hard, reddish brown, bearing blades; ligule a membrane fringed with hairs or sometimes near- ly glabrous, 1, 5-3,0 mm long; leaf blades persistent, erect, herbaceous, glabrous, lanceolate, 4—10 mm across, flat or folded, becoming rolled from margins when dry; blade bases folded, thickening with age, persistent and conspicuous often even in burned plants; blade tips gradually tapering. Inflorescence a panicle, open, 70—200 mm long, considerably overtopping leaves; main axis straight, often closely subtended or enveloped below by uppermost leaf sheath; numerous spikelets, spikelets appressed to the axes and held nearly erect but somewhat secund. Spikelets pedicellate, distinctly compressed laterally, 9—16 mm long, 3 mm across laterally (above glumes), olive-green. Rhachilla prolonged beyond fertile floret. Glumes not keeled, the lower V2 or more the length of the upper, V4-V2 as long as spikelet, white, or green, appressed to lemmas at maturity. Lower glume 2,5— 6,5 mm long, 3— 5-nerved, acute. Upper glume 3,5— 7,0 mm long, 5— 9-nerved, truncate apically. Florets with lemmas decidedly firmer than the glumes, keeled. Sterile lemmas laterally compressed, sides flat, similar in shape, texture and ornamentation; with keel and margins parallel; base not stipitate, without auriculate appendages, shortly bearded, sides scabrous or sometimes with short hairs, dull, with 3—1 1 strong or fairly distinct longitudi- nal ribs; tip tapering gradually from body of lemma to an arista or awn. Awn 2—16 mm long. First sterile lem- ma about V2 to z/3 length of second sterile lemma. Fer- tile floret shorter than second sterile lemma. Lemma of fertile floret differing from sterile lemmas, strongly Bothalia 18,2 (1988) laterally compressed and sides unomamented, faintly 3— 5-nerved, sides glabrous, tip truncate with a tuft of minute hairs. Palea thinner than lemma, 3/4 or more as long as lemma, keeled, 1-nerved. Lodicules 2, membra- nous, 2-lobed, margins ciliate. Stamens 4 or 6. Anthers 7 mm long, yellow. Ovary glabrous. Stigmas white. Caryopsis 9 mm long, laterally flattened. E. dura is distinguished from southern African Ehr- harta species in other groups by the perennial habit and the large nearly glabrous mucronate to awned spikelets. It is distinguished from closely related E. microlaena by the broad leaves and the broad, brown, flabellate bases. It grows in mesophytic to seasonally moist open habitats in Mountain Fynbos in sandy or loam soils over sand- stone or granite at altitudes of 430 to 1 300 m. A single specimen ( Boucher 2028) came from an altitude of 30 m at Kogelberg State Forest. All but a few of the speci- mens seen were collected after a bum. E. dura extends along mountain ranges from Stellenbosch and Worcester to Humansdorp (Figure 2), and has a much wider distri- bution than E. microlaena. Most Ehrharta species show considerable variation in habit and leaf development, and it is possible to recognize ecotypes and local variants. In contrast to this common pattern, E. dura is remark- ably constant in its appearance from the eastern to the western ends of its range, with no geographically corre- lated infraspecific variation. Flowering occurs from September to December. Vouchers: Acocks 22817; Bond 1611; Taylor 4211, 10256; Zeyher 4513. 2. Ehrharta microlaena Afees ex Trin. in Phalaridea, Memoires de l’Academie imperial des Sciences de St- Petersbourg, ser. 6, 5: 13 (of reprint) (1939); Nees: 218 (1841); Steudel: 5 (1853); Stapf: 665 (1900); Chip- pindall: 37 (1955); Smook & Gibbs Russell: 55 (1985). Type: Drege, Du Toits’ Kloof (LE!, lecto., here designa- ted; K!, SAM!). Perennial, erect, tufted, apparently lacking long rhi- zomes. Culms several, to 1 100 mm long, 2,5 mm across, herbaceous, crowded, unbranched, hollow. Young shoots intravaginal. Leaves mostly basal, culm leaves with blades reduced, sheaths not overlapping. Leaves auriculate, the auricles produced from the base of the blade and adnate to the margins of the ligule. Basal sheaths somewhat flabellate, tight, eventually deciduous, membranous, light brown, or whitish, bearing blades. Ligule a glabrous Bothalia 18,2 (1988) membrane to 8 mm long. Leaf blades persistent, erect, curved slightly outward from middle, herbaceous, glabrous, linear, reduced, setaceous, to 1 mm across; blade tips gradually tapering. Inflorescence a panicle, open, or somewhat contracted, 6—18 mm long, con- siderably overtopping leaves; main axis straight, usually exserted from uppermost leaf sheath; of numerous spikelets, spikelets spreading and somewhat secund. Spikelets pedicellate, distinctly compressed laterally, 13—15 mm long, to 2,5 mm across laterally (above glumes), with conventional internode spacing. Rachilla prolonged beyond fertile floret. Glumes not keeled, the lower V2 or more the length of the upper, V4-V3 as long as spikelet, green, appressed to lemmas at maturity. Lower glume 2,5— 3,0 mm long, 3-nerved, acute. Upper glume 4—5 mm long, 7-nerved, truncate apically. Florets with lemmas decidedly firmer than the glumes, keeled. Sterile lemmas laterally compressed, sides flat, similar in shape, texture and ornamentation; with keel and margins parallel; base not stipitate, without auriculate appendages, sparsely and shortly bearded at base; sides glabrous or puberulous, dull, with 5—7 longitudinal ribs; tip tapering gradually from body of lemma into a long awn. Awn as long as or longer than body of lemma, 13— 25 mm long. First sterile lemma about \ length of second sterile lemma. Fertile floret shorter than second sterile lemma. Lemma of fertile floret differing from sterile lemmas, strongly laterally compressed and sides unornamented, obscurely 5— 7-nerved, sides glabrous, tip truncate with a tuft of minute hairs. Palea thinner than lemma, 1 * 3/4 or more as long as lemma, keeled, 1- nerved. Lodicules 2, membranous, 2-lobed, margins ciliate and laciniate. Stamens 4. Anthers 7 mm long, yellow. Ovary glabrous. Stigmas white. Caryopsis 8 mm long, laterally flattened. E. microlaena is easily distinguished from all other Ehrharta species by the perennial habit, the large, glabrous, long-awned spikelets and the setaceous leaf blades. It is hydrophytic, and grows on streamsides and in damp peaty places in Mountain Fynbos. Like E. dura , most of the specimens seen were collected after fire. However, the distribution of E. microlaena is more restricted than that of E. dura, extending from the Kogelberg Forest Reserve north through Paarl, Bain’s Kloof, Du Toit’s Kltiof and Ceres to Tulbagh (Figure 3) at altitudes of 400 to 1 330 m. There is little intraspecific variation, and specimens from throughout the range are similar in appearance. Flowering occurs from December to February. Vouchers: Adamson 3603; Boucher 173, 1838; Esterhuy sen 28427, 35600. 1. LEAF ANATOMY OF E. DURA Transverse section The leaf blade is open and expanded (Figure 4A) but has the ability to inroll from the margins under adverse moisture conditions. The midrib is not structurally dis- tinguishable from the lateral first order vascular bundles and is not associated with colourless parenchyma. Suc- cessive first order bundles are separated by three smaller bundles, usually two third order bundles with a single second order bundle between them (Figure 4A) although this pattern is not always consistent (Figure 4B). 167 Well developed, rounded to slightly flattened adaxial ribs are located over all the vascular bundles (Figure 4A— C). These ribs generally are all the same size but the smallest third order bundles may be associated with smaller ribs (Figure 4B). The furrows between adjacent ribs are deep, narrow and steep-sided and tend to become cleft-like with leaf inrolling. Conspicuous bulliform cells occur at the bottom of these furrows (Figure 4C). The mesophyll tissue is irregularly arranged. The chlo- renchyma cells are larger than the bundle sheath cells, angular and fitting tightly together with the chloroplasts concentrated around the cell circumference (Figure 4C). The walls are straight with no arm cell-like invaginations. No large intercellular air spaces are visible. Colourless parenchyma is absent between the bundles although colourless adaxial bundle sheath extensions are associated with the smaller bundles (Figure 4B, C). The vascular bundles are surrounded by two bundle sheaths, an outer sheath of many (up to 26) small colourless cells and a distinct mestome sheath of cells with uniformly thicken- ed secondary walls (Figure 4C). All the epidermal cells contain conspicuous, dark, resin-like deposits distributed evenly across the entire width of the blade (Figure 4B, C). Abaxial epidermis Costal and intercostal zones are differentiated (Figure 4D, E). The intercostal long cells are rectangular with slightly wavy anticlinal walls (Figure 4D, E) and inflated outer walls (Figure 5A— C). All contain black tanninife- rous deposits generally filling the entire cell lumen (Figure 4E). Adjacent long cells in a file are separated by single or paired short cells (Figure 4D, E). Cell size and arrange- ment is uniform across each intercostal zone. Stomata occur in a single file on either side of each intercostal zone, immediately adjacent to the costal zones (Figure 4E). Successive stomata are separated by single interstomatals and neither the subsidiary cells nor the interstomatals contain tanniniferous deposits. The subsidiary cells are low dome-shaped and not sunken below the general level of the epidermis (Figure 5C, D). The stomatal pores are obscured by dense accumulations of wax platelets (Figure 5D). The costal silica bodies are irregularly dumbbell-shaped and alternate with similarly shaped short cells. Small prickle-hairs with very short barbs are interspaced at 168 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 4. — Leaf anatomy of Ehrharta dura. A-C, leaf in transverse section, Ellis 4695: A, outline showing absence of keel, scale = 20 jum; B, prominent adaxial ribs and deep furrows, scale = 10 (im; C, detail of chlorenchyma and tanniniferous epidermal cells (t), scale = 5 jum. D-E, abaxial epidermis: D, Ellis 4695, epidermal zonation and tanniniferous intercostal long cells (t), scale = 10 Atm; E, Ellis 4696, all intercostal long cells with tanniniferous deposits (t), scale = 10 Atm. intervals along the costal zones (Figures 4D, E). Micro- hairs were not observed with the light microscope but are clearly visible with the SEM (Figure 5C, E). These hairs have a short basal cell with a blunt distal cell (Figure 5E). Small pointed, single-celled intercostal macrohairs are very rare (Figure 5F). Specimens examined CAPE. — 3318 (Cape Town): Stellenbosch (-DD), Taylor 10256. 3320 (Montagu): Grootvadersbos (-DD), Ellis 5554. 3321 (Ladismith): Cloetes Pass, Langeberge (-DD), Ellis 4695, 4696. 3322 (Oudtshoorn): Robinson Pass, Outeniqua Mts (-CC), Ellis 5457. 3324 (Steytlerville): Groot Winterhoek Mts, Cockscomb Peak (-DB), Ellis 5615. 3419 (Caledon): Rivier- sonderend Mts, Die Galg (—BA), Ellis 5568. 2. LEAF ANATOMY OF E. MICROLAENA Transverse section No fresh leaf blade material of this taxon was avail- able for anatomical study, and consequently the transec- tional anatomy was not examined. Engelbrecht (1956) has shown that the leaf blade is cylindrical in section with the interior containing colourless parenchyma tissue. This structure appears to result from the fusion of the two margins and not from a reduction of the lamina on either side of the midrib with the resultant blade being only a rounded keel. This specialized blade needs detailed anatomical study as it represents an interesting adaptation within the genus. Abaxial epidermis Herbarium leaf blade material was used to prepare abaxial epidermal scrapes of this species. The epidermal structure is very similar to that of E. dura, and reference should be made to the description above. Both species have the diagnostic tanniniferous intercostal long cells which dominate the epidermis and are unique to this species group in Ehrharta. Specimens examined CAPE. — 3319 (Worcester): Hex River Mts, Milner Peak (-AD), Ellis 5524\ Du Toit’s Kloof (-CA), Boucher 1838. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS The two species in the Dura group are the only awned perennial Ehrharta species in southern Africa. Three other species have awns, but all are annual: E. longiflora and E. triandra in the Erecta group and E. pusilla in the closely related Calycina group. These three species grow near ephemeral water bodies, and each is apparently most closely related to the unawned perennial species within their group. Awns are therefore probably the result of parallel or convergent evolution in different species groups. Therefore, no phylogenetic relationship between the Dura group and the annual awned members of the Erecta and Calycina groups should be inferred on the basis of awn occurrence. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 169 The spikelet size of the Dura group species, excluding the awns, is only equalled in the three taxa of the Villosa group: E. thunbergii, E. villosa var. villosa and E. villosa var. maxima (Gibbs Russell 1987b). However, the shape and vesture of the sterile lemmas differ and are distinc- tive for both groups, and size alone is poor evidence upon which to speculate relationship. The spikelets of the Dura group are distinctive in other respects as well, and therefore the Dura group cannot be shown to have a close similarity with any other species group on the basis of spikelet structure (Gibbs Russell & Ellis 1987). However, the consistent occurrence of four stamens in E. microlaena and four or six stamens (the usual number for southern African Ehrharta species) in E. dura, suggests that relationships for the Dura group might be sought within the Austra- lian species formerly assigned to Tetrarrhena (Willemse 1982). Tetrarrhena is characterized by the presence of four stamens, a most unusual condition in the Poaceae. The Dura species group has distinctive leaf anatomy that separates it from the other groups in the genus in southern Africa (Gibbs Russell & Ellis 1987). In transec- tion the leaf blade lacks a keel, has well developed, flat- tened adaxial ribs and furrows and the mesophyll consists of large angular chlorenchyma cells with no definite pat- tern of arrangement. The tanniniferous epidermal cells, particularly the bulliform cells, are diagnostic for this group. This anatomy superficially resembles the Villosa group but the two groups can be separated by the flat ribs and tanniniferous cells of the Dura group and the FIGURE 5. — Ultrastructure of the abaxial epidermis of E. dura. A, Ellis 4695 with inflated, thick-walled intercostal long cells, stomatal file and costal zone with row of prickles, X 200; B, Ellis 4696 showing intercostal long cells, stomata and a prickle, X 100; C-E, Ellis 4695: C, more intercostal long cell detail with microhairs and stomata visible, X 150; D, stoma with dense accumulation of wax platelets overlying the pore, X 500; E, microhair with short basal cell and longer blunt distal cell, X 500; F, Ellis 4696 showing small intercostal macrohair, X 500. 170 tendency towards semi-radiate chlorenchyma with abaxial palisade-like cells in the Villosa group (Ellis 1987). The Setacea (Ellis 1987) and Ramosa groups and the Longifolia subgroup all lack keels but differ from the Dura group in many other respects (Gibbs Russell & Ellis 1987). The abaxial epidermis is differentiated into costal and intercostal zones with rectangular long cells, low dome- shaped subsidiary cells, irregularly dumbbell-shaped silica bodies, prickles with short barbs and microhairs with blunt distal cells. Epicuticular wax is absent except in association with the stomatal apertures where wax platelets obscure the pores. This combination of epider- mal attributes is distinctive and serves to distinguish the Dura group from the others (Gibbs Russell & Ellis 1987). Rectangular long cells are shared with the Villosa and Ramosa groups but the stomata, silica bodies and micro- hairs differ between these three groups. The unique tanniniferous epidermal cells found in the species of the Dura group are of great interest because these represent the only known C3 grasses which possess this type of cell (Ellis in prep.). No bambusoids, pooids or other arundinoids are known to have this type of epidermal cell which is also rare in the chloridoids and panicoids, except the Andropogoneae and Arundinelleae, where many species and genera exhibit tanniniferous cells. The colour and texture of the contents of the epidermal cells of E. dura and E. microlaena are con- sistent with that of the tanniniferous cells observed in these C4 grass taxa and it is presumed that they contain the same chemical substance. All 90 South African grass species in which this type of cell has been observed are unpalatable species from oligotrophic soils and it is in- ferred that these cellular contents are polyphenols which function as a chemical defence against herbivores (Ellis in prep.). Their presence in the Dura group may repre- sent a separate and similar adaptation to which no phy- logenetic importance should be attached. The anatomical observations of this study generally agree with previous reports but for a minor exception. Tateoka (1963) described the subsidiary cells of if. dura as being almost parallel-sided, whereas here they are shown to be low dome-shaped. However, the distinction between these two stomatal types is only slight and a difference in interpretation may have resulted in this apparent inconsistency. The work of Engelbrecht (1956) is in full agreement with this study. It is of interest that in one of the five specimens of E. dura examined by Engelbrecht (1956) a distinct keel, incorporating five vascular bundles with extensive adaxial parenchyma, was observed. This appears to be an inter- mediate condition between E. dura and the cylindrical blade of E. microlaena. It appears as if the cylindrical leaf blade of E. microlaena represents an adaptation to hygrophilous habitats and the intermediate specimen probably came from a damp locality. Unfortunately it is not possible to deduce which specimen displayed this anatomy from the work of Engelbrecht (1956). Never- theless, this represents the first possible intermediate between these two species which are otherwise so clearly separated anatomically and morphologically. E. dura and E. microlaena are undoubtedly closely related to each other, yet have very little in comrpon Bothalia 18,2 (1988) with any other species of Ehrharta in southern Africa. Both spikelet morphology and leaf anatomy indicate that they occupy an isolated position within the genus and are not linked to any of the other species groups. The two taxa are treated at the level of species because they are differentiated by both vegetative and spikelet characteristics, have very different transectional leaf blade anatomy and their habitats are somewhat different. In addition, although the two taxa occur sympatrically, they flower at different times and no morphologically intermediate specimens have been observed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank the Directors of the Herbaria that have lent specimens previously: BOL, J, JF, K, NBG, SAM, STE, and in addition, P and LE, as well as the Director of B for providing visitors’ facilities for study of a number of grass genera. We thank G. Condy for the spikelet drawing, S.Perold for scanning electron microscopy, A. Romanow- ski for photography, H.Ebertsohn for technical assistance and W. Roux for technical assistance and map preparation. REFERENCES CHIPPINDALL, L. 1955. A guide to the identification of grasses in South Africa. In C. Meredith, The grasses and pastures of South Africa. Central News Agency, Cape Town. DALLWITZ, M.J. 1984. User’s guide to the DELTA system — a genera system for coding taxonomic descriptions. CSIRO Division of Entomology Report No. 13. ELLIS, R.P. 1987a. Leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Po- aceae): the Setacea group. Bothalia 17: 75-89. ELLIS, R.P. 1987b. Leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Po- aceae): the Villosa group. Bothalia 17: 195-204. ENGELBRECHT, A.H.P. 1956. 'n Morfologiese studie van die genus Ehrharta Thunb. M.Sc. thesis, University of Pretoria. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987a. Taxonomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae): the Setacea group. Bothalia 17: 63-73. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987b. Taxonomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae): the Villosa group. Bothalia 17: 191-194. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. & ELLIS, R.P. 1987. Species groups in the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 51-65. NEES AB ESENBECK, G.C. 1841. Florae Africae Australioris. Prausnitzianus, Cracow. SMOOK, L. & GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1985. Poaceae. In G.E. Gibbs Russell et al., List of species of southern African plants, edn 2, part 1: 45-70. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 51. STAPF, O. 1900. Gramineae. In W.T. Thiselton-Dyer, Flora capensis 8: 310-750. STEUDEL, E.G. 1853. Synopsis plantarum graminearum . Metzler, Stuttgart. TATEOKA, T. 1963. Notes on some grasses. XII. Relationships between Oryzeae and Ehrharteae, with special reference to leaf anatomy and histology. The Botanical Gazette 124: 264-270. TRINIUS, C.B. 1839. Phalaridea. Memoires del Academie impe- rial des Sciences de St-Petersbourg, ser. 6, 5: 12-26 (of reprint). WILLEMSE, L.P.M. 1982. A discussion of the Ehrharteae (Gra- mineae) with special reference to the Malesian taxa former- ly included in Microlaena. Blumea 28: 181-194. SPECIMENS EXAMINED Acocks 2281 7 (1) PRE. Adamson 3603 (2) PRE. Bolus 4225 (1) BOL, PRE. Bond W662 (1) NBG; 1611 (1) PRE. Boucher 173 (2) STE; 1838 (2) PRE, STE; 2028 (1) PRE, STE. Bure hell 7184 ( 1) K. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 171 Drige s.n. (1) K, LE (lectotype), P, PRE; s.n. (2) K, LE (lecto- type), P, PRE, SAM. Du Toit 2027 (1) PRE, STE. Ecklon s.n. (2) P. Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (1) LE, SAM; s.n. (2) LE. Ellis 4695 (1) PRE; 4696 (1) PRE; 5457(1) PRE. Ester- huysen 7083 (1) BOL; 13657 (1) PRE; 28427 (2) BOL, PRE; 32827a (1) BOL, PRE; 34491 (1) BOL; 35600 (2) BOL, PRE. Fourcade 2479 (1) BOL, K, PRE, STE; 2852 (1) PRE, STE. Gill s.n. (1) K. Haynes 526 (1) K, PRE, STE. Keet 13-3-1919 (1) PRE. Kensit 14649 (1) BOL. Ledebour s.n. (2) LE. MacOwan 2074 (1) SAM; 2126 (1) K. Paterson 2484 (1) BOL. Schlechter 3611 (1) PRE; 9809 (1) BOL, K, LE, P, PRE. Taylor 3221 (1) PRE, STE; 4081 (1) PRE, STE; 4211 (1) JF, PRE, STE; 5598 (1) PRE; 10256 (1) PRE, STE. Thome Oct. 1926 (1) SAM. Zeyher 4513 (1) BOL, K, P, PRE, STE; s.n. (1) BOL, LE; s.n. (2) SAM. Zeyher & Ecklon s.n. (1) P. SPECIMENS OF THE VILLOSA GROUP OF EHRHARTA EXAMINED IN BOTHALIA 17,2: 191-194 (1987) Acocks 14809 (1) PRE; 15185 (1) PRE; 23393 (1) PRE. Adam- son 1116 (1) PRE; 1240 (2a) BOL; 1360 (2a) PRE; 1362 (2a) BOL. Andreae 1314 (1) PRE. Archibald 3664 (2b) PRE. Barker 2718 (2a) NBG. Bohnen 4541 (2a) PRE, STE. Bond 248 (1) NBG; 16 72 (1) NBG; 1685 (1) NBG; 9566 (1) NBG; 9644 (1) NBG. Booysen 2239 (1) NBG. Boucher 662 (2a) STE; 1689 (2b) PRE, STE; 3325 (2a/2b) STE; 3983 (2a) PRE, STE; 4724 (1) PRE, STE. Boucher & Shepherd 5665 (1) PRE. Britten 444 (2b) PRE; 778 (2b) PRE; 1890 (2b) PRE; 1941 (2b) PRE. Buys 6. 10. 78 (2b) STE. Cleghom 3122 (2a) PRE, STE. Compton 6262 (1) NBG; 9343 (2a) NBG; 14187 (2a) NBG; 17530 (2b) NBG; 22225(1) NBG, PRE, STE. Crook 1038 (2a) BOL, NBG, PRE; 2260( 2a) PRE. Curator, Pretoria 131 (2a) PRE. Dahlstrand 156 (2b) J, PRE. Dinter 3968 (1) PRE. Dixon 151 (2a) STE. Downing 400 (2a) PRE. Duthie 1642 (1) BOL. Du Toit 1651 (1) PRE, STE; 1668 (1) PRE, STE. Ecklon Oct. 1838 (1) NBG, SAM. Ecklon & Zeyher 409 (2b) BOL, NBG, SAM, STE. Ellis 601 (2b) PRE, STE; 708 (1) PRE; 1145 (1) PRE; 1152 (1) PRE; 1284 (2a) PRE; 1651 (l/2a) PRE; 1686 (2a) PRE; 1700 (1) PRE; 4626 (1) PRE; 4633 (1) PRE; 4635 (1) PRE; 4640 (l/2a) PRE; 4642 (1) PRE; 4648 (1) PRE; 4665 (2a) PRE; 4693 (l/2a) PRE; 5702(1)PRE; 5130 (1) PRE. Emdon 200 (l/2a) PRE, STE. Esterhuysen 3244 (1) PRE; 56 70(1) BOL; 9320 (1) BOL; 22725(1) PRE; 52245 (1) BOL, PRE; 32496 (1) BOL, PRE; 34024 (1) BOL; 34080 (2a) BOL. Fairale 343 (1) PRE. Gibbs Russell 5589 (1) PRE; 5591 (1) PRE; 5594 (1) PRE; 5596 (1) PRE; 5607 (1) PRE; 5677 (l/2a) PRE; 5674(1)PRE; 5619 (1) PRE; 5624 (1) PRE; 5628 (1) PRE; 5650 (1) PRE; 5631a (1) PRE; 5638a (1) PRE; 5648 (2a) PRE; 5670 (l/2a) PRE; 5680 (1) PRE; 5689 (1) PRE. Gluckmann 26/11138 (2a) J. Grant 4996 (1) PRE. Hubbard 261 (2a/2b) STE. Kruger 959 (1) JF, STE; 1681 (1) JF. Le Maitre 291 (1) JF. Levyns Oct. 1923 (2b) SAM. Liebenberg 4015 (1 /2a) PRE; 4224 (1) PRE; 4229 (2a) STE; 4260 (2a) STE; 4272 (2a) STE; 4274 (1) STE; 6557 (1) PRE, STE. Marloth 3046 (2a) PRE, STE; 3712 (2a) PRE; 6024 (2a) PRE. Merxmueller & Giess 28299 (1) PRE. Moss 3.1.18 (2a) J. M.R.L. 3594 (1) BOL. Olivier 165 (1) STE. Pappe Oct. 1838 (1) BOL. Parker 3621 (2a) BOL, NBG. Pater- son 1097 (2a) BOL. Pearson 5121 (1) BOL, PRE. Phillips 11903 (1) SAM. Pillans 757 9 (1) BOL. Prior April 1903 (2a) SAM. Schlechter 2098 (1) PRE; 9058 (1) BOL, PRE; 10208 (1) BOL, PRE. Smith 4969 (2a) PRE. Stocks s.n. (2b) STE. Story 4328 (1) PRE. Taylor 10167 (2b) PRE, STE. Theron 1108 (2b) PRE. Thoday Nov. 1921 (2a) BOL. Tyson 607 ( 1) BOL, NBG; 8598 (2b) PRE, STE; 14870 (2b) BOL; 7 7549 (2b) PRE. UPE Staff 158 (2b) PRE. Van Breda 4 (1) PRE. Van Breda & Joubert 2175 (1) STE. Van der Byl Sept. 1927 (2a) SAM, STE. Van der Merwe 1201 (l/2a) PRE. Van Rensburg 111 (1) PRE, STE; 276 (1) STE. Walgate 639 (2b) NBG. Walker Dec. 1976 (2a) J. Wolley Dod 3229 (2a) BOL. Zeyher 167 (1) BOL, PRE, SAM; 4509 (1) PRE; 45096 (2a) PRE. Zinn 67672 (1) SAM. Bothalia 18,2: Bothalia 18,2: 173-181 (1988) The Oxygonum dregeanum complex (Polygonaceae) G. GERMISHUIZEN* Keywords: new status, new taxa, Oxygonum dregeanum complex, Polygonaceae, southern Africa, taxonomy ABSTRACT The Oxygonum dregeanum Meisn. complex was studied. The following taxa are given a new status: subsp. swazicum (Burtt Davy) Germishuizen, stat. nov. and subsp. canescens (Sond.) Germishuizen, stat. nov. Four new varieties of subsp. canescens are described: var. linearifolium Germishuizen, var. nov.; var. dissectum Ger- mishuizen, var. nov.; var. pilosum Germishuizen, var. nov. and var. lobophyllum Germishuizen, var. nov. Two new subspecies are described: subsp. streyi Germishuizen, subsp. nov. and subsp. lanceolatum Germishuizen, subsp. nov. UITTREKSEL Die kompleks Oxygonum dregeanum Meisn. is bestudeer. Nuwe status is aan die volgende taksons toegeken: subsp. swazicum (Burtt Davy) Germishuizen, stat. nov. en subsp. canescens (Sond.) Germishuizen, stat. nov. Vier nuwe varieteite van subsp. canescens word beskryf: var. linearifolium Germishuizen, var. nov.; var. dissec- tum Germishuizen, var. nov.; var. pilosum Germishuizen, var. nov. en var. lobophyllum Germishuizen, var. nov. Twee nuwe subspesies word beskryf: subsp. streyi Germishuizen, subsp. nov. en subsp. lanceolatum Germishui- zen, subsp. nov. As part of a revision of the genus Oxygonum Burch, in southern Africa, to be published in the Flora of south- ern Africa, the Oxygonum dregeanum complex was studied. Two subspecies and four varieties are new and are here described. A list of the changes in rank of the different taxa of Oxygonum dregeanum are given. Oxygonum dregeanum Meisn. in Linnaea 14: 487 (1840). Type: neighbourhood of Omsamculo (Umzim- kulu) (location and collector uncertain). (a) subsp. dregeanum. O. dregeanum Meisn.: 487 (1840); C.H. Wr.: 461 (1912); Tikovsky & Merxm.: 4 (1969); O. dregeanum Meisn. var. dre- geanum— R.A. Grah.: 166 (1957); Ross: 156 (1972). Type as above. O. dregei Meisn.: 38 (1856). Type: Port Natal, Krauss 283 [K, lecto.!, designated by Graham: 166 (1957)]. O. natalense Schltr.: 92 (1907). Type: Natal, Alexandria, Rudatis 74 (Type not seen). Found in grassland in sandy soil in Natal and Transkei. Figure 1. Vouchers: Huntley 717 (NH, PRE); Johnson 414 (NBG, STE-U); Strey 8861 (PRE); Wood 628 (GRA, PRE, SAM). (b) subsp. streyi Germishuizen, subsp. nov., a sub- specie typica habitu multiramoso, caudice longo cylin- drico rubro, ocrea subulato-lobata, inflorescentia brevi differt. TYPE. — Natal, 3030 (Port Shepstone): Sea Park, R.G. Strey 11369 (PRE, holo; NH). Figure 2. Robust, spreading, decumbent perennial herb, much branched from a long, thick, red vertical rootstock; root- * Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001. MS. received: 1988.01.19. stock over 200 mm long and 25 mm in diameter. Stems angular, longitudinally ridged, reddish brown, densely hairy with white velutinous appressed hairs, rarely glab- rous; with short internodes. Ocrea membranous, lobed, reddish brown, densely hairy with white velutinous ap- pressed hairs, 4—5 mm long; lobes 3,0— 4,5 mm long, ending in a narrow red tip .Leaves simple, sessile, glabrous except for white velutinous appressed hairs along the midrib and base of the leaves; blade elliptic to narrowly obovate, (8)13—31(32) x (1,5)3—12 mm, acuminate, ending in a stiff tip, margins crisped. Inflorescence a short axillary thyrse with fascicles of 1—4 flowers in the axils of the cup-shaped bracts; axis 40-100 mm long. Perianth 5-lobed, white, glabrous except for the dense pilose hairs at the base; the lobes free almost to the base, 5—8 x 2,5 mm, the outer 2 segments keeled at the apex; pedicels up to 4 mm long, glabrous. Stamens 8, inserted on the inner perianth; anthers 1 mm long, reddish brown; filaments 4—5 mm long, with a basal ring of reddish cilia. FIGURE 1. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. dre- geanum. 174 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 2. — Holotype of Oxygo- num dregeamm Meisn. subsp. streyi Germishuizen. Styles 3, up to 5 mm long, joined for three-quarters of their length; stigmas capitate. Fruit 9x3 mm, ovoid, longitudinally ridged, waited between the ridges, veluti- nous, crowned with the persistent perianth. Occurs mostly in coastal grassland and palm veld on sandy soils in Natal. Figure 3. NATAL. — 2632 (Bella Vista): 40 km from Ndumu on road to Kosi Bay (-DC), Strey 10305 (NH, PRE). 2732 (Ubombo): 8 km south of Muzi (-AD), Ross <£ Moll 5097 (NH, PRE); IDC rice project site, 2 km from turnoff to Phelendaba on Mbazwana road (-BA), Germishuizen 3639 (PRE); just east of Vazi Swamp, Mazengwenya (-BA), Moll 4741 (PRE); between Lake Vazi and Sibayi area (-BA), Vahrmeijer 1088 (PRE); 16 km north of Lake Sibayi on road to Maputo (-BC), Vahrmeijer & Toelken 265 (NH, PRE); Sordwana Bay (-DA), Gerstner 3683 (NH, PRE); near Bhangazi, Sordwana State Forest ( - D A), MacDevette 1235 (NH, PRE). 2830 (Dundee): Qudeni (-DB), Gerstner 396 7 (NH, PRE). 2832 (Mtubatuba): Richards Bay (-CC), Venter 4873 (PRE). 2930 (Pietermaritzburg): Inanda (-DB), Medley Wood 313 (K); Clairmont (-DD), Medley Wood 10497 (NH); Schlechter 2950A (NH). 3030 (Port Shepstone): Sea Park (-CB), Strey 11369 (NH, PRE); Munster (-CC), Gemmell sn. (PRE); Uvongo (-CD), Acocks 10907 (PRE); Liebenberg 8102 ( PRE); Mogg 13160 (PRE); Margate, Village of Happiness (-CD), Coleman 659 (NH); Margate (-CD), Strey 10940, 11023 (NH, PRE); 11069 (NH); St. Michaels on Sea (-CD), Nichol- son 82 (NH). 3130 (Port Edward): Port Edward (-AA), Nichol- son 1 712 (PRE); Taylor 5383 (NBG); near Omobaleni (Mgungu) (-AA), Acocks 13385 (PRE). This taxon is readily distinguished from the others by the much branched decumbent habit, the short inter- nodes, the long, red, cylindrical rootstock and the short axillary inflorescences. This subspecies is named in honour of Mr R.G. Strey, who brought to my attention the fact that this taxon is different from the typical species. (c) subsp. swazicum (Burtt Davy) Germishuizen, stat. nov. O. zeyheri Sond. var. swazicum Burtt Davy: 167 (1926). Type: Swaziland, Stewart s.n (K, holo.l). O. dregeanum Meisn. var. swazicum (Burtt Davy) R. Grah.: 167 (1957). Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 175 FIGURE 3. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. streyi, •; subsp. swazicum, A. Occurs in eastern and south-eastern Transvaal and Swaziland (Figure 3). This taxon is distinguished from the typical subspecies in having deeply linear-lobed leaves and an unevenly lobed ocrea. Vouchers: Bolus 12260 (BOL, PRE); Kluge 287 (PRE); Rogers 11484 (K, NH); Stewarts.ru TM 8880 (GRA, PRE). (d) subsp. canescens (Sond.) Germishuizen, stat. nov. with a small spreading prickle a third of the way from the base, long and sharp or short and obtuse, obscurely puberulous. Five varieties are recognized that can be distinguished by the lobing of the leaves. var. canescens The leaves are deeply divided into 3—9 lobes. Only the lower lobes are shallowly divided again. Occurs in open grassland, savanna and thornveld on red sandy soils in Botswana, Transvaal, northern Orange Free State and northern Cape Province. Figure 4. Vouchers: Bayliss 4515 (NBG, PRE); Louw 94 (GRA, PRE); Morris & Engelbrecht 1070 ( PRE); Pegler991 (BOL, PRE, SAM). var. linearifolium Germishuizen, var. nov., a varie- tate typica foliis linearibus integris differt. TYPE. — Transvaal, Pretoria District, beside freeway to eastern Transvaal at turnoff to Onbekend, Mauve & Reid 5326 (PRE, holo.). Figure 5. A much branched herb with linear leaves, rarely with 1—2 short teeth at the base of lower leaves. Stems and leaves often dotted with black glands. Occurs in grass- land, sour bushveld and in disturbed area along road- sides in the central, southern and south-eastern Trans- vaal and northern Natal. Figure 6. O. canescens Sond.: 100(1850); Meisn.: 38 (1856); C.H. Wr.: 462 (1912); Burtt Davy: 167 (1926); Compton: 192 (1976). O. dregeanum Meisn. var. canescens (Sond.) R.Grah.: 167 (1957). Type: Transvaal, Aapjesrivier, Zeyher 1451a (W, holo.!). O. zeyheri Sond.: 100 (1850); Meisn.: 38 (1856); C.H. Wr.: 460 (1912); Burtt Davy: 167 (1926); Compton: 192 (1976). Type: Transvaal, Magaliesburg, Zeyher 1451b (W, holo.!). O. calcaratum Meisn.: 38 (1856); Schinz: 870 (1901); C.H. Wr.: 462 (1912); Burtt Davy: 167 (1926). Type: British Bechu- analand [northern Cape Province], ‘near the source of Kuruman river’, Burchett 2459 (K, holo.!). Annual herb, up to 0,5 m tall, much branched from a thick vertical perennial woody rootstock. Stems angular, sulcate, erect, occasionally decumbent, not much swollen at the nodes, finely to densely white strigose puberulous, long pilose or rarely glabrous, sometimes dotted with black glands. Ocreae lobed, up to 5 mm long, finely to densely strigose puberulous; lobes triangular, ending in slender red seta, nearly as long as the tube. Leaves (10—) 15— 65(— 70) x (1— )2-20(-26) mm, fleshy, linear, lanceolate or rhomboid, entire or with 1—2 short teeth at the base or deeply pinnately or bipinnately lobed; the lobes linear, further lobed, acute, sometimes with a red mucro, narrowing and tapering to a short petiole, white strigose puberulous. Inflorescence a long lax thyrse with fascicles of up to 3 flowers in the axils of the brown, ovate cuspidate membranous bracts without seta. Perianth 5-lobed, white, yellow or pinkish; lobes oblong, up to 5 mm long, densely white pilose outside below; pedicels up to 4 mm long, reddish brown, eglandular, pubescent. Stamens 8, included; filaments white, up to 5 mm long, with a ring of red-brown cilia one eighth from the base; anthers blue, up to 1 mm long. Styles heterostylous, 3, up to 5 mm long, joined for half their length; ovary pu- bescent with 3 basal horns. Fruit an obovoid nut, up to 10 x 5 mm, 9-ridged, transversely wrinkled, sometimes TRANSVAAL.— 2527 (Rustenburg): Jack Scott Private Nature Reserve (-DC), Wells 2405 (PRE). 2528 (Pretoria): Great North Road at turnoff to Rust De Winter (-AD), Mauve, Reid & Smook 5315 (PRE); Kwandebele, Gemsbokfontein Farm (-BD), Van Hoepen 1680 (PRE); Pretoria (-CA), Rogers s.ru (PRE); Rooikop (-CA), Smuts & Gittett 2124 (PRE); Kwaggaspoort (-CA), Verdoom s.n. (PRE); RietvaJlei 221 (— CA), Acocks 11280 (PRE); Koedoespoort (-CB), Werder- mann & Oberdieck 1244 (PRE); Van der Merwe Station (-CB), Janse 55 (PRE, SAM); Donkerhoek, 35 km from Pretoria (—CD); Repton 672 (PRE); 1,8 km S of Rayton on road to Cullinan (-DA), Davidse 5988 (PRE); Premier Mine (-DA), Menzies s.ru (PRE); 37 km E of Pretoria (-DC), Dyer & Collett 4680 (PRE); Bronkhorstspruit, Kaalfontein 613 JR Farm (-DC), Krynauw 985 (PRE); beside freeway to eastern Transvaal af turnoff to Onbekend (-DC), Mauve & Reid 5326 (PRE). 2529 (Witbank): Groblersdal (-AB), Venter 2971 (PRE); NW side of Loskopdam (-AC), Reid 686 (PRE); ‘The Hell’, near Loskop- FIGURE 4. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. ca- nescens var. canescens. 176 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 5. — Holotype of Oxygonum dregeamim Meisn. subsp. canes- cens (Sond.) Germishuizen vai. linearifolium Germishuizen. dam (-AD), Germishuizen 1392 (PRE); Loskopdam, Twee- loopfontein (-AD), Theron 1716, 2026 (PRE, PRU); Witbank (-CC), Rogers 2568 (GRA); between Bronkhorstspruit and Witbank (— CC), Killick 3839 (PRE). 2530 (Lydenburg): Skur- weberg, Makobulaan (-BA), Onderstall 1201 (PRE). 2628 (Johannesburg): Modderfontein (-AA), Prosser s.n. (NBG, PRE); 43 km SE of Pretoria, 1 mile (1,6 km) E of Bapsfontein (-BB), Codd 2575 (PRE). 2629 (Bethal): Breyten (-BD), Steyn 999 (NBG). NATAL. — 2730 (Vryheid): Mooihoek (—AC), Devenish 938 (PRE); 11 km from Vryheid on road to Louwsburg (— DD), Germishuizen 2260 (PRE). var. dissectum Germishuizen , var. nov., a varietate typica lobis profundioribus, pluribus, et apicibus (lobo- rum) acutis differt. TYPE. — Transvaal, Pietersburg, Feb. 1904, H. Bolus s.n. (BOL, holo.; GRA). Figure 7. The leaves of this plant are deeply divided and the FIGURE 6. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. ca- lobes in turn are again divided; each lobe ending in a nescens var. linearifolium. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 111 long slender tip. Occurs in grassland in sandy soils in the northern Transvaal, especially in the Pietersburg area. Figure 8. TRANSVAAL. — 2329 (Pietersburg): Blinkwater (-AA), Bremekamp & Schweickerdt 188 (PRE); Pietersburg (-CD), Bolus s.ru (BOL, GRA); Pietersburg Nature Reserve (-CD), Bredenkamp & Van Vuuren 123 (PRE); Marabastad (-CD), Nelson 118 (PRE). 2428 (Nylstroom): Naboomspruit, Mosdene (-DA), Galpin M305 (PRE, SAM). 2429 (Zebediela): Percy Fyfe Nature Reserve (-AA), Huntley 1146, 1550 (PRE); Luns- khp, about 32 km NNE of Potgietersrust (-AA), Maguire 1370 (NBG). var. pilosum Germishuizen, var. nov., a varietate typica lobis inferioribus foliorum longioribus et plantis pilosis differt. TYPE.— Transvaal, Twentyfour Rivers, F.A. Rogers 23637 (PRE, holo.). Figure 9. This taxon differs from the typical variety by the lower lobes of the leaves being over 1 5 mm in length, and the whole plant covered with long white pilose hairs. Occurs only in the north-western Transvaal, especially in the Waterberg area in savanna on sandy soils. Figure 8. TRANSVAAL. — 2428 (Nylstroom): Alma, 56 km NW of Warmbaths (-AC), Bayliss 2007 (NBG); Van Rensburg Farm, 43 km along Nylstroom-Vaalwater road (-AC), Leeuwenberg 10900 (PRE); Waterberg, Vaalwater, Farm Nooitgedacht (-AC), Westfall 2279 (PRE); Waterberg, Zandrivierspoort near Alma on Farm Witpoort (-AC), Van Wyk 26 79 (PRE, PRU); Twenty- four Rivers (-AD), Rogers 23637 (PRE); Geelhoutkop (-AD), Breyers.ru (PRE). var. lobophyllum Germishuizen, var. nov., a varie- tate typica lobis foliis latioribus et lobis ocreae triangu- laribus differt. TYPE. — Transvaal, 18 km ENE of Pretoriuskop, Acocks 16643 (PRE, holo.). Figure 10. The leaves are shallowly and deeply lobed but not di- vided up to the midrib, rarely entire; lobes usually wider than 2 mm. Occurs in the northern and eastern Transvaal and Swaziland in woodland, bushveld and grassland in sandy loam or granitic soils. Figure 8. FIGURE 7. — Holotype of Oxygonum dre- geanum Meisn. subsp. canescens (Sond.) Germishuizen var. dissectum Germis- huizen. Austro Africanae. no iom. .OJU^OiUcuv lUzjlvru-, Sc-tvL , £-r H-t Oxygonum dregeanum canescens (Sond.) < var. dissectum Ger: 178 FIGURE 8. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. ca- nescens vai.dissectum, A; vai.pilosum, 4; vai.lobophyllum. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TRANSVAAL. — 2230 (Messina): Venda, Ha-Lambani (-DD), Mugwedi 1665 (PRE). 2329 (Petersburg): 13 km from Bandoliers- kop on Petersburg road (-BD), Story 1833 (PRE). 2330 (Tza- neen): Hans Merensky Nature Reserve (-DA), Oates 88, 128 (PRE). 2431 (Acomhoek): Farm Kempiana 90 KU, Timbavati Private Nature Reserve (-AD), Zambatis 1470 (PRE); Pilgrims Rest District, Manyeleti Game Reserve (-DA), Bredenkamp 1262, 1382 (PRE). 2530 (Lydenburg): Nelspruit (-BD), Breyer s.n. (PRE); Nelspruit Research Station (-BD), Liebenberg 2152 (PRE). 2531 (Komatipoort): Kruger National Park, 18 km ENE of Pretoriuskop (-AB), Acocks 16643 (PRE); near Pretoriuskop (- AB), Codd & De Winter 4933 (PRE); 10 km N of Pretorius- kop on road to Skukuza (-AB), Codd & De Winter 4993, 4994 (PRE); Nohpe (-AB), Van der Schijff 1541 (PRE); Kaapmui- den (— CB), Rogers s.ru (PRE). SWAZILAND. —2631 (Mbabane): Malinda Hill (-AC), Compton 28433, 29775 (NBG, PRE); Stegi District, Sicusha (-BC), Compton 32472 (NBG, PRE). (e) subsp. lanceolatum Germishuizen , subsp. nov. a subspecie typica foliis angustioribus et tepalis vinoso- rubris differt. TYPE. — Transvaal, Lekgalameetse Nature Reserve, The Downs, Makwens, M. Stalmans 192 (PRE, holo.). Figure 1 1 . FIGURE 9. — Holotype of Oxygonum dre- geanum Meisn. subsp. canescens (Sond.) Germishuizen var. pilosum Germishui- zen. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 179 FIGURE 10. — Holotype of Oxy- gonum dregeanum Meisn. subsp. canescens (Sond.)Ger- mishuizen var. lobophyllum Germishuizen. 7 'K / ttt / , J, }1 ff C(c.ocs * /&. iS c 'Zoo' Z3///53 liTwtn Robust herb, arising from a thick vertical perennial woody rootstock, with many erect annual stems up to 0,3 m long. Stems much branched, angular, sulcate, fine- ly and densely strigose puberulous, rarely glabrous, sometimes reddish tinged. Ocrea up to 8 mm long, lobed, membranous, brown, sometimes with a reddish tinge, white strigose puberulous, rarely glabrous; lobes up to 4 mm long, ending in a narrow red tip. Leaves (15—) 20— 33(— 40) x (1 — )1 ,5 — 3,5(— 8) mm, lanceolate to narrowly ovate, rarely lobed towards base, glabrous ex- cept for a few white appressed hairs along the midrib at base and along margins, rarely white strigose puberulous, acute, all ending in a stiff point, tapering to narrow petiole, mostly with dark red margins especially near apex. Inflorescence an axillary or terminal thyrse with up to 3 flowers in brown, cuspidate, cup-shaped bracts; axis 50—200 mm long. Perianth 5-lobed, white, deep pink or wine-red tinged along centre on outside of outer 3 lobes, densely pilose at base becoming glabrous towards the apex; lobes free almost to base, up to 7 mm long, outer 3 lobes keeled at apex; pedicels strigose, up to 4 mm long. Stamens 8, inserted on inner perianth lobes; filaments of different lengths, up to 5 mm long; anthers up to 1,5 mm long, reddish brown, with a ring of red- dish brown cilia at base. Styles 3, heterostylous, 2,5— 6,0 mm long, joined for less than half their length. Fruit an ovoid nut, up to 12 mm long, slightly 3-angled, usual- ly without 3 blunt teeth at base, 9-ridged, transversely wrinkled, glabrous. Found in open grassland and on montane rocky grass- land, or rarely in woodland in Transvaal, Swaziland and Natal. Figure 12. TRANSVAAL. — 2430 (Pilgrims Rest): L^kgalameetse Nature Reserve, Makwens (-AA), Stalmans 192 (PRE); Haffenden Heights (-AA), Stalmans 174 (PRE); road to Makwens (-AA), Stalmans 634 (PRE); The Downs (-AA), Junod 4253 (PRE), Stalmans 1452 (PRE); on top of Orrie Baragwanath Pass (-AA), Reid 1159 (PRE); Ohrigstad Dam Nature Reserve (-DC), Jacobsen 1769 (PRE); Mount Sheba Nature Reserve, N slope of Mount Sheba (-DD), De Winter 9361 (PRE); Graskop (-DD), Galpin 14569 (PRE); Graskop, Stanley Bush Kop (-DD), P. & G. Raal 1035 (PRE); Pilgrims Rest (-DD), Rogers 14314 (PRE). 2530 (Lydenburg): Boschhoek, western Steen- 180 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Oxygonum dregeanum Melsn. subsp. lanceolatum Germishuizen "i 1988 $ metOW HERBARIUM PRETORIA f,5G053 _ 243CTSA '•■fo TRANSVAAL j M Stalmans u<4,c4 1 : I 1 : 1984. 10. 10 192 J ; M60 m 1 Oxygonum dregeanum Meisn v?e:h Lekgalameetse flat. Res., The Downs fl-aspect, gentle slope I Herb 0,15 m tall with wh j undersides of petals red te flowers with | G Germishuizen ) *, FIGURE 11. — Holotype of Oxygo mm dregeamm Meisn. subsp. lanceolatum Germishuizen. FIGURE 12. — Distribution of Oxygonum dregeanum subsp. lanceolatum. kampsberg (-AA), Young A407 (PRE); Hartebeestvlakte (-B A), Mohle 151 (PRE); Mauchsberg, Sabie (-BB), Smuts & Gillett 2306 (PRE, STE-U); Wonderkloof Nature Reserve (-BC), Elan- Puttick 128 (PRE); Belfast (-CA), Jenkins s.n. (PRE). 2531 (Komatipoort): Barberton (-CC), Pott 5469 (PRE); Thorn- croft s.n. (PRE); Saddleback Mountain (-CQ, Galpin 615 (NH, PRE, SAM); Osterbeek Farm, 5 km S of Barberton (-CC), De Sousa 626 (PRE); Swaziland border, Daylight Farm, Bearded Man Mountain {-CD),Buitendag 756 (NBG, PRE). 2629 (Bethal): Ermelo (— DB), Riley 12 (PRE). SWAZILAND. — 2531 (Komatipoort): Havelock Mine, Piggs Peak (-CC), Miller 2988 (PRE). 2631 (Mbabane): Malolotja Nature Reserve, Nkhaba (-AA), Heath 470 (PRE); Black Mbu- luzi Valley (-AA), Dlamini s.n. (NBG, PRE); Ukutula (-AC), Compton 25256 (NBG, PRE); Compton 24501 (NBG). NATAL. — 2731 (Louwsburg): 15 km from Ngome Forest Station on road to Vryheid (-CD), Germishuizen 2133 (PRE); 12 km from Ngome Forest Station on road to Vryheid (-CD), Buthelezi 115 (NH, PRE). 2829 (Harrismith): Klip River, Stryd- hoek, Tintwa Mountains (— CB), Doidge s.n. (PRE). 2930 (Pieter- maritzburg): Tweedie (-AC), Curator Pretoria 3462 (PRE); Greytown (-BA), Wylie s.n. (PRE); Pietermaritzburg, Table Mountain (-CB), Killick 732 (NBG). Bothalia 18,2 (1988) ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS My thanks go to the following: the curators and staff of BOL, GRA, K, NH, NBG, PRE, SAM, STE-U and W for the loan of their material; Dr H.F. Glen for translating the diagnoses into Latin; and Mrs A.J. Romano wski for the photographs. REFERENCES BURTT DAVY, J. 1926. A manual of the flowering plants and ferns of the Transvaal with Swaziland, South Africa 1: 167. Longmans, Green, London. COMPTON, R.H. 1976. Polygonaceae. Flora of Swaziland. Journal of South African Botany, Supplement Vol. 11: 192. GRAHAM, R.A. 1957. A revision of Oxygonum. Kew Bulletin 1: 166-167. 181 MEISNER, C.F. 1840. Polygoneae. In D.F.L. Schlechtendal, Linnaea 14: 487. MEISNER, C.F. 1856. Polygonaceae. In A.P. De Candolle, Prodromus systematis naturalis regni vegetabilis 14: 38. Paris. ROSS, J.H. 1972. Flora of NataL Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 39: 156. Government Printer, Pretoria. SCHINZ, H. 1901. Polygonaceae. Bulletin de I’Herbier Boissier ser. 2,1: 870. SCHLECHTER, R. 1907. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Flora von Natal. In H.G.A. Engler, Botanische Jahrbucher 40: 92. Leipzig. SONDER, O.W. 1850. In D.F.L. Schlechtendal, Linnaea 23 : 100. Halle, Berlin. TIKOVSKY, H. & MERXMULLER, H. 1969. Polygonaceae. In H. Merxmuller, Prodromus einer Flora von Sudwest-afrika 23: 4. Cramer, Lehre. WRIGHT, C.H. 1912. Polygonaceae. In W.T. Thiselton-Dyer, Flora capensis 5,1: 461-462. Reeve, London. Bothalia 18,2: 183-188 (1988) Notes on African plants VARIOUS AUTHORS BRASSICACEAE HELIOPHILA CORNELLSBER GIA , A NEW SPECIES FROM THE RICHTERSVELD Heliophila comellsbergia B.J. Pienaar & A. Nicholas sp. nov. H. patenti Oliv. et H. diffusae (Thunb.) DC. var. diffusae et vai.flaccae (Sond.) Marais affrnis; a H. patenti floribus multo maioribus et fructu globoso, inflato dif- fert; a H. diffusae et varietatibus foliis non divisis differt. Herba annua. Caulis unum ad aliquot. Folia simplices, integra, estipulata, anguste-lanceolata ad elliptica, 10- 40 x 2—8 mm. Flores albi. Petala 2,9— 4,5 x 1,4— 2,5 (—2,8) mm. Fructus globosus, 3,0— 4, 0(— 4,5) x 3,0— 3,8(— 4,0) mm, valvis inflatis. TYPE.— 2817 (Vioolsdrif): (-CA) Richtersveld, Cornellsberg in Stinkfontein Mountains, southern slopes to a neck south of the top, 1977.09.06, Oliver, Tolken & Venter 715 (PRE, holo.; K, MO). Soft, patently hairy, annual herb, (110— )1 55— 290 mm high. Stems one to several, erect, lax, patently pu- bescent. Leaves simple, alternate, entire, exstipulate, narrow-lanceolate to obtusely elliptic, marginally pu- bescent, midrib ventrally visible, 10—40 x 2—8 mm, larger leaves near the stem base, both stem and leaves often tinted purple. Racemes few to many-flowered, lax, axis elongating in fruit. Pedicels in flower 3—11 mm long, in fruit 6 — 10( — 12) mm long, initially ascending, recurved (almost drooping) when mature, patently pu- bescent. Flowers white, drying cream. Sepals (2,0—) 2,1— 2,5 x 1,0— 1,4 mm, membranous, dark cream in colour; outer 2 cucullate, inner 2 saccate, margin broad- ly transparent, tinted purple apically. Petals 2,9— 4,5 x 1,4— 2,5(-2,8) mm, obovate above, claw with lateral papillate appendage. Filaments 1,6— 1,9 mm and 1,2— 1,7 mm long, the 2 shorter filaments basally papillate. Anthers (0,5-)0,6-0,7(-0,8) mm long. Ovary globose, 0,4— 0,6 mm in diameter, 2 ovules, style as long as ovary; stigma capitate, papillate. Fruits globose, 3,0— 4, 0(— 4,5) x 3,0— 3, 8(— 4,0) mm, puberulent, valves inflated, faint- ly 1 -nerved, tinged purple when mature; style persistent, filiform, 2,0— 3,0 mm long. Seeds 1 or 2, 0,8— 1,0 mm in diameter, narrowly winged. Figures 1 & 2. CAPE. — 2817 (Vioolsdrif): Rosyntjiesberg, (-AC), Oliver, Tolken & Venter 302 (PRE); Cornellsberg (-CA), Oliver, Tolken & Venter 715 (K, MO, PRE). Heliophila comellsbergia is endemic to mountainous areas of the Richtersveld. Found in stoney places, in well drained clayey loam soils, it occurs on the southern slopes of mountains where it may grow in open or shaded areas. Oliver, Tolken & Venter record it as locally com- mon. The Richtersveld is a mountainous area that bor- ders on the Namib Desert. For much of the year it is a harsh, extremely dry area in which only succulent plants and plants with underground storage organs sur- vive. Good rains in August-September transform parts of the Richtersveld into a carpet of flowers, as in Nama- qualand. It is at this period that one finds an abundance of annuals, such as Heliophila comellsbergia. The specific epithet comellsbergia is derived from the isolated locality in which this new Heliophila species was collected. Cornellsberg is a peak in the Stinkfontein Mountain range. Oliver, Tolken & Venter collected the type specimen on the southern slopes, towards the neck of this peak. Y h FIGURE 1. — Holotype {Oliver, Tolken & Venter 715) of Helio- phila comellsbergia housed at PRE (Photograph by A. Ro- manowski). 184 FIGURE 2. — 1, petal with claw and basal appendage, X 1 3 ; 2, stamens, 2a, longer sta- men without basal papillae, X 29; 2b, shorter stamen with basal papillae, X 30; 3, mature globose fruit, X 3. All drawings based on Oliver, Tolken & Venter 302 (PRE). Drawings by G. Condy. Although the material of this new Heliophila species is limited, the authors find it desirable to name this taxon for two reasons; a, the remoteness of the area in which this species occurs, making it unlikely that it will be col- lected again in the near future; b, the distinctive, unique morphology of H. comellsbergia. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Heliophila comellsbergia most closely resembles H. patens Oliv., another Heliophila species of restricted dis- tribution. H. patens has so far only been recorded from the Piketberg and a collecting site somewhere between Knechtsvlakte (this name is probably an orthographic error and should be Knersvlakte) and Sandveld near Van- rhynsdorp (Figure 3). However, H. comellsbergia differs from H. patens in a number of structurally important and taxonomically significant ways. Of particular note are the larger flowers, recurved, inflated, globose, 1 or 2- seeded fruits and pubescent stems, leaves, pedicels and fruits of H. comellsbergia; H. patens has obovate to subcircular, laterally flattened fruits with at least two seeds (Table 1; Figure 4). Although H. comellsbergia appears to be allied to H. patens, the relationship between these two species is probably distant. Using Marais’s (1970) key to Heliophila in the Flora of southern Africa, H. comellsbergia keys out to H. diffusa (Thunb.) DC., FIGURE 3. — Distribution of Heliophila comellsbergia, •; H. patens, <>; H. diffusa var. diffusa, ■; and H. diffusa var. flacca, A. TABLE 1 . — Comparison of selected characters in Heliophila comellsbergia, H. patens, H. diffusa var. diffusa and H. diffusa var. flacca Character H. comellsbergia H. patens H. diffusa var. diffusa H. diffusa var. flacca Plant height (mm) 155-290 150-220 100-445 235-450 Vestiture *pubescent glabrous glabrous glabrous Leaf length (mm) 23-45 7-30 20-55 20-45 *Leaf width (mm) 3-8 0,4 -1,0 12-52 14-23 Petal length (mm) *3, 5-5,0 3, 0-4,0 1,5-3, 2 2, 0-4,0 Ovule number *1 2(-4) 1-8 1-8 Fruit length (mm) 5-8 4, 5-6, 5 *7-15 4, 5-6, 5 Fruit width (mm) 3-8 2-3 2-4 1, 8-3,0 important diagnostic characters. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 185 FIGURE 4. — Scatter diagram (leaf width X fruit length) illus- trating the distinctness of Heliophila cornellsbergia, <>; H. patens, o; H. diffusa var. diffusa, ■; and H. diffusa var. flacca, A . Solid symbols = pinnately compound leaves, unfilled symbols = simple undivided leaves. which has two varieties, viz. var. diffusa and var. flacca (Sond.) Marais. This species differs from H. cornellsbergia in having pinnately compound leaves, 1— 8-seeded, flat fruits and glabrous vegetative parts. Although allied to H. diffusa, the relationship is not considered close. In his southern African flora treatment, Marais (1970) places H. patens, H. diffusa var. diffusa and var. flacca following one another, and there is little doubt that H. cornellsbergia should be placed with this complex. It is probable that a long period of isolation on the mountains of the Richtersveld could explain why it differs fairly markedly from its nearest relatives, which occur some distance to the south (Figure 3). SPECIMENS EXAMINED Heliophila cornellsbergia B.J. Pienaar & A. Nicholas CAPE. — 2817 (Vioolsdrif): Rosyntjiesberg (-AC), Oliver, Tolken & Venter 302 (PRE); Comellsberg (-CA), Oliver, Tol- ken & Venter 715 (PRE, holo. ; K, MO, iso.). Heliophila patens Oliv. CAPE. — 3218 (Clanwilliam): Piketberg (-DD), Bolus 7530* (BOL, NBG, PRE, SAM, isotypes), Schlechter 3482 (PRE), 5183 (BOL). Without precise locality: between Knechtsvlakte & Sandveld (possibly 3118BC?), Leipoldt 3963* (BOL, PRE). Heliophila diffusa (Thunb.) DC. var. diffusa CAPE. — 3218 (Clanwilliam): Elandskloof (-BD), Adamson s.n. (BOL 27121), Lewis s.n. (BOL 27120). 3318 (Cape Town): Kapokberg (- AD), Bolus 12599* (PRE); Lions’ Head & Rump (—CD), Lilians 3924* (PRE), Ecklon & Zeyher 71* (SAM); Devils Peak (—CD), Ecklon & Zeyher 70* (SAM); Hercules Pillar (— DB), Compton 13673* (NBG); Tigerberg (-DC), Esterhuysen 17509 (PRE); Groot Drakenstein Mts, Duiwels- kloof (-DD), Esterhuysen 14046* (BOL); Seven Sisters Mtn, Paarl (-DD), Esterhuysen 23928 (BOL). 3319 (Worcester): Kleinvlei Bridge (-AB), Acocks 19884* (PRE); Elandskloof (-AC), Compton 16179 (NBG); Steendal, Tulbagh (-AC), Zeyher s.n. (SAM 14059)*; Theronsberg (-BC), Compton 11788* (NBG). 3418 (Simonstown): Constantiaberg (-AB) Compton 13916 (NBG). Precise locality unknown: Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (PRE 23076); Braakfontein (?), Schlechter 3840 (PRE). Heliophila diffusa (Thunb.) DC. var. flacca CAPE. — 3318 (Simonstown): Helderberg (-BB), Parker 4247* (NBG); Jonkershoek (-DD), Compton 15339* (NBG), Lewis 3132* (SAM). 3419 (Caledon): Grabouw (— AA), Stokoe s.n* (SAM 64258); Caledon (-AB), Ecklon & Zeyher 69* (K 142686, holo.; SAM, iso.); Caledon near hotsprings (-AB), Zeyher s.n. (K 142686), Zwarteberg, Zeyher 1894 (PRE). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors would like to thank the Director and staff (particularly Dr H. Glen, G. Condy, A. Romanowski, B. Schrire and J. van Rooy) of the Botanical Research Institute. The Directors and staff of BOL, K, NBG, and SAM are thanked for the loan of specimens. The referees are also thanked for their valuable contribution. REFERENCE MARAIS, W. 1970. Cruciferae. In Flora of southern Africa 13: 1 — 118. Government Printer, Pretoria. B.J. PIENAAR and A. NICHOLAS * Specimen cited in Flora of southern Africa by Marais (1970). MS. received: 1988.03.28. ERICACEAE COILOSTIGMA ZEYHER1ANUM — A CORRECTION In ‘Studies in the Ericoideae (Ericaceae). V. The genus Coilostigmd in Bothalia 17,2: 167, the variety tenui- folium was published as a new combination without the citation of the basionym which was inadvertently left out in the editorial process. This is now rectified. Coilostigma zeyherianum Klotzsch var. tenuifo- lium (Klotzsch) E.G.H. Oliver, comb, et stat. nov. Coilostigma tenuifolium Klotzsch in Linnaea 12: 234 (1838). Types: In planitie inter ‘Krakakamma’ et montes ‘Vanstadens- riviersberge’, Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (Bt, E!, S!); idem as 294 (G!, GOET!, LD!, M!, MEL!, MO!, S!, W!, UPS!, Z!); in sylvis ‘Olifantshoek’ prope flumen ‘Bosjesmansrivier’, Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (Bt, BOL!). Lectotype (chosen here): Ecklon & Zeyher s.n. (S). E.G.H. OLIVER 186 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) GERANIACEAE THE CORRECT AUTHOR CITATION FOR PELARGONIUM SECTION OTIDIA In the most recent taxonomic treatment of the genus Pelargonium, Knuth (1912: 369) cited the authority of the section Otidia as (Lindl.) Harv. (1860), based on the genus Otidia Lindl. ex Sweet. This is not correct. The name Otidia was first published, in generic rank, by Sweet (1820: viii), without any mention of Lindley. Later in the same work, under t. 98 Sweet stated: ‘This plant [Otidia carnosa] is proposed by Mr Lindley to form a distinct genus, which we have adopted ...’. In my opinion Sweet is the undoubted author of the genus, and ‘Lindl. ex’ should be omitted from the citation as Lindley was not mentioned in connection with the original publica- tion of the name. Furthermore, Harvey (1860: 278) was not the first author to place Otidia in sectional rank, being preceded by G. Don (1831: 729). Don did not cite the generic name Otidia as basionym, but by citing ‘Lindl. in Sweet, ger. p. 8 no. 98’ he provided an adequate reference to the validly published basionym. Although this reference is not entirely direct, it is not contrary to I.C.B.N. Art. 33.2 which only concerns publications later than 1 Jan. 1953. (A change in rank is considered to be a different combination and there is not a separate clause to cover changes in ranking). The correct author citation therefore is Pelargonium sect. Otidia (Sweet) G. Don. REFERENCES DON, G. 1831. A general system of gardening and botany, Vol. 1. Rivington, London. HARVEY, W.H. 1860. Pelargonium. In W.H. Harvey & O. Son- der, Flora capensis 1: 259-308 (278). Hodges & Smith, Dublin. KNUTH, R. 1912. Pelargonium. In A. Engler, Das Pflanzenreich 4, 129, 53: 316-545 (369). Engelmann, Berlin. SWEET, R. 1820. Geraniaceae, Vol. 1. Ridgway, London. P. VORSTER* * Botany Department, University of Stellenbosch, Stellen- bosch 7600, South Africa. MS. received: 1987.08.22. ORCHIDACEAE ADDITIONS TO THE SYNONYMY OF EULOPHIA SCHWEINFURTHII For some time doubt has existed as to the precise nature of Eulophia chrysops Summerh., particularly with regard to its alliance with a species recognized as occurring in southern Africa, E. schweinfurthii Kraenzl. (Kraenzlin 1893; Summerhayes 1958; Hall 1965). Both these concepts have wide distributions in tropi- cal Africa, extending marginally into the Transvaal (E. schweinfurthii) and in recent records, into Botswana (E. chrysops ). Summerhayes (1958) proposed E. chrysops as a new name for Lissochilus aurantiacus Reichb. f. (1865), E. aurantiaca having been used previously for another species, related to E. welwitschii (Reichb. f.) Rolfe. Summerhayes also reduced two tropical species, L. johnstonii Rolfe and L. holubii Rolfe to the synonymy of E. chrysops. In discussing E. chrysops, Summerhayes (1958) noted at the time that more data and material were needed to elucidate its relationships. The specimens that he had seen suggested that the flowers of E. chrysops were ap- preciably larger (petals 13—16 mm long) than those of E. schweinfurthii and that they have less acute sepals with more narrow bases. Subsequent examination of material has shown that these distinctions do not hold, either for the sepal shapes or for the flower sizes. Petal length varies from 8— 14(— 16) mm in E. schweinfurthii, covering the range given by Summerhayes fori?. chrysops. Some of the variation in flower size may be related to the habitats which vary from arid mopane woodland to wet bog verges (Williamson 1977) and to dry bushveld and grassland (Hall 1965). The overall evidence of con- tinuity shows convincingly that the two concepts should be merged. The name of the joint concept should be E. schwein- furthii Kraenzl. (1893) which, being earlier, replaces Summerhayes’ E. chrysops (1958) as the nomen novum for L. aurantiacus Reichb. f. (1865). Further accretions to this concept are likely to become evident in studies of material of other tropical allies but none appear to have been described earlier than E. schweinfurthii. REFERENCES HALL, A.V. 1965. Studies of the South African species of Eulophia. Journal of South African Botany Supplemen- tary Vol. 5: 1-248. KRAENZLIN, F. 1893. Orchidaceae africanae. Botanische Jahr- biicher 17: 54. REICHENBACH, G.L. 1865. Dr. Welwitsch’s Orchideen aus Angola. Flora 48: 177-191. SUMMERHAYES, V.S. 1958. African orchids, 25. Kew Bulle- tin 1958: 57-87. WILLIAMSON, G. 1977. The orchids of South Central Africa, pp. 237. Dent, London. A.V. HALL* * Bolus Herbarium, University of Cape Town, Rondebosch 7700. MS. received: April 1988. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) POLYGONACEAE REINSTATEMENT OF OXYGONUM ACETOSELLA WELW. 187 R.A. Graham in his revision of Oxygonum in Kew Bulletin 1957: 165 (1957), places Oxygonum acetosella Welw. as a synonym of Oxygonum alatum Burch, because they are similar in their winged fruits and lobed leaves. On closer investigation it is found that O. acetosella dif- fers from O. alatum by the total absence of cup-shaped and elongated scales scattered over the entire surface of the plant, the shallowly lobed leaves and the entire ocreae, which are always fringed in the latter. Figure 5 repre- sents a scatter diagram, using internode length along one axis and width of leaves along the other axis, which clearly separates the two taxa. 3a O. acetosella Welw. in Transactions of the Linnean Society of London 27: 60 (1869); Hiern: 903 (1900); Bak. & C.H. Wr.: 99 (1909); Gossweiler: 395 (1953). Type: Angola, Mossamedes, Welwitsch 1757 (BM iso.; K; PRE!). Figure 6. A glabrous, somewhat fleshy, glaucous, decumbent or prostrate annual herb, much branched from the base. FIGURE 5. — Scatter diagram illustrating the difference between Oxygonum acetosella, •, and O. alatum, 6. FIGURE 6. — Type of Oxygonum acetosella Welw. r Oxygonum acetosella Welw. FACULDADE° DC "-r An9°'- "' 17571 Oxygonum acetosella Welw. Estafao Angola: Mossamedes Habitat , Alt. .. Dat. VI-V1I-1859 Col. F.. Welwitsch N* 1757 Del. Obs. 188 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Stems semicylindrical, glabrous, up to 200 mm long. Ocrea truncate, up to 8 mm long, quite entire or minute- ly erose-denticulate, with a green leaf-like limb up to 3 mm long. Leaves broadly lanceolate to ovate, simple or shallowly 2-3-lobed, (30-)39-56(-60) x (9-)12-22 (—27) mm, acute at the apex, narrowed into the winged petiole, fleshy, glabrous. Inflorescence a small thyrse with fascicles of up to 3 flowers in the axils of ovate membranous bracts. Flowers bisexual. Perianth segments 5, obovate, 5—6 mm long, white. Stamens 8; anthers pale blue, up to 1 mm long; filaments 2, 5-4,0 mm long with a ring of cilia one-eighth from base. Styles 3, joined for almost half their length, up to 5 mm long. Fruit ob- long, up to 10 mm long, with 3 narrow wings. Found on grassy flats and sandy hills in northern South West Africa/Namibia. Figure 7. Vouchers: Giess 7954 (PRE, WIND); Moss & Jacobsen K299 (PRE). REFERENCES BAKER, J.G. & WRIGHT, C.H. 1909. Polygonaceae. In W.T. Thiselton-Dyei, Flora of tropical Africa 6,1: 99. Reeve, Kent. GOSSWEILER, J. 1953. Nomes indigenas de plantas de Angola'. 395. Luanda. GRAHAM, R.A. 1957. A revision of Oxygonum. Kew Bulletin 1: 165. FIGURE 7. — Distribution of Oxygonum acetosella Welw. in South West Africa/Namibia. HIERN, W.P. 1900. Polygonaceae. Catalogue of the African plants collected by Dr Friedrich Welwitsch in 1853-1861 : 903. London. WELWITSCH, F. 1869. Polygonaceae. Transactions of the Lin- nean Society of London 27 : 60. London. G. GERMISHUIZEN MS. received: Feb. 1988. Bothalia 18,2: 189-194 (1988) Fusarium tricinctum (Fungi : Hyphomycetes) in South Africa — morphology and pathogenicity* SANDRA C. LAMPRECHT,** W.F.O. MARASAS,1- P.S. VAN WYK,* and P.S. KNOX-DAVIES0 Keywords.' Fusarium tricinctum, Medicago truncatula, morphology, pathogenicity, soil, South Africa, taxonomy, Triticum aestivum ABSTRACT The occurrence, cultural characteristics, morphology and pathogenicity of seven isolates of Fusarium tricinc- tum (Corda) Saccardo, are described. Cultures were isolated from plant debris in soils under natural grassland in the Golden Gate National Park, Orange Free State, and under either wheat or annual Medicago spp. at Malmesbury, Cape Province. One isolate was obtained from roots of a Medicago sp. at Caledon, Cape Province. The isolates were identical to each other and to two foreign reference cultures of F. tricinctum and all produced napiform to citriform microconidia on monophialides. All the isolates were weak to intermediately aggressive pathogens of Medicago truncatula Gaertn. cv. Jemalong and Triticum aestivum L. cv. Palmiet and caused pre- and post- emergence damping-off of seedlings as well as discolouration and necrosis of root and crown tissues. This is the first report of the pathogenicity of F. tricinctum to M. truncatula. UITTREKSEL Die voorkoms, kultuureienskappe, morfologie en patogeniteit van sewe isolate van Fusarium tricinctum (Corda) Saccardo, word beskryf. Kulture is uit plantreste in gronde onder natuurlike grasveld in die Golden Gate Nasionale Park, Oranje-Vrystaat, en onder of koring of eenjarige Medicago spp. in Malmesbury, Kaap- provinsie, gei'soleer. Een isolaat is verkry vanuit wortels van ’n eenjarige Medicago sp. te Caledon, Kaapprovin- sie. Die isolate was identies aan meekaar en aan twee buitelandse verwysingskulture van F. tricinctum en almal het napiforme tot sitriforme mikrokonidia op monofialides geproduseer. A1 die isolate was swak tot middelmatig aggressiewe patogene van Medicago truncatula Gaertn. cv. Jemalong en Triticum aestivum L. cv. Palmiet en het voor- en na-opkomsafsterwing van saailinge sowel as verkleuring en nekrose van wortel- en kroonweefsel veroor- saak. Hierdie is die eerste aanmelding van die patogeniteit van F. tricinctum teenoor M. truncatula. INTRODUCTION Four species are currently accepted in the section Sporotrichiella of the genus Fusarium Link, i.e. F. poae (Peck) Wollenw., F. tricinctum (Corda) Sacc., F. sporo- trichioides Sherb., and F. chlamydosporum Wollenw. & Reinking (Nelson et al. 1983). Reports in the literature on the occurrence, geographical distribution and patho- genicity of these Fusarium species are for the most part unreliable because of the use of the name F. tricinctum Corda emend. Snyd. & Hans. (Snyder & Hansen 1945) which encompasses all four of these species. However, there is considerable evidence that F. tricinctum sensu stricto is relatively widespread, but usually at low fre- quencies, in soils and in association with cereals, includ- ing wheat, oats, barley and maize, grasses and a number of other hosts in Europe (Wollenweber & Reinking 1935; Jamalainen 1955; Seemuller 1968; Booth 1971; Marasas et al. 1979; Domsch et al. 1980; Nirenberg 1981; Ylimaki 1981; Gerlach & Nirenberg 1982; Chel- kowski et al. 1984) and North America (El-Gholl et al. 1978; Kane et al. 1987). Although F. tricinctum appears to be relatively common in cold temperate areas of * Part of a Ph.D. Agric. thesis to be submitted by the first author to the University of Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch. ** Plant Protection Research Institute, Private Bag X5017, Stel- lenbosch 7600. t South African Medical Research Council, P.O. Box 70, Tyger- berg 7505. * Department Plant Pathology, University of the Orange Free State, P.O. Box 339, Bloemfontein 9300. □ Department of Plant Pathology, University of Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch 7600. MS. received: 1987.07.02. northern Europe, particularly in Finland (Jamalainen 1955; Uoti & Ylimaki 1974; Uoti 1976; Ylimaki 1981), this fungus has also been isolated in Florida in the USA (El-Gholl et al. 1978). The isolates from leaf- spots on Hedera helix L. in Florida are the only ones that have been found to produce the teleomorph ( Gibbe - rella tricincta El-Gholl, McRitchie, Schoulties & Ridings) in compatible crosses (El-Gholl et al. 1978, 1979; Cullen et al. 1983). A dried culture (DAOM 194693) obtained from CBS 449.67 which was isolated from Calamagros- tis epigeios (L.). Roth in Berlin, Germany by Seemuller (1968), has been designated as the neotype for F. tricinc- tum (Neish 1987). Two species of the section Sporotrichiella, i.e. F. poae and F. chlamydosporum are relatively common in South Africa (Doidge 1938; Doidge 1950; Marasas et al. 1987). During a recent survey of Fusarium species in South African soils, three isolates of F. tricinctum were obtained from Golden Gate National Park (Mara- sas et al. 1988). These isolates represented the first record of the occurrence of F. tricinctum in South Africa. There are also no other authenticated records of this fungus from the continent of Africa. Subsequently four additional isolates were obtained. The occurrence, cul- tural characteristics, morphology and pathogenicity of these South African isolates of F. tricinctum are describ- ed and compared with two foreign reference cultures in this paper. MATERIALS AND METHODS Fusarium cultures The sources of seven South African and two foreign isolates of F. tricinctum are given in Table 1. All cultures 190 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 1. — Sources of Fusarium tricinctum cultures F. tricinctum isolate No. (MRC)* Host or substrate Locality Supplier Original No. 1574 Hedera helix leaf spots Samsula, Florida, USA NE El-Gholl Red single ascospore 1799 Unknown Germany W Gerlach 62448 3448 Soil debris in natural grassland Golden Gate, Orange Free State SC Lamprecht 9A-2A 3518 Soil debris in natural grassland Golden Gate, Orange Free State WFO Marasas M9A-21 3519 Soil debris in natural grassland Golden Gate, Orange Free State WFO Marasas M9A-14A 3908 Root of Medicago sp. Caledon, Cape Province SC Lamprecht 1197A-1518 4519 Soil debris in wheat field Langgewens, Malmesbury, Cape Province SC Lamprecht 1517/36 4520 Soil debris in medic field Langgewens, Malmesbury, Cape Province SC Lamprecht 1528/64 4521 Soil debris in medic field Langgewens, Malmesbury, Cape Province SC Lamprecht 1523/87 * Accession numbers of lyophilised cultures in the collection of the South African Medical Research Council (MRC), Tygerberg, South Africa. were initiated from single conidia, lyophilised (Nelson et al. 1983) and deposited in the culture collection of the South African Medical Research Council (MRC), P.O. Box 70, Tygerberg, South Africa. The two foreign refer- ence cultures were supplied by Dr W. Gerlach, Biologische Bundesanstalt fur Land- und Forstwirtschaft, Berlin, Federal Republic of Germany (MRC 1799), and Dr N.E. El-Gholl, Department of Agriculture, Gainesville, Florida, USA (MRC 1574). Three isolates from soil debris in Golden Gate National Park were obtained during a survey of Fusarium species in South African soils (Marasas et al. 1988). Three additional isolates from soil debris at Lang- gewens, Malmesbury were obtained by methods identical to those described by Marasas et al. (1988). A culture from roots of an annual Medicago sp. (medic) was isolat- ed as described by Lamprecht etal. (1984). Cultural and morphological characteristics of all FI tri- cinctum isolates were determined by incubating cultures on potato-dextrose agar (PDA, Difco) at 25° C in the dark and on carnation-leaf agar (CLA, Fisher et al. 1982) at 20° C under a mixture of white fluorescent and near- ultraviolet light with a 12 h photoperiod (Nelson et al. 1983). Colony diameters of single-conidial cultures on PDA incubated in the dark at 25° and 30° C were measured after 72 h (Burgess & Liddell 1983). Morphological struc- tures were examined, measured and photographed under a light microscope. Culture material for scanning electron microscopy (SEM) was fixed in 1,5% glutaraldehyde in 0,1 M phos- phate buffer for 24 h followed by 1 % osmium tetroxide for 2 h, dehydrated in a graded acetone series, critical point dried, coated with gold/palladium, and viewed with an IS1 scanning electron microscope. Pathogenicity tests The nine F. tricinctum isolates were tested for patho- genicity to medics ( Medicago truncatula Gaertn. cv. Jema- long) and wheat ( Triticum aestivum L. cv. Palmiet) by means of seed inoculation and soil infestation techniques described by Lamprecht et al. (1984) and Lamprecht (1986). In the case of seed inoculation, discs 4 mm diam., from 10-d-old water agar (WA, Difco) cultures of each F. tricinctum isolate, were buried 10 mm deep in steam- treated soil. Medic seeds, but not the wheat seeds, were treated with water at 50° C for 30 min. prior to planting. Six seeds were planted in contact with each disc and covered with steam- treated soil. There were 60 seeds per plastic pot (125 mm) and three pots per treatment. Control seeds were planted in contact with uninoculated discs. Pots were randomized in a growth chamber at 20° to 22° C. Seedling emergence and damping-off were followed and recorded after 14 d. Data were analysed by a one-way analysis of variance and means were compared using Tukey’s least significant difference (LSD) at the 5% level. In the case of soil infestation, inoculum of each isolate of F. tricinctum on a mixture of sand (200 g), bran (10 g) and water (30 ml) was mixed with steam-treated soil (2,5% , w/w) in 175 mm plastic pots. Control pots con- tained uninoculated, autoclaved sand-bran mixture. Six- ty seeds were planted in each pot and there were three pots per treatment. Pots were randomized and held in a glasshouse at 15° to 30° C. After six weeks the plants were removed and disease severity of 10 randomly select- ed plants per pot scored on a scale from 0 to 5 based on Bretag (1985) for medics and Kane et al. (1987) for wheat as follows: Medics: 0, no visible discolouration of lateral and tap roots; 1 , slight discolouration of lateral roots, no dis- colouration of tap root; 2, lateral roots discoloured brown with lesions, slight discolouration of tap root; 3, necrotic lesions (1 to 5 mm long) on tap root; 4, necrotic lesions (>5 mm long) on tap root; 5, tap root completely rotted, plant dead. Wheat: 0, no visible discolouration of lateral roots and crown tissue; 1, discolouration of roots and scutellar node; 2, necrotic lesions on roots and scutellar node; 3, necrotic lesions on roots, scutellar node and sub- crown intemode, with discolouration extending to the crown; 4, necrosis of scutellar node and subcrown intemode with more extensive discolouration of the crown; 5, extensive necrosis of the crown and stem base, plant dead. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 191 9 e A FIGURE 1. — Fusarium tricinctum, X 710. A, spindle-shaped and napiform to citriform micioconidia (MRC 4521); B, napiform to citriform microconidia (MRC 4520); C, spindle-shaped and napi- form microconidia (MRC 4520); D, monophialide (MRC 4521); E-F, termi- nal and intercalary chlamy- dospores (MRC 4520). The statistical significance of disease severity indices was determined by the Kruskal-Wallis one-way analysis of variance followed by Tukey’s LSD at the 5% level based on rank averages. Isolations were made from diseased tissues of re- presentative plants of both hosts inoculated by both methods. RESULTS Seven isolates of F. tricinctum from three localities in South Africa (Table 1), were examined. These isolates were found to be identical to each other and to two foreign reference cultures of F. tricinctum. The cultural and morphological characteristics of the South African isolates of F. tricinctum are described and illustrated below. Fusarium tricinctum (Cor da) Saccardo, Sylloge Fungorum 4: 700 (1886). See SeemUller (1968), Gerlach & Nirenberg (1982), Nelson et al. (1983) and Neish (1987) for synonymy. Colony diameters of single -conidial cultures on PDA after dark incubation for 3 d are 25—30 mm at 25° C and 12—17 mm at 30° C. Colonies are densely floccose with irregular margins, pink to carmine red with the reverse carmine red. Microconidia (Figure 1 A,B,C) are produced in false heads on monophialides which are formed laterally on the aerial mycelium or on branched conidiophores, hyaline, cylindrical and tapered towards the apex (Fig- ures ID; 3B). Microconidia on PDA and CLA are hyaline, 0— 1-septate, and of two distinct types: fusiform micro- conidia which are usually produced first (within 14 d) and abundantly, 10-17 x 3,0— 3,5 /um (Figure 1A, C), and napiform to citriform microconidia which are pro- duced later (after 21 d or longer) and sparingly in some strains, 9—15 x 4—7 jum (Figures 1A, B, C; 3C). Macro- conidia are produced in orange sporodochia on CLA after 21 d or longer and are falcate to lunate, with a pedicellate basal cell and tapered apical cell, 3-5-septate, 25-60 x 3, 0-4, 5 jam (Figures 2A, B, C, D; 3A). Chlamy- dospores are produced on PDA or CLA after 21 d or longer, terminal or intercalary, hyaline to pale brown, smooth to rough-walled, produced singly or in chains or clumps in the aerial and submerged hyphae, 8—15 jam diam. (Figures IE, F; 3D). All nine isolates of F. tricinctum exhibited some de- gree of pathogenicity to M. truncatula cv. Jemalong as well as wheat cv. Palmiet (Tables 2 & 3). This fungus was re-isolated from diseased tissue of inoculated plants of both hosts, but not from controls. Most isolates were more pathogenic to M. truncatula than to wheat with respect to pre- and post-emergence damping-off (Table 2) as well as the severity of root discolouration and ne- crosis (Table 3). Disease severity indices in medics and wheat were, however, significantly correlated (r = 0,99, p <0,05). Isolates from different sources in South Africa were all weakly to moderately aggressive pathogens and did not differ much in aggressiveness to either host with respect to damping-off of seedlings (Table 2). However, some isolates were significantly (p = 0,05) more aggres- sive than others with respect to disease severity indices in medics as well as wheat (Table 3), e.g. isolate MRC 3518 from natural grassland soil at Golden Gate was significantly more aggressive to both hosts than all other isolates. 192 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 2. — Pre- and post-emergence damping-off of seedlings of Medicago truncatula cv. Jemalong and Triticum aestivum cv. Palmiet after seed inoculation with different isolates of Fusarium tricinctum F. tricinctum Damping-off of seedlings (% )* isolate No. (MRC) Medicago truncatula Triticum aestivum Pre-emergence Post-emergence Pre-emergence Post-emergence 1574 35 ab 3 ab 8 a 0 1799 48 b 3 ab 7 a 0 3448 49 b 3 ab 4 a 0 3518 49 b 10 abc 6 a 0 3519 47 b 7 abc 10 a 0 3908 42 ab 11 abc 7 a 0 4519 49 b 19 c 5 a 0 4520 46 ab 14 be 7 a 0 4521 47 b 18c 3 a 0 Control 30 a 0a 5 a 0 * Each figure based on 1 80 seeds planted per treatment. Means in each column followed by the same letter do not differ significant- ly (p =0,05). FIGURE 2. — Macroconidia of Fli- sarium tricinctum, X 715. A & B, MRC 3908; C& D, MRC 4520. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 193 FIGURE 3. — Scanning electron- micrographs of Fusarium tricinctum. A, macroconi- dia (MRC 4521), X 1430; B, monophialides and napi- form to citriform microco- nidia (MRC 4521), X 2860; C, napiform to citriform microconidia (MRC 4520), X 1430; D, chlamydospo- res (MRC 4521), X 1790. DISCUSSION The cultural and morphological characteristics of South African isolates of F. tricinctum were found to be identical to those of two reference cultures and to agree with previous descriptions of F. tricinctum (Wollenweber & Reinking 1935; Booth 1971; Gerlach & Nirenberg 1982; Nelson et al. 1983). The most diagnostic character- istic of F. tricinctum is the production of napiform to citriform microconidia on monophialides. It should be TABLE 3. — Disease development in Medicago truncatula cv. Jemalong and Triticum aestivum cv. Palmiet plants ex- posed to soil inoculum of different isolates of Fusarium tricinctum F. tricinctum Disease severity index* isolate No. (MRC) Medicago truncatula Triticum aestivum 1574 1,8 c 1,7 c 1799 1,0 b 1,0 b 3448 1,1 b 1,0 b 3518 2,5 g 2,3 f 3519 2,2 f 2,1 ef 3908 1,8 c 1,7 c 4519 2,0 e 2,0 e 4520 2,0 e 1,8 d 4521 1,9 d 1,8 cd Control 0,0 a 0,0 a * Each figure represents the mean of 30 plants per treatment. See Materials and methods for disease severity rating scale. Means within each column followed by the same letter do not differ significantly (p =0,05). noted, however, that these characteristic microconidia are usually not present in cultures before they are 21 d old or older, and that they are produced sparingly by some isolates. In the absence of these microconidia, cul- tures of F. tricinctum can easily be misidentified as either F. acuminatum Ell & Ev. or F. reticulatum Mont. South African isolates of F. tricinctum proved to be pathogenic to medic as well as wheat seedlings. This is the first report of the pathogenicity of F. tricinctum to an annual Medicago sp. (M. truncatula). Isolates of F. tri- cinctum were weak to moderately aggressive pathogens of M. truncatula, compared with F avenaceum (Fr.) Sacc. (Lamprecht et al. 1984; Bretag 1985), and of wheat, compared with F. graminearum Schwabe Group 1, F. culmorum (W.G. Smith) Sacc. and F. crookwellense Burgess, Nelson & Toussoun (Van Wyk et al. 1987). The present results with respect to the pathogenicity to wheat are in agreement with previous findings (Seemiil- ler 1968; Uoti 1976; Kane et al. 1987), except that Seemtiller (1968) found F. tricinctum to be strongly pathogenic to wheat and to cause damping-off of seed- lings as well as foot and root rot. Fusarium tricinctum was not recorded in surveys of Fusarium species from diseased medics (Lamprecht et al. 1984) and wheat (Van Wyk et al. 1987) in South Africa. In a recent survey of Fusarium species in South African soils (Marasas et al. 1988), F. tricinctum was isolated from one out of 29 soil samples, and only three isolates of this species out of a total of 2 425 Fusarium isolates were obtained. On the basis of the available evidence, it appears that F. tricinctum is a rare fungus in South Africa 194 and is probably not involved as a major pathogen in the root and crown rot complex of either medics or wheat in this country. However, in view of the taxonomic con- fusion surrounding F. tricinctum, the possibility of mis- identification, and the demonstrated pathogenic poten- tial of South African isolates of this fungus, researchers should be aware of the occurrence, distinguishing charac- teristics, and potential importance of this fungus in South Africa. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank F.J. Calitz of the Biometry Section, Fruit and Fruit Technology Research Institute, Stellenbosch for statistical analyses and A.C. Jaap and M.E. Holtz- hausen of the Plant Protection Research Institute, Stellenbosch for competent technical assistance. REFERENCES BOOTH, C. 1971. The genus Fusarium. Commonwealth Myco- logical Institute, Kew, England. BRETAG, T.W. 1985. Fungi associated with root rots of annual Medicago spp. in Australia. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 85: 329-334. BURGESS, L.W. & LIDDELL, C.M. 1983. Laboratory manual for Fusarium research. Department of Plant Pathology and Agricultural Entomology, University of Sydney, Sydney. CHELKOWSKI, J„ VISCONTI, A., SOLFRIZZO, M. & BOT- TALICO, A. 1984. Formation of mycotoxins by Fusarium species from cereals in Poland. Phytopathologia Mediter- ranea 23: 43-46. CULLEN, D., SMALLEY, E.B. & DIMOND, R.L. 1983. Hetero- karyosis in Fusarium tricinctum and F. sporotrichioides. Journal of General Microbiology 129: 3035-3041. DOIDGE, E.M. 1938. Some South African Fusaria. Bothalia 3: 331-483. DOIDGE, E.M. 1950. The South African fungi and lichens to the end of 1945. Bothalia 5: 1-1094. DOMSCH, K.H., GAMS, W. & ANDERSON, T.H. 1980. Com- pendium of soil fungi. Vol. 1. Academic Press, London. EL-GHOLL, N.E., MCRITCHIE, J.J, SCHOULTIES, C.L. & RIDINGS, W.H. 1978. The identification, induction of perithecia, and pathogenicity of Gibberella ( Fusarium ) tricincta n. sp. Canadian Journal of Botany 56: 2203- 2206. EL-GHOLL, N.E., SCHOULTIES, C.L. & RIDINGS, W.H. 1979. Factors affecting perithecial production in Gibberella (Fu- sarium) tricincta. Canadian Journal of Botany 57: 2497- 2500. FISHER, N.L., BURGESS, L.W., TOUSSOUN, T.A. & NELSON, P.E., 1982. Carnation leaves as a substrate and for preserv- ing cultures of Fusarium species. Phytopathology 72: 151-153. GERLACH, W. & NIRENBERG, H. 1982. The genus Fusarium — a pictorial atlas. Mitteilungen aus der Biologischen Bun- Bothalia 18,2 (1988) desanstalt fur Land- und Forstwirtschaft, Berlin-Dahlem 209: 1-406. JAMALAINEN, E.A. 1955. Fusarium species causing plant diseases in Finland. Acta Agricultura Fennica 83: 159- 172. KANE, R.T., SMILEY, R.W. & SORRELLS, M.E. 1987. Rela- tive pathogenicity of selected Fusarium species and Micro- dochium bolleyi to winter wheat in New York. Plant Disease 71: 177-181. LAMPRECHT, S.C. 1986. A new disease of Medicago truncatula caused by Cylindrocladium scoparium. Phytophylactica 18: 111-114. LAMPRECHT, S.C., KNOX-DAVIES, P.S. & MARASAS, W.F.O. 1984. Fusarium spp. associated with diseased root and crown tissue of annual Medicago spp. Phytophylactica 16: 195-200. MARASAS, W.F.O. , LEISTNER, L., HOFMANN, G. & ECK ARDT, C. 1979. Occurrence of toxigenic strains of Fusarium in maize and barley in Germany. European Journal of Applied Microbiology and Biotechnology 7: 289-305. MARASAS, W.F.O., LAMPRECHT, S.C., VAN WYK, P.S. & ANELICH, R.Y. 1987. Bibliography of Fusarium (Fungi : Hyphomycetes) in South Africa, 1945-1985. Bothalia 17: 97-104. MARASAS, W.F.O., BURGESS, L.W., ANELICH, R.Y., LAM- PRECHT, S.C. & VAN SCHALKWYK, D.J. 1988. Survey of Fusarium species associated with plant debris in South African soil. South African Journal of Botany 54: 63-71. NEISH, G.A. 1987. Neotypification of Fusarium tricinctum. Canadian Journal of Botany 65: 589-591. NELSON, P.E., TOUSSOUN, T.A. & MARASAS, W.F.O. 1983. Fusarium species. An illustrated manual for identification. Pennsylvania State University Press, University Park. NIRENBERG, H. 1981. A simplified method for identifying Fusarium spp. occurring on wheat. Canadian Journal of Botany 59:1599-1609. SEEMULLER, E. 1968. Untersuchungen iiber die morphologische und biologische Differenzierung in der Fusarium Sektion Sporotrichiella. Mitteilungen aus der Biologischen Bundes- anstalt fur Land- und Forstwirtschaft, Berlin-Dahlem 127: 1-93. SNYDER, W.C. & HANSEN, H.N. 1945. The species concept in Fusarium with reference to Discolor and other sections. American Journal of Botany 32: 657-666. UOTI, J. 1976. The effect of five Fusarium species on the growth and development of spring wheat and barley. Annales Agri- culture Fenniae 15: 254-262. UOTI, J. & YLIMAKI, A. 1974. The occurrence of Fusarium species in cereal grain in Finland. Annales Agriculturae Fen- niae 13: 5-17. VAN WYK, P.S., LOS, O., PAUER, G.D.C. & MARASAS, W.F.O. 1987. Geographic distribution and pathogenicity of Fusa- rium species associated with crown rot of wheat in the Orange Free State, South Africa. Phytophylactica 19: 27 1 — 274. WOLLENWEBER, H.W. & REINKING, O.A. 1935. DieFusarien. Ihre Beschreibung, Schadwirkung und Bekampfung. Paul Parey, Berlin. YLIMAKI, A. 1981. The mycoflora of cereal seeds and some feedstuffs. Annales Agriculturae Fenniae 20: 74-88. Bothalia 18,2: 195-209 (1988) Leaf anatomy of the South African Danthonieae (Poaceae). XVII. The genus Chaetobromus R.P. ELLIS* Keywords: Chaetobromus, Danthonieae, leaf anatomy, Poaceae ABSTRACT The leaf anatomy of Chaetobromus Nees is described and illustrated. The genus has non-Kranz anatomy but with a low lateral cell count. The abaxial epidermis is not pooid as microhairs are present, the silica bodies are dumbbell-shaped and the stomatal subsidiaries are dome-shaped. From the sample of 33 randomly selected speci- mens from throughout the distribution range of the genus it was possible to identify four anatomical groups, each associated with a specific habitat and differing in vegetative morphology. These intergrade in a reticulate pattern and do not constitute discrete entities. It appears that the genus is monospecific with four poorly separated subspecific taxa. UITTREKSEL Die blaaranatomie van Chaetobromus Nees word beskryf en geillustreer. Die genus het nie-Kranzanatomie maar met ’n lae laterale seltelling. Die abaksiale epidermis is nie pooied nie aangesien mikrohare aanwesig is, die silikaliggame murgbeenvormig en die hulpselle van die huidmondjies koepelvormig is. Uit ’n monster van 33 ek- semplare wat willekeurig vanuit die hele verspreidingsgebied van die genus gekies is, kon vier anatomiese groepe geidentifiseer word, elk met ’n spesifleke habitat geassosieer, en verskillend wat vegetatiewe morfologie betref. Hierdie groepe vloei ineen in ’n netvormige patroon en vorm nie afsonderlike entiteite nie. Dit blyk dat die genus monospesifiek is met vier swak omgrensende subspesifieke taksons. INTRODUCTION Chaetobromus Nees is a small genus in which four closely allied species have been described. However, they are very difficult to distinguish from one another and must be regarded as provisional until the genus has been studied in greater detail. Nowadays only three specific names are generally accepted (Clayton & Renvoize 1986). These are C. dregeanus Nees, C. involucratus (Schrad.) Nees and C. schraderi Stapf. The name C. schlechteri Stapf, that of the fourth species described, has fallen into disuse although it is correct (Smook & Gibbs Russell 1985). Chippindall (1955) does not con- sider C. schlechteri to be distinct from C. dregeanus. Chaetobromus is indigenous to southern Africa with the centre of distribution in the western Cape, Namaqua- land and southern South West Africa/Namibia. The genus occurs mainly in the Strandveld, the Namaqualand Coast Belt of the Succulent Karoo and the Namaqualand Broken Veld (Acocks 1975). All these veld types are at low al- titudes, with sandy soil and with winter rainfall decreas- ing northwards. It is also occasionally found further south in the southern Strandveld as far south as Table Bay. It is of interest that Chaetobromus also occurs at higher altitudes in the Western Mountain Karoo from Loeriesfontein southwards to Sutherland. It is rare in this latter veld type but this appears to be due to over- grazing. The leaf anatomy of Chaetobromus has received little attention in the literature. De Wet (1956) reported that * Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001. MS. received: 1987.10.20. the epidermis is panicoid, with linear microhairs and dumbbell-shaped silica bodies, and the mesophyll is ‘festucoid’ with a poorly differentiated outer bundle sheath and uniformly distributed chlorenchyma. Watson et al. (1986) give further anatomical details. They con- sider the silica bodies to be intermediate between the panicoid and the pooid type. Stomata are present with guard cells flush or overlapping the interstomatals and the subsidiary cells are either parallel-sided or low dome- shaped — either panicoid or pooid. These authors also did not observe abaxial microhairs. They consider the genus to be C3 although the lateral cell count is rather low. The midrib is structurally indistinguishable from the other larger bundles. All bundles have wide adaxial bundle sheath extensions. The bulliform cells occur in very large, simple, fan-shaped groups without associated colourless cells. The present paper will describe and il- lustrate the anatomy of the genus based on a representa- tive sample and will compare this anatomy with the findings of the above authors. MATERIALS AND METHODS Leaf blade segments of Chaetobromus plants were freshly fixed in the field in FAA (Johansen 1940). Her- barium voucher specimens from the same plants were taken for determination by the National Herbarium (PRE) where they are housed. Leaf transverse sections, 10 nm thick, were prepared after desilicification in hydrofluoric acid (Breakwell 1914), dehydration using the method of Feder& O’Brien (1968) and embedding in Tissue Prep (Fischer Scientific). These sections were stained in safranin and fast green (Johansen 1940). The manual scraping method of Met- calfe (1960) was used to prepare scrapes of the abaxial 196 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 1. — Leaf blade anatomy of Chaetobromus specimens representative of Group 1 as seen in transverse section. A, outline showing sectioned macrohairs, Ellis 2182, X 100. B, slightly inrolled outline, Ellis 2187, X 100. C-D, Ellis 2184: C, leaf • outline, X 100; D, anatomical detail of chlorenchyma and vascular bundles with abaxial macrohairs, X 250. E-F, Ellis 21 76: E, outline of margin, X 100; F, detail of chlorenchyma with low lateral cell count, X 250. leaf epidermis. The anatomical structure was recorded photographically using a Reicherdt Univar microscope and Ilford Pan F Film (50 ASA). The standardized terminology of Ellis (1976, 1979) was used for the anatomical descriptions. The following abbreviations will be used in these descriptions: vb/s — vascular bundle/s l’vb/s — first order vascular bundle/s 2’vb/s — second order vascular bundle/s 3’vb/s — third order vascular bundle/s ibs — inner bundle sheath; mestome sheath obs — outer bundle sheath; parenchyma sheath Identification of the voucher specimens to species level proved to be very difficult and unsatisfactory. This is understandable as the genus is in need of revision (Chippindall 1955), the species concepts are vague, and species are indistinct and intergrade, with many inter- mediate specimens being present. It has, therefore, been decided to consider this genus at the generic level only. Separate descriptions of the species will not be given due to uncertainty of the exact identity of a significant proportion of the voucher specimens. The anatomical description of the genus given is inclusive of the entire sample of 33 specimens used in this study. It was, nevertheless, possible to sort the material studied into four informal groups using anatomical, eco- logical and vegetative morphological criteria. These informal groups appear to correspond reasonably well with the species described in the genus and they will be compared and contrasted in an attempt to ascertain whether they represent distinct species. In the citation of the specimens examined these informal groups are used together with their probable specific equivalent. Asterisks indicate cases where there is a discrepancy between the herbarium determination (in brackets) and the grouping used here. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 197 FIGURE 2. — Abaxial epidermal structure of Chaetobromus specimens of Group 1 as seen in surface view. A-B, Ellis 21 75; A, macrohairs, many filled with air, X 160; B, detail of macrohair bases and silica bodies, X 250. C, pubescence of leaf sur- face, phase contrast, Ellis 2187, X 100. D, macrohairs, silica bodies and intercostal microhairs, Ellis 2184, X 250. Specimens examined Group 1 . Chaetobromus involucratus CAPE. — 2816 (Oranjemund): Richtersveld, Beesbank (-BC), Ellis 50 71 ; Beauvallon (-DA), Ellis 21 75*, 21 76 * (C. schraderi). 2916 (Port Nolloth): Port Nolloth (-BD), Ellis 2182, 2183, 2184, 2185, 2187. 3017 (Hondeklipbaai): Hondeklip Bay (-AD), Ellis 5344, 5345. 3217 (Vredenburg): St Helena Bay, Stompneus- baai (-DB), Ellis 703* (C. schraderi). Group 2. Chaetobromus schraderi CAPE. — 2816 (Oranjemund): Richtersveld, Beesbank (-BC), Ellis 5073. 2917 (Springbok); Steinkopf (-BD), Ellis 2164, 2165, 2166; Spektakelberg, Sandhoogte Pass (-DA), Ellis 2191, 2192, 2193, 2194. 3018 (Kamiesberg): 43 km N of Bitterfontein (-CA), Ellis 1730* (C. dregeanus ); Bitterfontein (-CC ), Ellis 2206. 3118 (Van Rhynsdorp): 64 km N of Van Rhynsdorp (-BC), Ellis 1 733* (C. dregeanus). Group 3. Chaetobromus dregeanus (lowland form) CAPE. — 3218 (Clanwilliam): Elands Bay (-AD), Ellis 1691. 3317 (Saldanha): Saldanha Bay (-BB), Ellis 1696. 3318 (Cape Town): Yzerfontein (-AC), Ellis 692; Blouberg Strand (-CD), Ellis 2357, 2358. Group 4. Chaetobromus dregeanus (mountain form) CAPE. — 3019 (Loeriesfontein): Loeriesfontein at junction of Nieuwoudtville and Granaatboskolk roads (-CD), Ellis 2422; 103 km from Brandvlei on road to Loeriesfontein (-DC), Ellis 2423, 2424. 3118 (Van Rhynsdorp): 10 km S of Bitterfontein (-AB), Ellis 2426. 3119 (Calvinia): Van Rhyns Pass (-AC), Ellis 2457; Botterkloof Pass between Calvinia and Clanwilliam (-CD), Ellis 2450. 3220 (Sutherland): Sutherland (-BC), Ellis 2467. LEAF ANATOMY OF THE GENUS CHAETOBROMUS Leaf in transverse section Outline : open, expanded, flat (Figures 3A— C, 5A & B) to slightly inrolled (Figures 1A— C, 5D) or narrow, infolded (Figure 7A, C, G & H) or inrolled (Figure 7E); leaf thickness 230—550 pm. Ribs and furrows : slight (Figure 3 A— D) to medium (Figure 1A— F) rounded adaxial ribs overlie l’vbs and 2’vbs; furrows shallow and wide (Figure 3A-D) to narrow, cleft-like (Figure 7E & F); furrows may be present over 3’vbs; slight abaxial ribs and furrows sometimes present (Figures 1 A-F, 7H), usually not developed. Median vascular bundle : not structurally distinct from lateral l’vbs. Vascular bundle arrangement ; tends to be variable and rather irregular although a basic pattern is discernible; 5, 7, 9 or 1 1 l’vbs in leaf section; one 2’vb between consecutive l’vbs al- though this sometimes varies; one 3’vb between adjacent l’vbs and 2’vbs but may be absent but then usually only on one side of each 2’vb (Figures IF, 3E & 5C). All vbs situated in centre of blade. Vascular bundle description; l’vbs round to elliptical in shape; phloem adjoins ibs; metaxylem vessels very narrow, diameters much less than those of obs cells (Figures ID & F, 3D & F, 5E & F); 2’vbs and 3’vbs round to elliptical; xylem and phloem distinguishable. Vascular bundle sheaths; double; obs round to elliptical; prominent adaxial and abaxial multiseriate parenchymatous extensions extend to the 198 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) upper and lower epidermis from all l’vbs (Figures ID & F, 3D & F, 5E & F, 7B, D & F); 2’vbs with narrower adaxial extensions, being bi- or uniseriate; 3’vbs with irregular extensions or extensions absent; obs cells in- flated, round, the cells smaller than the mesophyll cells; walls thin; either translucent, without chloroplasts (Figures 3D & 7F) or with small chloroplasts, fewer than in the chlorenchyma cells (Figures ID & F, 3E & F, 5C & E); ibs entire, of small lignified cells, those opposite the phloem with the inner tangential and radial walls thickened (Figures 3D & 5C). Sclerenchyma: minute adaxial and slightly larger abaxial strands associated with the l’vbs and 2’vbs; no sclerenchyma adjacent to the 3’vbs; small sclerenchyma caps in the margins; cell walls not lignified. Chlorenchyma: irregular (Figure 5E & F) to tending to radiate condition (Figures ID & F, 2D— F); more than one layer of radiating cells; lateral cell count low, from 3—5 cells; continuous between bundles; chlorenchyma cells large, angular and equidimensional (Figure ID & F) to elongated (Figure 3D— F); often nucleate and may be refractive under interference con- trast (Figure 3F); no arm cells or fusoids; intercellular air spaces large and frequent. Colourless cells: absent ex- cept in the bundle sheath extensions. Adaxial epidermal cells: small to medium-sized bulliform groups at bases of furrows (Figures ID & E, 3D&F, 5E&F, 7F); occupy less than V4 leaf thickness; central cell often largest and may be shield-shaped; cuticle very thin; epidermal ap- pendages usually absent but macrohairs (Figure lA)and prickles (Figure 5E)may be present; no papillae. Abaxial epidermal cells: bulliform cells absent; cuticle very thin or slightly thickened; macrohairs present (Figure 1A, C & D) or absent; no prickles or papillae. Abaxial epidermis in surface view Intercostal long cells: elongate rectangular (Figures 2B & D, 4C & E, 8F) or fusiform (Figures 4D, 6A— D, 8A— D); walls straight (Figures 2A-D, 4A— E) to slight- ly sinuous (Figures 6A— F, 8A— F); cell shape and size consistent across individual intercostal zones; long cells adjoin one another or are separated by short cells; no bulliform cells. Stomata: low dome-shaped (Figures 2B & D, 4C & E) to dome-shaped (Figures 6B, D, F, 8A-F) subsidiary cells; occurring throughout intercostal zones FIGURE 3. — Transectional leaf anatomy of Group 2 representatives of Chaetobromus. A, expanded, flat outline, Ellis 2165, X 100. B, leaf margin, Ellis 2164, X 100. C-D, Ellis 2166: C, outline, X 100; D, chlorenchyma cell arrangement and vas- cular bundles with parenchymatous extensions, X 250. E— F, Ellis 2191: E, vascular bundle arrangement, X 160; F, detail of chloroplasts in chlorenchyma and bundle sheath cells, interference contrast, X 250. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 199 or restricted to two or four rows; stomata in files separat- ed by single interstomatal long cell, this either short or elongated, more than three times longer than wide; tend to be overarched by inflated long cells (Figure 9F). Intercostal short cells: presence variable, either absent or irregularly present to present between all long cells; either single or paired; tall and narrow in shape. Papillae: absent. Prickles: absent except for very small hooks which are rarely present (Figure 6D ). Microhairs : present or absent; elongated, basal and distal cells about equal in length (Figures 4C, 9H) or distal cell much shorter (Figure 9D); hairs short, about the same length as the stomata; distal cell deciduous and thin-walled. Macro- hairs: usually absent but may be present (Figures 2A— D, 9A, B); unicellular, hard, stiff and pointed; base con- stricted and superficial, not associated with specialized raised epidermal cells (Figures 9B, 10); appressed to leaf surface and visible in transections (Figure 1A, C & D); length up to 120 /am; tend to be very numerous; lumens often filled with air (Figure 2A & B); intercostal. Silica bodies : horizontally elongated, variable dumbbell-shaped (Figures 2B, 4E, 6B & D, 8B, D & F); rarely nodular (Figure 6F); exclusively costal; granules may be present. Adaxial epidermis in surface view Differs from abaxial epidermis in having shorter inter- costal long cells, costal prickles with elongated barbs are common (Figure 9C & G) and numerous microhairs are present adjacent to the costal zones (Figure 4F); the microhairs are larger and more common than on the abaxial surface; the distal cell may also be rounded and not tapering (Figure 9H). These differences in frequency of occurrence, size and shape of the adaxial and abaxial microhairs on the same leaf are unusual. FIGURE 4. — A-E, abaxial epidermis of Group 2 Chaetobromus specimens: A-C, Ellis 2191: A, zonation pattern, X 160; B, intercostal zone showing absence of macrohairs, X 250; C, detail of subsidiary cell shape, intercostal long cells and micro- hairs, X 400. D, fusiform intercostal long cells, Ellis 2164, X 250. E, interference contrast showing microhairs, Ellis 1 730 , X 250. F, adaxial epidermis showing prickle hairs and microhairs, Ellis 2206, X 400. 200 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 5. — Transverse sections of Group 3 Chaetobromus specimens. A, outline, Ellis 2358, X 100. B, outline and leaf margin, Ellis 1691, X 100. C, anatomical detail of chlorenchyma and vascular bundles, Ellis 2357, X 250. D-F, Ellis 1696: D, slightly inrolled outline, X 100; E, chloroplast distribution in bundle sheath and chlorenchyma cells, X 250; F, interference contrast showing chloroplast and bundle sheath cell shape, X 250. DISCUSSION Subfamilial and tribal classification The results of this study confirm and expand the find- ings of De Wet (1956) and Watson etal. (1986) who re- ported a ‘festucoid’ transectional anatomy and a panicoid abaxial epidermis for Chaetobromus . The abaxial epider- mis is not pooid in several respects such as the possession of microhairs, dumbbell -shaped silica bodies and dome- shaped stomata, and as a result, pooid relationships can be discounted. Microhairs are unknown in pooid grasses and dumbbell-shaped silica bodies are very rare (Watson et al. 1985). Watson et al. (1986) did not observe abaxial microhairs on Chaetobromus but their presence is con- firmed here although they are rare and appear to be absent on those specimens assigned to groups 3 and 4. Panicoid type dumbbell-shaped silica bodies are common although the nodular type of pooid body was sometimes present. This confirms the observations of Watson et al. (1986). The pooid type of stomata, in which the guard cells over- lap the interstomatal cells (Watson & Johnston 1978), do not appear to occur in Chaetobromus as reported by Watson et al. (1986). Instead the guard cells are flush with the interstomatals and the subsidiary cells are dome- shaped. This is typical of the panicoid type and not pooid where the subsidiaries are typically parallel-sided. The transectional anatomy of Chaetobromus, on the other hand, can be considered to be of the pooid type. The outer bundle sheath cells are non-Kranz and do not possess specialized chloroplasts and have thin cell walls. The chlorenchyma cells are large parenchymatous cells usually diffusely arranged, often tending to the radiate condition. The genus is undoubtedly C3 as sug- gested by Watson et al. (1986) although this has yet to be confirmed physiologically. This combination of pooid transectional anatomy with a panicoid type of epidermis is typical of the Arun- dinoideae. The leaf anatomy, therefore, supports arundi- noid affinities for Chaetobromus and is in full agreement with the classification of the genus in the Arundineae (Clayton & Renvoize 1986). Certain aspects of the chlorenchyma of Chaetobromus deserve further comment. As noted by Watson et al. (1986), the lateral cell count is rather low, from 3-5 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 201 FIGURE 6. — Abaxial epidermal structure of Chaetobromus specimens of Group 3. A-B, Ellis 2357: A, costal and intercostal zone distribution, X 160; B, fusiform long cells and differential staining of intercostal long cells, X 250. C-D, Ellis 2358: C, costal and intercostal zones, X 160; D, costal and intercostal silica bodies and short intercostal hooks, X 250. E, epider- mal pattern, Ellis 1696, X 160. F, subsidiary cell and silica body shape, Ellis 692, X 400. cells, which is unusual in a C3 plant. The chlorenchyma arrangement may also tend to the radial type of arrange- ment although more than one layer of radiating cells is always present. This chlorenchyma arrangement re- sembles that of Dregeochloa pumila (Nees) Conert (Ellis 1977), another danthonioid from the winter rainfall coastal areas of the southern Namib Desert. Merxmuel- lera rangei (Pilg.) Conert appears to represent the ex- treme of this type of development (EUis 1982). The vegetation of this area is dominated by succulents and the chlorenchyma of these associated grasses is reminis- cent of that of CAM plants, particularly the large size of the cells, their particular radial type of arrangement, the persistent nuclei, large vacuoles and the refractive nature of the chloroplasts under interference contrast illumination. The CAM photosynthetic pathway is un- known in the Poaceae but, if it does occur, these grasses appear to be the most likely candidates. Their photo- synthetic physiology deserves investigation as it may demonstrate the presence of CAM in the grass family. Differences between the species of Chaetobromus The basic anatomical differences between the four species or groups in the genus are listed in Table 1. These are usually not discrete differences and they often intergrade between the groups. However, they do give an indication of the anatomical tendencies evident within the genus. TABLE 1. — The main anatomical differences separating the infrageneric taxa of Chaetobromus 202 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 3 s <2 CL D §J,. O a; o2 "a M & .g J=1 5 c o o > «o > M 1 " |o | S Is Z 3 c a" o S3 % 'll -d 2 ’Be q *«2 ■a ^ wo 3 g c ,£> cn b |S A -Si * a ° -1 c w « 6 S3 3 3 * 5) .3 02 co C < n •« H SJ 02 « OU ■g .3 It 1 ,sl ? 3 -c g 0 £ 2 1 IfJ *1 1? tj c3 fl> ±3 04 co rO g C £ Ph C ° § P4 2 O -s T3 *3 0) ^ * e 3. O q 75%), total projected canopy cover of all species, height of different strata (grass layer, shrub layer, canopy height and height of emergents) and, for Forest and Thicket plots, also diameter at breast height of all indi- vidual trees (if more than 100 mm). In view of the tremen- dous variability of the vegetation, the sample size was inadequate for a detailed phytosociological classification. It does, however, provide sufficient information to cha- racterize the major vegetation units. For descriptive pur- poses, species were classed into growth forms as shown in Tables 5-14. Dominant and characteristic species of each vegetation unit were chosen as follows: Characteristic (diagnostic) species: species with a fidelity value of 80% or more. Dominant species: species with a mean Braun- Blanquet cover value of at least 0,80. In these calculations, single occurrences (species pre- sent in only one plot) were excluded. Forest and Thicket plots were considered separately from the Mountain Fyn- bos, Grassy Fynbos and Grassland plots. This seemed reasonable as only a few species were common to both subdivisions, and of these very few qualified as character- istic or dominant. RESULTS The dominant vegetation types in the study area were Grassy Fynbos (33%) and Subtropical Thicket (32%) (Figure 2, Table 3). Grassland (18%), Afromontane Forest (12%) and Mountain Fynbos (5%) had more limited distributions. A summary of floristic and structural characteristics of the major vegetation units as recorded in 64 sample plots is given in Table 4. Species richness (expressed as species per m2 of plot area) varied between 0,13 (Forest) to 0,92 (Mountain Fynbos). These values are dependent on quadrat area, so that only the figures for Grassland, Grassy Fynbos and Mountain Fynbos are directly com- parable. The high figure for Thickets compared to Forest agrees with previous findings that Afromontane Forests are poorer in species than Thickets in the east- ern Cape (Cowling 1983b). When distinct differences in structure (Table 4) are considered in conjunction with diagnostic and dominant species (Tables 5 to 14), each of the major units is clearly distinguishable. 1 . Afromontane Forest Forests comprising tall evergreen trees with canopy heights of 10 to 14 m and emergents of up to 21 m occur on south-facing slopes and in some valley bottoms. Forest types on northern slopes and in alluvial valley bottoms with canopy heights of 2—9 m and emergents of up to 12 m are grouped with the next unit (Sub- tropical Thicket). The distinction was not made on the basis of structure only. We also used the almost total absence of a herbaceous ground layer and the presence of typical Afromontane species (White 1978) such as Podocarpus falcatus and Diospyros whyteana. Despite a strong Tongoland-Pondoland influence, there are pro- nounced floristic differences between Afromontane For- est and Subtropical Thicket in the eastern Cape (Cowling 1984). In the results of our survey, 24 tree species have fidelity values of more than 80% (present in less than 214 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 2. — Number of sample quadrats. All were permanently marked to double as long term monitoring plots Forest 400 m2 (circular) Thicket 4 X 25 m Mountain Fynbos 5 X 10 m Grassy Fynbos 5 X 10 m Grassland 5 X 10 m Fernibrae 2 3 3 3 3 Zuurberg Lot 16 2 3 3 3 3 Sunday’s River, Skurwenek 3 3 3 Superbus 1 5 3 3 3 Break Neck 1 2 3 3 3 Total (64) 6 13 15 15 15 TABLE 3. — Distribution of major vegetation units in different parts of the Zuurberg National Park. Areas were estimated from the maps in Figure 2 Forest Thicket Grassland Grassy Fynbos Mountain Fynbos Femibrae/Heatherbrae area (ha) 1 755 681 521 212 277 64 % of total 8,5 39 30 12 16 3 Zuurberg Lot 16 area (ha) 1940 720 196 128 656 240 % of total 9,3 37 10 7 34 12 Sunday’s River Reserve area (ha) 13 464 1 138 3 564 3 064 5 194 504 % of total 64,8 8 26 23 39 4 Superbus area (ha) 978 22 596 48 188 124 % of total 4,7 2 61 5 19 13 Kabougas Poort area (ha) 457 396 35 24 2 % of total 2,2 - 87 8 5 - Break Neck area (ha) 2 184 12 1320 268 480 104 % of total 10,5 1 60 12 22 5 Zuurberg National Park area (ha) 20 778 2 573 6 593 3 755 6 819 1038 % of total 100 12 32 18 33 5 TABLE 4. — Floristic and structural characteristics of the major vegetation units of the Zuurberg National Park Forest Thicket Grassland Grassy Fynbos Mountain Fynbos No. of plots 6 13 15 15 15 Plot size (m2) 400 100 50 50 50 No. of spp. recorded 109 140 151 136 176 No. of spp. per plot max. 67 51 42 46 60 min. 39 25 22 24 31 mean 53 37 31 35 46 Mean no. of spp. per m2 plot 0,13 0,37 0,62 0,70 0,92 Canopy height (m) max. 14 9 0,5 0,9 2,0 min. 10 2 0,3 0,5 0,5 mean 12 5 0,4 0,7 1,2 Maximum height of emergents (m) 21 12 2,5 1,5 3,5 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 20% of non-Forest plots) and 18 of these were recorded only in Forest. Shrubs are rare, succulents are virtually absent, and eight of the 10 fern species recorded occur exclusively in Forest. Diagnostic and dominant species are listed in Tables 5 and 6. 2. Subtropical Thicket Thicket as defined here comprises a variable assem- blage of communities dominated by thorny and/or suc- culent shrubs. They occur on dry north-facing slopes in higher parts and on all aspects in lower-lying south- ern parts of the study area. Most of them comprise what Lubke et al. (1986) describe as Valley Bushveld. This term was used by Acocks (1953) but is no longer useful because it incorporates too wide a range of types (Cowling 1984). At least three basic types were includ- ed in our sample: TABLE 5. — Diagnostic species of Afromontane Forest grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are excluded Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value)* Fidelity (%) Trees Podocarpus falcatus 6 1,50 86 Canthium inerme 6 0,58 86 Rhus chirindensis 5 0,60 100 Celtis africana 5 0,50 83 Hyperacanthus amoenus Olea capensis subsp. 5 0,80 83 macrocarpa 5 0,60 83 Calodendrum capense 4 0,88 80 Pterocelastrus tricuspidatus 3 1,00 100 Podocarpus latifolius 3 0,50 100 Scolopia mundii 3 0,50 100 Sideroxylon inerme 3 0,67 100 Ficus sur 3 1,00 100 Olinia ventosa 3 1,00 100 Apodytes dimidiata 3 0,83 100 Trimeria trinervis 2 0,50 100 Eugenia capensis 2 1,25 100 Gonioma kamassi 2 0,50 100 Maytenus acuminata 2 0,50 100 Shrubs Dovyalis rhamnoides 6 0,50 86 Gutia pulchella 2 0,50 100 Vines Rhoicissus tomentosa 4 1,25 100 Herbs & graminoids E hr hart a erect a 3 0,67 100 Peperomia tetraphylla 3 0,50 100 Oplismenus sp. cf. O. hirtelus 2 1,25 100 Galopina circaeoides 2 0,50 100 Haemanthus albiflos 2 0,50 100 Streptocarpus rexii 2 0,50 100 Succulents Crassula nemorosa 2 0,50 100 Ferns Rumohra adiantiformis 4 0,50 100 Asplenium ruti folium 2 0,50 100 * Sum of Braun-Blanquet cover estimates divided by presence; for Forest and Thicket plots a cover of less than 5% was recorded as 0,50. 215 Kaffrarian Thicket Closed, non-succulent shrubland to low forest com- munities dominated by evergreen, sclerophyllous trees and shrubs with a high cover of stem spines and vines (Cowling 1984; Everard 1987). Campbell (1985) would classify much of the taller thicket of this type as Eastern Forest & Thicket. Kaffrarian Succulent Thicket This type occurs in dry areas and is characterized by a high proportion of succulents, a great diversity in growth form and a strong Karoo-Namib floristic influence (Cow- ling 1984; Campbell 1985; Everard 1987). A variation of this type, similar to Addo Bush and Sundays River Scrub (Acocks 1953), occurs in southern parts such as the northern slopes at Superbus (see Figure 2). The lat- ter has a canopy height of no more than 2—3 m and is dominated by Schotia afra, Putterlickia pyracantha, Phyl- lanthus verrucosus and Euphorbia ledienii. Portulacaria afra dominates in some parts, particularly on steep slopes in the western parts of the Park. Combretum caff rum- Acacia caffra Thicket This type has a very limited distribution along river beds. Since the dominant species ( Combretum caffrum and Acacia caffra) are deciduous, it is not included in the Subtropical Thicket concept and we group it here provisionally. It shows similarity to the tropical thickets found in the valleys of Natal and Transvaal. Diagnostic and dominant species of Subtropical Thicket are listed in Tables 7 and 8. 3. Mountain Fynbos Mountain Fynbos has the highest species richness (Table 4) and covers only an estimated 5% of the Park TABLE 6.— Dominant species of Afromontane Forest grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are excluded Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Trees Trichocladus ellipticus 3 2,17 75 Podocarpus falcatus 6 1,50 86 Eugenia capensis 2 1,25 100 Vepris lanceolata 5 1,10 71 Pterocelastrus tricuspidatus 3 1,00 100 Ficus sur 3 1,00 100 Olinia ventosa 3 1,00 100 Diospyros whyteana 6 1,00 60 Calodendrum capense 4 0,88 80 Apodytes dimidiata 3 0,83 100 Hyperacanthus amoenus 5 0,80 83 Shrubs Carissa bispinosa 6 0,83 75 Vines Rhoicissus tomentosa 4 1,25 100 Rhoicissus digitata 4 1,00 27 Herbs & graminoids Oplismenus sp. cf. O. hirtellus 2 1,25 100 Behnia reticulata 4 1,25 29 Chlorophytum comosum 4 0,88 57 Cyperus albostriatus 4 0,88 50 216 TABLE 7. — Diagnostic species of Thicket communities grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are excluded Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Trees Brachylaena ilicifolia 7 0,79 88 Pappea capensis 7 0,71 88 Rhus refracta 7 0,50 88 Euclea undulata 6 1,00 100 Ptaeroxylon obliquum 5 0,80 83 Schotia afra 4 1,25 100 Olea europaea subsp. africana 4 0,50 100 Combretum caffrum 2 1,25 100 Acacia caffra 2 0,50 100 Psydrax obovata 2 0,50 100 Shrubs Ehretia rigida 9 0,50 90 Putterlickia pyracantha 8 1,94 100 Plumbago auriculata 8 1,00 89 Abutilon sonneratium 7 0,50 100 Portulacaria afra 5 1,30 100 Croton rivularis 4 0,50 80 Xeromphis rudis 4 0,50 80 Jatropha hastata 3 0,67 100 Grewia robusta 2 1,50 100 Rhigozum obovatum 2 1,25 100 Euphorbia ledienii 2 0,75 100 Tecomaria capensis 2 0,50 100 Phyllanthus verrucosus 2 0,50 100 Euphorbia mauritanica 2 0,50 100 Vines Sarcostemma viminale 7 0,50 100 Jasminum spp. 6 0,75 100 Kedrostis nana 6 0,50 100 Herbs & graminoids Sansevieria hyacinthoides 10 0,90 91 Commelina spp. 10 0,50 91 Panicum maximum 9 0,83 100 Protasparagus aethiopicus 9 0,50 100 Panicum deustum 8 0,50 89 Protasparagus multiflorus 7 0,50 88 Protasparagus crassicladus 5 0,50 100 Protasparagus striatus 4 0,50 100 Peristrophe cemua 3 1,50 100 Protasparagus virgatus 3 0,67 100 Protasparagus subulatus 3 0,50 100 Succulents Opuntia ficus-indica* 7 0,50 100 Crassula perforata 4 0,50 100 Cotyledon velutina 4 0,50 100 Crassula expansa 3 0,50 100 * Invasive exotic (Table 3). It is most common on wet southern slopes, but also occurs on sandy soils in protected low-lying areas. Mountain Fynbos as defined here is largely synony- mous to the Mountain Fynbos of Taylor (1978), and Kruger (1979) and the Mesotrophic Proteoid Fynbos of Campbell (1985), but it also includes some communities that may represent later serai stages of the next unit (Grassy Fynbos). The Mountain Fynbos represented in our sampling has a relatively low total grass cover and a high proportion of C3 grasses ( Festuca , Pentaschistis and Merxmuellera species) and Restionaceae. Mature stands of Pro tea lorifolia and P. repens are very localiz- ed and occur mostly in inaccessible areas. Campbell Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 8.- — Dominant species of Thicket communities grouped by growth form Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Trees Hippobromus pauciflorus 2 2,00 50 Schotia afra 4 1,25 100 Combretum caffrum 2 1,25 100 Euclea undulata 6 1,00 100 Schotia la ti folia 3 1,00 50 Ochna arborea 3 0,83 33 Ptaeroxylon obliquum 5 0,80 83 Maytenus nemorosa 5 0,80 50 Shrubs Putterlickia pyracantha 8 1,94 100 Grewia robusta 2 1,50 100 Portulacaria afra 5 1,30 100 Rhigozum obovatum 2 1,25 100 Azima tetracantha 6 1,17 67 Plumbago auriculata 8 1,00 89 Vines Rhoicissus digitata 11 1,05 73 Rhoicissus tridentata 3 1,00 50 Capparis sepiaria 12 0,96 75 Herbs & graminoids Hypoestis forskaolii 9 1,61 75 Peristrophe cemua 3 1,50 100 Cyperus albostriatus 4 1,25 50 Protasparagus setaceus 6 1,00 60 Sansevieria hyacinthoides 10 0,90 91 Panicum maximum 9 0,83 100 (1985) did not include mature fynbos of the Zuurberg in his sample, presumably because it was thought to be absent (Campbell op. cit. , page 7). Widdringtonia nodiflora did not occur in any of our fynbos plots, but it is highly characteristic of our con- cept of Mountain Fynbos and should be added to the lengthy list of diagnostic species in Table 9. A large number of species are locally dominant. The list of dominant species (Table 10) has therefore been limited to those with a mean cover value of 1 ,00 or more and, except for species with very high cover values, a pre- sence of more than 50% (present in at least eight of the 15 Mountain Fynbos plots). 4. Grassy Fynbos Grassy Fynbos covers the largest proportion of the surface area of the Park (Table 3) and occurs on all plateau tops and also on gentle southern and northern slopes in higher-lying areas. Diagnostic and dominant species of Grassy Fynbos are listed in Tables 1 1 and 12. Campbell (1985) distinguished between three sub- series of Grassy Fynbos, namely Dry, Mesic and Meso- trophic. He classified the dominant vegetation of the Zuurberg as Sundays Mesic Grassy Fynbos but also men- tioned the lack of good differential characters. The pre- sence of proteoids over 1 m tall, the less than 40% cover of Ericaceae, the 10—50% cover of restioids and the 30—90% cover of grasses are used as differentiating fea- tures by Campbell. Two types of his Mesotrophic sub- Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 217 TABLE 9. — Diagnostic species of Mountain Fynbos communi- TABLE 10. — Dominant species of Mountain Fynbos communi- ties grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are ex- ties grouped by growth form. Criteria for entry are specified eluded in the text Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Shrubs Clutia alatemoides 8 1,13 100 Montinia caryophyllacea 8 1,13 100 Anthospermum spathulatum 8 1,00 80 Erica cerinthoides 7 0,86 88 Othonna quinquedentata 6 1,17 100 Giffortia ilicifolia 5 1,40 100 Erica chamissonis 5 2,00 100 Penaea cneorum 5 1,20 100 Protea cynaroides 5 0,80 100 Struthiola argentea 5 0,80 100 Ursinia anethoides 5 0,80 100 Erica copiosa 5 1,00 83 Metalasia gnaphalodes 4 0,75 100 Giffortia paucistaminea 3 1,00 100 Coleonema pulchellum 3 1,00 100 Hermannia sp. cf. H. odorata 3 1,00 100 Myrica kraussiana 3 1,00 100 Passerina obtusifolia 3 1,00 100 Thesium strictum 3 1,00 100 Agathosma ovata 2 1,00 100 Giffortia burchellii 2 2,50 100 Euclea polyandra 2 0,50 100 Euryops latifolius 2 2,00 100 Myrsine africana 2 1,00 100 Polygala fruticosa 2 1,00 100 Protea lorifolia 2 1,00 100 Senecio lineatus 2 1,00 100 Grasses Festuca costata 6 1,83 100 Merxmuellera disticha 6 1,00 100 Ehrharta ramosa 4 1,00 100 Merxmuellera stricta 3 1,67 100 Pentaschistis eriostoma 3 1,67 100 Miscanthus erectus 2 2,00 100 Restioids Rhodocoma capensis 11 1,36 100 Cannomois virgata 6 2,00 100 Restio sejunctus 4 1,00 100 Hypodiscus synchrolepis 3 1,00 100 Herbs & suffrutices Senecio oxyriifolius 14 0,86 100 Knowltonia cordata 11 1,00 100 Pelargonium reniforme 9 1,00 100 Streptocarpus meyeri 7 1,00 100 Scabiosa columbaria 7 0,86 88 Rhyticarpus difformis 6 0,50 100 Stachys scabrida 6 1,00 100 Pelargonium zeyheri 5 0,80 100 Schizaea pectinata 5 0,80 100 Aristea schizolaena 5 0,80 83 Cephalaria humilis 4 0,75 100 Psoralea asarina 4 1,00 100 Rhynchosia cooperi 4 1,00 100 Argyrolobium tuberosum 4 0,50 80 Chironia melampyrifolia 3 0,33 100 Helichrysum cymosum 3 1,00 100 Pteridium aquilinum 3 1,33 100 Senecio crenatus 3 1,00 100 Pimpinella caffra 3 0,33 100 Succulents Crassula obovata 7 1,00 88 Crassula nemorosa 2 0,50 100 Geophytes Eriospermum spp. 9 0,89 90 Empodium sp. 3 0,67 100 Agapanthus praecox 2 0,50 100 Cyrtanthus sp. 2 1,00 100 Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Shrubs Erica deliciosa 2 3,00 50 Giffortia burchellii 2 2,50 100 Erica simulans 10 2,10 56 Erica chamissonis 5 2,00 100 Euryops latifolius 2 2,00 100 Pteronia teretifolia 2 2,00 40 Thesium strictum 3 1,67 100 Giffortia ilicifolia 5 1,40 100 Myrica kraussiana 3 1,33 100 Penaea cneorum 5 1,20 100 Othonna quinquedentata 6 1,17 100 Gutia alatemoides 8 1,13 100 Montinia caryophyllacea 8 1,13 100 Phylica axillaris 11 1,09 46 Indigo f era stenophylla 13 1,08 46 Leucadendron salignum 11 1,00 42 Anthospermum spathulatum 8 1,00 80 Gnidia coriacea 8 1,00 35 Protea foliosa 8 1,00 62 Grasses Festuca costata 6 1,83 100 Merxmuellera stricta 3 1,67 100 Pentaschistis eriostoma 3 1,67 100 Pentaschistis angustifolia 6 1,17 75 Tristachya leucothrix 6 1,17 22 Themeda triandra 7 1,14 19 Restioids Cannomois virgata 6 2,00 100 Restio triticeus 11 1,55 55 Rhodocoma capensis 11 1,36 100 Sedges Tetraria cuspidate 8 1,00 42 Herbs & shrublets Helichrysum odoratissimum 2 2,00 40 Pteridium aquilinum 3 1,33 100 Helichrysum felinum 13 1,08 68 Helichrysum nudifolium 13 1,00 52 Mohria caffrorum 13 1,00 72 Knowltonia cordata 11 1,00 100 Aster bakerianus 10 1,00 50 Alepidea capensis 9 1,00 75 Berkeya sphaerocephala 9 1,00 75 Pelargonium reniforme 9 1,00 100 Geophytes Oxalis spp. 15 1,00 79 Hypoxis hemerocallidea 9 1,00 53 series also occur in the Zuurberg, namely Mannetjiesberg Mesotrophic Grassy Fynbos and Grahamstown Meso- trophic Grassy Fynbos. In the study area, these two types have a much more limited distribution than Sundays Mesic Grassy Fynbos. Our concept of Grassy Fynbos is much wider than that of Campbell. We also include Suurberg Grassland and much of Hankey Grassland, both of which approach Acocks’s (1953) Dohne Sourveld (Campbell op. tit.). Hankey Grassveld shows two extremes. A sourveld with Tristachya leucothrix, Merxmuellera stricta and nume- rous fynbos elements and a sweetveld with grasses such 218 TABLE 11. — Diagnostic species of Grassy Fynbos grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are excluded Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Shrubs Erica adunca 6 1,67 100 Erica demissa 4 1,50 80 Erica pectinifolia 3 2,33 100 Gnidia anthylloides 3 0,67 100 Oedera imbricata 2 0,50 100 Metalasia muricata 2 1,00 100 Podalyria burchellii 2 - 100 Grasses Sporobolus mauritianus 3 0,67 100 Sedges Tetraria sp. nov. 3 0,67 100 Tetraria secans 2 0,50 100 Herbs & suffrutices Linum thunbergii 4 1,00 100 Polygala hispida 3 1,00 100 Corymbium africanum 2 1,00 100 TABLE 12. — Dominant species of Grassy Fynbos grouped by growth form Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Shrubs Erica pectinifolia 3 2,33 100 Phylica axillaris 12 1,83 50 Leucadendron salignum 15 1,67 58 Erica adunca 6 1,67 100 Erica demissa 4 1,50 80 Agathosma capensis 3 1,33 50 Pteronia teretifolia 3 1,33 60 Leucospermum cuneiforme 4 1,25 36 Aspalathus chortophila 6 1,17 33 Anthospermum paniculatum 8 1,13 38 Erica simulans 8 1,13 44 Gnidia coriacea 12 1,00 52 Grasses Themeda triandra 15 2,47 41 Diheteropogon filifolius 3 2,00 43 Tristachya leucothrix 11 1,82 41 Eragrostis curvula 3 1,67 50 Trachypogon spicatus 8 1,38 42 Sporobolus centrifugus 3 1,33 43 Alloteropsis semialata 12 1,25 43 Eragrostis capensis 8 1,00 36 Restioids Restio triticeus 9 2,00 45 Sedges Tetraria cuspidata 9 1,11 47 Ficinia spp. 11 1,00 46 Herbs & suffrutices Bobartia orientalis 9 1,78 45 Vemonia capensis Thesium sp. cf. T. corym- 2 1,50 25 buligerum 3 1,33 75 Hermannia flammula 6 1,17 38 Helichrysum albanense 13 1,15 68 Tephrosia capensis 14 1,00 54 Aster bakerianus 8 1,00 40 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) as Themeda triandra and Heteropogon contortus with- out fynbos elements (Campbell op. cit.). The sourveld is here included under Grassy Fynbos and the sweetveld under Grassland. In the study area, there is a much great- er discontinuity in the distribution of fynbos elements than in those characters used by Campbell to distinguish between Grassy Fynbos and Grassland. For practical reasons, we have therefore used the presence of fynbos elements to differentiate between Grassy Fynbos and Grassland. 5. Grassland R.A. Lubke (unpublished data) recognized, in the northern part of the Sundays River area (Figure 1), two major grassland communities, namely Festuca costata Tussock Grassland and Themeda triandra- Tristachy a leucothrix Grassland. The latter was provisionally sub- divided by him into Bobartia orientalis Grassland and Trachypogon spicatus Grassland, further subdivided into a, Heteropogon contortus Grassland and b, Setaria spha- celata Grassland. We have taken a much narrower view and the Grass- lands of the study area are here considered to include only those areas where Restionaceae, Ericaceae and Pro- teaceae are totally absent. Campbell’s (1985) criteria for recognizing Grassland are difficult to use because of the gradual decrease of fynbos elements along the tran- sition from Grassy Fynbos to Grassland. Our concept therefore includes only part of Campbell’s Hankey Grassland and seems to be identical to Lubke’s Setaria sphacelata Grassland. As such it is perhaps the most uni- form vegetation unit of all and occurs mostly on steep northern and western slopes. What variation there is, appears to be the result of soil depth and rockiness. Some species ( Acacia karroo, Diospyros lycioides and Aloe ferox for example) are restricted to deep soils on lower northern slopes, while succulents such as Euphor- bia polygona are locally dominant only in very rocky areas. Diagnostic and dominant species are listed in Tables 13 and 14. Very few of the dominant species have high fidelity values, so that most of the diagnostic species are forbs or succulents and not grasses. Elionurus muticus and Brachiaria serrata are very common but only Setaria sphacelata var. torta and Aristida diffusa subsp. burkei appear to be characteristic of Grassland as defined here. The dominant grasses are also present in Grassy Fynbos, where their cover values are scarcely lower. DISCUSSION The forests of the Zuurberg have floristic elements in common with both the Amatola and Alexandria Forests and are similar in species composition to forests in the Watersmeeting Nature Reserve (Bathurst), the Fort Grey Nature Reserve (East London) and the Groendal Wilder- ness Area north of Uitenhage (Geldenhuys 1985). They differ from the Knysna and Tsitsikamma Forests in species composition, notably the absence of Ocotea bullata and Trichocladus crinitus and the presence of species of Pon- doland-Tongaland affinity. Trees such as Smellophyllum capense, Atalaya capensis, Homalium dentatum, H. ru- fescens and Chionanthus peglerae are rare or have limited Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 13. — Diagnostic species of Grassland grouped by growth form. Single occurrences are excluded Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Trees Diospyros lycioides 4 1,50 80 Acacia karroo 3 1,00 100 Shrubs Sutera albiflora 7 1,00 88 Diospyros scabrida 2 0,50 80 Leonotis oxymifolia 2 1,00 100 Grasses Setaria sphacelata var. torta Aristida diffusa subsp. 8 1,00 80 burkei 4 1,00 100 Herbs & suffrutices Ruellia sp. cf. R. pilosa 7 1,00 80 Cyanotis speciosa 6 0,50 100 Thesium junceum 5 1,00 100 Eriosema saligna 4 0,75 100 Heliophila rigidiuscula 4 0,50 80 Thesium sp. cf. flexuosum 3 0,67 100 Euphorbia striata 2 1,00 100 Indigofera hedyantha 2 1,00 100 Monsonia emarginata 2 1,00 100 Pachycarpus dealbatus 2 1,00 100 Senecio puberulus 2 1,00 100 Succulents Crassula nudicaulis Crassula mesembryanthe- 5 0,40 83 moides 4 0,75 100 Crassula perfoliata 3 0,33 100 Aloe ferox 2 - 100 Bui bine frutescens 2 1,00 100 Haworthia reinwardtii 2 0,50 100 Ruschia orientalis 2 - 100 distributions in the eastern Cape. The Zuurberg Forests are relatively isolated and therefore represent an impor- tant biogeographical link in the distribution of Afro- montane Forest in the eastern Cape and also between the eastern and southern Cape (Geldenhuys 1985). Thicket communities of the Zuurberg are very vari- able, probably as a result of topographic, rainfall and edaphic gradients. In terms of structure and species composition, most of the thicket agrees with Everard’s (1987) Xeric Kaffrarian Thicket. Only a very small part of the Kaffrarian Succulent Thicket of the study area is similar to Addo Bush (Acocks 1953) or Spekboomveld (Archibald 1955), the dominant vegetation of the Addo Elephant National Park. Everard (1987) classified the latter as one of two suborders of Kaffrarian Succulent Thicket, namely Xeric Succulent Thicket. His other suborder, Mesic Succulent Thicket, seems floristically similar to some of the thickets of the Zuurberg. The Mountain Fynbos of the study area was not in- cluded in the classification of Campbell (1985) but it has the differentiating features of his Mesotrophic Pro- teoid Fynbos. Protea lorifolia and P. repens are the dominant canopy species and Grassy Fynbos is present as understorey. In view of the limited and localized dis- tribution and the high species richness, this vegetation unit should receive special attention when management 219 TABLE 14. — Dominant species of Grassland grouped by growth form Presence (no. of plots) Dominance (mean BB cover value) Fidelity (%) Trees Diospyros lycioides 4 1,50 80 Shrubs Aspalathus chortophila 12 1,75 67 Anthospermum paniculatum 10 1,20 48 Grasses Themeda triandra 15 2,20 41 Tristachya leucothrix 10 2,00 37 Eragrostis curvula 3 2,00 50 Alloteropsis semialata 7 1,43 25 Elionurus muticus 12 1,42 75 Heteropogon contortus 12 1,25 67 Cymbopogon validus 5 1,20 50 Trachypogon spicatus 11 1,09 58 Brachiaria serrata 14 1,00 70 Eragrostis capensis 14 1,00 64 Setaria sphacelata var. torta 8 1,00 80 Sedges Tetraria cuspidata 2 1,50 11 Ficinia spp. 9 1,00 38 Herbs & suffrutices Crabbea nana 10 1,10 56 Hermannia flammula 10 1,10 63 Tephrosia capensis 10 1,00 38 Chaetacanthus sp. nov. 9 1,00 56 policies are formulated. The effects of fire on succession (under local conditions) need to be studied in detail. The absence of seed-regenerating Protea species (P. lori- folia and P. repens ) from the plateau areas may be part- ly due to frequent fires in the past (see the successional model of Cowling 1984), but shallower and more fertile soils could also be limiting factors. Mature stands of Protea lorifolia are almost exclusively found on sandy soils. Judged by diagnostic species, our concept of Grassy Fynbos appears to be similar to that of Cowling (1984), who argued that it is not a recently derived vegetation type as Acocks (1953) proposed. The presence of regional endemics {Erica demissa, E. pectinifolia, Podalyria bur- chellii and Protea foliosa for example) and the resprout- ing ability of virtually all the species found in Grassy Fynbos indicate that it should be recognized as a distinct vegetation type. Campbell (1985) proposed that the Grassy Fynbos (Eastern Fynbos) of the Zuurberg and Grahamstown areas should be included in the Fynbos Biome and perhaps also in the Cape Floristic Region. The abundance of grasses was discussed by Cowling (1984). He suggested that high temperatures during the growing season (the high proportion of summer rain) in- crease the competitive advantage of C4 grasses, although the more fertile and finer-textured soils (Campbell 1983) also need to be considered. Too frequent fires may lead to an increase in grassiness by removing the shading effect of the overstorey. It is possible that longer intervals be- tween fires will result in an increase of Mountain Fynbos in certain areas. 220 CONCLUSIONS In the Zuurberg National Park several totally differ- ent and unrelated vegetation types occur in close proxi- mity. The dynamics of the boundaries between the types and between communities need to be studied in more detail to explain the intricate mosaic of vegetation. Com- munity boundaries may be determined at least partly by an equally intricate mosaic of soil types. Campbell (1983) has reported distinct edaphic gradients in the mountains of the Fynbos Biome. Another major ecological factor seems to be the natural fire cycle, in which the warmer, drier northern slopes tend to burn at more frequent intervals than the wet southern slopes. Fire is considered to be the major disturbance factor in fynbos biome com- munities (Cowling et al. 1987). If the present-day patchy distribution of plant com- munities has been shaped by edaphic factors and a natural fire regime, little seems to be gained by interfering with the natural cycle. It is indeed impractical to divide such complex communities into conventional ‘burning blocks’ and burn them according to a rigid schedule. Instead, management should try to allow lightning fires to run their natural course, and exclude man-made fires from outside the Park. Further research is required to assess this policy, focusing on post-fire succession and the effects of fire on the characteristic and dominant species in each vegetation unit. It is also important to gain infor- mation on the extent to which edaphic factors are re- sponsible for community boundaries. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank Nico and Sorina van der Walt for their hos- pitality during our visits. Financial support from the National Parks Board and the Rand Afrikaans University is acknowledged. REFERENCES ACOCKS, J.P.H. 1953. Veld types of South Africa. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 28. ARCHIBALD, E.E.A. 1955. An ecological survey of the Addo Elephant National Park. Journal of South African Botany 20: 137-154. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) BREYTENBACH, G.J. & VLOK, J. 1985. The Suurberg National Park: management options. Saasveld Forestry Research Centre, George. Unpublished. CAMPBELL, B.M. 1983. Montane plant environments in the Fynbos Biome. Bothalia 14: 283-298. CAMPBELL, B.M. 1985. A classification of the mountain vegeta- tion of the Fynbos Biome. Memoirs of the Botanical Sur- vey of South Africa No. 50. CHARLTON, J.S. 1982. Report on activities at Suurberg State Forest, June 1981 to June 1982. Saasveld College for Foresters, George. Unpublished. COWLING, R.M. 1983a. Phytochorology and vegetation history in the south-eastern Cape, South Africa. Journal of Bio- geography 10: 393-419. COWLING, R.M. 1983b. Diversity relations in Cape shrublands and other vegetation in the south-eastern Cape, South Africa. Vegetatio 54: 103-127. COWLING, R.M. 1984. A syntaxonomic and synecological study in the Humansdorp region of the Fynbos Biome. Bothalia 15: 175-227. COWLING, R.M., LE MAITRE, D.C., MCKENZIE, B., PRYS- JONES, R.P. & VAN WILGEN, B.W. 1987. Disturbance and the dynamics of fynbos biome communities. South African National Scientific Programmes Report No. 135. CSIR, Pretoria. EVERARD, D.A. 1987. A classification of the subtropical tran- sitional thicket in the eastern Cape, based on syntaxono- mic and structural attributes. South African Journal of Botany 53: 329-340. GELDENHUYS, C.J. 1985. Ekologie, beplanning en bestuur van inheemse woudplantegroei in the Suurberg Nasionale Park. Saasveld Forestry Research Centre, George. Unpublished. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. & ROBINSON, E.R. 1981. Phytogeo- graphy and speciation in the vegetation of the eastern Cape. Bothalia 13: 467-472. GOLDBLATT, P. 1978. An analysis of the flora of southern Africa: its characteristics, relationships and origins. An- nals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 65 : 369-436. KRUGER, F.J. 1979. South African heathlands. In R.L. Specht, Heathlands of the world. A. Descriptive studies'. 19-79. Elsevier, Amsterdam. LUBKE, R.A., EVERARD, D.A. & JACKSON, S. 1986. The biomes of the eastern Cape with emphasis on their conser- vation. Bothalia 16: 251-261. STEHLE, T.C. 1979. Brandbeskermings- en beheerde brandplan vir die Suurberg Staatsbos. Eastern Cape Forestry Region, King Williams Town. Unpublished. TAYLOR, H.C. 1978. Capensis. In M.J.A. Werger, Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa'. 171-230. Junk, The Hague. VAN WYK, B-E., VAN WYK, C.M. & NOVELLIE, P.A. 1988. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 2. An annotated checklist of ferns and seed plants. Bothalia 18: 221-232. WHITE, F., 1978. The Afromontane region. In M.J.A. Werger, Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa'. 463-513. Junk, The Hague. Bothalia 18,2: 221-232 (1988) Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 2. An annotated checklist of ferns and seed plants B-E. VAN WYK*, C.M. VAN WYK** and P.A. NOVELLIEt Keywords: checklist, eastern Cape, flora, growth form, plant distribution ABSTRACT A checklist of 1 100 plant taxa representing 540 genera and 129 families is given for the Zuurberg National Park (eastern Cape). Annotations include growth form (except in Poaceae and Cyperaceae) and voucher specimen(s). The diversity of the flora is ascribed to the presence of four major phytochoria of southern Africa rather than local endemism. UITTREKSEL ’n Kontrolelys van 1 100 planttaksons, wat 540 genusse en 129 families verteenwoordig, word vir die Zuur- berg Nasionale Park (Oos-Kaap) aangegee. Groeivorms (behalwe by Poaceae en Cyperaceae) en kontrole-eksemplare word ook aangetoon. Die diversiteit van die flora word toegeskryf aan die teenwoordigheid van vier hoofplante- groeistreke van suidelike Afrika eerder as aan plaaslike endemisme. INTRODUCTION The study area is situated in the eastern Cape, which is known to be a transitional zone of four major phyto- choria, namely the Cape, Tongoland-Pondoland, Karoo- Namib and Afromontane regions (Goldblatt 1978; Gibbs Russell & Robinson 1981; Cowling 1983; Lubkeefa/. 1986). Furthermore, five vegetation types are represent- ed in this area. It is therefore of considerable phytogeo- graphical interest. The vegetation of the Zuurberg National Park was studied to supply basic data for an inventory. Major vegetation units are described by Van Wyk etal. (1988) and all ferns and flowering plants recorded within the boundaries of the Park are listed. No comprehensive studies or systematic collecting work have been done here in the past. METHODS Herbarium specimens were collected on several visits between June 1985 and October 1987. The staff of the National Herbarium and various specialists identified the material. A field herbarium was compiled to provide a permanent record of all plant taxa and to facilitate future studies. Duplicates of the specimens are housed in the Rand Afrikaans University Herbarium (JRAU) and in the National Herbarium (PRE) of the Botanical Research Institute, Pretoria. The nomenclature and arrangement of the checklist follow Gibbs Russell et al. (1985, 1987). Collecting * Department of Botany, Rand Afrikaans University, P.O. Box 524, Johannesburg 2000. ** Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001. t National Parks Board, Private Bag X66, Cradock 5880, South Africa. MS. received: 1987.12.28. numbers, all by B-E. & C.M. van Wyk, are shown in italics. Growth forms are mentioned, except in Poaceae and Cyperaceae. Naturalized exotic species are marked with an asterisk. Exact localities are not cited, but all collections are from the following quarter degree square grids: 3325 (Port Elizabeth): —AD, — BC, — BD. RESULTS A total of 1 100 species and infraspecific taxa repre- senting 540 genera and 129 families, was recorded in the study area (Table 1). Naturalized exotic species represent 5,6% of the total flora, a figure much lower than the 10% given by Gibbs Russell & Robinson (1981) for the Albany and Bathurst Districts. The largest families are the Asteraceae (62 genera, 148 species) and the Poaceae (51 genera, 90 species). Nearly all of the largest families of southern Africa (Gibbs Russell 1985) are also present amongst the 50 largest families of the Zuurberg. Only the Mesembryanthemaceae and the Ericaceae are ranked significantly lower in the Zuurberg flora than in the southern African flora as a whole (Gibbs Russell 1985, Table 3). TABLE 1. — Number of families, genera and species recorded in the Zuurberg National Park Families Genera Indige- nous species Natural- ized exotics Pteridophyta 11 17 28 0 Gymnospermae 3 3 6 0 Angiospermae Dicotyledoneae 97 378 732 56 Monocotyledoneae 18 142 272 6 1037 62 Total 129 540 1 100 222 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 2. — Comparison of the flora of the Zuurberg National Park with other southern African floras (data from Gibbs Russell 1985) No. of vegeta- tion types Families Genera Spp. and infrasp. taxa Spp. per genus Area (km2) Taxa per km2 Zuurberg 5 129 540 1 100 2,04 208 5,29 Cape Peninsula 1 129 699 2622 3,75 470 5,58 Lesotho 4 113 554 1591 2,87 30 276 0,05 Swaziland 3 147 796 2162 2,72 17 363 0,12 Southern Africa 28 234 2376 23 250 9,79 2 573 000 0,01 The diversity of the flora is compared to other south- ern African floras in Table 2. The Zuurberg National Park is much smaller than the other areas mentioned in Table 2. However, more vegetation types are represented than in the other regional floras mentioned (Van Wyk et al. 1988) and a comparable number of families and genera is present. Although the number of species per km2 is very high, the total number of species and the species/ genus ratio are lower. Endemic genera typically have high species/ genus ratios. A mean of 8,6 for all endemic genera in southern Africa is given by Gibbs Russell & Robinson (1981). A lack of distribution records from many of the quarter degree grid squares of the eastern Cape makes it very difficult to accurately assess the degree of endemism. Lubke et al. (1986) have concluded that endemism in the eastern Cape is relatively low com- pared to other centres. Their results have indicated that most endemics (61) are from the thicket vegetation of the Tongaland-Pondoland region, with the Cape region (59) a close second. The diversity of the flora of the Zuurberg National Park is ascribed not so much to endemism or to a large number of species, but rather to the presence of five vegetation types and the relatively high number of higher order taxa (families and genera), each of which contribute a relatively low number of species. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We wish to thank the Director and staff of the National Herbarium for the many specimens that were identified. The following specialists have also contributed to iden- tifications: A. Bean, K. Balkwill, H.P. Linder, R.O. Mof- fett, A.A. Obermeyer-Mauve, E.G.H. Oliver, C.H. Stirton and A.E. van Wyk. We also wish to thank the following persons who helped us in various ways: H. Allison, R.M. Cowling, M. Fourie, L. Jonker, M.Koekemoer, G.Kotze, R.A. Lubke, R. Niemand, E. Novellie, E.M. Reinten, A.L. Schutte, N. van der Walt, S. van der Walt and K.T. van Warmelo. Financial support from the National Parks Board and the Rand Afrikaans University is acknow- ledged. REFERENCES COWLING, R.M. 1983. Phytochorology and vegetation history in the south-eastern Cape, South Africa. Journal of Bio- geography 10: 393-419. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1985. Analysis of the size and composi- tion of the southern African flora. Bothalia 15: 613 — 629. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. & ROBINSON, E.R. 1981. Phytogeogra- phy and speciation in the vegetation of the eastern Cape. Bothalia 13: 467-472. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., REID, C., VAN ROOY, J. & SMOOK, L. 1985. List of species of southern African plants, edn 2, part 1. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 51. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., WELMAN, W.G., RETIEF, E., IMMEL- MAN, K.L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., PIENAAR, B.J., VAN WYK, M. & NICHOLAS, A. 1987. List of species of south- ern African plants, edn 2, part 2. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 56. GOLDBLATT, P. 1978. An analysis of the flora of southern Africa: its characteristics, relationships and origins. Annals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 65: 369-436. LUBKE, R.A., EVERARD, D.A. & JACKSON, S. 1986. The biomes of the eastern Cape with emphasis on their conser- vation. Bothalia 16: 251-261. VAN WYK, B-E., NOVELLIE, P.A. & VAN WYK, C.M. 1988. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 1. Characterization of major vegetation units. Bothalia 18: 211—220. CHECKLIST The nomenclature and arrangement of the checklist follow Gibbs Russell et al. (1985, 1987). Collecting numbers, all by B. & M. van Wyk, are shown in italics. Growth forms are mentioned, except in ferns, Poaceae and Cyperaceae. Naturalized exotic species are marked with an asterisk. Exact localities are not cited, but all collections are from the following quarter degree square grids: 3325 (Port Elizabeth): -AD, -BC, -BD. PTERIDOPHYTA EQUISETACEAE Equisetum ramosissimum Desf, 1963 OSMUNDACEAE Todea barbara (L.) T. Moore, 21 73 SCHIZAEACEAE Mohria caffrorum (L.) Desv., 231, 340 Schizaea pectinata (L.) Swartz, 183, 1283, 1517 DENNSTAEDTIACEAE Pteridium aquilinum (L.J Kuhn subsp. aquilinum, 228a ADLANTACEAE Adiantum capillus-veneris L., 326 raddianum Presl, 331 Cheilanthes capensis (Thunb.) Swartz, 1378 concolor (Langsd & Fisch.) Schelpe & N.C. Anthony, 777, 1088 hirta Swartz, 1768, 1886 multifida (Swartz) Swartz var. multifida, 1238 parviloba (Swartz) Swartz, 482, 1086 viridis (Forssk.) Swartz var. macrophylla (Kuntze) Schelpe & N.C. Anthony, 334 var. viridis, 369, 642, 695, 1083, 1087 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 223 Pellaea calomelanos (Swartz) Link, 703, 964 Pteris dentata Forssk., 337 POLYPODIACEAE Pleopeltis macrocarpa (Bory ex Willd) Kaulf, 749, 1084 ASPLENIACEAE Asplenium lunulatum Swartz, 349, 795, 1655 rutifolium (Berg.) Kunze, 1 77 splendens Kunze, 350 Ceterach cordatum (Thunb.) Desv., 339, 1356 THELYPTERIDACEAE Thelypteris bergiana (Schlechtd) Ching, 769 LOMARIOPSIDACEAE Elaphoglossum acrostichoides (Hook. <6 Grev.) Schelpe, 1 085 ASPIDIACEAE Dryopteris inaequalis (Schlechtd.) Kuntze, 347 Rumohia adiantiformis (G. Forst.) Ching, 168 BLECHNACEAE Blechnum australe L. var. australe, 766, 1240 capense (L.) Schlechtd., 765, 2171 punctulatum Swartz var. punctulatum, 352, 1239 GYMNOSPERMAE ZAMIACEAE Encephalartos caffer (Thunb.) Lehm., shrub, 2161 lehmannii Lehm., shrub, 626 longifolius (Jacq.) Lehm., small tree, 233 PODOCARPACEAE Podocarpus falcatus (Thunb.) R. Br. ex Mirb., tree, 753 latifolius (Thunb.) R. Br. ex Mirb., tree, 82 CUPRESSACEAE Widdringtonia nodiflora (L.) Powrie, shrub or small tree, 200 ANGIOSPERMAE — MONOCOTYLEDONEAE TYPHACEAE Typha capensis (Rohrb.) N.E. Br., forb, 1629 POTAMOGETONACEAE Potamogeton thunbergii Cham. & Schlechtd., aquatic forb, 238 APONOGETONACEAE Aponogeton desertorum Zeyh. ex Spreng. f, aquatic forb, 1 985 POACEAE Hemarthria altissima (Poir.) Stapf & C.E. Hubb., 1984 Elionurus muticus (Spreng.) Kunth, 1095b, 1120, 1287 Miscanthus erectus (Stent & C.E. Hubb.) ined, 1480 sorghum (Nees) Pilg., 1584 Andropogon appendiculatus Nees, 1054, 1277 Cymbopogon plurinodis (Stapf) Stapf ex Burtt Davy, 86 7 validus (Stapf) Stapf ex Burtt Davy, 707, 1196, 1200, 1318 Hyparrhenia anamesa Clayton, 639, 1197 hirta (L.) Stapf, 1141 Trachypogon spicatus (L. f.) Kuntze, 1100 Heteropogon contortus (L.) Roem. & Schult., 669, 999, 1099 Diheteropogon filifolius (Nees) Clayton, 656, 1105, 1199 Themeda triandra Forssk., 6 73 Digitaria eriantha Steud., 997, 1320, 1392 monodactyla (Nees) Stapf, 974, 1014, 1095a, 1424 natalensis Stent, 1126 Alloteropsis semialata (R. Br.) Hitchc. subsp. eckloniana (Nees) Gibbs Russell, 611, 983, 1108 Brachiaria arrecta (Dur. & Schinz) Stent, 1587b serrata (Thunb.) Stapf, 995, 1143, 1340 Paspalum dilatatum Poir., 1046, 1109* paspaloides (Michx.) Scribm, 1587a scrobiculatum L., 1043 Urochloa panicoides Beauv., 1764, 1941 Echinochloa crus-galli (L.) Beauv., 1955 Oplismenus sp., 1090, 1898 Panicum coloratum L. var. coloratum, 1 741 deustum Thunb., 760, 978, 1398 ecklonii Nees, 1717 gilvum Launert, 1042, 1586 maximum Jacq., 963, 989, 1142, 1360, 1548 subalbidum Kunth, 2033 Setaria lindenbergiana (Nees) Stapf, 891, 1323 sphacelata (Schumach.) Moss var. sphacelata, 1366 var. torta (Stapf) Clayton, 965, 1198 Rhynchelytrum nerviglume (French.) Chiov., 218, 675, 969, 1503 Pennisetum macrourum Trim , 1220, 1988 Cenchrus ciliaris L., 1821 Ehrharta calycina J.E. Sm. var. calycina, 1185, 1202b erecta Lam. var. erecta, 1203, 1268 ramosa (Thunb.) Thunb. var. ramosa, 1223, 1276 cf. longifoha Schrad, 1274 Phalaris arundinacea L., 1978* minor Retz, 1918* Arundinella nepalensis Trim, 2148 Tristachya leucothrix Nees, 66 7, 998 Helictotrichon hirtulum (Steud.) Schweick., 1053, 1102, 1265 Merxmuellera arundinacea (Berg) Conert, 1836 disticha (Nees) Conert, 2101 stricta (Schrad) Conert, 865, 2053, 2102 Karroochloa curva (Nees) Conert £ Turpe, 135 7 Pentaschistis ampla (Nees) McClean, 1060 angustifolia (Nees) Stapf, 1028, 1101, 1155, 1186, 1254, 1273 curvifolia (Schrad) Stapf, 1263, 1264 eriostoma (Nees) Stapf, 1316, 1837 Phragmites australis (Cav.) Steud, 1989 Agrostis lachnantha Nees var. lachnantha, 763a, 889 Polypogon monspeliensis (L.) Desf, 888* Aristida congesta Roem. & Schult. subsp. barbicollis (Trim & Rupr.) De Winter, 1847 diffusa Trim subsp. burkei (Stapf) Meld., 863, 987, 1328 junciformis Trim & Rupr. subsp. junciformis, 1510 Stipa dregeana Steud var. elongata (Nees) Stapf 96 7, 1149, 1408, 1652 Tragus berteronianus Schult., 1363 Sporobolus africanus (Poir.) Robyns & Toumay, 1050 centrifugus (Trim) Nees, 2108 fimbriatus (Trim) Nees var. fimbriatus, 1153, 1359 mauritianus (Steud.) Dur. & Schinz, 2068, 2105 natalensis (Steud) Dur. <6 Schinz, 1029 nitens Stent, 1386 Eragrostis capensis (Thunb.) Trim, 471, 709, 742, 1271 cilianensis (AIL) F.T. Hubb., 1399, 1416 curvula (Schrad) Nees, 980, 1032, 1148, 1746 obtusa Munro ex FicaL & Hiem, 1093, 1145, 1391 plana Nees, 1065 planiculmis Nees, 242, 1052, 1057, 1218, 1221 racemosa (Thunb.) Steud, 281, 1037, 1098 Microchloa caffra Nees, 1269 Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers., 1048, 1106, 1107, 1255 Harpochloa falx (L. f.) Kuntze, 1187 Eleusine coracana (L.) Gaertm subsp. africana (K.-OByme) Hilu & De Wet, 1942 Triraphis andropogonoides (Steud.) PhilL, 131 7 Koeleria capensis (Steud) Nees, 1272, 1970, 1980 Melica racemosa Thunb., 994, 1202a, 1545 Schismus barbatus (Loefl ex L.) ThelL, 923 224 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Poa binata Nees, 2100 Festuca costata Nees var. costata, 2098 scabra Vahl, 1665, 1723 Bromus unioloides H. B. K„ 1266, 1904, 1959* Brachypodium flexum Nees, 262 Lolium rigidum Gaudin, 1 950* CYPERACEAE Carpha glomerata (Thunb.) Nees, 1233 Cyperus albostriatus Schrad., 230, 972, 1939 denudatus L. f, 1044, 1585 difformis L., 1396 maiginatus Thunb., 929, 1806 obtusiflorus Vahl vai. sphaerocephalus (Vahl) Kuekenth., 1056 pulcher Thunb., 1 777, 1 778 rubicundus Vahl, 1393 sphaerosperm us Schrad., 1946 tenellus L. f. var. tenellus, 203 7b textilis Thunb., 322 usitatus Burch., 1394 Pycreus polystachyos (Rottb.) Beauv., 1613 Mariscus dregeanus Kunth, 1138 indecorus (Kunth) Podlech, 990 solidus (Kunth) ined. vai. solidus, 1 792 var. involutus (C.B. Cl) ined., 1121 tabularis (Schrad.) C.B. Cl subsp. major (Nees) ined., 1397, 1770 uitenhagensis Steud., 977 usitatus (Burch.) ined. var usitatus, 1394 Ficinia albicans Nees, 1827 quinquangularis Boeck., 1846 sylvatica Kunth, 1889 Fuirena hirsuta (Berg.) P.L. Forbes, 1579, 1956, 2143 Schoenoplectus paludicola (Kunth) Palla ex J. Raynal, 232, 2031 Isolepis cemua (Vahl) Roem. <£ Schult., 896 ludwigii Kunth, 1673 prolifer R. Br., 783 sepulcralis Steud., 214, 881, 2037a Eleocharis dregeana Steud, 2032 Fimbristylis complanata (Retz.) Link, 1047 Bulbostylis contexta (Nees) Bodard, 1000, 1097 humilis (Kunth) C.B. CL, 1003 Abildgaardia ovata (Burm. f.) Krai., Femiebrae plot A 1 Tetraria bromoides (Lam.) Pfeiffer, 2158 compressa Turrill, 264 cuspidata (Rottb.) C.B. CL, 357, 677, 744 fourcadei Turrill & Schonl., 2058 pubescens Schonl. & Turrill, 151 9 secans C.B. CL, 1520 sp. nov., 1499 Schoenoxiphium lehmannii (Nees) Steud., 1735 rufum Nees, 21 79 sparteum (Wahlenb.) C.B. CL, 1049, 1506, 1471 Carex cf. aethiopica Schkuhr, 1631 clavata Thunb., 1979 ARACEAE Zantedeschia aethiopica (L.) Spreng., forb, 752a LEMNACEAE Lemna gibba L., aquatic forb, 934a Wolffia arrhiza (L.) Horkel ex Wimm., aquatic forb, 934b RESTIONACEAE Ischyrolepis sieberi (Kunth) Linder, 2059, 2060, 2167 Elegia vaginulata Mast., 1521 Restio sejunctus Mast., 1515 triticeus Rothb., 9, 267, 359 Calopsis paniculata (Rottb.) Desv., 2157 Rhodocoma capensis Nees ex Steud., 125, 179, 1338, 1727, 2047 fruticosa (Thunb.) Linder, 420, 1 728 Cannomois virgata (Rottb.) Steud, 2046 Hypodiscus striatus (Kunth) Mast., 268, 762, 768, 1514 synchroolepis (Steud.) Mast., 236 sp., 2182 COMMELINACEAE Commelina africana L. var. africana, forb, 1658 var. krebsiana (Kunth) C.B. CL, forb, 944 var. lancispatha C.B. CL, forb, 946, 1390 benghalensis L„ forb, 948 eckloniana Kunth, forb, 1079, 1384 Cyanotis speciosa (L. f.) Hassk., forb, 992, 1286, 1379 JUNCACEAE Prionium serratum (L. f.) Drkge ex E. Mey., large tuft, 2142 Juncus capensis Thunb., tuft, 937 exsertus Buchen., tuft, 892 lomatophyllus Spreng., tuft, 1628 oxycarpus E. Mey. ex Kunth, tuft, 1 765, 2034 LILIACEAE Bulbine abyssinica A. Rich., succulent, 1068 asphodeloides (L.) Willd, succulent, 1677 filifolia Bak., forb, 1176 frutescens (L.) Willd, succulent, 323, 2150 cf. lagopus (Thunb.) N.E. Br., succulent, 2111 latifolia (L. f.) Roem. & Schult., succulent, 134 Trachyandra affinis Kunth, forb, 21 77 asperata Kunth. var. macowanii (Bak.) Oberm., forb, 1661 var. stenophylla (Bak.) Oberm., forb, 1055 gif fenii (Leighton) Oberm., forb, 1795 saltii (Bak.) Oberm. var. saltii, forb, 1707 Anthericum sp., forb, 21 77 Chlorophytum capense (L.) Koss, forb, 1122 comosum (Thunb.) Jacq., forb, 1760, 1897 Caesia contorta (L. f.) Dur. <6 Schinz, forb, 1013 Schizobasis intricata (Bak.) Bak., geophyte, 1313, 1541 Eriospermum dyeri Mar loth ex Archib., geophyte, 1312 sp. cf. E. occultum Archib., geophyte, 1475, 1022b, 2125 Kniphofia cf. uvaria (L.) Hook., forb, 370, 1429 Aloe ferox Mill, large succulent, 156 microcantha Haw., succulent, 1224, 2156 pluridens Haw., large succulent, 1644 speciosa Bak., large succulent, 710 striata Haw., succulent, 621 tenuior Haw., scandent succulent, 40, 405 Gasteria sp., succulent, 2023 Haworthia angustifolia Haw., succulent, 693, 1249, 1311 cooperi Bak. var. cooperi, succulent, 623, 734 glauca Bak. var. glauca, succulent, 732 reinwardtii (Salm-Dyck) Haw. var. reinwardtii, succulent, 485 cf. var. brevicula G. G. Sm. , succulent, 1546 Agapanthus praecox Willd. subsp. minimus (Lindl.) Leighton, forb, 637, 1458 Tulbaghia cemua Ave-Lall., geophyte, 1127, 1726 violacea Harv., forb, 1531 Albuca sp. cf. A. macowanii Bak., geophyte, 691, 2151 sp., geophyte, 2107 Urginea altissima (L. f.) Bak., geophyte, 1423h, 1742 Drimia anomala (Bak.) Benth., geophyte, 1843 capensis (Burm. f.) Wijnands, geophyte, 1315 sp., geophyte, 2011 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 225 Rhadamanthus sp. nov.?, geophyte, 1858 Dipcadi viride (L.) Moench, geophyte, 722, 2003 Litanthus pusillus Harv., geophyte, 1571 Scilla nervosa (Burch.) Jessop, geophyte, 1010 Eucomis autumnalis (Mill) Chitt. subsp. autumnalis, geophyte, 2126 Omithogalum anguinum Leighton ex Oberm., geophyte, 1653 conicum Jacq. subsp. conicum, geophyte, 1 722 juncifolium Jacq., geophyte, 1022a, 1188, 1842 rogersii Bak. , geophyte, 1890 Ledebouria revoluta (L. f.) Jessop, geophyte, 1690 undulata (Jacq.) Jessop, geophyte, 692 Veltheimia bracteata Harv. ex Bak., geophyte, 1801, 2202 Sansevieria hyacinthoides (L.) Druce, forb, 630 Protasparagus aethiopicus (L.) Oberm., climber, 536, 1636 burchellii (Bak.) Oberm., forb, 561 capensis (L.) Oberm., forb, 406 crassicladus (Jessop) Oberm., climber, 578, 806 densiflorus (Kunth) Oberm., forb, 521, 6 76 divaricatus Oberm., forb, 415 laricinus (Burch.) Oberm., forb, 646 macowanii (Bak.) Oberm., forb, 408, 1593 multiflorus (Bak.) Oberm., climber, 1614 setaceus (Kunth) Oberm., climber, 112, 341 striatus (L. f.) Oberm., forb, 116, 235, 519 suaveolens (Burch. ) Oberm., forb, 88, 364 subulatus (Thunb.) Oberm., forb, 555 virgatus (Bak.) Oberm., forb, 18, 343 Behnia reticulata (Thunb.) Didr., forb, 69 HAEMODORACEAE Lanark lanata (L.) Dur. & Schinz, forb, 1034 AMARYLLIDACEAE Haemanthus albiflos Jacq. , geophyte, 162, 1575 Scadoxus puniceus (L.) Friis & Nordal, geophyte, 1229 Boophane disticha (L. f.) Herb., geophyte, 694 Nerine undulata (L.) Herb, complex, geophyte, 1625 Brunsvigia grandiflora LindL, geophyte, 1470 Cyrtanthus sanguineus (LindL) Walp., geophyte, 2016 HYPOXIDACEAE Empodium sp., geophyte, 1489 Hypoxis angustifolia Lam. var. buchananii Bak., geophyte, 1944 hemerocallidea Fisch. & Mey., geophyte, 1008 longifolia Bak., geophyte, 1250, 1257 obtusa Burch, ex Edwards, geophyte, 862a rigidula Bak. var. rigidula, geophyte, 1036, 2039 cf. villosa L. f., geophyte, 862 zeyheri Bak., geophyte, 1260 TECOPHILAEACEAE Cyanella sp., geophyte, 802 DIOSCOREACEAE Dioscorea cf. sylvatica (Kunth) Eckl, geophyte, 478 IRIDACEAE Romulea autumnalis L. BoL, geophyte, 219 Moraea cf. algoensis GoldbL, geophyte, 2043 cf. elliotii Bak., geophyte, 1710 tripetala (L. f.) Ker-GawL, geophyte, 2180 Dietes iridioides (L.) Sweet ex Klatt, forb, 1761 Bobartia orientalis J.B. Gillett subsp. orientalis, forb, 379, 2113 Aristea anceps Eckl. ex Klatt, forb, 1020, 1245 cognata N.E. Br. ex Weim., forb, 1247 ecklonii Bak., forb, 1683 juncifolia Bak. , forb, 1509 schizolaena Harv., forb, 1123, 1259, 1696 Dierama pendulum Bak., geophyte, 17, 2138 Gladiolus ochroleucus Bak. var. macowanii (Bak.) Oberm., geo- phyte, 1428 Anapalina caffra (Ker-GawL ex Bak.) G.J. Lewis, geophyte, 2 Watsonia cf. longifolia Mathews & L. BoL, geophyte, 658, 713 Freesia corymbosa (Burm. f.) N.E. Br., geophyte, 71 7 ORCHIDACEAE Habenaria cf. arenaria LindL, forb, 1596, 1611 Brachycorythis macowaniana Reichb. f, forb, 1998 Disa versicolor Reichb. f. , forb, 2203 Satyrium membranaceum Swartz, forb, 1 720 Monadenia brevicomis LindL, forb, 1 706 Disperis lindleyana Reichb. f, forb, 1598 Acrolophia capensis (Berg.) Fourc. var. capensis, forb, 1691, 1999 Polystachya pubescens Reichb. f, epiphyte, 1163 Eulophia clavicomis LindL var. clavicomis, forb, 65 7, 789 platypetala LindL, forb, 662 tenella Reichb. f, forb, 1177, 1190 Tridactyle tricuspis (H. BoL) Schltr., epiphyte, 1590, 2014 Cyrtorchis arcuata (LindL) Schltr., epiphyte, 2013 Mystacidium capense (L. f.) Schltr., epiphyte, 2012 venosum Harv. ex Rolfe, epiphyte, 164 ANGIOSPERMAE — DICOTYLEDONEAE PIPERACEAE Peperomia tetraphylla (G. Forst.) Hook. & Am., forb, 72, 325 SALICACEAE Salix capensis Thunb. var. capensis, tree, 295, 884 MYRICACEAE Myrica cordifolia L., shrub, 249 div ersifolia Adamson, shrub, 490 humilis Cham. & Schlechtd, shrub, 679 kraussiana Buchinger ex Meisn, shrub, 786 serrata Lam., shrub, 377, 837 ULMACEAE Celtis africana Burm. f., tree, 110 Chaetacme aristata Planch., tree, 81, 293 MORACEAE Ficus burtt-davyi Hutch., tree, 962 ingens (Miq.) Miq. var. ingens, shrub or tree, 145, 705 sur Forssk., tree, 126, 1504 URTICACEAE Laportea grossa (Wedd) Chew, forb, 1206, 1602 Didymodoxa caffra (Thunb.) Friis & Wilmot-Dear, forb, 1407 PROTEACEAE Protea cynaroides (L.) L., shrub, 319 foliosa Rourke, shrub, 98 lorifolia (Salisb. ex Knight) Fourc. , shrub or small tree, 258, 636 repens (L.) L., shrub, 1554 Leucospermum cuneiforme (Burm. f.) Rourke, shrub, 1, 614 Leucadendron salignum Berg., shrub, 41, 1278, 1325 VISCACEAE Viscum minimum Harv., epiphytic parasite, sight record rotundifolium L. f., epiphytic parasite, 74 SANTALACEAE Colpoon compressum Berg., small tree, 21, 202 Rhoiacarpos capensis (Harv.) DC., shrub, 1919 Thesium disciflorum A. W. Hill, shrublet, 793, 1695 flexuosum A. DC., shrublet, 187, 609 fruticosum A. W. Hill, shrublet, 184 gnidiaceum A. DC., shrublet, 1716 junceum Bemh., shrublet, 832, 1296 pallidum A. DC., shrublet, 846 cf. squarrosum L. f., shrublet, 604, 1258 strictum Berg. , erect shrub, 97, 606, 1341 virgatum Lam., shrublet, 221, 353 POLYGONACEAE Emex australis Steinh., forb, 1355* 226 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Rumex crispusZ,., forb, 1915* cf. nepalensis Spreng., forb, 2127* cf. sagittatus Thunb., forb, 1932 Polygonum aviculare L., forb, 1972* lapathifolium L. subsp. maculatum (S.F. Gray) T.-Dyer& Trim., forb, 1937 salicifolium Willd., forb, 338, 936 Bilderdykia convolvulus (L.) Dumort, twining forb, 1916* CHENOPODIACEAE Chenopodium carinatum R. Br., forb, 918, 1091* mucronatum Thunb., forb, 1404 Exomis microphylla (Thunb.) Aell. var. axyrioides ( Fenzl ) Aell., shrub, 1261 Salsola kali L., forb, 1422* AMARANTHACEAE Am ar an thus hibridus L. subsp. hibridus var. hibridus, forb, 1128* thunbergii Moq., forb, 1405 Pupaha lappacea (L.) Juss., forb, 1370* Achyranthes sicula (L.) All., forb, 1635* Achyropsis avicularis (E. Mey. ex Moq.) Hook, f., forb, 1082, 1615 leptostachya (E. Mey. ex Meisn.) Hook, f, forb, 981 Gomphrena celosioides Mart., forb, 1414* AIZOACEAE Limeum africanum Burm. subsp. africanum, forb, 1373 telephioides E. Mey. ex Fenzl var. telephioides, forb, 905 Gisekia pharnaceoides L., forb, 1853 Pharnaceum dichotomum L. f, forb, 573, 1973 Galenia pubescens (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Druce, shrublet, 1 744 sarcophylla Fenzl, shrublet, 1365 secunda (L. f.) Sond., shrublet, 1977 Aizoon canariense L., forb, 1208 rigidum L. f. var. villosum Adamson, forb, 557 MESEMBRYANTHEMACEAE Aptenia cordifolia (L. f.) Schwant. var. cordifolia, succulent, 993 1983 Bergeranthus scapiger (Haw.) N.E. Br., succulent, 810 vespertinus (Berger) Schwant., succulent, 544 Carpobrotus dimidiatus (Haw.) L. Bol., succulent, 486, 612 Delosperma brevisepalum L. Bol. var. brevisepalum, succulent, 572 cf. cooperi (Hook, f.) L. Bol., succulent, 2072 . ecklonis (Salm-Dyck) Schwant., succulent, 1374 hirtum (N.E. Br.) Schwant., succulent, 819, 820 laxipetalum L. Bol, succulent, 543a lehmannii (Eckl. dt Zeyh.) Schwant., succulent, 1967, 1976 cf. testaceum (Haw.) Schwant., succulent, 1354 sp., succulent, 1560 Lampranthus productus (Haw.) N.E. Br., succulent, 1974 spectabilis (Harv.) N.E. Br. subsp. spectabilis, succulent, 697 1388 Mestoklema tuberosum (L.) N.E. Br. ex Glen, succulent, 814, 1733 Pleiospilos sp.?, succulent, 476 Ruschia orientalis L. Bol., succulent, 502, 1331, 1542 stenophylla (L.) Bol.) L. Bol., succulent, 254, 1216, 1693 PORTULACACEAE Anacampseros cf. telephiastrum DC., succulent, 266, 854, 1314 Portulacaria afra Jacq., large succulent, 526 CARYOPHYLLACEAE Cerastium capense Sond., forb, 1925 Polycarpon tetraphyllum L. f., forb, 882, 1244, 1854, 1921* Silene burchellii Otth var. angustifoha Sond., forb, 1308, 1 703 var. burchellii, forb, 1681 var. pilosellaefolia (Cham. & Schlechtd.) Sond., forb, 1183 gallicaZ., forb, 1671* Dianthus zeyheri Sond. subsp. natalensis Hooper, forb, 1030 ILLECEBRACEAE Polhchia campestris/4r'r., forb, 257, 921, 1035, 1438 RANUNCULACEAE Knowltonia cordata H. Rasm., forb, 1336, 1500, 2141 vesicatoria (L. f.) Sims subsp. vesicatoria, forb, 1692 Clematis brachiata Thunb., climber, 328 Ranunculus multifidus Forssk., forb, 330 MENISPERMACEAE Cissampelos torulosa E. Mey. ex Harv., climber, 1899 LAURACEAE Cassytha ciliolata Nees, twining parasite, 91 filiformis L, twining parasite, 2165* PAPAVERACEAE Argemone subfusiformis G.B. Ownbey, forb, 911* Papaver aculeatum Thunb., forb, 1958 FUMARIACEAE Fumaria muralis Sond. ex Koch, twining forb, 1927 BRASSICACEAE Heliophila elongata (Thunb.) DC., forb, 1041, 1430 rigidiuscula Sond., forb, 360 trifurca Burch, ex DC., forb, 842 Lepidium africanum (Burm. f.) DC. subsp. africanum, forb, 1818 Coronopus didymus (L.) Sm., forb, 1866* Sisymbrium capense Thunb., forb, 1729 orientale L., forb, 1810* Eruca sativa Mill., forb, 1595* cf. Diplotaxis muralis (L.) DC., forb, 1776* Raphanus raphanistrum L., forb, 1928* Rorippa fluviatilis (E. Mey. ex Sond.) Thell. var. caledonica (Sond.) Marais, forb, 1815 var. fluviatilis, forb, 1 752 Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.) Medik., forb, 1124* CAPPARACEAE Capparis sepiaria L. var. citrifolia (Lam.) Toelken, tall shrub, 137, 140, 807 Boscia oleoides (Burch, ex DC.) Toelken, tree, 825 Cadaba aphylla (Thunb.) Wild, shrub, 1797 Maerua cafra (DC.) Pax, tree, 752b racemulosa (DC.) Gilg & Ben., tree, 66 DROSERACEAE Drosera trinervia Spreng., forb, 1501, 1682 CRASSULACEAE Cotyledon campanulata Marloth, succulent, 930 cuneata Thunb., succulent, 1423 e orbiculata L, succulent, 627, 718 velutina Hook, f., succulent, 761 woodii Schonl. & Bak. f, succulent, 79, 619, 1624b Kalanchoe rotundifolia (Haw.) Haw., succulent, 133, 817, 1418 Crassula arborescens (Mill) Willd. subsp. arborescens, succulent shrub, 618 capitella Thunb. subsp. thyrsiflora (Thunb.) Toelken, succulent, 708 cordata Thunb., succulent, 477, 858, 1787 ericoides Haw. subsp. ericoides, succulent, 467, 1306, 1432 expansa (Dryand.) Ait. subsp. expansa, succulent, 815, 1151 1638 lactea Soland., succulent, 52, 624, 1822 latibracteata Toelken, succulent, 640 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 227 mesembryanthemoides (Haw.) Dietr. subsp. hispida (Haw.) Toelken, 25, 1465 subsp. mesembryanthemoides, succulent, 812, 1565 muscosa L. cf. var. muscosa, succulent, 144 nemorosa (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Endl. ex Ml alp. , succulent, 76 nudicaulis L. var. nudicaulis, succulent, 1 762 var. platyphylla (Harv.) Toelken, succulent, 49, 209, 796, 855 obovata Haw. var. obovata, succulent, 253, 1464 orbicularis L., succulent, 366, 473 ovata (Mill) Druce, succulent, 1641 pellucida L. subsp. brachypetala (Drege ex Harv.)Toelken, succulent, 1578 subsp. marginalis (Dryand. in Ait.) Toelken, succulent, 1591, 1642 perfoliata L. var. coccinea (Sweet) Rowley, succulent, 860a, 1230 var. minor (Haw.) Rowley, succulent, 1426, 1457 var. perfoliata, succulent, 1 783 perforata Thunb., succulent, 444, 540, 1626 pubescens Thunb. subsp. radicans (Haw.) Toelken, succulent, 816 subsp. rattrayi (Schonl. & Bak. f.) Toelken, succulent, 1421, 156 7 rogersii Schonl., succulent, 1819, 2070 rupestris Thunb. subsp. rupestris, succulent, 37, 151, 260 tetragona L. subsp. connivens (Schonl.) Toelken, succulent, 1804 subsp. lignescens Toelken, succulent, 1353, 1 772 subsp. robusta (Toelken) Toelken, succulent, 823 vaginata Eckl. & Zeyh. subsp. vaginata, succulent, 1530, 2104 sp. cf. C. capensis (L.) Baill., succulent forb, 1488 Adromischus cristatus (Haw.) Lem. var. cristatus, succulent, 700, 1481 sphenophyllus C.A. Sm., succulent, 852, 1319 MONTINIACEAE Montinia caryophyllacea Thunb., shrub, 181 PITTOSPORACEAE Pittosporum viridiflorum Sims, tree, 150, 792 CUNONIACEAE Cunonia capensis L., tree, 248 HAMAMELIDACEAE Trichocladus ellipticus Eckl. & Zeyh. ex Walp., tree, 68, 287 ROSACEAE Rubus pinnatus Willd., scandent shrub, 750 rigidus Sm., scandent shrub, 1275 Alchemilla capensis Thunb., forb, 190, 2123 Agrimonia odorata Mill., shrub, 1242* Cliffortia burchellii Stapf, shrub, 185 ilicifolia L. var. ilicifolia, shrub, 409 linearifolia Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 199, 1305, 2168 paucistaminea Weim., shrub, 250, 421, 746 serpyllifolia Cham. & Schlechtd., shrub, 1502 strobilifera Murray, shrub, 32, 344, 1161 FABACEAE Acacia caffra (Thunb.) Willd., tree, 6 7 karroo Hayne, tree, 315 Schotia afra (L.) Thunb. var. afra, tree, 542 latifolia Jacq., tree, 148, 1833 Calpurnea aurea (Ait.) Benth. subsp. sylvatica (Burch.) Brummitt, small tree, 528, 1757 Podalyria burchellii DC., shrub, 7, 393, 598, 1433b Rafnia elliptica Thunb., shrub, 615, 1066 Lotononis cytisoides (E. Mey.) Benth., shrub, 494 pungens Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 2196 Asp ala thus biflora E. Mey. subsp. biflora, shrublet, 701 chortophila Eckl. & Zeyh . subsp. chortophila, shrub, 101, 171, 988, 1118, 1436 subsp. kougaensis Dahlg., shrub, 468 frankenioides DC., shrub, 207, 428, 1290 lactea Thunb. subsp. adelphea (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Dahlg., shrub, 1564, 1831 laricifolia Berg. , shrub, 845 spinosa L. subsp. spinosa, shrub, 1303, 1440 teres Eckl. <6 Zeyh. subsp. teres, shrub, 431, 1329, 2149 Buchenroedera multiflora Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 1478, 1523 Melolobium canescens Benth., shrub, 927 Crotalaria capensis Jacq. , small tree, 1863 Argyrolobium collinum Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 645, 1348, 1441, 1535, 1856, 2042 crassifolium Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 464, 1522, 1838 molle Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 1456, 1483, 2131 tomentosum (Andr.) Druce, shrub, 321, 1089, 1358b, 1607 tuberosum Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 1447 sp. cf. A. pilosum Harv., forb, 1455, 1512, 2132 Medicago laciniata (L.) Mill., forb, 1364 Indigofera acutisepala Conrath, shrub, 1063, 1894 denudata Thunb., shrub, 94, 234, 495 disticha Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 1420, 1619 fastigiata E. Mey., shrub, 1170 hedyantha Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 590, 1209, 2065, 2118 heterophylla Thunb., forb, 1349 sessilifolia DC., shrub, 1413 stenophylla Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 509, 834, 1326 stipularis Link, forb, 500, 600, 859, 126 7 stricta L. f., shrub, 1205, 1 700, 2164 sp. cf. I. brachystachya E. Mey., shrub, 251 Psoralea asarina (Berg.) Salter, shrub, 1474, 1492 glabra E. Mey., shrub, 208, 1096, 1179, 149 7, 1581 pinnata L., shrub or small tree, 90, 785 Otholobium prodiens C.H. Stirton, shrub, 270, 774 Tephrosia capensis (Jacq.) Pers. var. acutiflora E. Mey., suffrutex, 747 var. angustifolia E. Mey., suffrutex, 152, 696, 1027 var. capensis, suffrutex, 2166 grandiflora (Ait.) Pers., shrub, 2154 macropoda (E. Mey.) Harv., shrub, 1051, 1169 semiglabra Sond., suffrutex, 2009 Sutherland^ frutescens (L.) R. Br., shrub, 2193 Lessertia cf. stenoloba E. Mey., forb, 1811 Zornia capensis Pers., forb, 111 7 Rhynchosia caribaea (Jacq.) DC., climber, 327, 824, 1383 cooperi (Harv. ex Bak. f.) Bum Davy, climber, 374 totta (Thunb.) DC., forb, 1061, 1130, 1425, 1446, 1487 Eriosema salignum E. Mey., forb, 721, 861, 1039, 1207 Dipogon lignosus (L.) Verde., climber, 1191 GERANIACEAE Geranium caffrum Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 2122 flanaganii Knuth, forb, 2155 incanum Bunn. f. var. multifidum (Sweet) Hilliard & Burtt, forb, 386 Monsonia emarginata (L. f.) L’Herit., forb, 730, 116 7 Erodium cicutarium (L.) L’Herit. ex Ait., forb, 1809* Pelargonium alchemilloides (L.) L’Herit., forb, 758, 1064, 1358a graveolens L ’Herit., forb ,51,329, 775 cf. grossularioides (L.) L’Herit., forb, 903 heracleifolium Lodd., forb, 1462 luridum (Andr.) Sweet, forb, 1310 multicaule Jacq. var. multicaule, forb, 390, 1529, 1699 odoratissimum (L.) L'Herit., forb, 1643 panduriforme Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 915 peltatum (L.) L’Herit., creeper, 620, 1561 pulverulentum Colv. ex Sweet, forb, 1335, 1912 quercifolium (L. f.) L’Herit., forb, 913 reniforme Curt. , forb, 205, 396 ribifolium Jacq. , forb, 31, 613, 830 schizopetalum S weet, forb, 1139 sidifolium (Thunb.) Kunth, forb, 1285 zonale (L.) L’Herit., forb, 629 228 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) OXALIDACEAE Oxalis bifi urea Lodd, geophyte, 1450, 1524, 2103, 2112 caprina L., geophyte, 1351 comiculata L., geophyte, 1743* cf. setosa L., geophyte, 1454 smithiana Eckl. <6 Zeyh., geophyte, 1994 stellata EckL & Zeyh., geophyte, 1189 LINACEAE Linum thunbergii Eckl. & Zeyh., forb, 397, 608, 1445, 1498 ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Zygophyllum foetidum Schrad & WendL, shrub, 2195 RUTACEAE Zanthoxylum capense (Thunb.) Harv., tree, 108, 159 Calodendrum capense (L. f.) Thunb., tree, 109 Agathosma acutissima Duemmer, shrub, 416, 1552 capensis (L.) Duemmer, shrub, 1539 cf. peglerae Duemmer, shrub, 21 91 puberula (Steud.) Fourc., shrub, 567, 828, 1330 venusta (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Pillans, shrub, 269, 354 Coleonema pulchellum I. Williams, shrub, 564, 2001 Vepris lanceolata (Lam.) G. Don, tree, 136 Clausena anisata (Willd) Hook. f. ex Benth., tree, 1592 PTAEROXYLACEAE Ptaeroxylon obliquum (Thunb.) Radik., tree, 142 MELIACEAE Melia azedarach L„ tree, 1933* POLYGALACEAE Polygala asbestina Burch., shrublet, 1385, 1774 fruticosa Berg. , shrub, 180, 414 hispida Burch., shrublet, 1204 illepida E. Mey., shrublet, 961, 1104, 1154, 1291, 1511 microlopha DC., shrublet, 1826 myrtifolia L., shrub, 157, 879, 1624a uncinata E. Mey. ex Meisn., shrublet, 958, 1537 Muraltia alopecuroides (L.) DC., shrublet, 280, 570, 850, 2163 ericifolia DC., shrub, 191, 426, 1484 EUPHORBIACEAE Phyllanthus burchellii Muell. Arg., forb, 950a maderaspatensis L., forb, 950b verrucosus Thunb., shrub, 113, 413 Croton rivularis Muell. Arg., tree, 53 Leidesia procumbens (L.) Prain, forb, 782 Acalypha ecklonii Baill., forb, 907, 979, 1896, 1930 glabrata Thunb. var. glabrata, shrub, 54, 797 peduncularis E. Mey. ex Meisn., forb, 1 724 punctata Meisn., forb, 1125 Ctenomeria capensis (Thunb.) Harv. ex Sond., climber, 2010, 1358c Dalechampia capensis Spreng. f., climber, 1834 Ricinus communis L., forb, 912* Jatropha capensis (L. f.) Sond, shrub, 107 Clutia affinis Sond., shrub, 38 alatemoides L., shrub, 172, 459, 492 ericoides Thunb., shrub, 474 heterophylla Thunb., shrub, 1040 pulchella L., shrub, 41 7 Suregada africana (Sond.) Kuntze, shrub or small tree, 1880 Euphorbia heptagona L., succulent, 616 kraussiana Bemh. , forb, 104, 754 ledienii Berger, succulent, 527, 826 mauritanica L., succulent, 105 polygona Haw., succulent, 153 cf. pugniformis Boiss., succulent, 1288 silenifolia (Haw.) Sweet, geophyte, 48, 1 94 striata Thunb., forb, 659, 1580 tetragona Haw., succulent tree, 102 triangularis Desf, succulent tree, 631 Chamaesyce inaequilatera (Sond.) Sojak, forb, 883 ANACARDIACEAE Harpephyllum caffrum Bemh. ex Krauss, tree, 33, 193 Schinus molle L., tree, 2194* Loxostylis alata Spreng. f. ex Reichb., tree, 154 Rhus cf. albomarginata Sond., shrub, rare, 866 chirindensis Bak. f forma legatii (Schonl.) R. & A. Fernandes, tree, 63, 229 dentata Thunb. shrub, 36, 491, 1279 fastigiata Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 603, 771, 1298 incisa L. f. var. effusa (Presl) R. Fernandes, tree, 465 lancea L. f., tree, 928 longispina Eckl. & Zeyh., tree, 633, 939 lucida L. forma lucida, shrub, 463, 689 p aliens Eckl. & Zeyh., shrub, 120, 216, 243, 512 pyroides Burch, var. pyroides, tree, 61, 595 refracta Eckl. & Zeyh., tree, 158, 518, 558 rehmanniana Engl. var. uitenhagensis (Eckl. & Zeyh.) ined, tree, 244 rigida Mill. var. rigida, shrub, 15, 740, 1453 rosmarinifolia Vahl, shrub, 169 AQUIFOLIACEAE Hex mitis (L.) Radik., tree, 127 CELASTRACEAE Maytenus acuminata (L. f.) Loes. var. acuminata, tree, 14, 441 capitata (E. Mey. ex Sond.) Marais, shrub, 551, 1403 heterophylla (Eckl. & Zeyh.) N.K.B. Robson, shrub or tree, 223, 309, 442 linearis (L. f.) Marais, shrub, 2197 nemorosa (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Marais, tree, 56, 62, 316, 440, 1001 undata (Thunb.) Blakelock, tree, 523, 53 7 Putterlickia pyracantha (L.) Szyszyl, shrub, 111, 562, 635, 1402 Pterocelastrus tricuspidatus (Lam.) Sond, shrub or tree, 198, 513, 857, 1656 Cassine aethiopica Thunb., tree, 246, 302, 534, 856, 1594, 1600 crocea (Thunb.) Kuntze, tree, 529 peragua L., shrub or tree, 85, 306, 446 reticulata (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Codd, shrub, 1115, 1555 tetragona (L. f.) Loes., scandent shrub, 300 Pleurostylia capensis (Turcz.) Oliv., tree, 77, 301, 517a, 1609 ICACINACEAE Apodytes dimidiata E. Mey. ex Am. subsp. dimidiata, tree, 284 SAPINDACEAE Allophylus decipiens (Sond) Radik., tree, 95, 457, 1 755 Atalaya capensis R.A. Dyer, tree, 949 Smellophyllum capense Radik., tree, 196 Pappea capensis Eckl. & Zeyh., tree, 132 Dodonaea angustifolia L. /, small tree, 565 Hippobromus pauciflorus (L. f.) Radik., tree, 122, 292 MELIANTHACEAE Melianthus comosus Vahl, shrub, 879, 919 RHAMNACEAE Scutia myrtina (Burm. f.) Kurz, woody climber, 149 Noltea africana (L.) Reichb. f., tree, 60 Phylica axillaris Lam. var. microphylla (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Pillans, shrub, 4, 197,201,411,674, 1241 paniculata Willd., small tree, 273, 429 Helinus integrifolius (Lam.) Kuntze, climber, 1924 VITACEAE Rhoicissus digitata (L. f.) Gilg & Brandt, woody climber, 70, 117 tomentosa (Lam.) Wild & Drum., woody climber, 143 tridentata (L. f.) Wild & Drum., woody climber, 13, 333, 438, 589 sp., shrub, 1800 Cyphostemma cirrhosum (Thunb.) Desc. ex Wild & Drum., suc- culent climber, 922 Both alia 18,2 (1988) 229 TILIACEAE Grewia occidentalis L., shiub or small tree, 103, 430, 451 robusta Burch., shrub or small tree, 545, 548 MALVACEAE Abutilon sonneratianum (Cav.) Sweet, shrub, 556, 1073 Malvastrum coromandelianum (L.j Garcke, shrub, 1 731 * Sida dregei Burtt Davy, forb, 947 ternata L. f, forb, 559, 1078 Pavonia praemorsa (L. f.) Cav., shrub, 320, 1612 Hibiscus aethiopicus L. var. aethiopicus, forb, 1252 var. angustifolius (Eckl. K. U DRY GRASSVELD POLYGALA POLfGALA BOWKERAE HARV . ER I CAEFOL I A D.C. I ENDEMIC GRASSVELD DRY GRASSVELD DRY GRASSVELD RHUS FRASER I SCHONL . U GRASSVELD GRASSVELD 274 of threatened plants would be aided by this data card and should follow a standard checklist of items to be examined. Taylor & Edwards (1972) point out that if we are to succeed in conserving these species, standardized data will have to be sent to a central co-ordinating authori- ty which will compile and distribute the information. Henifin et al. (1981) developed a detailed checklist from which Hall et al. (1980) adapted one for use in the west- ern Cape survey. This standard checklist should be used to standardize information obtained in field surveys in the eastern Cape. Rates of extinction must also be monitored, but at present we are aware of only one case, that of Gladiolus alatus L. var. algoensis Herb., which was last recorded over a hundred years ago. Hall et al. (1980) indicate that extinction rates may have increased during the past 200 years although this finding has been strongly affected by periodically varying collecting intensities. Threat factors No studies have been carried out to show which or even how many species are threatened by the various threat factors in the eastern Cape. There are three major forms of threat on natural habitats in this region. They are direct human impacts, indirect human impacts and natural pressures. Direct human impact (i) Agriculture: in the eastern Cape agriculture appears to be affecting the flora most seriously. Bad grazing methods have been responsible for the reduction of cover in all the vegetation types and have reached alarm- ing proportions in the more arid areas of the eastern Cape. Many species have been eliminated, species com- position has changed and loss of soil has occurred in large areas of the eastern Cape owing to overgrazing (A.J. Aucamp pers. comm.). Aucamp also estimates that approximately 150000 ha of thicket in the Uitenhage District is so badly overgrazed that it will never recover. Overgrazing is possibly the major threat to eastern Cape flora. Bush-clearing for crop cultivation has also been re- sponsible for major reductions in certain species, espe- cially in the higher rainfall areas of the eastern Cape. The Department of Agriculture and Water Supply (A.J. Aucamp pers. comm.) have found that ill-planned bush- clearing can cause up to nearly 35 tonnes of soil to be lost per ha per year. The natural rate of soil regeneration is only approximately 1 tonne per ha per year. Although burning is a useful tool in veld management (Trollope 1973, 1974), the frequency of fires is critical. Excessive and uncontrolled burning, especially in the Fynbos and the Grassland veld types, can lead to unde- sirable changes in species composition. (ii) Development of urban areas for industry and resi- dential purposes is also responsible for increased pres- sure on plant communities. Some important and species- rich communities notably in the East London (Potters Pass) and Port Elizabeth areas (Swartkops region) are being directly threatened. Road building, mining and Bothalia 18,2 (1988) quarrying are minor threats to vegetation in the eastern Cape. However, care should be taken to minimize their impact on the surrounding vegetation. Exploitation such as flower picking, wood collecting and plant collecting (for horticultural purposes) is having devastating effects on certain species. Cycads ( Encephalartos spp.) are in- discriminately collected by many people in spite of restrictions, and in certain areas (e.g. the national road through the Fish River Valley) are sold to passing motor- ists. Other species that are threatened by collectors in- clude many of the Liliaceae, Orchidaceae and succulents such as some Euphorbia species (e.g. Euphorbia obesa Hook, f.) and species of the Mesembryanthemaceae (Everard 1985). Indirect human impact Indirect human impacts include pressures from alien plant invasion, erosion and possibly pollution. (i) Alien plant invasion: the exotic plant species which menace natural vegetation in the eastern Cape include four Australian acacias: Acacia cyclops A. Cunn. ex G. Don, A. longifolia (Andr.) Willd., A. mearnsii De Wild, and A. saligna (Labill.) Wendl. (Stirton 1978); Pinus pinaster Ait. (Jacot Guillarmod 1980); Hakea sericea Schrad. (Jacot Guillarmod in press); three species of cacti — Opuntia aurantiaca Lindl., O. ficus-indica (L.) Mill, and O. imbricata (Haw.) DC, (Schonland 1924); nassella tussock — Stipa trichotoma Nees (Steinke 1965); water hyacinth — Eichhomia crassipes (Mart.) Solms-Laub. (Jacot Guillarmod 1979); water fern — Azolla filiculoides Lam. (Jacot Guillarmod in press) and Sesbania punicea (Cav.) Benth. (Pienaar 1977). There are several other exotic species present in the eastern Cape that are not yet fully invasive but are threats. Among these are Lantana camara L., Solanum mauritianum Scop., Salvinia molesta Mitchell and possibly some Eucalyptus species. Many rare indigenous species are threatened by these spreading exotics, a good example being Oldenburgia arbuscula DC. which is threatened by spreading Pinus pinaster, Hakea sericea, Acacia mearnsii and A. longifolia. (ii) Erosion, especially in areas where grazing pressures have been heavy, is also a threat to the natural vegeta- tion. Sheet erosion in the Karoo areas with the asso- ciated loss of topsoil and the exposure of roots of many woody species is causing a reduction in the num- ber of woody species in these areas (B. Hobson pers. comm.). Areas of the Ciskei are also very badly affected where topsoil loss has led to a deterioration in grasslands and other veld types (pers. obs.). (iii) Pollution is a threat to aquatic and some other habi- tats. The extent of this threat is not clear at this stage; however there is a danger that the situation could dete- riorate rapidly especially in habitats close to urban areas, e.g. Swartkops Estuary near Port Elizabeth. Natural pressures Natural threats which include pathogens, natural fires and genetic factors, may only become a real threat when populations have been drastically reduced in size. Studies to show the chief patterns of threat factors have been 275 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) conducted for taxa in various areas in the western Cape (Hall & Veldhuis 1985), however their impact on taxa in the eastern Cape will only become clear when the threat- ened plants are investigated and monitored in the field. Conservation The International Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Animals and Plants (CITES) which is administered by the IUCN states that ‘wild fauna and flora, in their many beautiful and varied forms, are an irreplaceable part of the natural systems of the earth which must be protected for this and the gene- rations to come’ (Anon. 1973). Lucas (1976) points out that the ever-growing value of wild fauna and flora from aesthetic, scientific, cultural, recreational and economic points of view is being noted by many countries. Hall & Veldhuis (1985) present many convincing reasons for conserving rare species and hence maintaining natural diversity. They also discuss conservation strategies in detail. They note that re-establishing populations at new sites or holding small samples of their natural popula- tions in botanical gardens should be last-resort actions as plants are often put under many adverse pressures such as alien selection forces and hybridization in these situations. Seed banks for storing seeds are also a useful method of saving species from extinction, although many factors such as gene pool sizes need to be consider- ed when establishing seed banks. The best insurance against extinction is the conservation of natural habitats (Raven 1976; Hall et al. 1980). With the present land use requirements many of these habitats will have to be conserved in the form of sanctuaries or conservation areas. This may not be ideal but appears to be the only remaining practical option for conserving many species. When planning these sanctuaries many authors (Mac- Arthur & Wilson 1963; Diamond 1975; Diamond & May 1976; Game 1980; Gilpin & Diamond 1980; Poynton & Roberts 1985) advocate that island biogeo- graphical theory should be incorporated into the geo- metric design of the boundaries. Despite the occasional dissenters (Simberloff & Abele 1975) who feel that the application of the theory to conservation practice is pre- mature, the overwhelming consensus is that the theory’s tenets need to be considered in the context of reserve planning. It has generally been proposed that reserves should be large, clumped, roundish and connected by corridors. Such recommendations are usually based on the notion that any geometrical consideration that in- creases immigration rates and/or decreases extinction rates or minimizes the perimeter to area ratio is useful. CONCLUSIONS Preliminary investigations show that there are 662 threatened vascular plant taxa in the eastern Cape. Nine- ty-one percent of these fall into the I and U categories which is indicative of the lack of information and recent collection records available on the eastern Cape flora. In order to clarify most of these cases and to gain more information on the nature and severity of the various threat factors, a long-term and ongoing monitoring pro- gramme needs to be initiated. This programme should follow the guidelines reported by Hall et al. (1980). The ultimate success in conserving most of the threatened taxa lies in the conservation of viable habitats from which the threat factors have been eliminated. Research is required to identify suitable habitats, understand essential processes and formulate management schemes if many of these taxa are going to be saved from extinc- tion. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Shirley Jackson and student assistants are thanked for preparing the initial list of threatened taxa and for much of the herbarium work. The staff of the Albany Herbarium are thanked for co-operation and assistance. Prof. R.A. Lubke is thanked for supervision during the study and for comments on a draft of this paper. Michelle Everard is warmly thanked for her help in the preparation of this paper. This study was supported financially by the Nature Conservation Research Section of the National Program- me for Ecosystem Research. REFERENCES ANONYMOUS 1973. Convention on international trade in en- dangered species of wild fauna and flora. Special Supple- ment IUCN Bulletin 4: 1-12. BRUTON, M.N. & GESS, F.W. in press. Towards an environ- mental plan for the eastern Cape. Proceedings of a Sym- posium, Grahamstown, Rhodes University. CHOLEWA, A.F. & HENDERSON, D.M. 1984. A survey and assessment of the rare vascular plants of the Idaho Natio- nal Engineering Laboratory Site. Great Basin Naturalist 44: 140-144. COWLING, R.M. 1983. Phytochorology and vegetation history in the south-eastern Cape, South Africa. Journal of Bio- geography 10: 393-419. CROVELLO, T.J. 1976. Computers as an aid to solving endanger- ed species problems. In G.T. Prance, The status of endang- ered plant species and environments in the western hemis- phere. New York Botanical Garden. DAY, R.T. 1983. A survey and census of the endangered Furbish lousewort, Pedicularis furbishiae, in New Brunswick. Cana- dian Field Naturalist 97: 325-327. DIAMOND, J.M. 1975. The island dilemma: lessons of modem biogeographic studies for the design of natural reserves. Biological Conservation 7: 129-146. DIAMOND, J.M. & MAY, R.M. 1976. Island biography and the design of natural reserves. In R.M. May, Theoretical eco- logy. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford. EVERARD, D.A. 1985. The conservation status of some unique plant communities in the eastern Cape. M.Sc thesis, Rhodes University, Grahamstown. FOXX, T.S. & TIERNEY, G.D. 1980. Status of the flora of the Los Alamos National Environmental Research Park. Los Alamos National Laboratory, New Mexico. GAME, M. 1980. Best shape for nature reserves. Nature 287: 630-631. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., RETIEF, E. & SMOOK, L. 1984. Inten- sity of plant collecting in southern Africa. Bothalia 15: 131-138. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. & ROBINSON, E.R. 1981. Phytogeo- graphy and speciation in the vegetation of the eastern Cape. Bothalia 13: 467-472. GILPIN, M.E. & DIAMOND, J.M. 1980. Subdivisions of nature reserves and the maintenance of species diversity. Nature 285: 567-569. GOLDBLATT, P. 1978. An analysis of the flora of southern Afri- ca; its characteristics, relationships and origins. Annals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 65: 369-436. HALL, A.V. 1972a Computer based data banking for taxonomic collections. Taxon 21: 13-25. HALL, A.V. 1972b. The use of a data banking system for taxon- omic collections. Contribution from the Bolus Herbarium 5: 1-7. HALL, A.V. 1974. Museum specimen record data storage and re- trieval. Taxon 23: 23-28. 276 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) HALL, A.V. 1981. Information handling for southern Africa’s rare and endangered species survey. In L.E. Morse & M.S. Henifln, Rare plant conservation: geographical data or- ganization: 167-184. The New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, New York. HALL, A.V., DE WINTER, M., DE WINTER, B. & VAN OOS- TERHOUT, S.A.M. 1980. Threatened plants of southern Africa. South African National Scientific Programmes Report No. 45. HALL, A.V. & VELDHUIS, H.A. 1985. South African Red Data Book: plants — fynbos and karoo biomes. South African National Scientific Programmes Report No. 45. HENIFIN, M.S., MORSE, L.E., REVEAL, J.L, MACBRYDE, B. & LAWYER, J.I. 1981. Guidelines for the preparation of status reports on rare or endangered plant species. In L.E. Morse & M.S. Henifin, Rare plant conservation: geographi- cal data organization. The New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, New York. JACOT GUILLARMOD, A. 1979. Water weeds in southern Afri- ca. Aquatic Botany 6: 377-391. JACOT GUILLARMOD, A. 1980. Exotic weeds and macchia vegetation in the eastern Cape. Eastern Cape Naturalist 69: 21-23. JACOT GUILLARMOD, A. in press. Exotic plant invasion, man’s activities and indigenous vegetation. In M.N. Bruton & F.W. Gess, Towards an environmental plan for the eastern Cape. Grahamstown, Rhodes University. LUBKE, R.A., EVERARD, D.A. & JACKSON, S. 1986. The biomes of the eastern Cape with emphasis on their con- servation. Bothalia 16: 251-261. LUCAS, G.L. 1976. Conservation: recent developments in inter- national co-operation and legislation. In J.B. Simmons et al.. Conservation of threatened plants: 271-303. Plenum Press, New York. MACARTHUR, R.H. & WILSON, E.O. 1963. An equilibrium theory of insular zoogeography. International Journal of Organic Evolution 17: 373-387. MAGILL, R.E., GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., MORRIS, J.W. & GON- SALVES, P. 1983. PRECIS, the Botanical Research Insti- tute herbarium data bank. Bothalia 14: 481-495. MCCOY, E.D. 1981. Rare, threatened and endangered plant species of south-west Florida and potential O.S.C. activity impacts. Biological Services Program, Florida. MILEWSKI, A.V. 1977. Habitat of Restionaceae endemic to west- ern Cape coastal flats. Journal of South African Botany 43: 233-241. MILEWSKI, A.V. 1978a. Habitat of threatened Proteaceae ende- mic to western Cape coastal flats. Journal of South Afri- can Botany 44: 55-65. MILEWSKI, A.V. 1978b. Habitat of threatened species of Ser- ruria and Protea endemic to western Cape coastal flats. Journal of South African Botany 44: 363-371. MORRIS, J.W. & GLEN, H.F. 1978. PRECIS, the National Her- barium of South Africa (PRE) computerized information system. Taxon 27: 449-462. PIENAAR, K. 1977. Sesbania punicea (Cav.) Benth., the hand- some plant terrorist. Veld & Flora 63: 17-18. POYNTON, J.C. & ROBERTS, D.C. 1985. Urban open space planning in South Africa: a biogeographical perspective. South African Journal of Science 81: 33-37. RAVEN, P.H. 1976. Ethics and attitudes. In J.B. Simmons et al., Conservation of threatened plants: 155-179. Plenum Press, New York. RENNIE, J.V.L. 1945. The Eastern Province as a geographical region. South African Geographical Journal 27: 1-27. SCHONLAND, S. 1924. The jointed cactus. Journal of the De- partment of Agriculture 4: 2-12. SIMBERLOFF, D.S. & ABELE, L.G. 1975. Island biogeogra- phy theory and conservation practice. Science 191: 285- 286. STEINKE, T.D. 1965. Nassella tussock grass — dangerous new weed. Farming in South Africa 41: 9—11. STIRTON, C.H. (ed.) 1978. Plant invaders — beautiful but danger- ous. Cape Provincial Department of Nature and Environ- mental Conservation. TAYLOR, H.C. & EDWARDS, D. 1972. A proposed inventory of the conservation status of threatened South African plant species. Unpublished. TROLLOPE, W.S.W. 1973. Fire as a method of controlling mac- chia (Fynbos) vegetation in the Amatola Mountains of the eastern Cape. Proceedings of the Grassland Society of southern Africa 8: 35-41. TROLLOPE, W.S.W. 1974. Role of fire in preventing bush en- croachment in the eastern Cape. Proceedings of the Grass- land Society of southern Africa 9: 67-72. WERGER, M.J.A. 1978. Biogeographical divisions of southern Africa. In M.J.A. Werger, Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa. Junk, The Hague. WERGER, M.J.A. & COETZEE, B.J. 1978. The Sudano-Zambe- zian Region. In M.J.A. Werger, Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa: 301-462. Junk, The Hague. WHITE, F. (ed.) 1983. Vegetation of Africa. UNESCO/AETFAT/ UNSO, Paris. WRIGHT, A.E. 1983. Conservation status of the Three Kings Is- lands endemic flora in 1982. Record of the Auckland In- stitute and Museum 20: 175-184. APPENDIX List of recently extinct, endangered, vulnerable and rare plant taxa of the eastern Cape. * Taxa endemic to the eastern Cape Recently extinct Gladiolus alatus L. var. algoensis Herb. Endangered Encephalartos latifrons Lehm. * Herschelia lugens (H. BoL) Kraenzl var. nigrescens Linder Euphorbia obesa Hook. f. * Vulnerable Encephalartos arenarius R.A. Dyer* caffer (Thunb.) Lehm. cycadifolius (Jacq.) Lehm. horridus (Jacq.j Lehm.* longifolius (Jacq.) Lehm. princeps R.A. Dyer trispinosus (Hook.) R.A. Dyer* Marsilea schelpeana Launert Cyperus brevis Boeck. Aloe reynoldsii Letty Kniphofia rooperi (Moore) Lem. Cyrtanthus staadensis Schonl. Dierama pulcherrimum (Hook, f ) Bak. Eulophia platypetala Lindl. Arundinaria tessellata (Nees) Munro Helichrysum recurvatum (L. f. ) Thunb. Rare Encephalartos altensteinii Lehm. friderici-guilielmi Lehm. lehmannii Lehm. villosus Lehm. Cyathea dregei Kunze Kniphofia praecox Bak. subsp. bruceae Codd Clivia nobilis Lindl. Crinum campanulatum Herb. lineare L. f. variabile (Jacq.) Herb. Cyrtanthus clavatus (L ’Herit.) R.A. Dyer helictus Lehm. huttonii Bak. smithiae Watt ex Harv. spiralis Burch, ex Ker-Gawl. Bobartia orientalis J.B. Gillett* Dietes bicolor (Steud.) Sweet ex Klatt Gladiolus gueinzii Kunze oppositiflorus Herb, subsp. salmoneus (Bak.) Oberm. Strehtzia juncea Link Acrolophia micrantha (Lindl) Schltr. & H. Bol. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 277 Anochilus flanaganii (H. Bol.) Rolfe Disa tysonii H. Bol Crassula aiborescens (Mill.) Willd. subsp. undulatifolia Toelken socialis Schonl. * Elephantorrhiza sp. Diosma passerinoides Steud. Commiphora harveyi (Engl) Engl Euphorbia jansenvillensis Nel ledienii Berger var. dregei N.E. Br. Greyia flanaganii H. Bol Sterculia alexandri Harv. Cassipourea flanaganii (Schinz) Alston Cussonia gamtoosensis Strey* Myrsine pillansii Adamson Brachystelma meyerianum Schltr. Trichocaulon annulatum N.E. Br. Iboza barberae N.E. Br. Streptocarpus kentaniensis Britten & Story Gardenia thunbergii L. f. Euryops latifolius B. Nord. Bothalia 18,2: 279-287 (1988) Description of a proteoid-restioid stand in Mesic Mountain Fynbos of the south-western Cape and some aspects of its ecology G. DAVIS* Keywords: Chondropetalum hookerianum, duplex soil. Erica cristata, Fynbos Biome, Leucadendron xanthoconus, mediterranean- type climate, Mountain Fynbos, soil nutrients ABSTRACT A description of the community and its climatic and edaphic environments is given for a stand of Mountain Fynbos vegetation codominated by Leucadendron xanthoconus and Chondropetalum hookerianum . The paper categorizes aspects of the study site either according to existing classifications, or by comparison with other fyn- bos systems. Comparison of rainfall and temperature data with those collected at an agricultural research station in the region indicated high variability in the spatial and temporal pattern of precipitation, and an air temperature regime which was influenced by the topography. Analysis of vegetation data revealed a species richness lower than other fynbos communities, but a species turnover of similar magnitude. A list of flowering plants and ferns found in the stand is appended. The soil of Table Mountain Group origin comprised a colluvial A-E horizon with a well defined stone-line, and residual B and C horizons of shale origin. It had low pH and nutrient status, with a high measured concentration of aluminium, especially in the B horizon. UITTREKSEL ’n Bergfynbos-plantegroeigemeenskap met Leucadendron xanthoconus en Chondropetalum hookerianum as dominante plantsoorte, asook die kKmaats- en edafiese omgewing daarvan, word beskryf. Die artikel kategoriseer aspekte van die studieterrein of volgens huidige klassifikasies of deur vergelyking met ander fynbossisteme. Reen- val- en temperatuurdata is met die van ’n landbounavorsingstasie in dieselfde streek vergelyk. Hierdie vergelykings het aangetoon dat die neerslag binne die streek baie veranderlik ten opsigte van ruimte en tyd was, en dat tempe- ratuur deur die topografie beinvloed is. Ontleding van die plantegroeidata het aangetoon dat die spesierykheid laer as die van ander gemeenskappe in die fynbos was, maar dat die spesieomset ongeveer dieselfde was. ’n Lys van blomplante en varings wat in die stand aangetref word, word bygevoeg. Die grond van Tafelberggroep-oorsprong het uit ’n kolluviale A-E-horison met ’n duidelike kliplyn, en residuele B- en C-horisonne van skalie-oorsprong bestaan. Die pH- en voedingstofstatus was laag, met ’n hoe aluminiumkonsentrasie, veral in die B-horison. INTRODUCTION Mountain Fynbos is the best preserved vegetation type in the Fynbos Biome of the Cape (Moll & Bossi 1984). The poor, highly leached soils of these upland sites (Kruger 1979) have proved unsuitable for conventional agriculture, and direct commercial utilization is restrict- ed almost entirely to silviculture and the wildflower in- dustry. As a large-scale international trade, the latter is relatively young, and production techniques are in many instances still experimental (Davis 1984). It is expected that wildflower producers will increasingly favour cultivation over the traditional veld-harvesting method of floricultural production to assist in control- ling product quality (Brits et al. 1983). Those parts of the relatively unutilized Mountain Fynbos which con- tain the preferred habitats of many of the showy pro- teaceous species, are seen as the logical locations for this branch of agricultural development. This article is based on observations made during the first phase of a study into the possible effects of physical disturb- ance by agricultural tillage on natural Mountain Fynbos. The primary objective of this paper is to describe the chosen study site in terms of the existing classifica- tions and other frames of reference normally used for * Experimental Ecology Division, Botanical Research Institute, Private Bag X16, Rondebosch 7700. MS. received: 1987.10.22. fynbos systems. Where this is not possible, or is not appropriate, comparison with data from other fynbos studies is attempted. The rationale for these exercises is two-fold. Firstly, recognition of common sets of at- tributes, especially ecologically functional ones, is a necessary basis for formulating the management strate- gies required for utilization and conservation of Moun- tain Fynbos vegetation. Secondly, where the classifica- tions used to describe Mountain Fynbos systems are incomplete, the task of workers motivated to update them, is facilitated by available quantitative data. This paper endeavours also to be a small part of that acces- sible repository. STUDY AREA The chosen site is on the south edge of the Grabouw Basin, Caledon District, within a region where quartzite, sandstone and thin bands of shale and conglomerate of the upper Table Mountain Group outcrop, as document- ed on the 1:125 000 geological map of the area (Govern- ment Printer 1 966). It lies on a gentle slope of approxi- mately 8% , with an aspect of 246° and at an altitude of 375 m. It is 10,5 km from the sea on the landward side of a ridge which rises to a maximum height of approxi- mately 500 m. The grid co-ordinates of the site are: 34° 15' 38"S and 19° 6’ 38"E. Until March 1987, the area in which the study site is located was managed by the Directorate of Forestry (Department of Environ- ment Affairs) as a mountain water catchment area. It is 280 now under the control of the Department of Nature and Environmental Conservation (Cape Provincial Adminis- tration). METHODS Development of the study site An experimental plot 50 x 50 m was delineated at the site during 1984. Sample quadrats (2 x 2 m) were delineated at 28 regularly spaced stations, providing a sampling intensity of 4% for the major components of the vegetation. As part of the long-term experimental design the site was cleared by means of a controlled burn in February 1985. Climatic data A weather station was set up on the cleared area and a data-logging device (MC Systems, Cape Town) instal- led. This monitored a set of environmental parameters, including precipitation and air temperature. Regional long-term precipitation data were obtained from records of the Weather Bureau (1985), and from a statistical report issued by the Soil and Irrigation Research Insti- tute (Agrometeorological Division 1983) for the follow- ing stations respectively: Highlands Forest Station (34° 1 7'S; 19° 6'E; 426 m) over the period 1938—1984; and the experimental farm of the Fruit and Fruit Tech- nology Research Institute in Elgin (34° 8'S; 19° 2'E; 305 m) over the period 1963—1983. As an estimate of the long-term mean air temperature at the study site, long-term data from the Elgin Station (Agrometeorolo- gical Division 1983) were adjusted by the differences recorded for this same parameter at the two stations during the period July 1985— June 1986 (see Results). For periods when the data-logging equipment was non-functional (a total time of approximately six weeks during the sample period of July 1985— December 1986), precipitation data recorded at the Highlands Forest Sta- tion, 2,5 km to the south-west, have been used. Means of the monthly totals at these two stations during 1986 agreed to within 1,3%. Temperature data were not aug- mented in this way. Vegetation Mature vegetation was sampled at the 28 stations mentioned above. A 1 x 1 m subquadrat was used for close inspection of the less conspicuous species. A list of all identified species of ferns and flowering plants observed on random scans of the plot and its immediate surroundings (a total area of ± 0,65 ha) is given in the Appendix. Further species recognized as distinct are not recorded because the material found was such that it could not be identified. A single set of nested quadrats (after Whittaker et al. 1979) was marked out in veld adjacent to the study plot for the construction of a species-area curve to per- mit comparison of the site with data from other studies. The number of different species was measured in qua- drats of: 1 mz (10 replicates); 10 m2 (2 replicates); 100 m2 and 1 000 m2 (no replication). Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Age of the stand was estimated by counting the num- ber of nodes on the largest individuals of the dominant shrub species, Leucadendron xanthoconus (Kuntze) K. Schum., and cross-checking against aerial photographic records of the Department of Surveys and Mapping. Soil Description of the soil profile was provided by three shallow soil pits (approximately 0,8 m deep), and a single deeper one (1 ,8 m). For analysis of the physical and chemical characteristics of the soil, samples were taken from the A horizon, the top of the B horizon, and a single sample from saprolitic parent material at 2 m. Each of these samples was air-dried and sieved to 2 mm. Nutrient analyses were performed by the regional Soil Analytic Laboratory of the Department of Agricul- ture and Water Supply (Winter Rainfall Region) at Elsen- burg using methods described by Jackson (1958), Hesse (1971), the Fertilizer Society of South Africa (1974), and Moore & Chapman (1986). Bulk density and field capacity were determined on undisturbed soil cores, and texture on 2 mm sieved samples. As possible factors influencing pedogenesis at the site, incidental observations of plant or animal inter- actions with the soil were noted; the most apparent of these was the presence of a number of termite mounds. RESULTS Climate The climatic diagram (after Muller 1982), derived for the study site from the adjusted data of Highlands Forest Station and Elgin Experimental Farm, is given in Figure 1 . Figure 2 shows the total monthly rainfall measured at the study site (with adjustments for missing data — see Methods), together with concurrent and long-term data from other sites. Figure 3 demonstrates that on a weekly basis during the sample period the rainfall was very unevenly distributed between the Highlands study site and Elgin, although total precipitation received during 1986 at each station was similar (Highlands, 1 110 mm and Elgin, 1 090 mm). The weekly Highlands total of 123,4 mm in this latter figure comprises precipitation recorded by the Highlands Forest Station during a single FIGURE 1. — The derived climate diagram for the Highlands study site. The broken line depicts mean monthly air temp- erature, while the solid line is total monthly precipitation (after Muller 1982). Bothalia 18,2 (1988) HS86 EH EEF06 CZJ HFLT B EEFLT FIGURE 2. — Total monthly precipitation during 1986, and long-term averages for sites in Highlands and Elgin. Legend symbols are as follows: HS86 = Highlands study site, 1986; EEF86 = Elgin Experimental Farm, 1986; HFLT = Highlands Forest Station (1938-1984); and EEFLT = Elgin Experimental Farm (1963-1983). 24 h period in February 1986 when the data logger sys- tem at the study site was not functional. An accumula- tion type rain gauge at the study site confirmed rainfall in excess of 100 mm for the month of February. For reasons dictated by the completeness and reliabil- ity of the data, air temperature regimes are given for the period July 1985 to June 1986 (see Figure 4). The most noticeable differences between these two locations are the consistently warmer mean temperatures during the spring and summer months, and the year-round colder minima at the Elgin Station. A 10-day period of missing logged data at the study site during February may cause the reported extreme values to be inaccurate for that month. Vegetation Vegetation at the site was estimated to be 12 years old. Aerial photographs taken in 1973 (Department of Surveys and Mapping) indicated that the area had been recently burned. This agreed with the Highlands Forest Station records documenting an accidental fire during the same year. The plant community was characterized by a shrub layer largely comprising Leucadendron xantho- conus, and a dense restioid component dominated by Chondropetalum hookerianum (Masters) Pill. The mean ELGIN PPTN (mm) FIGURE 3. — Comparison of weekly precipitation totals record- ed at Highlands (combined forest station and study site data), and the Elgin Experimental Farm during 1986. 281 1985 1986 FIGURE 4. — Mean monthly temperature measures recorded at the Highlands study site and the Elgin Experimental Farm during the period July 1985 to July 1986. February values for Highlands include a 10-day period of missing data, which could cause the extreme values during that month to be unrepresentative. measured density of L. xanthoconus on the plot was 1 ,7 mature plants per m2 (1 ,23 S.D.) with a mean height of 0,80 m (0,155 S.D.). Approximate projected cover of live restioid shoot material (mostly Chondropetalum hookerianum ) was 39%, and that of accumulated dead tissue added a further 35%. A third species which was abundant throughout the site was Erica cristata Dulfer. This species had a frequency of occurrence of 93%, but probably contributed little to the aboveground biomass of the system owing to its sparse and rangy habit. Another conspicuous shrub species at the site was Erica longifolia Ait., which was thinly and unevenly distributed (0,48 mature plants per m2 ; 1,2 S.D.) with individual heights of up to 1,4 m. The mean species richness in the set of twenty-eight 1 m2 quadrats was calculated to be 7,7 species per m2 (1,7 S.D.), whereas the 1 m2 quadrats of the nested set afforded a slightly higher value of 8,6 species per m2 (1,7 S.D.). The overall mean for these two sets is 7,9 species per m2. The larger quadrats of the nested set contained 19 (mean of 2); 37; and 56 species in 10m2, 100 m2, and 1 000 m2 respectively. A linear regression between the number of species (S), and the log10 of the quadrat area (LogA) gave the following relationship: S = 6,12 + 16,02 LogA (r2 =0,984) The species list (see Appendix) contains the names of all taxa recorded at the site both before the experimental burn in 1985, and for two subsequent seasons. Soil Soil at the site was duplex, a category found through- out the south-western Cape (Schloms et al. 1983). It comprised a dense underlying stratum of saprolitic shale with a shallow (150-800 mm) colluvial overburden of predominantly quartzitic material. The top stratum con- sisted of an orthic A horizon, a leached E horizon, and a basal stone-line (commonly 1 50 mm thick) of quartz and sandstone rock fragments. In places, the topsoil contained more fine shale-derived material, while in others the sandy surface layer was missing entirely, leaving a lithosolic A/E horizon. Rock particles varied 282 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 1.— Chemical and physical properties of soil at the Highlands study site. Mean values are given for each parameter, followed by the standard deviation of the mean. Values for the C horizon represent a single sample only, and bulk density of the B hori- zon a set of 2 values Parameter Units A horizon B horizon C horizon N (Kjeld) MS-8'1 453 (155) 192 (53) _ P (Bray 2) Mg.g-1 7,3 (0,6) 6,3 (3,1) 8 K (Bray 2) Mg-g"1 79 (18) 59,3 (32,3) 18 Exch. cations: Na+ me/100 g 0,62 (0,11) 0,36 (0,15) 0,42 K+ me/100 g 0,19 (0,02) 0,1 (0,05) 0,08 Ca2+ me/100 g 1,04 (0,28) 1,07 (0,35) 0,35 Mg2+ me/ 100 g 0,75 (0,12) 1,29 (0,65) 0,39 C.E.C. me/ 100 g 3,54 (1,92) 8,82 (1,04) 0,2 Al me/ 100 g 0,44 (0,08) 10,8 (2,93) - C % 3,32 (0,51) 1,08 (0,49) <0,05 Resistance ohms 747 (116) 3687 (1494) 520 PH 4,3 (0,1) 3,9 (0,2) 3,9 Texture: Clay % 7,4 (4,1) 27 (3,6) - silt % 8,1 (2,1) 50 (3,0) - sand % 85 (6,1) 17 (7,2) - sand texture medium medium Bulk density mg.mm"3 1,23 (0,1) 1,45 (-) - in the size of their largest dimension from less than 10 mm, to more than 300 mm, and were usually heavily ferruginized. The B horizon was composed exclusively of the shale-derived material, showed weak structure, and tended to be gleycutanic. The deeper soil pit which was dug outside of the study plot and adjacent to an area with outcropping sandstone, revealed in the sub- soil horizon a layer of pre-weathered sandstone approxi- mately 1 ,2 m thick, bounded above and below by shale- derived material. This band dipped at an angle of ap- proximately 45°, and it is thought that the C horizon throughout the study plot was effectively within the upper shale stratum. With regard to the classification system developed by MacVicar et al. (1977), the soil could be placed in the Kroonstad Form (Mkambati or Avoca Series), although where the B horizon displayed more prismatic structure and darker cutans, association with the Estcourt Form was stronger (Uitvlugt or Est- court Series). Identification of the soil series was equi- vocal on account of the variability of the clay content of the E horizon, a diagnostic feature of both forms. Results of the physical and chemical analyses per- formed on samples taken from the site are summarized in Table 1. In terms of the textural classification includ- ed by MacVicar et al. (1977), soil of the A horizon lies on the border between loamy sand and sandy loam. Field capacity of the top layer of soil, expressed as gravimetric water content, was measured as 22,5% (3,57 S.D.). The following features which might influence profile development were observed at the site: 1, surface soil movement under the influence of winter runoff; 2, waterlogging of the colluvial stratum, but not the B horizon during winter; 3, the presence of termite colonies ( Amitermes sylvestris ) whose mounds were present with a mean density of 120 per ha, and a ma< n height of 350 mm; 4, the occurrence of earthworms (infrequently observed); 5, occasional mole or mole rat activity; and 6, the penetration of roots into the dense B horizon. This latter phenomenon was limited to structural faults and was noted as occurring to the maximum investigated depth of 1,8 m. These roots probably belonged to Leucadendron xanthoconus in- dividuals, the only species whose roots were positively identified as penetrating into the B horizon. Fungal hyphae were also observed in old root channels in this horizon. DISCUSSION Climate The climate diagram (Figure 1) based on long-term data depicts a typical humid mediterranean-type with winter half-year rainfall (May to October) exceeding 65% of the 928 mm annual total, and a distinct winter with at least one mean monthly temperature less than 15°C (Aschmann 1973). As described by Fuggle & Ash- ton (1979), the climates of the Fynbos Biome form a ‘spatially diverse mosaic’ on account of its mountainous topography. Comparison of the observed climatic para- meters at the study site and at the Elgin Experimental Farm illustrates this diversity, with precipitation patterns in the region being especially non-uniform (Table 2). TABLE 2. — Long-term annual precipitation at various stations within the Grabouw Basin Station Altitude (m) Ann. pptn (mm) Source Elgin FS 281 1120 Fuggle 1981 Elgin EF 305 978 Agromet. 1983 Lebanon FS 351 675 Fuggle 1981 Highlands FS 426 928 WB 1985 Nuweberg FS 650 1499 Fuggle 1981 Jakkalsrivier - 1 655 824 Kruger 1979 Jakkalsrivier - 2 817 956 Kruger 1974 EF, experimental farm; FS, forest station; Agromet., Agrome- teorology Division; WB, Weather Bureau. Both alia 18,2 (1988) The heterogeneity of the rainfall may also play a critical role in the fire ecology of these seasonally flam- mable areas. The single highest rainfall event at the Highlands Forestry Station during the sample period occurred in February, the height of the fire season. Such temporal and spatial patchiness of rainfall acting over the millennia of fynbos evolution could have contributed significantly to a patchy fire history, and hence to the heterogeneous mosaic of the present-day vegetation. Regional patterns of ambient air temperature appear to be more predictable than those of precipitation (Figure 3). The warmer spring and summer mean air temperatures, and the colder year-round minima of the Elgin Experi- mental Farm relative to the Highlands study site, can probably be explained by the location of the former station. Elgin almost certainly experiences more restrict- ed air movement during the windier spring and summer period than the study site (partly supported by un- published data from this study); and perennial nocturnal drainage of cold air (Barry & Chorley 1982) from the large mountains of the Hottentots Holland and Fransch- hoek to the north. See Davis (1987) for a brief discus- sion of wind at the study site. Vegetation The criteria established by Taylor (1978) for the de- finition of fynbos are amply satisfied by vegetation at the study site, and the species which characterize it, all have distributions restricted to the Fynbos Biome as delineated by Moll & Bossi (1984). Species richness at the site was lower than the much quoted fynbos figure of 121 flowering plant species within an area of 100 m2 (Taylor 1972). Unfortunately this figure has been quoted in the literature as a bench- mark of species richness in fynbos (e.g. Bond 1983; Jarman 1982; and Taylor 1978), when, in fact, it is given in a semi-popular article in which descriptive de- tails are omitted. Better documented figures are pre- sented by Bond (1983), who reports a maximum figure of 104 species in an area of 1 000 m2 in a Jonkershoek stand of Protea nitida (waboomveld), the extrapolation of which on the log-scale would agree well with the total of 126 species recorded at the Highlands study site in an area of approximately 0,65 ha. In the same paper, Bond presents a synoptic species-log area curve for fyn- bos vegetation in the southern Cape mountains. For the formulation S = b + dlog10A, where S is the number of species in an area A, he found b = 16,4 and d = 15,8. These constants of the linear equation represent ‘point diversity’ and species turnover (or community patchiness) respectively (Bond 1983). Highlands data indicate a sig- nificantly lower point diversity (t-test; p <0,001), but a similar patchiness for the community at the study site. They are more similar to those obtained by Whittaker et al. (1979) for mallee vegetation in New South Wales, Australia (b = 5,3 and d = 15,3). Based on a sample area of 100 m2, Cowling (1983) reported species-richness of 26,5 for Mountain Fynbos in the south-eastern Cape. This is lower than the Highlands figure, while on the other hand the mean of his ‘point diversity’ (sensu Bond 1983) for fynbos shrubland sites was twice that of the study site. The measures of diversity discussed above lend a valuable perspective to the description of the 283 Highlands study site, but as yet the body of available information is insufficient for this parameter to be used as an accurate classifier. According to the description of post-fire succession in fynbos by Kruger & Bigalke (1984), as summarized by Rutherford & Westfall (1986), the 12-year post-fire stand of the study site was in an early stage of maturity, a phase during which the codominance of phanero- phytes, chamaephytes, and hemicryptophytes is best de- veloped. However, the abundance of restioid shoot tissue and the consequent build-up of a dense mat of Utter may effectively advance the maturation process in the site community by causing premature reduction in species richness. Subjectively, the mature vegetation of the study site was best described as a Leucadendron xanthoconus stand, with an understorey dominated by Chondropeta- lum hookerianum and Erica cristata. These species have distributions as follows: L. xanthoconus and C. hooke- rianum occur from the Cape Peninsula eastward as far as Bredasdorp (Vogts 1982) and Riversdale (Linder 1985) respectively, while E. cristata is restricted to the area between Sir Lowry’s Pass and the Klein River Mountains (Baker & OUver 1967). Grobler (1964), Boucher (1972, 1978), Kruger (1974), and Durand (1981) have all con- ducted vegetation surveys within a 15 km radius of the study site, and although they cite some species con- spicuous in the Highlands vegetation, none of their community descriptions characterize it. Inspection of Boucher’s (1978) data for the occurrence of the above three species in his study area between Cape Hangklip and the Palmiet River revealed a pattern (Figure 5), which suggests that the convergence of all three at Highlands may be a characteristic feature of the site. In two of the three instances where this occurred in Boucher’s study, soil was of the duplex Estcourt Form. (It is possible that E. cristata and C. hookerianum form a commensalistic association, in which physical support of the trailing ericoid by the erect restioid may be an element, a phe- nomenon observed in the mature vegetation at the study site.) Comparison of the Highlands species list (see Appen- dix) with those of Boucher (1978) and Kruger (1974) FIGURE 5. — Frequencies with which the three species Leuca- dendron xanthoconus, Chondropetalum hookerianum and Erica cristata occurred at Mountain Fynbos sample plots in the Cape Hangklip area, and their degree of distributional overlap. Drawn from the data of Boucher (1978). 284 confirmed the small degree of overlap at the species level. Of the Highlands species, approximately one third of the total number was contained in each of the other lists, while less than 20% were common to all three. Kruger & Taylor (1980) have previously demonstrated that a 60% difference in species composition exists between Cape Hangklip and Jakkalsrivier. The above discussion suggests that while many phyto- sociological elements of the region are represented at the study site, regional patchiness might easily make mani- festation of a previously recognized community unlikely. In an attempt to improve upon the phytosociological approach to classification of Mountain Fynbos vegeta- tion, Campbell (1985, 1986) invested considerable effort in constructing a structural classification with a priori rules for classifying communities. He pointed out (Camp- bell 1985), using stands dominated by Leucadendron gandogeri as an example, that some assemblages of plant life will necessarily defy classification by that particular system. Interpretation of the Highlands vegetation ac- cording to the key of structural features affords it a simi- larly equivocal position. Careful consideration of the Highlands vegetation may offer additional information to resolve that particular shortcoming of the structural classification. Soil As with the composition of plant communities, soil is a characteristically variable component of the Fynbos Biome (Moll & Jarman 1984). Boucher (1978) counted eight soil forms (14 series) in his study area of 1 15 km2 , but some of his classified mountain plant communities included up to six of these. Estcourt, one of the forms identified at the Highlands site, occurred at 15% of his mountain releves as the Soldaatskraal Series, while Kroonstad was not listed at all. Kruger (1974), noted six forms within the 1,58 km2 Jakkalsrivier catchment, none of which was in common with the Highlands site. Campbell (1983), in his extensive survey of montane environments in the Fynbos Biome also encountered none of the forms identified at the study site, although the Highlands data are consistent with the generalized gradients which summarize his work. Considering the shale-derived component of the Highlands soil, his warning against equating non-quartzitic origin in Moun- tain Fynbos soil with nutrient-richness is borne out. In the broad context of fynbos soils, topsoil at the study site is typical in that it is acid, leached, and nutrient poor (Kruger 1979). Being duplex in nature, however, the dense B horizon acts as an impediment to the vertical loss of many of the soil constituents that might normally be removed from the system during the podzolization process, although throughflow (Trud- gill 1977) may account for loss via seeps. (The working definition of nutrient-poorness supplied by Campbell (1983) is easily met for both A and B horizons.) Apart from some intensive studies on lowland sys- tems with narrowly defined objectives (e.g. Low 1983; Mitchell et al. 1984; Stock 1985; Witkowski & Mit- chell 1987), published data which describe the nutrient status and cycling processes in fynbos soils are limited. Information on nutrients in mountain systems is sporadic Bothalia 18,2 (1988) in the literature, and usually incidental to broader eco- logical studies. Comparison of the Highlands data with those describing other Mountain Fynbos sites (Low 1983), indicated that total N in the Highlands topsoil was greater than at these other sites by factors of be- tween 1,1 and 3,2. The measured available P was com- parable to the values of between 2,5 and 4,5 jug-g'1 re- ported by Read & Mitchell (1983) for coastal fynbos. The C.E.C. measured at the Highlands site fell into the wide range of values measured by Kruger (1974) for soils at Jakkalsrivier (0,5 to 44,0 me/100 g), while it was appropriately lower (for an oligotrophic soil) than the approximate mean of 14 me/ 100 g given by Tucker (1983) for a range of non-carbonate soils in Australia and the USA. Accumulation of clay particles at the top of the B horizon clearly increased the measured C.E.C. at this level (Table 1), but parallel concentration of aluminium may outweigh the advantage of this to plants by reduc- ing the availability of phosphorus under the inherently acid conditions (White 1979). The ability of Scottish heathland plants to survive on soils with high Al content is demonstrated in a study cited by Woolhouse (1981) where concentrations of 0,17% (18,9 me/100 g) are re- ported for the Bj horizon. These figures are somewhat greater in magnitude than those obtained for soil of the Highlands study site. It would be reasonable to suppose that the toxic effects of Al are countered either edaphi- cally (Norrish & Rosser 1983), or physiologically within heathland and fynbos systems, where this element is liable to be common (Hesse 1971). The observed downhill movement of topsoil during the rainy season at the Highlands site implies that the process of soil creep responsible for the formation of this duplex soil is still in progress. However, root pene- tration, together with some activities of the soil fauna, may be acting to ameliorate and stabilize the soil in local patches. Synthesis The data which describe phenomena of the Highlands study site are valuable to the ongoing study by providing a base-line for the investigation of ecosystem functions. The immediate objective, however, is to place that infor- mation in a general descriptive context which relates to other Mountain Fynbos systems. This is attempted in Table 3. TABLE 3. — A summary description of the Highlands study site with regard to the climate, vegetation and soil Feature Description Climate Humid mediterranean-type with spatial and tempo- ral stochasticity of precipitation Vegetation Proteoid-restioid ( Leucadendron xanthoconus- Chondropetalum hookerianum) with species turn- over typical of Mountain Fynbos, but with low point diversity Soil Of Table Mountain Group origin with a quartzitic and shale-derived colluvium (probably mobile) over- lying weathered shale; acid, nutrient-poor and seasonally waterlogged Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 285 CONCLUSION As human demands inevitably increase with time, con- servation and effective utilization of natural resources such as Mountain Fynbos vegetation will depend greatly on the extent to which managers are able to identify and predict responses of ecosystems to the impacts of exploitation. Classification of ecosystem attributes is an important step in establishing a means to extrapolate knowledge of specific sites to larger managerial units. Treating the Highlands site as a test case, we have seen above that hopes for the development of a classification which encompasses the functional complexity of Moun- tain Fynbos are justified. This is especially true consider- ing the large body of information which has accumulated over the past decade under the co-ordination of the Fyn- bos Biome Project of the CSIR (see Moll & Jarman 1984). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The help and co-opcration of people too numerous to list here is gratefully acknowledged. Amongst them are Mr J.J.N. Lambrechts, Miss Elsie Esterhuysen, and Dr Richard Cowling, as well as personnel of the Directorate of Forestry, and the Botanical Research Unit at Stellen- bosch. The advice of Dr M.C. Rutherford on preparation of the manuscript, and the assistance throughout of Andrew Flynn is greatly appreciated, especially with respect to compilation of the species list. 1 REFERENCES AGROMETEOROLOGICAL DIVISION 1983 . Agro-climatologi- cal report of the south-western Cape. Soil and Irrigation Research Institute, Elsenburg. ASCHMANN, H. 1973. Distribution and peculiarity of mediter- ranean ecosystems. In F. di Castri & H.A. Mooney, Medi- terranean type ecosystems. Origin and structure. Springer- Verlag, Berlin. BAKER, H.A. & OLIVER, E.G.H. 1967. Ericas in southern Afri- ca. Purnell, Cape Town. BARRY, R.G. & CHORLEY, R.J. 1982. Atmosphere, weather, and climate, 4th edn. Methuen, New York. BOND, P. & GOLDBLATT, P. 1984. Plants of the Cape flora. A descriptive catalogue. Journal of South African Botany, Supplementary Vol. 13. BOND, W. 1983. On alpha diversity and the richness of the Cape flora: a study in southern Cape fynbos. In F.J. Kruger, D.T. Mitchell & J.U.M. Jarvis, Mediterranean-type ecosys- tems. The role of nutrients. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. • BOUCHER, C. 1972. The vegetation of the Cape Hangklip area. M.Sc. thesis, University of Cape Town. BOUCHER, C. 1978. Cape Hangklip area. II. The vegetation. Bothalia 12: 455-497. BRITS, G.J., JACOBS, G. & VOGTS, M.M. 1983. Domestication of fynbos Proteaceae as a floricultural crop. Bothalia 14: 641-646. CAMPBELL, B.M. 1983. Montane plant environments in the Fyn- bos Biome. Bothalia 14: 283-298. CAMPBELL, B.M. 1985. A classification of the mountain vegeta- tion of the Fynbos Biome. Memoirs of the Botanical Sur- vey of South Africa No. 50. CAMPBELL, B.M. 1986. Vegetation classification in a floristical- ly complex area: the Cape floristic region. South African Journal of Botany 52: 129-140. COWLING, R.M. 1983. Diversity relations in Cape shrublands and other vegetation in the south-eastern Cape, South Africa Vegetatio 54: 103-127. DAVIS, G.W. 1984. Flowers from fynbos — the need for a policy of resource management for the wildflower industry. Veld & Flora 70: 116-118. DAVIS, G.W. 1987. Performance of a laboratory-constructed anemometer under summer field conditions on a Moun- tain Fynbos experimental site. Bothalia 17: 136-138. DURAND, B.J. 1981. A study of the short-term responses of fynbos to fire in the Kogelberg State Forest, South Africa. M.Sc. thesis, University of Cape Town. FERTILIZER SOCIETY OF SOUTH AFRICA 1974. Manual of soil analysis methods. The Fertilizer Society of South Africa, Pretoria FUGGLE, R.F. & ASHTON, E.R. 1979. Climate. In J. Day, W.R. Siegfried, G.N. Louw & M.L. Jarman, Fynbos ecology: a preliminary synthesis. Scientific Programmes Report No. 40. CSIR, Pretoria. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., REID, C., VAN ROOY, J. & SMOOK, L. 1985. List of species of southern African plants. Edn. 2, Part 1. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Afri- ca No. 51. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., WELMAN, W.G., RETIEF, E„ IMMEL- MAN, K.L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., PIENAAR, B.J. & NICHOLAS, A. 1987. List of species of southern African plants. Edn 2, Part 2. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 56. GOVERNMENT PRINTER 1966. Geological map. 3319C- Worcester/3419A-Caledon. Government Printer, Pretoria. GROBLER, P.J. 1964. Die plantegroei en flora van 'n area op Oudebos in Kogelbergreservaat, Caledon. M.Sc. thesis, University of Stellenbosch. HESSE, P.R. 1971. A textbook of soil chemical analysis. Murray, London. JACKSON, M.L. 1958. Soil chemical analysis. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey. JARMAN, M. 1982. A look at the littlest floral kingdom. Scientiae 23: 9-19. KRUGER, F.J. 1974. The physiography and plant communities of the Jakkalsrivier catchment. M.Sc. thesis, University of Stellenbosch. KRUGER, F.J. 1979. South African heathlands. In R.L. Specht, Ecosystems of the world. Vol. 9 A. Heathlands and related shrublands. Descriptive studies. Elsevier, Amsterdam. KRUGER, F.J. & BIGALKE, R.C. 1984. Fire in fynbos. In P. de V. Booysen & N.M. Tainton, Ecological effects of fire in South African ecosystems. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. KRUGER, F.J. & TAYLOR, H.C. 1980. Plant species diversity in Cape fynbos: gamma and delta diversity. Vegetatio 41: 85-93. LINDER, H.P. 1985. Conspectus of the African species of Res- tionaceae. Bothalia 15: 387-503. LOW, A.B. 1983. Phytomass and major nutrient pools in an 11- year post-fire coastal fynbos community. South African Journal of Botany 2: 98-104. MACVICAR, C.N., DE VILLIERS, J.M., LOXTON, R.F., VER- STER, E., LAMBRECHTS, J.J.N., MERRYWEATHER, F.R., LE ROUX, J., VAN R OO YEN, T.H. & VON HARM- SE, H.J. 1977. Soil classification. A binomial system for South Africa. Dept, of Agricultural Technical Services, Pretoria. MITCHELL, D.T., BROWN, G. & JONGENS-ROBERTS, S.M. 1984. Variation of forms of phosphorus in the sandy soils of coastal fynbos, south-western Cape. Journal of Ecology 72: 575-584. MOLL, E.J. & BOSSI, L. 1984. Assessment of the extent of the natural vegetation of the Fynbos Biome of South Africa. South African Journal of Science 80: 355-358. MOLL, E.J. & JARMAN, M. 1984. Clarification of the term fyn- bos. South African Journal of Science 80: 351—352. MOORE, P.D. & CHAPMAN, S.B. (eds) 1986. Methods in plant ecology, 2nd edn. Blackwell, Oxford. MULLER, M.J. 1982. Selected climatic data for a global set of standard stations for vegetation science. Junk, The Hague. NORRISH, K. & ROSSER, H. 1983. Mineral phosphate. In Di- vision of Soils, CSIRO. Soils, an Australian viewpoint. CSIRO, Melbourne, Academic Press, London. READ, D.J. & MITCHELL, D.T. 1983. Decomposition and mine- ralization processes in mediterranean-type ecosystems and in heathlands of similar structure. In F.J. Kruger, D.T. Mitchell & J.U.M. Jarvis, Mediterranean-type ecosystems. The role of nutrients. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. RUTHERFORD, M.C. & WESTFALL, R.H. 1986. Biomes of southern Africa — an objective categorization. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South A frica No. 54. 286 SCHLOMS, B.H.A., ELLIS, F. & LAMBRECHTS, J.J.N. 1983. Soils of the Cape coastal platform. In H.J. Deacon, Q.B. Hendey & J.J.N. Lambrechts, Fynbos palaeoecology — a preliminary synthesis. Scientific Programmes Report No. 75. CSIR, Pretoria. STOCK, W.D. 1985. An investigation of nitrogen cycling pro- cesses in a coastal ecosystem in the south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Ph.D. thesis, University of Cape Town. TAYLOR, H.C. 1972. Fynbos. Veld & Flora 2: 68-75. TAYLOR, H.C. 1978. Capensis. In M.J.A. Werger, Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa. Junk, The Hague. TRUDGILL, S.T. 1977. Soil and vegetation systems. Oxford University Press, Oxford. TUCKER, B.M. 1983. Basic exchangeable cations. In Division of Soils, CSIRO. Soils: an Australian viewpoint, pp.928. CSIRO, Melbourne, Academic Press, London. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) VOGTS, M. 1982. South Africa’s Proteaceae. Struik, Cape Town. WEATHER BUREAU 1985. Unpublished data. Department of Environment Affairs. WHITE, R.E. 1979. Introduction to the principles and practice of soil science. Blackwell, Oxford. WHITTAKER, R.H., NIERING, W.A. & CRISP, M.D. 1979. Structure, pattern, and diversity of a mallee community in New South Wales. Vegetatio 39: 65-76. WITKOWSKI, E.T.F. & MITCHELL, D.T. 1987. Variations in soil phosphorus in the fynbos biome, South Africa. Jour- nal of Ecology 75: 1159-1171. WOOLHOUSE, H.W. 1981. Soil acidity, aluminium toxicity and related problems in the nutrient environment of heath- lands. In R.L. Specht, Ecosystems of the world. Vol. 9B. Heathlands and related shrublands. Analytical studies. Elsevier, Amsterdam. APPENDIX A provisional list of the species occurring at the Highlands study site in the Caledon District The alphabetical arrangement of Bond & Goldblatt (1984) is used here for ease of access, but nomenclature and authorship are according to Gibbs Russell et al. (1985) and Gibbs Russell et al. (1987), except for the Restionaceae, where Linder (1985) has been used. SCHIZAEACEAE Schizaea pectinata (L.) Swartz PINACEAE Pinus pinaster Ait. CYPERACEAE Chrysithrix capensis L. Ficinia albicans Nees bolusii C.B. CL capensis L. ecklonea (Steud.) Nees fascicularis Nees lateralis (Vahl) Kunth paradoxa (Schrad.) Nees Tetraria brachyphylla Levyns capillacea (L.j C.B. CL compar (L.) Lestib. cuspidata (Rottb.) C.B. Cl. fimbriolata (Nees) C.B. Cl. ustulata (L.) C.B. CL HAEMODORACEAE Dilatris pillansii W.F. Barker Lanaria lanata (L.) Dur. & Schinz Wachendorfia paniculata Burm. IRIDACEAE Anapalina triticea (Burm. f.) N.E. Br. Aristea juncifolia Bak. oligocephala Bak. spiralis (L. f.) Ker-Gawl. Bobartia filiformis (L. f.) Ker-Gawl. gladiata (L. f ) Ker-GawL Gladiolus maculatus Sweet Ixia micrandra Bak. Micranthus junceus (Bak.) N.E. Br. Thereianthus bracteolatus (Lam.) G.J. Lewis Tritoniopsis parviflora (Jacq.) G.J. Lewis LILIACEAE Eriospermum sp. Jacq. ex Willd. ORCHIDACEAE Ceratandra atrata (L.) Dur. & Schinz POACEAE Ehrharta longifolia Schrad Merxmuellera rufa (Nees) Conert RESTIONACEAE Calopsis hyalina (Mast. ) Linder membranacea (Pillans) Linder Cannomois virgata (Rottb.) Steud Ceratocaryum decipiens (N.E. Br.) Linder Chondropetalum hookerianum (Mast. ) Pillans Elegia filacea Mast. Hypodiscus albo-aristatus (Nees) Mast. argenteus (Thunb.) Mast. aristatus (Thunb.) Krauss laevigatus (Kunth) Linder willdenowia (Nees) Mast. Ischyrolepis caespitosa Esterhuysen Mastersiella digitata (Thunb.) Gilg-Ben. Restio filiformis Poir. similis Pillans triticeus Rottb. verrucosus Esterhuysen Staberoha cernua (L. f.) Dur. & Schinz Thamnochortus lucens (Poir.) Linder Willdenowia sp. cf. arescens Kunth APIACEAE Centella restioides Adamson Lichtensteinia trifida Cham. & Schlechtd. Peucedanum ferulaceum Thunb. ASTERACEAE Berkheya barbata (L. f. ) Hutch. herbacea (L. f.) Druce Corymbium africanum L. Ely tropappus rhinocerotis (L. f. ) Less. Gerbera linnaei Cass. Helichrysum cymosum (L.) D. Don pandurifolium Schrank teretifolium (L.) D. Don Lachnospermum umbellatum (L. f.) Pillans Osteospermum tomentosum (L. f.) T. NorL Othonna quinquedentata Thunb. Phaenocoma prolifera (L.) D. Don Senecio pubigerus L. triqueter DC. Stoebe capitata Berg. plumosa (L.) Thunb. Ursinia paleacea (L.) Moench Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 287 BALANOPHORACEAE Mystropetalon thomii Harv. BR UNLACE AE Berzelia lanuginosa (L.J Brongn Brunia laevis Thunb. neglecta Schltr. CAMPANULACEAE Lightfootia unidentata (Thunb.) A. DC. Lobelia tomentosa L. f. Roella ciliata L. CRASSULACEAE Ciassula ericoides Haw. DROSERACEAE Drosera cistiflora L. trinervia Spreng. EBENACEAE Diospyros glabra (L.) De Winter ERICACEAE Erica coccinea L. corifolia L. cristata Dulfer cruenta Soland. longifolia Ait. nudiflora L. pulchella Houtt. spumosa L. EUPHORBIACEAE Euphorbia silenifolia (Haw.) Sweet FABACEAE Argyrolobium filiforme EckL & Zeyh. Aspalathus sp. Otholobium rotundifolium (L. f.) C.H. Stirton Rafnia sp. GENT1ANACEAE Chironia linoides L. GERANIACEAE Pelargonium ellaphiae E.M. Marais LOBELIACEAE Cyphia volubilis (Burm. f.) WUld. Merciera leptoloba A. DC. OXALIDACEAE Oxalis polyphylla Jacq. PENAEACEAE Penaea mucronata L. POLYGALACEAE Poly gala bracteolata L. PROTEACEAE Aulax umbellata (Thunb.) R. Br. Diastella thymelaeoides (Berg. ) Rourke Leucadendron salignum Berg. xanthoconus (Kuntze) K. Schum. Leucospermum truncatulum (Salisb. ex Knight) Rourke Protea cordata Thunb. longifolia Andr. scabra R. Br. Serruria barbigera Knight elongata R. Br. Spatalla racemosa (L.) Druce RHAMNACEAE Phylica atrata Licht. ex Roem. & Schult. ericoides L. imberbis Berg. ROSACEAE Cliff ortia complanata E. Mey. RUB1ACEAE Anthospermum galioides Reichb. RUTACEAE Diosma oppositifolia L. SELAGINACEAE Selago scabrida Thunb. STILBACEAE Campylostachys cemua (L. f. ) Kunth Stilbe ericoides (L.) L. THYMELAEACEAE Gnidia anomala Meisn Struthiola eckloniana Meisn ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Zygophyllum fulvum L. Bothalia 18,2: 289-291 (1988) Miscellaneous notes VARIOUS AUTHORS THE PLANT NUMBER SCALE — AN IMPROVED METHOD OF COVER ESTIMATION USING VARIABLE-SIZED BELT TRANSECTS INTRODUCTION The vegetation ecology of the Transvaal Waterberg is currently being investigated at a scale of 1:250000 (Westfall in prep.). Vegetation structure is being analysed according to Edwards (1983) using the cover meter (Westfall & Panagos 1984) for cover determinations in each height class. In the floristic analysis, individual species cover is estimated by using the Domin-Krajina cover-abundance scale (Mueller-Dombois & Ellenberg 1974). A comparison of recorded species cover, being the sum of the class midpoints according to the Domin- Krajina scale (Mueller-Dombois & Ellenberg 1974), with the structural cover should result in the summed species cover for a stand being: 1, greater than the cover of the height class with the greatest cover, and 2, less than the summed cover of all the height classes, provided that 3, quadrat size is such as to include those species contribut- ing significantly to the total cover of the stand. In the vegetation being investigated, quadrat size is generally commensurate with species richness (Westfall et al. 1987). However, the summed estimated species cover was often considerably less than the mean cover for the height classes with the greatest cover for the same stands. Overcompensation for the underestimation of species cover often led to the summed estimated species cover being considerably greater than the summed cover of all the height classes for the same stands (West- fall in prep.). Clearly, improved species cover estimations are required for species cover to have any relevance other than an approximate indication of relative abundance. In estimating species cover, according to Edwards (1983), the observer is often inclined to ignore grasses without inflorescences and to estimate from a static position without taking plant size and distribution into account. For example, a larger plant should require a larger area to be observed than a smaller plant. Further- more, although mean canopy diameter can be readily estimated it is often far more difficult to estimate mean distance apart in terms of mean canopy diameter because of often highly irregular plant distribution. To overcome these problems, the approach suggested here is based on a simple estimate of area and a count of the individuals of a species within the area. METHODS The cover of a species is given by Edwards (1983) for hexagonal packing by 90,7 (n+1)2 where c = percentage crown cover and n = the mean number of crown diameters by which the plant crowns are separated. Assuming hexagonal packing, the transect area, of which the percentage crown cover is a proportion, is given by: sin 60° (n+1) 30D where D = mean crown diameter and 30 = the value for obtaining a minimum of 0,1% cover. Cover of less than 0,1% is not considered significant. Transect length is, therefore, 30D and transect width is sin 60° (n+1). In practice, transect width was taken as slightly less than the average gap between plants within or nearest to the sample quadrat plus the mean crown diameter. The number of individuals of a species was then counted within the transect. Only species occurring within the sample quadrat were recorded and for each a count of individuals within a transect commensurate with each species spacing and size was made. Counts of individuals did not include the first individual as the transect was started adjacent to the first individual. This permitted a cover of less than 0,1% where no individuals were counted. Transect width was never greater than the length as this could have resulted in actual cover values of less than 0,1% being given higher cover values. The mean number of crown diameters (n) by which the plant crowns are separated within each transect is given by n = 22^1 where I = number of individuals counted. Percentage crown cover can then be calculated according to Edwards (1983). Table 1 shows number of individuals counted, representation by a single character symbol and percentage cover for recording purposes in the field. Vegetation structure was analysed using the cover meter and the summed species cover was estimated with both the Domin-Krajina scale and the plant number scale as outlined above for five vegetation stands represented by 21 quadrats. The mean of the shortest and longest cross distances of each crown was taken as the crown diameter for each species and these distances were noted in four categories (Edwards 1983) namely, forbs (herbs), grasses, shrubs and trees. Class intervals were selected on a basis of trial and error to give an approximately normal distribution of occurrences within crown diameter class intervals. All estimations were done by an independent observer. RESULTS The results of the crown cover determinations are given in Table 2. 290 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) TABLE 1. — Number of plant individuals counted with single character symbol and percentage crown cover No. Symbol % Crown cover 0 + 0,00 1 1 0,10 2 2 0,40 3 3 0,91 4 4 1,61 5 5 2,52 6 6 3,63 7 7 4,94 8 8 6,45 9 9 8,18 10 A 10,08 11 B 12,20 12 C 14,51 13 D 17,03 14 E 19,75 15 F 22,68 16 G 25,80 17 H 29,12 18 I 32,65 19 J 36,38 20 K 40,31 21 L 44,44 22 M 48,78 23 N 53,31 24 O 58,05 25 P 62,99 26 Q 68,13 27 R 73,47 28 S 79,10 29 T 84,76 30 U 90,70 31 V 96,85 >31 w 100,00 The Fibonacci sequence, where each number is the sum of the preceding two numbers, provided the closest resemblance to a normal distribution of occurrences within crown diameter class intervals. This is illustrated in Figure 1 with a frequency polygon with the class intervals on a natural logarithmic scale to reduce the effect of increasingly larger class intervals. The class intervals used for mean crown diameters according to the Fibonacci sequence, are shown in Table 3. Transect lengths were determined by the midpoints of each class interval. INTERPRETATION In Table 2 estimations according to the Domin-Krajina cover-abundance scale are considerably lower than those for the single height classes with the most cover. The plant number scale, in contrast, yielded higher values than that of the single height class with the most cover and lower values than the cover of the combined height classes for each releve, except releve 37. This indicates a greater precision in estimating cover when using the plant number scale as opposed to the Domin-Krajina scale. According to Westfall et al. (1987), quadrat size should have been larger for the vegetation type repre- sented by releve 37, but this was not apparent using the Domin-Krajina scale at the time of sampling. However, simple summation of the values obtained by the plant number scale in the field indicated inadequate quadrat size. It is far too time-consuming to verify quadrat size for each quadrat according to Westfall et al. (1987). The plant number scale together with a structural analysis of the vegetation provides a simple means of verifying adequacy of quadrat size. In the frequency polygons (Figure 1) the peaks to the left of the central troughs for forbs, grasses and shrubs are caused by a relatively higher proportion of 0,2 m diameter crowns. This can be attributed to the observer rounding off crown diameters to 0,2 m some of which should have fallen into the 0,211 to 0,34 class. If class intervals had been known at the time of recording, it can be expected that greater care would have been exercised in measurements where crown diameters were close to class borders. The troughs mentioned are, therefore, considered to be a result of measurement inaccuracies which could be overcome by using class intervals. The use of standard transect lengths as illustrated in Table 3 should simplify transect length determination and provide for variability in crown size. A further ad- vantage could be the simultaneous counting of individuals of different species with similar crown diameters and spacing to save time. It is also suggested that a simple counter be used for recording number of individuals for each species as marking paper for this purpose requires stopping at each individual recorded. It must be emphasized that the parameter determined here is projected crown cover and not projected foliage cover which is more species and age-dependent. The class ‘r’ on the Braun-Blanquet scale and *+’ on the Domin-Krajina scale (Mueller-Dombois & Ellenberg 1974) both with ‘solitary, insignificant cover’ are difficult to determine. Species with a single occurrence in a sample quadrat often have significant cover outside the quadrat. If a stand is defined, as in this study, as 20 ha (Westfall et al. 1987), it is impracticable to determine whether a species is ‘solitary’ within that area. The concept of ‘solitary’ is relative to the area defined. In the plant number scale used here the lowest cover class is less than 0,1 % , which seems better defined than ‘solitary’. In contrast to the Domin-Krajina scale, the plant num- ber scale has proportionately finer subdivisions at the lower cover values of the scale. This is of significance in the South African context with often high species rich- ness characterized by many dominant species with generally lower cover in contrast to the few dominant species with higher cover often found in the relatively impoverished European vegetation. TABLE 2. — Percentage crown cover in five vegetation stands represented by releves 33 to 37 Releve no. Single height class Percentage crown cover Combined Domin_Krajina h.eight scale classes Plant number scale 33 55 100 27 60 34 31 104 25 74 35 44 103 19 79 36 41 86 21 53 37 63 146 17 35 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Mean crown diameter In (m) FIGURE 1. — Frequency polygons of occurrence of plants in mean crown diameter class intervals for forbs grasses ( ), shrubs and trees ( ). Class intervals are according to the Fibonacci sequence on a In scale. CONCLUSIONS The projected crown cover determinations based on area estimations and counting of individuals shows improved precision compared to the Domin-Krajina cover-abundance scale. Although this method is more time-consuming than a purely visual estimation of cover, the use of standard class intervals and a counter should decrease the time required for cover determinations. The method appears more suitable for the species-rich South African vegetation than the traditional European cover- abundance estimation scales. The method also provides a means of verifying quadrat size adequacy. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors thank Dr J.C. Scheepers for comments and suggestions. REFERENCES EDWARDS, D. 1983. A broad-scale structural classification of vegetation for practical purposes. Bothalia 14: 705-712. 291 TABLE 3. — Class intervals of crown diameters according to the Fibonacci sequence for determining standard transect lengths Crown diameter class interval (m) Transect length (m) 0,001-0,01 0,15 0,011-0,02 0,45 0,021-0,03 0,75 0,031-0,05 1,20 0,051-0,08 1,95 0,081-0,13 3,15 0,131-0,21 5,10 0,211-0,34 8,25 0,341-0,55 13,35 0,551-0,89 21,60 0,891-1,44 34,95 1,441-2,33 56,55 2,331-3,77 91,50 3,771-6,10 148,05 6,101-9,87 239,55 MUELLER-DOMBOIS, D. & ELLENBERG, H. 1974. Aims and methods of vegetation ecology. Wiley, London. WESTFALL, R.H. & PANAGOS, M.D. 1984. A cover meter for canopy and basal cover estimations. Bothalia 15: 241 — 244. WESTFALL, R.H., VAN STADEN, J.M. & PANAGOS, M.D. 1987. Predictive species area relations and determination of subsample size for vegetation sampling in the Transvaal Waterberg. South African Journal of Botany 53: 44-48. WESTFALL, R.H. in prep. The vegetation ecology of Sour Bush- veld in the Transvaal Waterberg. R.H. WESTFALL and M.D. PANAGOS MS. received: 1987.07.31. Bothalia 18,2: 293-304 (1988) New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL*, W.G. WELMAN*, G. GERMISHUIZEN*, E. RETIEF*, B.J. PIENAAR*, C. REID*, L. FISH*, J. VAN ROOY*, C.M. VAN WYK*, E. KALAKE** and STAFF* Keywords: distribution records, floristic inventory, name changes, new taxa, PRECIS, southern Africa ABSTRACT Alterations to the inventory of about 24 000 species and infraspecific taxa of bryophytes and vascular plants in southern Africa are reported for the year 1987. The inventory, as presently maintained in the Taxon compo- nent of the PRECIS system, contains the accepted name for each taxon, synonyms previously in use as accepted names during the past half-century, and literature references necessary to identify species in each genus and to establish the synonymy. The inventory is updated as new research affecting plant classification in southern Africa is published. During 1987 there were 678 alterations, representing about 2,8% of the total number of taxa. UITTREKSEL Daar word vir die jaar 1987 verslag gedoen van veranderings aan die lys van ongeveer 24 000 spesies en infra- spesifieke taksons van mosse en vaatplante in suidelike Afrika. Die lys, soos dit tans in die Takson-komponent van die PRECIS-stelsel in stand gehou word, bevat die aanvaarde naam van elke takson, sinonieme voorheen in gebruik as aanvaarde name gedurende die afgelope halfeeu, en literatuurverwysings wat nodig is om spesies in elke genus te identifiseer en om sinonimie vas te stel. Die lys word bygewerk soos nuwe navorsing wat plant- klassifikasie in suidelike Afrika raak, gepubliseer word. Gedurende 1987 was daar 678 veranderings wat ongeveer 2,8% van die totale aantal taksons verteenwoordig. INTRODUCTION This is the fourth in this series that reports annual al- terations to the complete inventory of southern African plants maintained in the Taxon component of the com- puter system PRECIS. Previous annual lists of changes were published in Bothalia 15: 751-759 (1985), 16: 109-118 and 17: 269—275. The format continues to be that of the List of species of southern African plants, edn 2, parts 1 & 2 (Gibbs Russell et al. 1985, 1987). The complete and up-to-date listing of names, literature and useful synonyms for all the 24000 southern African plants is continuously maintained in the Taxon compo- nent of PRECIS, and the plant identification service of the Botanical Research Institute uses the names as cur- rently recorded. The Institute can supply PRECIS list- ings of the most recent species treatment for any family or genus. In addition, beginning this year, the data files for the alterations reported in this paper are also available on floppy disk. This is the first year since 1985 in which alterations for all plants have been included. In 1986 and 1987, while the literature and synonyms for dicotyledons were being completed, only cryptogams and monocots could be covered in these annual lists. Reported alterations for 1987 include 130 newly de- scribed species or infraspecific taxa, 85 names brought back into use, and 1 5 species newly reported for south- ern Africa, resulting in 230 additions to the total list of species and infraspecific taxa. Six species were removed because they were mistakenly recorded from southern * Botanical Research Institute, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001. ** The National Herbarium, P.O. Box 114, Gaborone, Botswana. Africa, 172 names have gone into synonymy, and there are 51 new combinations and 27 orthographic correc- tions. New literature references have been added for 20 genera in which no changes were caused, or for which no proposed changes were accepted. The total of 678 alterations to the List of species affects about 2,8% of the southern African flora. The total number of altera- tions since Taxon-PRECIS began to record synonyms in 1984 is 1 863 (7,8% of the flora). Over 1 20 journals are routinely scanned for relevant papers, and the above changes were reported in 150 articles and books. The large number of changes exceeds the estimate of about 500 alterations per year predicted from the mono- cotyledons alone. Each alteration represents progress in our understanding of the relationships in the flora, yet each change is expensive in terms of publications that must be purchased and the expert manpower necessary to find, evaluate, record and implement these changes in herbaria, computer systems and manuscripts. Our small taxonomic community can ill afford the time spent on these activities, at the expense of research. The large number of changes emphasizes the desperate need for a code of nomenclature that will allow greater stabil- ity in plant nomenclature. Besides these routine changes, extensions to Taxon- PRECIS during the past year include the production of an index to the 2 000 plates in the first 49 volumes of Flowering Plants of Africa with the currently accepted name and synonyms for each plate. In addition, proto- types are being developed for the expansion of the system to hold additional information for each species, such as distribution, life form, habitat, conservation status and importance to man. 294 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Spermatophyte families and genera follow the order and numbering of the Englerian classification system, as given by Dyer (1975, 1976), with the exception of Poaceae, which follows an unpublished system of generic numbering. Bryophytes follow Crosby & Magill (1981) and Grolle (1983). Pteridophytes follow Schelpe & An- thony (1986). Species are listed in alphabetical order: a name in current use appears in capital letters with its PRECIS number; synonyms appear in lower case letters, and each synonym is entered twice, once indented below the name for which it is a synonym and once in its al- phabetical place in the genus. New collection records are indicated by quoting a specimen and its locality. Naturalized taxa are shown by an asterisk following the name. Each contributor is acknowledged at the beginning of the groups for which he is responsible. Although staff members of the BRI have final responsibility for main- taining Taxon-PRECIS, we acknowledge with gratitude co-operation of other botanists in reporting changes. Mrs B.C. de Wet wrote a number of computer programs to aid data entry and checking and Mrs J. Mulvenna slaved over a hot terminal to add all the changes to PRECIS. Both have helped immeasurably in catching and eliminating inconsistencies. REFERENCES CROSBY, M.R. & MAGILL, R.E. 1981. A dictionary of mosses. Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis. DYER, R.A. 1975. The genera of southern African flowering plants. Vol. 1. Dicotyledons. Botanical Research Institute, Pretoria. DYER, R.A. 1976. The genera of southern African flowering plants. VoL 2. Monocotyledons. Botanical Research In- stitute, Pretoria. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., REID, C., FISH, L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., VAN WYK, M., VAN ROOY, J. & STAFF 1987. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. Bothalia 17: 269-275. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., REID, C., VAN ROOY, J. & SMOOK, L. 1985. List of species of southern African plants, edn 2, part 1. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 51. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., WELMAN, W.G., RETIEF, E., IMMELr MAN, K.L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., PIENAAR, B.J., VAN WYK, C.M. & NICHOLAS, A. 1987. List of species of southern African plants, edn 2, part 1. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 56. GROLLE, R. 1983 . Acta Botanica Fennica 121: 1-62. SCHELPE, E.A. & ANTHONY, N.C. 1986. Pteridophyta In O. A. Leistner, Flora of southern Africa. Botanical Research In- stitute, Pretoria. STAFF OF THE NATIONAL HERBARIUM 1985. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. Bothalia 15: 751-759. STAFF OF THE NATIONAL HERBARIUM 1986. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. Bothalia 16: 109-118. BRYOPHYTA Contributed by J. van Rooy BRYACEAE (24) 1506 HEPATICAE OXYMITRACEAE (H7) 1011 -OXYMITRA BISCH. (Note change In genus number) SCHISTOCHILACEAE 1121 -SCHISTOCHILA DUM. (Note spalling correction) MUSCI DITRICHACEAE (5) 1338 -ASTOMIOPSIS C. MUELL. 1. MAGILL. 1987. J. BRYOL. 14: 528. 100 A. AMBLYOCALYX C. MUELL. 1339 -CHEILOTHELA LINDB. 1. MAGILL. 1987. J. BRYOL. 14: 528. 100 C. CHILENSIS (MONT.) BROTH. DICRANACEAE (8) 1371 -AONGSTROEMIOPSIS FLEI5CH . 1. MAGILL. 1987. J. BRYOL. 14= 527. 100 A. JULACEA (DOZ. A MOLK. ) FLEISCH. GRIMMIACEAE (15) 1443 -LEUCOPEPICHAETIUM MAGILL (Note spelling correction) EPHEMERACEAE (18) 1461 -EPHEMEPUM HAMPE 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. 200 E. NAMA9UENSE MAGILL FUNARIACEAE (19) 1467 -FUNARIA HEDW. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. 75 F. CLAVATA (MITT.) MAGILL F. harveyana Magill = F. SUCCULEATA 450 F. SUCCULEATA (NAGER t WRIGHT) MAGILL (=F. harveyana Magill) 1 1000 1508 -BRYUM HEDW. 2. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. ion B. radicals Rehm. ex Dlx. = B. TURBINATUM 2200 B. TURBINATUM (HEDW.) TURN. (=B. radicals Rehm. ex Dlx.) 2 1121 1301 1331 1356 1441 1461 BARTRAMIACEAE (37) 1581 1581 -BARTRAMIA HEDW. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. B. afrostrlcta C. Muell. = ANACOLIA BPEUTELII 250 B. COMPACTA HORNSCH. VAR. MACOWANIANA (C. MUELL.) MAGILL B. squarrlfolla Sim = ANACOLIA BREUTELII 1583 -BREUTELIA (B.S.G.) SCHIMP. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. B. afroscoparla (C. Muell.) Par. = B. SUBSTRICTA B. breutel 1 1 (C. Muell.) Broth. = ANACOLIA BREUTELII 500 B. ELLIPTICA MAGILL 650 B. SUBSTRICTA (C. MUELL.) MAGILL (=B. afroscoparla (C. Muell.) Par.) 1 1584 -PHILONOTIS BRID. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. P. afrofontana (C. Muell.) Par. var. brevlseta (C. Muell.) Par. = BREUTELIA SUBSTRICTA 1585 -ANACOLIA SCHIMP. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. 100 A. BREUTELII (C. MUELL.) MAGILL VAR. BREUTELII (=Bartramia afrostricta C. Muell.) 1 (=Breutel1a breutelli (C. Muell.) Broth . ) 1 200 A. BREUTELII (C. MUELL.) MAGILL VAR. SOUARRIFOLIA (SIM) MAGILL (=Bartram1a squarrlfolla Sim) 1 1466 1588 -QUATHLAMBA MAGILL 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. 100 Q. DEBILICOSTATA MAGILL RHACHITHECIACEAE (40A) 1606 1606 -RHACHITHECIUM BROTH. EX LE'JOL. (Note spelling correction) 1471 -PHYSCOMITRIUM (BRID.) BRID. 1. MAGILL. 1987. FSA. 300 P. SPATHULATUM (HORNSCH.) C. MUELL. VAR. SESSILE (SHAW) MAGILL ORTHOTRICHACEAE (42) 1616 -AMPHIDIUM SCHIMP. 1. MAGILL 4 VAN ROOY. MS. FSA. 1616 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 295 100 200 1623 100 A. cyathlcarpum (Mont.) Broth. = A. TORTUOSUM 9901043 A. LAPPONICUM (HEDW.) SCHXMP. A. TORTUOSUM (HORNSCH.) ROBINS. (=A. cyathlcarpum (Mont.) Broth.) 1 -ORTHOTRICHUM HEDH. O. mirum Lewinsky STONEOBRYUM MIRUM -CARDOTIELLA VITT 1. VITT. 1961. J. HATTORI BOT. LAB. 49: 101. C. SECUNDA (C. MUELL.) VITT -STONEOBRYUM NORRIS 4 ROBINS. 1. NORRIS 4 ROBINS. 1981. BRYOLOGIST 64= 96. s. Mirum (Lewinsky) norris a robins. (=Orthotr1chura mirum Lewinsky) 1 LEUCOOONTACEAE (49) 1686 9901142 -LEUCODON SCHWAEGR. 2. MAGILL 4 VAN ROOY. MS. FSA. L. ASSIMILIS (C. MUELL.) JAEG. (=L. capensls Schlmp. In Ran.) 2 L. capansl* Schlmp. In Ran. = L. ASSIMILIS METEORIACEAE (58) -SOU AMID IUM (C. MUELL.) BROTH. 2. MAGILL 4 VAN ROOY. MS. FSA. S. biforma (Hampa) Broth. = S. BRASILIENSE S. BRASILIENSE (HORNSCH.) BROTH. (=S. biforma (Hampa) Broth.) 2 (=S. rahmannl 1 (C. Mugll.) Broth.) 2 S. rahmannl 1 (C. Muall.) Broth. = S. BRASILIENSE NECKERACEAE (60) -PINNATELLA FLEISCH. (Nota spalling corractlon) HOOKERIACEAE (65) 1781 1781 -CALLICOSTELLA (C. MUELL.) MITT. Southarn African spaclas moved to SCHIZOMITRIUM C. applanata Broth, A Bryhn = SCHIZOMITRIUM TRISTE C. trlstls (C. Muall.) Broth. = SCHIZOMITRIUM TRISTE 1785 -DISTICHOPHYLLUM DOZ. 4 MOLK. 2. MAGILL A VAN ROOY. MS. FSA. 200 0. MNIIFOLIUM (HORNSCH.) SIM VAR. MNIIFOLIUM 300 D. MNIIFOLIUM (HORNSCH.) SIM VAR. TAYLORII (SIM) MAGILL (=0. taylor 1 1 Sim) 1 D. taylor 11 Sim = 0. MNIIFOLIUM VAR. TAYLORII 1792 -SCHIZOMITRIUM B.S.G. 1. MAGILL 4 VAN ROOY. MS. FSA. 100 S. TRISTE (C. MUELL.) 0CHYRA < =Ca 1 1 1 coite 1 la applanata Broth. A Bryhn. ) 1 ( =Call (costal la trlstls (C. Muall.) Broth.) 1 -PSEUD OBRACH I ARIA LAUNERT 3. CLAYTON A PENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GPAM. 4. WEBSTER. 1987. AUSTR. PANICEAE. Treatment of this genus In Brachlarla by Clayton and In Urochloa by Webster shows the unsatisfactory state of generic delimitation In Panlceae. -UROCHLOA BEAUV. 3. WEBSTER. 1987. AUSTR. PANICEAE. Several African species currently treated in Panlcura and Brachlarla were transferred to Urochloa by Webster. Study of all our species will bo required before these Isolated changes can be adopted. -ORYZIDIUM C.E. HUBB. 4 SCHWEICK. (Note author change for genus) -PANICUM L. 4. WEBSTER. 1987. AUSTR. PANICEAE. -TRICHOLAENA SCHULT. (Note author change for genus) -EHRHARTA THUNB. 2. GIBBS RUSSELL. 1984. BOTHALIA 15: 145 4 149. 3. GIBBS RUSSELL. 1987. BOTHALIA 17= 191- 194. E. STIPOIDES LABILL. * Australasian species collected In Natal. 2930 (Pietermaritzburg) Karkloofi wattle plantation (-AD), T. Collins, Nov. 1970 (NH). E. THUNBERGII GIBBS RUSSELL (=E. vlrgata Launert ) 3 E. virgata Launert = E. THUNBERGII -CENTROPODIA REICHB. (Note correction In genus number) -MERXMUELLERA C0NERT 3. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GRAM. Inclusion of this genus In Rytldosperma Is not yet accepted pending study of generic limits with Pentaschlstls. 9902044 -KARROOCHLOA CONERT 4 TUERPE 3. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GRAM. Inclusion of this genus In Rytldosperma is not yet accepted pending study of generic limits. 9902611 THUIDIACEAE (72) 1832 100 -LEPTOTERIGYNANDRUM C. MUELL. 1. MAGILL. 1987. J. BRY0L. 14: L. AUSTROALPINUM C. MUELL. -STIPAGPOSTIS NEES (Note correction In genus number) 9902630 -STIPA L. Stlpa trlchotoma Nees = NASELLA TRICHOTOMA 9902631 NASELLA DESV. 1. CARO. 1966. KURTZIANA 3: 79. 2. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GRAM. 100 N. TRICHOTOMA (NEES) HACK. EX ARECH. (=St1pa trlchotoma Nees) 2 9902970 -BRACHYACHNE (BENTH.) STAPF (Note author change for genus) 9903330 -LEPTOCHLOA BEAUV. 3. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GRAM. This reference now Includes Olplachne as a section of Laptochloa. ANGIOSPERMAE -LEPTOCARYDION STAPF (Note author change for genus) MONOCOTYLEDONAE Contributed by C. Reid POACEAE Contributed by L. Fish 9900010 9900310 -ROTTBOELLIA L.F. 50 R. COCHINCHINENSIS (LOUR.) CLAYTON (=R. exaltata L.F.) 1 R. exaltata L. F. = R. COCHINCHINENSIS 9900370 -IMPERATA CYR. (Note author change for genus) 9900490 -VETIVERIA BORY (Note author change for genus) 9900810 -DIHETEROPOGON (HACK.) STAPF (Note author change for genus) 9901040 -BRACHIARIA (TRIN.) GRISEB. 4. WEBSTER. 1987. AUSTR. PANICEAE. -0IPLACHNE BEAUV. 5. PHILLIPS. 1982. KEW BULL. 37: 133. 6. CLAYTON 6 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GPAM. This genus Is retained because It Is still recognized at sectional level when Included In Leptochloa. -LOPHACME STAPF (Note corrected spalling) -STIBURUS STAPF 3. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE. 1986. GEN. GRAM. Our species are retained In this genus and not transferred to Eragrostls. -Las 1 ochloa Kunth = TRIBOLIUM (Note corrected author citation) -Plaglochloa Adamson 4 Sprague = TRILOBIUM (Note corrected author citation) Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 296 9904040 -BRIZA L. 3. MATTHEI . 1975. WILLDENOWIA, 8= 79. 4. CLAYTON 4 RENVOIZE 1986. GEN. GRAM. 300 B. SUBARISTATUM LAM. ( =Chascolytrum subar istatura (Lam.) Desv . ) 4 220 K. ALBOMONTANA BAIJNATH 5 550 K. BRUCEAE (CODO) CODD (=K. praecox Bak. subsp. bruceae Codd ) 4 K. praecox Bak. subsp. bruceae Codd = K. BRUCEAE 3300 K. PRAECOX. BAK 9904041 -Chascolytrum Desv. C. subarlstatum (Lam.) Desv. = BRIZA SUBARISTATUM 9904150 -PUCCINELLIA PARL. 100 P. ACROXANTHA C.A. SMITH 4 C.E. HUBS. 200 P. ANGUSTA (NEES) C.A. SMITH 4 C.E. HUBB. (Note corrected author citation for both species ) 9904250 -Pseudobromus K. Schum. = FE5TUCA (Note corrected author citation) CYPERACEAE 452000 0459000 -CYPERUS L. 2950 C. INVOLUCRATUS ROTTB. Tropical African species collected In Natal. 2732 (Sordwana Bay) (-AB), Van Wyk 948> Kluge 2640. 0459010 1300 -PYCREUS BEAUV. P. MUNDII NEES (Note orthographic change) 046500 -FICINIA SCHRAD. 4250 F. PETROPHILA ARNOLD 4 GORDON-GRAY (Note orthographic correction) 0467000 -FUIRF.NA ROTTB. 5. FORBES. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 185. ERIOCAULACEAE 828000 0828000 -ERIOCAULON L. 550 E. DREGEI HOCHST. VAR. SONQERIANUM (KOERN.) OBERM. (Note orthographic change) LILIACEAE 942000 0984000 -BULBINELLA KUNTH 50 B. 3. PERRY. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 431. BARKERAE P.L. PERRY 100 B. CAUDA-FELIS ( L.F. ) DUR. 4 SCHINZ B. (=B. caudata (Thunb.) Kunth ) 3 caudata (Thunb.) Kunth = B. CAUDA-FELIS 120 B. CHART ACEA P.L. PERRY 140 B. CILIOLATA KUNTH 150 B. DIVAGINATA P.L. PERRY 160 B. liBURNIFLORA P.L. PERRY 170 Ei. ELATA P.L. PERRY 180 B. ELEGANS SCHLTR. EX P.L. PERRY 200 6. florlbunda (Alt.) Dur. 4 Schlnz - exact 310 B. application unknown GRAMINIFOLIA P.L. PERRY 320 B. LATIFOLIA KUNTH VAR. DOLERITICA P.L. PERRY 330 B. LATIFOLIA KUNTH VAR. LATIFOLIA 335 B. NANA P.L. PERRY 340 B. NUTANS (THUNB.) DUR. 4 SCHINZ VAR. NUTANS 345 B. (=B. robusta Kunth) 3 (=3. setosa (Wllld.) Dur. 4 Schlnz) R NUTANS (THUNB.) DUR. 4 SCHINZ VAR. B. TURFOSICOLA P.L. PERRY peronata Kunth = B. TRIQUETRA 350 a. PUNCTULATA A. ZAHLBR. B. robusta Kunth = B. NUTANS VAR. NUTANS B. setlfolia Kunth = B. TRIQUETRA B. setosa (Willd.) Dur. 4 Schlnz 1 B. NUTANS 370 B. VAR. NUTANS TRINERVIS (BAK.) P.L. PERRY 400 B. TRIQUETRA ( L. F.) KUNTH ( -B. setlfolia Kunth) 3 (=B. peronata Kunth) 3 1026000 3000 3050 3700 3720 5550 6550 6600 6650 9720 14070 14090 14100 -ALOE L. 6. GLEN 4 HARDY. 1987. FLOWER. PL. AFR. 49. 7. GLEN 4 HARDY. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 52: 489. A. barbertonlae Pole Evans = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. CHORTOLIRIOIDES VAR. CHORTOLIRIODES BERGER A. CHORTOLIRIOIDES BERGER VAR. WOOL LIANA (POLE EVANS) GLEN 4 HARDY (=A. woolliana Pole Evans ) 7 A. COOPERI BAK. SUBSP. COOPERI A. COOPERI BAK. SUBSP. PULCHRA GLEN 4 HARDY A. davyana Schonl. var. davyana = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. davyana Schonl. var. subollfera Groenewald = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. FOURIEI HARDY 4 GLEN A. grad Ilf lora Groenewald = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. GREATHEADII SCHONL. VAR. DAVYANA (SCHONL.) GLEN 4 HARDY (=A. barbertonlae Pole Evans) 7 (=A. davyana Schonl. var. davyana) t (=A. davyana Schonl. var. subollfera Groenewald) ft (=A. graciltflora Groenewald) 7 (=A. longibracteata Pole Evans) 7 (=A. mutans Reynolds) 7 (=A. verdoornlae Reynolds) 7 A. GREATHEADII SCHONL. VAR. GREATHEADII A. HARDYI GLEN A. karasbergensls PI Hans = A. STRIATA SUBSP. KARASBER5ENSIS A. komaggasensis Krltzinger 4 v. Jaarsveld = A. STRIATA SUBSP. KOMAGGASENSIS A. longibracteata Pole Evans = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. MARLOTHII BERGER SUBSP. ORIENTALIS GLEN 4 HARDY A. mutans Reynolds = A. GREATHEADII VAR. DAVYANA A. STRIATA HAW. SUBSP. KARASBERGENSIS (PILLANS) GLEN 4 HARDY ( =A . karasbergensls PI llans) 7 A. STRIATA HAW. SUBSP. KOMAGGASENSIS (KRITZINGER 4 V. JAARSVELD) GLEN 4 HARDY (=A. komaggasensis Krltzinger 4 v. Jaarsveld) 7 A. STRIATA HAW. SUBSP. STRIATA A. verdoornlae Reynolds = A. GREATHEADII VAR. 0AVYANA A. woolliana Pole Evans = A. CHORTOLIRIOIDES VAR. WOOLLIANA/ 1027000 -GASTERIA DUVAL 2. V. JAARSVELD. 1987. CACT. 4 SUCC. JL (U.S. ) 59: 170. 7050 G. VLOKII V. JAARSVELD 1079000 -ALBUCA L. 6. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1984. NOTES ROY. BOT. GARD. EOINB. 42: 227. 650 A. BATTENIANA HILLIARD 4 BURTT 5020 A. RUPESTRIS HILLIARD 4 BURTT 5050 A. SCHLECHTERI BAK. (Note change In species number) 6000 A. XANTHOCODON HILLIARD 4 BURTT 1080000 -URGINEA STEINH. 4. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1984. NOTES ROY. BOT. GARD. EDINB. 42: 227. 450 U. CALCARATA (BAK.) HILLIARD 4 BURTT 3150 U. SANIENSIS HILLIARD 4 BURTT 0985000 -BULBINE WILLD. 5. V. JAARSVELD 4 BAIJNATH. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 424. 6. BAIJNATH. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 4 27. 980 B. ESTERHUYSENIAE BAIJNATH 2820 B. STRIATA BAIJNATH 4 V. JAARDVELD 0985010 -TRACHYANDRA KUNTH 4750 T. SALTII (BAK.) OBERM. VAR. OATESII (BAK.) OBERM. (Note change In species number) 1012000 -ERIOSPERMUM JACQ. EX HILL0. #'. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING PERRY 2220 E. CORYMBOSUM BAK. # 1024000 -KNIPHOFIA MOENCH 4. CODD. 1987. BOTHALIA 17: 185. 5. BAIJNATH. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 307. 1098000 420 1380 2050 2250 2420 2710 2970 -LACHENALIA JACQ. F. EX MURRAY 9. BARKER. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53= 166. 10. MULLER-DOBLIES ET AL. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 481. L. BARKERIANA U. MULLER-DOBLIES, B. NORD. 4 D. MULLER-DOBLIES L. DEHOOPENSIS W.F. BARKER L. KLIPRANDENSIS W.F. BARKER L. LEOMONTANA W.F. BARKER L. MACGREGORIORUM W.F. BARKER (Note orthographic correction) L. MINIMA W.F. BARKER L. NAMIBIENSIS W.F. BARKER 1113000 -ASPARAGUS L. A. vlrgatus Bak. = PROT ASPARAGUS VIRGATUS 1113010 -PROT ASPARAGUS OBERM. 4. OBERMEYER. 1937. FL. AUSTRALIA 46: 494. 297 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 6600 P. VIRGATUS (BAK.) OBEPM. (^Asparagus virgatus Bak.) 5 AMARYLLIDACEAE 1166000 1191000 -CYRTANTHUS L. F. 3050 C. ROTUND XLOB'JS N.E. BR. 1970000 -UPERA GAUDICH. 3. FRIIS, IMMELMAN A WILMOT-DEAR . 1907. NORD. J. BOT. 7: 125-126. U. cameroonensis Wedd. = U. TRINERVIS 200 U. TRINERVIS (HOCHST. APUD KRAUSS ) FRIIS 4 IMMELMAN (=U. cameroonensis Wedd.) 3 IRIDACEAE 1259000 1261000 -ROMULEA MARATTI 2. DE VOS. 1907. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 247. 9350 R. UNIFOLIA DE VOS 1301000 -HESPERANTHA KER-GAWL. 0. GOLDBLATT. 1907. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53= 959. 730 H. ELSIAE GOLDBL. (Note change in species number) 750 H. ERECTA (BAK.) BENTH . EX BAK. (Note change in species number) H. pilosa (L. f.) Ker-Gawl. subsp. latifolta Goldbl. = H. PSEUDOPILOSA 2013000 -DROGUETIA GAUDICH. 2. FRIIS, IMMELMAN & WILMOT-DEAR. 1907. NORD. J. BOT. 7: 125-126. D. burchelli 1 N.E. Br. = D. INERS SUBSP. BURCHELLII 150 D. INERS ( FORSSK. ) SCHWEINF. SUBSP. BURCHELLII (N.E. BR.) FRIIS & WILMOT-DEAR ( =D . burchel 1 i 1 N.E. Br . ) 2 175 0. INERS (FORSSK.) SCHWEINF. SUBSP. INERS 2019000 -AUSTRALINA GAUDICH. A. ( ntegr (folia Wedd. = DIDYMODOXA CAPENSIS VAR. INTEGRIFOLIA 2600 H. PILOSA ( L.F. ) KER-GAWL. 2620 H. PSEUDOPILOSA GOLDBL. (=H. pilosa (L. f.) Ker-Gawl. subsp. latifolta Goldbl. ) 0 2950 H. TERETIFOLIA GOLDBL. 3050 H. TRUNCATULA GOLDBL. 3100 H. UMBRICOLA GOLDBL. ORCHIDACEAE 1309000 1922000 -HABENARIA WILLD. #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING MANNING. 1300 H. FILICORNIS LINDL. # 2050 H. SUBARMATA REICHB. F. # 2019010 100 300 900 -DIDYMODOXA WEDD. 2. FRIIS, IMMELMAN A WILMOT-DEAR. 1907. NORD. J. BOT. 7: 125-126. 0. CAFFRA (THUNB.) FRIIS A WILMOT-DEAR D. CAPENSIS (L. F.) FRIIS 4 WILMOT-DEAR VAR. CAPENSIS (=Urtica capensis L. f.) 2 0. CAPENSIS (L. F.) FRIIS 4 WILMOT-DEAR VAR. INTEGRIFOLIA (WEDD.) FRIIS A WILMOT-DEAR (=Australina integrifolia Wedd.) 2 (=D. integrifolia (Wedd.) Wedd.) 2 D. integrifolia (Wedd.) Wedd. = 0. CAPENSIS VAR. INTEGRIFOLIA PROTEACEAE Contributed by C.M. van Wyk 2016000 1990000 -CORYCIUM SWARTZ 1000 C. OROBANCHOIOES (L. F.) SWARTZ (Note author change) 2030000 -AULAX BERG. 1. ROURKE. 1907. S-AFR. TYDSKR. PLANTK. 53(6): 969. 1561000 -ACROLOPHIA PFITZER 2097000 -HAKEA SCHPAD. 3. S'JMMERHAYES 6 HALL. 1962. TAXON 11: 201. #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING HALL. 150 H. 2. BUPTT . 1991. KEW BULL.: 33. SALICIFOLIA (VENT.) BURTT 170 A. CAPENSIS (BERG.) FOURC. VAR. LAMELLATA (LINDL.) SCHELPE (=Euloph1a barbata (Thunb.) Spreng.) 3, 8 VISCACEAE H. (=H. saligna Knight) 2 saligna Knight - H. SALICIFOLIA Contributed by G. Germishuizen 2093000 1690000 -EULOPHIA R. BR. EX LINDL. #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING HALL. E. barbata (Thunb.) Spreng. = ACROLOPHIA CAPENSIS VAR. LAMELLATA E. barbata sensu H. Bol. non (Thunb.) Spreng. = E. CLAVICORNIS VAR. NUTANS 000 E. CLAVICORNIS LINDL. VAR. NUTANS (SOND.) A.V. HALL ( =E . barbata sensu H. Bol. non (Thunb.) Spreng . ) S 2093000 -VISCUM L. 2. GILBERT, POLHILL 4 WIENS. 1905. NORD. J. BOT. 5: 229. V. nervosum Hochst. ex A. Rich. = V. TRIFLOPUM SUBSP. NERVOSUM 1950 V. TRIFLORUM DC. SUBSP. NERVOSUM (HOCHST. EX A. RICH. ) M. GILBERT (=V. nervosum Hochst. ex A. Rich.) 2 POLYGONACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 2109000 DICOTYLEDONAE SALICACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 1072000 and B.J. Pienaar 1073000 570 590 600 700 000 -SALIX L. 1. IMMELMAN. 1907. BOTHALIA 17,2: 171-177. S. capensis Thunb. = S. MUCRONATA SUBSP. CAPENSIS S. hirsuta Thunb. = S. MUCRONATA SUBSP. HIRSUTA S. MUCRONATA THUNB. SUBSP. CAPENSIS (THUNB.) IMMELMAN (=S. capensis Thunb.) 1 S. MUCRONATA THUNB. SUBSP. HIRSUTA (THUNB.) IMMELMAN <=S. hirsuta Thunb. ) 1 S. MUCRONATA THUNB. SUBSP. MUCRONATA S. MUCRONATA THUNB. SUBSP. WILMSII (SEEMEN) IMMELMAN (=S. wilmsii Seemen) 1 S. MUCRONATA THUNB. SUBSP. WOOOII (SEEMEN) IMMELMAN (=3. wood 11 Seemen) 1 S. wi lm.si 1 Seemen = S. MUCRONATA SUBSP. WILMSII S. woodii Seemen = S. MUCRONATA SUBSP. WOODII URTICACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 1979000 and B.J. Pienaar 1979000 -URTICA L. U. capensis L. f. = DIDYMODOXA CAPENSIS VAR. CAPENSIS 2201000 2150 2200 -POLYGONUM L. 2. GERMISHUIZEN. 1906. BOTHALIA 16,2: 232. P. senegalense Meisn. forma albotomentosum R.A. Grah . = P. SENFGALENSE SUBSP. ALBOTOMENTOSUM P. SENEGALENSE MEISN. SUBSP. ALBOTOMENTOSUM (R.A. GPAH . ) GERMISHUIZEN (=P. senegalense Meisn. forma albotomentosum R.A. Grah.) 2 P. SENEGALENSE MEISN. SUBSP. SENEGALENSE 2209000 -OXYGOHUM BURCH. 2. GERMISHUIZEN. 1907. BOTHALIA 17,1: 90-91. 3. GERMISHUIZEN. 1907. BOTHALIA 17,2: 105- 107. 100 O. ALATUM BURCH. VAR. ALATUM 150 O. ALATUM BUPCH. VAR. LONGISQUAMATUM GERMISHUIZEN 1050 0. ROBUSTUM GERMISHUIZEN CHENOPODIACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 2219000 and B.J. Pienaar 2223000 -CHENOPODIUM L. 2. AELLEN. 1920. FEDDES REPRIUM 29: 337-397. 1000 C. HEDERIFORME (MURR.) AELL. VAR. DENTATUM AELL. 1050 C. HEDERIFORME (MURR. ) AELL. VAR. UNDULATUM AELL. 2229000 -ATRIPLEX L. 9. WILSON. 1909. FL. . AUSTR. 9: 91-133. 370 A. HORTENSIS L. 970 A. LINDLEYI MOO. SUBSP. . QUADRIPARTITA P.G. WILSON * 600 A. MUELLERI BENTH. 1270 A. SPONGIOSA F. MUELL. * 298 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) AMARANTHACEAE Contributed by B.J. Pienaar 2289000 BRUNIACEAE Contributed by C.M. van Wyk 3283000 2299000 -AMARANTHUS L. 2. AELLEN. 1964. FL. EUROP. l: 109. 250 A. CAUDATUS L. * AIZOACEAE Contributed by B.J. Pienaar 2374000 2376000 -LIMEUM L. 5. FRIEDRICH. 1954. MITT. BOT. STAATSAM. MUNCHEN 11-20: 134-1654. 2800 L. VISCOSUM (GAY) FENZL SUBSP. TRANSVAALENSE FRIEDR. 2395000 130 150 160 175 -TRIANTHEMA L. 2. GQNCALVES. 1978. FL. ZAM. 4: 517. T. PORTULACASTPUM L. T. SALSOLOIDES FENZL EX OLIV. VAR. SALSOLOIDES T. SALSOLOIDES FENZL EX OLIV. VAR. STENOPHYLLA ADAMSON T. SALSOLOIDES FENZL EX OLIV. VAR. TRANSVAALENSIS (SCHINZ) ADAMSON MESEMBRYANTHEMACEAE Contributed by G. Germi shui zen 2405001 and B.J. Pienaar 2405036 -DINTERANTHUS SCHWANT. *. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING KILLICK. 600 D. VANZYLII (L. BOL. ) SCHWANT. (=0. vanzylil (L. Bol.) Schwant. var. llneatus Jacobsen) 2 (=L1thops vanzylil L. Bol.) 1 D. vanzylil (L. Bol.) Schwant. var. llneatus Jacobsen = D. VANZYLII (Note orthographic change for "vanzy 1 1 1 " ) 2405066 5350 21300 21400 -LAMPRANTHUS N.E. BR. 2. GLEN. 1978. UNPUBL. PH.D. THESIS. UNIV. CAPE TOWN L. caespltosus (L. Bol.) N.E. Br. var. caespltosus = L. TEGENS L. caespltosus ( L. Bol.) N.E. Br . var. luxurlans (L. Bol.) Jacobsen = L. TENUIFOLIUS L. DELTOIDES (L.) WIJNANDS (Note author correction) L. TEGENS (F. MUELL. ) N.E. BR. (=L. caespltosus (L. Bol.) N.E. Br. var. caespltosus) 2 L. TENUIFOLIUS (L.) SCHWANT. (=L. caespitosus (L. Bol.) N.E. Br. var. luxurlans (L. Bol.) Jacobsen) 2 3290000 200 ROSACEAE 3375000 125 250 300 425 450 470 850 3388000 1530 1630 1650 5172 9920 10830 -STAAVIA OAHL #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING POWRIE. S. CAPITELLA (THUNB.) SOND . ( =S . capltella Sond.) It (-S. comosa Colozza) * (=S. rupestris Eckl. & Zeyh.) # S. capltella Sond. = S. CAPITELLA S. comosa Colozza = S. CAPITELLA S. rupestris Eckl. t Zeyh. = S. CAPITELLA Contributed by B.J. Pienaar 3316000 and C.M. van Wyk -ALCHEMILLA L. 2. HAUMAN & BALLE. 1936. MEM. ACAD. BELG. SVO. SER. II VOL. 16. FASC. 320: 20-21. 3. ROTHMALER. 1937. REPERT. SP. NOV. REGNI VEGET XLII : 122-123. 4. ROSS. 1972. FL. NATAL: 183. 5. MENDES. 1978. F. ZAM. 4: 29-33. 6. HILLIARD & B'JRTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 370. A. BICARPELLATA POTHM. A. COLURA HILLIARD A. CRYPTANTHA STEUD. (=A. inyangensis Welm. ) 5 A. ELONGATA ECKL. t ZEYH. VAR. PLATYLOBA ROTHM. A. GALPINII HARM, i BALLE A. HIRSUTO-PETIOLATA (DE WILD.) ROTHM. A. Inyangensis Weim. = A. CRYPTANTHA A. SCHLECHTERANA ROTHM. -CLIFFORTIA L. 6. WEIMARCK. 1953. BOT. NOTISER 106,1= 78- 80. 7. WEIMARCK. 1959. BOT. NOTISER 112,1: 73- 79. C. CERVICORNU WEIM. C. CONCINNA WEIM. C. CRASSINERVIS WEIM. C. INCANA WEIM. C. SUBDURA WEIM. C. VERRUCOSA WEIM. 3391000 -GRIELUM L. 4. ADAMSON & SALTER. 1950. FL. CAPE PENIN.: 452. 150 G. GRANDIFLORUM (L.) DRUCE (=G. tenulfollum L. ) 4 250 G. HUMIFUSUM THUNB. VAR. PARVIFLORUM HARV. G. tenui f ol 1 urn L. = G. GRANDIFLORUM FABACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 3426000 2405069 -LITHOPS N.E. BR. 1. BOLUS. 1937. NOTES MESEM. 3= 75. 2. COLE. 1980. NAT. CACT. & SUCC . J. (U.K.) 35,3: 75. 6250 L. MENNELLII L. BOL. 6550 L. NAUREENIAE COLE L. vanzylil L. Bol. = DINTERANTHUS VANZYLII 3454000 -PROSOPIS L. 3. BURKART. 1976. J. ARNOLD ARBOR. 57= 219. 150 P. GLANDULOSA TORR. VAR. TORREYANA (BENSON) JOHNSTON * 3646000 -COELIDIUM VOGEL EX WALP. 2. GRANBY. 1987. NORD . J. BOT. 7,1: 51-52. 350 C. FLAVUM GRANBY 2405073 50 450 1505 2950 3975 4150 -MESEMBRYANTHEMUM L. ##. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING BITTRICH t OEHN (HAMBURG) M. AGINOSUM L. BOL. M. ALKALIFUGUM DINT. M. FASTIGIATUM THUNB. M. LONGISTYLUM DC. M. PINGUE L. M. PUSILLUM HERRE PORTULACACEAE Contributed by B. J. Pienaar 2406000 2407000 -CALANDRINIA * 1. SCOGGAN. 1978. FL. CANADA 3= 666. 100 C. CILIATA (R. i P. ) DC. (=C. cillata DC. var. menzlesil (Hook.) Macb . ) 1 C. cillata DC. var. menzlesil (Hook.) Macb. = C. CILIATA RANUNCULACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 2521000 and B.J. Pienaar 254 8 0 0 0 150 -THALICTRUM L. T. MINUS L. (Note change In species number) DROSERACEAE Contributed by G. Germishuizen 3133000 and B.J. Pienaar 3136000 -DROSERA L. 4. CHEEK. 1987. KEW BULL. 42: 738. 1750 D. SLACKII M.R. CHEEK 3657000 -LOTONONIS (DC.) ECKL. t ZEYH. 6. VAN WYK. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53,2: 161- 165. 1450 L. BREVICAULIS B.-E. VAN WYK 3698000 -LOTUS L. 2. BALL. 1986. FLORA EUPOPEA 2= 175. L. hlspldus Desf. = L. SUBBIFLORUS 530 L. SUBBIFLORUS LAG. * (=L. hispldus Desf.) 2 3702000 9650 11950 18750 21230 -INDIGOFERA L. 7. JARVIE t STIRTON. 1986. BOTHALIA 16,2= 230. 8. JARVIE & STIRTON. 1987. BOTHALIA 17,1: 1- 6. 9. GERMISHUIZEN. 1987. 17,1: 33-34. I. GIFBERGENSIS C.H. STIRTON & J.K. JARVIE I. IONII J.K. JARVIE t C.H. STIRTON I. RUBROGLANDULOSA GERMISHUIZEN I. THESIOIOES J.K. JAPVIE & C.H. STIRTON 3718000 250 300 350 -TEPHROSIA PERS. 5. SCHRIRE. 1987. BOTHALIA 17, l: 7-15. T. aemula (E. Mey.) Harv. = T. MACROPODA VAR. DIFFUSA T. AEQUILATA BAK. SUBSP. AUSTRALIS BRUMMITT T. ALBISSIMA H.M. FORBES SUBSP. ALBISSIMA T. ALBISSIMA H.M. FORBES SUBSP. ZULUENSIS (H.M. FORBES) B.D. SCHRIRE ( =T. uni f ol 1 a H.M. Forbes) 5 (=T. zuluensls H.M. Forbes) 5 T. angustlsslma Engl. = T. LONGIPES SUBSP. LONGIPES VAR. LONGIPES T. aplculata H.M. Forbes = T. NATALENSIS SUBSP. NATALENSIS Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 650 T. BRUMMITTII B.O. SCHRIRE T. dawsonli Bak. f. = T. LONGIPES SUBSP. L0NGIPE5 VAR. LONGIPES T. diffusa (E. Hey.) Harv. = T. MACROPODA VAR. DIFFUSA 3400 T. GLOMERULI FLORA MEISN. SUBSP. GLOMERULI FLORA 3450 T. GLOME PULI FLORA MEISN. SUBSP. MEISNERI (HUTCH, 4 BURTT DAVY) B.D. SCHRIRE 3470 T. GOBENSIS BRUMMITT 4400 T. LONGIPES MEISN. SUBSP. LONGIPES VAR. LONGIPES (=T. angustlssima Engl.) 5 (=T. dawsonl 1 Bak. f.) 5 (=T. lurlda Sond. var . drummondli Brummltt) 5 (=T. lurlda Sond. var. lissocarpa Brummltt) 5 (=T. lurlda Sond. var. lurlda) 5 T. lurlda Sond. var. drummondli Brummltt = T. LONGIPES SUBSP. LONGIPES VAR. LONGIPES T. lurlda Sond. var. lissocarpa Brummitt = T. LONGIPES SUBSP. LONGIPES VAR. LONGIPES T. lurlda Sond. var. lurlda = T. LONGIPES SUBSP. LONGIPES VAR. LONGIPES 4650 T. MACROPODA (E. MEY.) HARV. VAR. DIFFUSA (E. MEY. ) B.D. SCHRIRE (=T. aemula (E. Mey.) Harv.) 5 ( -T. diffusa (E. May.) Harv.) 5 4700 T. MACROPODA (E. MEY.) HARV. VAR. MACPOPODA T. medley 1 H.M. Forbes = T. SHILUWANENSIS T. natalensls H.M. Forbes = T. NATALENSIS SUBSP. NATALENSIS 5200 T. NATALENSIS H.M. FORBES SUBSP. NATALENSIS (=T. aplculata H.M. Forbes) 5 (=T. natalensls H.M. Forbes) 5 5250 T. NATALENSIS H.M. FORBES SUBSP. PSEUDOCAPITATA (H.M. FORBES) B.D. SCHRIRE (=T. pseudocap 1 tata H.M. Forbes) 5 T. pseudocapl tata H.M. Forbes = T. NATALENSIS SUBSP. PSEUDOCAPITATA 7400 T. SHILUWANENSIS SCHINZ (=T. medleyi H.M. Forbes) 5 (=T. spathacea Hutch. 4 Burtt Davy) 5 ( =T. wy 1 1 e 1 H.M. Forbes) 5 T. spathacea Hutch. 6 Burtt Davy = T. SHILUWANENSIS T. unifolia H.M. Forbes = T. ALBISSIMA SUBSP. ZULUENSIS T. wy 1 lei H.M. Forbes = T. SHILUWANENSIS T. zuluensls H.M. Forbes = T. ALBISSIMA SUBSP. ZULUENSIS 3773000 100 3670000 650 750 -ORNITHOPUS L. 1. BALL. 1968. FL. EUROP. 2: 182. O. SATIVUS BR0T. SUBSP. SATIVUS * -ERYTHRINA L. 3. FRANKLIN-HENNESSY. 1985. 4. FRANKLIN-HENNESSY. 1986. BOTHALIA 16,1: 48. E. X DYERI E.F. FRANKLIN-HENNESSY E. X JOHNSONII E.F. FRANKLIN-HENNESSEY -PUERARIA DC. 2. OHWI . 1985. AGRIC. UNIV. WAC-ENINGEN PAPERS 85, l: 43. P. LOBATA (WILLD.) OHWI VAR. LOBATA * (=Dolichos hlrsutus Thunb.) 2 7000 -RHYNCHOSIA LOUR. 4. GERMISHUIZEN. 1987. BOTHALIA 17,2: 181- 182. 2270 R. EMARGINATA GERMISHUIZEN 4750 R. NYASICA BAK. Tropical African species collected In Botswana. 1725 (Livingstone): Lesomo (- CC), P. A. Smith 14 April 1983. - Contributed by E. Kalake 000 -DOLICHOS L. D. hlrsutus Thunb. = PUERARIA LOBATA VAR. LOBATA GERANIACEAE Contributed by C.M. van Wyk 3924000 3440 5230 -PELARGONIUM L'HERIT. 15. VORSTER. 1986. S. AFR. J. BOT. 52(4): 383-384. 16. N0R0ENSTAM. 1987. PL. SY5T . EVOL. 155: 333-337. 17. VORSTER. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53(1): 65- 70. 18. VORSTER. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53(1): 71- 74. 19. VORSTER. 1987. S-AFR. TYDSKR. PLANTK . 53(2): 184-185. P. CAROLI-HENPICI B. NORD . P. DIVISIFOLIUM VORSTER 9930 10720 16500 17053 LINACEAE 3947000 299 P. fumarioides L'Herlt. ex Harvey = P. MINIMUM P. malacoldes Knuth = P. NANUM P. MINIMUM VORSTER (=P. fumarioides L'Herlt. ex Harvey) 19 P. NANUM L'HERIT. (=P. humifusum Willd.) 15 (=P. malacoldes Knuth) 15 l=P. parvulum DC.) 15 (=P. procumbens (Andr.) Pers.) 15 P. parvulum DC. =' P. NANUM P. procumbens (Andr.) Pers. = P. NANUM P. sanlculaef ollum Willd. = P. TABULARE P. TABULARE (BURM. F.) L'HERIT. (=P. saniculaef olium Willd.) 5 (Note author change for species) P. TRAGACANTHOIDES BURCH. Contributed by E. Retlef 3943000 -HUGONIA L. 2. ROBSON 6 GONCALVES. 1969. FL M0CAM3 . (LINACEAE): 4. H. busseana Engl. = H. ORIENTALIS H. OPIENTALIS ENGL. <=H. busseana Engl.) 2 ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef >000 -ZYGOPHYLLUM L. 3. RETIEF . 1987. BOTHALIA 17: 189. 1625 Z. MACROCARPON RETIEF SIMAROUBACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef -KIRKIA OLIV. 2. IMMELMAN. 1966. FSA 18: 1. PTAEROXYLACEAE Contributed by E. Retief 4157000 -PTAEROXYLON ECKL. 4 ZEYH. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18= 35. MELIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 4163000 -ENTANDPOPHRAGMA C. DC. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18= 59. 4168000 -NYMANIA LINDL. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 39. 4171000 -TURRAEA L. 3. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 41. 400 T. STREYI PENNINGTON 4 F. WHITE 4175000 -MELIA L. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 49. 4193000 -EKEBERGIA SPARRM. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 51. 4195000 -TRICHILIA P. ER. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 53. 4195010 -PSEUDOBERSAMA VERDC. 2. WHITE 4 STYLES. 1986. FSA 18: 57. MALPHIGIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 000 -TRIASPIS BURCH. 2. IMMELMAN. 1986. FSA 181 63. 000 -SPHEDAMNOCARPUS PLANCH. EX BENTH . 4 HOOK. F. 3. DE VILLIEPS 4 BOTHA. 1986. FSA 18: 66. S. angolensis (Juss.) Planch, ex Ollv. = S. PPUPIENS SUBSP. PPUPIEN5 S. galphiml Ifollus (Juss.) Szyszyl. subsp. galphlml Ifolius = S. PRUPIENS SUBSP. GALPHIMIIFOLIUS S. ga lphi mi i f ol i us (Juss.) Szyszyl. subsp. rehmannil (Szyszyl.) Launert = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. GALPHIMIIFOLIUS 450 S. PRURIENS (JUSS.) SZYSZYL. SUBSP. GALPHIMIIFOLIUS (JUSS.) DE VILLIEPS 4 C.J. BOTHA (=S. ga lphi ml 1 f o 1 1 us (Juss.) Szyszyl. subsp. rehmannil (Szyszyl.) Launert ) 3 (=S. galphl ml 1 f ol 1 us (Juss.) Szyszyl. subsp. galphlml Ifolius ) 3 (=S. rehmannil Szyszyl.) 3 (=S. woodianus Arenes ) 3 500 S. PRURIENS (JUSS.) SZYSZYL. SUBSP. PRURIENS (=S. angolensis (Juss.) Planch, ex Oliv. ) 3 <=S. prurlens (Juss.) Szyszyl. var. lanceolatus Launert) 3 (=S. prurlens (Juss.) Szyszyl. var. lat i f ol tus Engl . ) 3 (=S. wllmsii Engl. ) 3 300 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) S. prurtens (Juss.) Szyszyl. var. lanceolatus Launert = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. PRURIENS S. prurlens (Juss.) Szyszyl. var. latlfolius Engl. = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. PRURIENS S. rehmannH Szyszyl. = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. GALPHIMIIFOLIUS 600 S. TRANSVAALICUS (KUNTZE) BURTT DAVY S. wl lms ( 1 Engl. = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. PRURIENS S. woodianus Arenes = S. PRURIENS SUBSP. GALPHIMIIFOLIUS 4220000 -ACRIDOCARPUS GUILL. 4 PERR. 2. IMMELMAN. 1986. FSA 10: 69. 100 M. LUGARDIAE N.E. BR. CELASTRACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 4618000 4626000 -MAYTENUS MOLINA 4. VAN WYK 4 ARCHER. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 155. 1050 M. OLEOSA VAN WYK & ARCHER 4629000 -CATHA FORSSK. EX SCOP. 4. VAN WYK 2 PRINS. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 202. 50 C. ABBOTTII VAN WYK 4 PRINS VITACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 4909000 4917000 -RHOICISSUS PLANCH. 3. URTON, OLIVIER 4 ROBERTSON. 1986. S. AFR. J. BOT. 52: 589. R. clrrhlflora sonsu G1 lg 4 Brandt p.p. excl. syn. Rhus clrrhlflora L. f. = R. TRIDENTATA SUBSP. TRIDENTATA R. cunelfolla (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Planch. = R. TRIDENTATA SUBSP. CUNEIFOLIA R. erythrodes (Fresn.) Planch. = R. TRIDENTATA SUBSP. CUNEIFOLIA 550 R. TRIDENTATA (L. F.) WILD & DRUM. SUBSP. CUNEIFOLIA (ECKL. * ZEYH.) N.R. URTON (=C(ssus cunelfolla Eckl. 4 Zeyh.) 3 (=R. cunelfolla (Eckl. & Zeyh.) Planch.) 3 (=R. erythrodes (Fresn.) Planch.) 3 600 R. TRIDENTATA (L. F.) WILD 4 DRUM. SUBSP. TRIDENTATA t=R. clrrhlflora sensu Gllg & Brandt p.p. excl. syn. Rhus cirrhlf lora L. f . ) 3 4918000 -CISSUS L. C. cunelfolla Eckl. & Zeyh. = RHOICISSUS TRIDENTATA SUBSP. CUNEIFOLIA STERCULIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5044000 5056000 -HERMANNIA L. 5. DE WINTER. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 401. 5350 H. CORDATA (E. MEY. EX PHILL. ) DE WINTER CLUSIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5162000 5168000 -HYPERICUM L. 2. WIGHT 4 ARN. 1834. PRODR. 99. 350 H. HOOKERANUM WIGHT & APN THYMELAEACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5429000 5435000 -GNIDIA L. 19. HILLIARD 6 BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 218. 250 G. BURCHE LLII ( MEISN . ) GILG ( =Las1os1phon burchellll Melsn.) 4 5320 G. RENNIANA HILLIARD 4 BURTT 5435010 -Lasleslphon Freson. = GNIDIA L. burchellll Melsn. = GNIDIA BUPCHELLII 5436000 -STRUTHIOLA L. 4. PETERSON 4 HILLIARD. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 219. 125 S. ANGUSTILOBA PETERSON 4 HILLIARD 5461000 -PASSERINA L. 2. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1987. THE BOTANY OF THE SOUTHERN NATAL DRAKENSBERG 233. 250 P. DRAKENSBERGENSIS HILLIARD 4 BURTT IMMELMAN 950 N. LUEDERITZII KOEHNE FORMA HEREROENSIS KOEHNE 1000 N. LUEDERITZII KOEHNE FORMA LUEDERITZII 1450 N. SAGITTIFOLIA ( SOND . ) KOEHNE VAR. ERICIFORMIS KOEHNE N. sallcifolla H.B.K. = HEIMIA SALICIFOLIA 1900 N. SCHINZII KOEHNE <=N. schlnzll Koehne var. fleckll Koehne ) # <=N. schlnzll Koehne var. rehmannll Koehne ) # N. schlnzll Koehne var. fleckll Koehne - N. SCHINZII N. schlnzll Koehne var. rehmannll Koehne = N. SCHINZII 5487000 -HEIMIA LINK 4 OTTO 2. KOEHNE. 1903. PFLANZENREICH 17: 241. 200 H. SALICIFOLIA (MONTI) LINK 4 OTTO (=Nesaea sallcifolla H.B.K.) 2 COMBRETACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5536000 5538000 -COMBRETUM LOEFL. 9. EXELL. 1978. FZ 4: 100-160. 1800 C. KRAUSSII HOCHST. (=C. nelsonll Duemmer ) 9 C. nelsonll Duemmer = C. KRAUSSII MYRTACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5553000 5558000 -MYRTUS L. 1. CAMPBELL. 1968. FL. EUROP. 2: 303. 100 M. COMMUNIS L. * TRAPACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5829000 5829000 -TRAPA L. 2. VERDCOURT. 1986. KEW BULL. 41: 447. 100 T. NATANS L. VAR. PUMILA NAKANO EX VERDC. ARALIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5839000 5872000 -CUSSONIA THUNB. 5. REYNEKE 4 KOK. 1987. A. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 317. 400 C. PANICULATA ECKL. 4 ZEYH. VAR. PANICULATA 450 C. PANICULATA ECKL. 4 ZEYH. VAR. SINUATA REYNEKE 4 KOK APIACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5893000 5992000 -HETEROMORPHA CHAM. 4 SCHLECTD . 5. TOWNSEND. 1985. KEW BULL. 40= 843-849. 250 H. PAPILLOSA C.C. TOWNSEND 6013000 -DEVERRA DC. 2. PFISTERER 4 PODLECH. 1986. MITT. BOT. MUNCHEN 22: 571. O. aphylla (Cham. 4 Schlechtd.) DC. = D. DENUDATA SUBSP. APHYLLA 300 0. DENUDATA (VIV) PFISTERER 4 POOL. SUBSP.. APHYLLA (CHAM. 4 SCHLECHTD.) PFISTERER 4 PODL. (=D. aphylla (Cham. 4 Schlechtd.) DC.) 2 ( =Pituranthos aphyllus (Cham. 4 Schlechtd.) Benth. 4 Hook. f. ex Schlnz) 2 6013010 -Pituranthos = DEVERRA P. aphyllus (Cham. 4 Schlechtd.) Benth. 4 Hook. f. ex Schlnz = DEVERRA DENUDATA SUBSP. APHYLLA 6016010 -DRACOSCIADIUM HILLIARD 4 BURTT 1. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 220. 100 O. ITALAE HILLIARD 4 BURTT 200 0. SANICU LI FOLIUM HILLIARD 4 BURTT 6045000 -POLEMANNIA ECKL. 4 ZEYH. 4. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43: 225. 350 P. SIMPLICIOR HILLIARD 4 BURTT 6116000 -PEUCEDANUM L. 2950 P. THODEI ARNOLD (Note orthographic correction) ERICACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 6179000 LYTHRACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 5473000 -ROTALA L. 9. COOK. 1979. BOISSIERA 29: 9-133. 700 R. MEXICANA CHAM. 4 SCHLECHTD. 5486000 -NE3AEA COMM. EX JUSS. #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING 5473000 6237000 -ERICA L. 24. OLIVER. 1984. S. AFR. J. BOT. 3,5: 268- 270. 25. DAVIDSON. 1985. S. AFR. J. BOT. 51: 71- 73. 26. HILLIARD 4 BURTT. 1985. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 42: 240-245. 27. OLIVER. 1986. BOTHALIA 16: 35-38. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 559S0 E. REVOLUTA (H. BOL.) L.E . DAVIDSON. (=E. subvert 1 c 11 lar f s Diels ex Guth. var. revoluta H. Bol.) 25 E. subvertlcl Haris Diels ex Guth. var. revoluta H. Bol. = E. REVOLUTA 6296000 -COILOSTIGMA KLOTZSCH 2. OLIVER. 1987. BOTHALIA 17= 163. C. dregeanum Klotzsch = C. ZEYHERIANUM VAR. ZEYHERIANUM C. tenulfollum Klotzsch = C. ZEYHERIANUM VAR. TENUIFOLIUM 300 C. ZEYHERIANUM KLOTZSCH VAR. TENUIFOLIUM (KLOTZSCH) E.G.H. OLIVER <=C. tenulfollum Klotzsch) 2 900 C. ZEYHERIANUM KLOTZSCH VAR. ZEYHERIANUM (=C. dregeanum Klotzsch) 2 SAPOTACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 63S3000 6368000 -SIDEROXYLON L. 2. HEMSLEY . 1966. KEW BULL. 20: 972. 100 S. INERME L. SUBSP. INERME 6386010 -MANILKARA ADANS. 3. VAN WYK. 1982. S. AFR. J. B0T. 1: 33. EBENACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 6903000 6909000 -EUCLEA MURRAY 3. RETIEF . 1966. BOTHALIA 16: 220. 550 E. 0EWINTERI RETIEF APOCYNACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 6599000 6562000 -LANDOLPHIA BEAUV. L. capensls Ollv. = ANCYCLOBOTRYS CAPENSIS L. peterstana (Klotzsch) T.-Dyer = ANCYCLOBOTRYS PETERSIANA 6562020 -ANCYCLOBOTRYS PIERRE 1. KUPICHA. 1985. FZ 7,2: 422. 100 A. CAPENSIS ( OLIV. ) PICHON (=Landolph1a capensls Ollv.) 1 200 A. PETERSIANA (KLOTZSCH) PIERRE (=Landolph1a peterslana (Klotzsch) T.- Dyer ) 1 301 325 C. GEOMETRICUM BAK. & C.H. NR. (=C. lanceolatum Forssk. subsp. geometrlcum (Bak. & C.H. Nr.) Brand) 3 C. lanceolatum Forssk. subsp. geometrlcum (Bak. A C.H. Nr. ) Brand = C. GEOMETRICUM 7072000 -Tysonla H. Bol. = AFROTYSONIA T. afrlcana H. Bol. = AFROTYSONIA AFRICANA T. glochidiata R. Mill = AFROTYSONIA GLOCHIDIATA 7072010 -AFROTYSONIA RAUSCHERT 1. MILL. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 467-475. 100 A. AFRICANA (H. BOL.) RAUSCHERT (=Tyson1a afrlcana H. Bol.) 1 200 A. GLOCHIDIATA (R. MILL) R. MILL (=Tyson1a glochidiata R. Mill) 1 VERBENACEAE Contributed by N.G. Welman PERIPLOCACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 6729000 6747000 -RAPHIONACME HARV. 6. VENTER & VERHOEVEN. 1906. S. AFR. J. BOT. 52: 332. 7. VENTER A VERHOEVEN. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53: 177. 350 R. ELSANA VENTER 6 VERHOEVEN 925 R. NAMIBIANA VENTER A VERHOEVEN ASCLEPIADACEAE Contributed by E. Retlef 6752000 6870000 -BRACHYSTELMA R. BR. 2. FORSTER. 1986. BOTHALIA 16: 227. 200 B. BARBEPAE HARV. EX HOOK. F. 350 B. BREVIPEDICELLATUM TUPRILL B. caudatum (Thunb.) N.E. Br . = B. TUBEROSUM 5850 B. TUBEROSUM (MEERBURG) R. BR. EX SIMS (=B. caudatum (Thunb.) N.E. Br . ) 2 6885000 -STAPELIA L. 1. LEACH. 1985. EXCELXA, TAX. SER. Z- 1-157. 4420 ?S. GIGANTEA N.E. BR. X 09BE0PSIS CAUDATA (N.E. BR) LEACH (=S. tarantuloldes R.A. Dyer) 1 4420 ?S. GIGANTEA N.E. BR. X ORBEOPSIS LUTEA (N.E. BR) LEACH (=S. tarantuloldes R.A. Dyer) 1 S. tarantuloldes R.A. Dyer = S. GIGANTEA X ORBEOPSIS CAUDATA S. tarantuloldes R.A. Dyer = S. GIGANTEA X ORBEOPSIS LUTEA B0RAGINACEAE Contributed by W.G. Helman 7038000 7148000 -PLEXIPUS PAFIN. 1. FERNANDES. 1984. BOLM SOC BROTERIANA 57: 265-273. 150 P. CAESPITOSUS (H. PEARSON) R. FERNANDES (=Bouchea caespltosa H. Pearson) 1 1600 P. SCHLECHTERI (GUERKE) R. FERNANDES VAR. SCHLECHTERI 7148020 -Bouchea Cham. Southern African species moved to PLEXIPUS B. caespltosa H. Pearson = PLEXIPUS CAESPITOSUS B. schlechter 1 Guerke = PLEXIPUS SCHLECHTERI VAR. SCHLECHTERI 7148030 -Chascanum E. Mey. = PERIPLEXUS C. schlechter 1 (Guerke) Moldenke = PLEXIPUS SCHLECHTERI VAR. SCHLECHTERI SOLANACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 7000 -SOLANUM L. 13. HEPPER & JAEGER. 1986. KEW BULL. 41,2= 433-435. S. hermannl 1 auctt. = S. LINNAEANUM 3750 S. LINNAEANUM HEPPER A JAEGER (=S. hermannl 1 auctt.) 13 ( =S. sodomeum auctt.) 13 S. sodomeua auctt. = S. LINNAEANUM SCRQPHULARIACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 7472000 -HEMIMERIS L. F. 100 H. CENTRODES HIERN ( =H. nana Diels ) 3 300 H. MONTANA L. F. (=H. pachyceras Diels) 3 (=H. racenosa (Houtt.) Merrill) 3 H. nana Diels = H. CENTRODES H. pachyceras Diels - H. MONTANA H. racemosa (Houtt.) Merrill - H. MONTANA 7476000 -NEMESIA VENT. 9. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 385-400. 200 N. ALBIFLORA N.E. BR. (=N. flanaganll Hlern) 9 1500 N. CAERULEA HIERN 1800 N. DENTICULATA (BENTH.) FOURC . <=N. natalltla Sond.) 9 N. flanaganll Hlern = N. ALBIFLORA N. frutlcans (Thunb.) Benth. var. linearis (Vent.) Norllndh = N. LINEAPIS 2600 N. GLABRIUSCULA HILLIARD A BURTT 3850 N. LINEARIS VENT. (=N. Frutlcans (Thunb.) Benth. var. linearis (Vent.) Norllndh) 9 N. natalltla Sond. = N. DENTICULATA 5400 N. RUPICOLA HILLIARD 5550 N. SILVATICA HILLIARD 5700 N. UM60NATA (HIERN) HILLIARD A BURTT (=Diclis umbonata Hiern) 9 7043000 -EHRETIA P. BR. 150 E. OBTUSIFOLIA HOCHST. EX DC. Tropical African species collected In Botswana. 16211 Andara ) : Xaru, P.A. Smith 26 February 1984. -Contributed by E. Kalake . 7064000 -CYNOGLOSSUM L. 3. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 345-350. 25 C. ALTICOLA HILLIARD A BURTT 75 C. AUSTROAFRICANUM HILLIARD A BURTT (=C. austroafricanum Welm. nomen nudum) 3 C. austroafr Icanura Walm. nomen nudum = C. AUSTROAFRICANUM 7477000 -OICLIS BENTH. 0. umbonata Hlern NEMESIA UMBONATA 19000 -SUTERA ROTH 16. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,2: 216-217. 1900 S. BEVERLYANA HILLIARD A BURTT 10450 S. SILENIOIDES HILLIARD 58000 -LIMOSELLA L. 3. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,2: 212-216. L. capensls auct. - L. GRANDIFLORA 400 L. GRANDIFLORA BENTH. (=L. capersfs auct.) 3 302 450 L. INF LATA HI LLIAPD i BURTT 700 L. VESICULOSA HILLIARD & BURTT Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 6352020 -Dinocanthium Bren. = PYROSTRIA D. hystrix Brent. = PYROSTRIA HYSTRIX SELAGINACEAE 7566000 7571000 -AGATHELPIS CHOISY 3. WIJNANDS. 1983. BOT. COMMELINS. 100 A. DUBIA (L.) HUTCH. EX WIJNANDS (Note author correction) SCROPHULARIACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 7460000 7597000 -MELASMA BERG. M. barbatum HI ern = ALECTRA SESSILIFLORA VAR. SESSILIFLORA M. sessi lif lorum (Vahl) Hlern = ALECTRA SESSILIFLORA VAR. SESSILIFLORA 7597010 -ALECTRA THUN3 . 1. MELCHOIR . 1941. NOTIZBL. BOT. GAPD. HUS. BERL. 15: 4 27. 2. HEPPER. 1960. KEW BULL. 14: 405. A. barbata (Hlern) Melch. = A. SESSILIFLORA VAR. SESSILIFLORA A. me lampyro i des Benth. - A. SESSILIFLORA VAR. SESSILIFLORA 1870 A. SESSILIFLORA (VAHL) KUNTZE VAR. SESSILIFLORA (=A. barbata (Hlern) Melch.) 2 (=A. melampyroides Benth.) 2 (=Melasma barbatum Hlern) 2 (^Melasma sess 1 1 1 f lorum (Vahl) Hlern) 1 7627000 900 1150 1250 1500 1600 1650 -HARVEYA HOOK. 4. HILLIARD i BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 377-384. H. crlspula Conrath = H. RANDII H. HUTTONII HIE9N H. LEUCOPHARYNX HILLIARD » BURTT H. PULCHRA HILLIARD t BURTT H. RANDII HIERN ( =H . crlspula Conrath) 4 H. SCARLATINA (BENTH.) HIEPN (=Aulaya scarlatina Benth.) 4 H. SILVATICA HILLIARD t BURTT 7627010 -Aulaya Harv . = HARVEYA A. scarlatina Benth. = HARVEYA SCARLATINA ACANTHACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 7906000 6007000 -ASYSTASIA BLUME 5. EDWARDS t GETLIFFE NORRIS. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53,3: 231-233. 350 A. PINGUIFOLIA T.J. EDWARDS 8026000 365 367 368 -PERISTROPHE NEES 5. BALKWILL ET AL. 1986. S. 52,6: 513-520. 6. BALKWILL ET AL. 1988. S. 54,1: 47-54. P. KOTSCHYANA NEES P. NAMIBIENSIS BALKWILL SU3SP. BALKWILL P. NAMIBIENSIS BALKWILL SUBSP. AFR. J. BOT. AFR. J. BOT. BRANDBERGENSIS NAMIBIENSIS 8031000 -DICLIPTERA JUSS. 6. BALKWILL t BALKWILL. 1988. S. AFR. J. BOT. 54,1: 55-59. 330 D. FIONAE BALKWILL 8094010 -MONECHMA HOCHST. 2. MUNDAY. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53,2: 140- 142. 550 M. CALLOTHAKNUM J. MUNDAY RUBIACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 8119000 8308000 500 510 520 -TRICALYSIA A. RICH. 4. ROBBRECHT. 1987. BULL. JARD . BOT. NAT. BELG. 57: 180-187. T. CAPENSIS ( MEISN. EX HOCHST.) SIM VAR. CAPENSIS ( =Bunburya capensls Melsn. ex Hochst.) 4 T. CAPENSIS (MEISN. EX HOCHST.) SIM VAR. GALPINII (SCHINZ) ROBBRECHT (=T. galpinii Schinz) 4 T. CAPENSIS (MEISN. EX HOCHST.) SIM VAR. TRANSVAALENSIS ROBBRECHT T. galplnll Schinz = T. CAPENSIS VAR. GALPINII 8308030 -Bunburya Melsn. = TRICALYSIA B. capensls Melsn. ex Hochst. = TRICALYSIA CAPENSIS VAR. CAPENSIS 8352000 -CANTHIUM LAM. 9. TILNEY t KOK. 1987. S. AFR. J. BOT. 53,1: 98-102. 10. BPIDSON. 1987. KEW BULL. 42,3= 634. C. guetnzil Sond. = KEETIA GUEINZII 1100 C. SETIFLORUM HIERN SUBSP. SETIFLORUM 1400 C. VANWYKII TILNEY t KOK 8352050 -KEETIA PHILL. 1. BRIDSON. 1986. KEW BULL. 41,4: 970-971. 100 K. GUEINZII (SOND.) BRIDSON (=Canthium gueinzil Sond.) 1 (=K. transvaalensls Ph ill.) 1 K. transvaalensls Phi 11. = K. GUEINZII 8355000 -PYROSTRIA COMMERS. EX JUSS. 1. BPIDSON. 1987. KEW BULL. 42,3: 629-630. 100 P. HYSTRIX (BREM.) BRIDSON < =Dinocanthium hystrix Brern. ) 1 8467000 -HYDROPHYLAX L. F. Southern African species moved to PHYLOHYDRAX H. carnosa (Hochst.) Sond. = PHYLOHYDRAX CARNOSA 8467010 100 -PHYLOHYDRAX PUFF 1. PUFF. 1986. PL. SYST. EVOL. 154: 343-366. P. CARNOSA (HOCHST.) PUFF < =Hydrophylax carnosa (Hochst.) Sond.) 1 VALERIANACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 8527000 8532000 100 200 300 -VALERIANA L. 2. BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 402-405. V. CAPENSIS THUMB . VAR. CAPENSIS V. CAPENSIS THUMB. VAR. LANCEOLATA N.E. BR. V. CAPENSIS THUN3 . VAR. NANA B.L. BURTT DIPSACACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 8539000 8541000 -CEPHALARIA ROEM. * SCH'JLT. 3. BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 366. 500 C. GALPINIANA SZABO SUBSP. GALPINIANA 550 C. GALPINIANA SZABO SUBSP. SIMPLICIOR B.L. BURTT CAMPANULACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 8644000 8668000 650 2750 3650 5450 8350 9300 9350 12650 -WAHLENBEPGIA SCHRAD. EX ROTH 9. TUYN. 1981. MITT. BOT. STSAMML. , MUNCH. 17: 239-242. 10. HILLIARD i BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,2: 195-198. 11. HILLIARD * BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,3: 350-352. 12. THULIN. 1987. NORD. J. BOT. 7,3: 261. W. APPRESSIFOLIA HILLIARD t BURTT W. CUSPIDATA V. BREHM. (=W. dentifera v. Brehrn. ) 10 (=W. furcata v. Brehm. ) 10 W. dentifera v. Brehm. = W. CUSPIDATA W. DOLERITICA HILLIARD * BURTT W. furcata v. Brehm. = W. CUSPIDATA W. HIRSUTA (EDGEW.) TUYN ( =Cepha lost Irma hlrsutum Edgew.) 9 W. PALLIDIF LORA HILLIARD t BURTT W. POLYTRICHIFOLIA SCHLTR . SUBSP. POLYTRICHIFOLIA W. POLYTRICHIFOLIA SCHLTR. SUBSP. DRACOMONTANA HILLIARD t BURTT W. TETRAMERA THULIN 8669000 -Cephalostigma A. DC. Southern African species moved to WAHLENBERGIA C. hlrsutum Edgew. = WAHLENBERGIA HIRSUTA ASTERACEAE Contributed by W.G. Welman 8729000 8764000 -CORYMBIUM L. 250 C. ENERVE MARKOTTER (Note species mistakenly omitted from Edn 2,2) 8992000 -GNAPHALIUM L. 1000 G. PAUCIF LORUM DC. (Note species mistakenly omitted from Edn 2,2) 9006000 -HELICHRYSUM MILL. 2. HILLIARD. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 43,2: 198. H. altlcolum H. Bol. var. montanum H. Bol. = H. EVANSII 5775 H. EVANSII HILLIARD (=H. altlcolum H. Bol. var. montanum H. Bol.) 2 9037000 600 2600 -STOEBE L. S. CINEREA (L.) THUNB. (=Ser1ph1ua clnereum L. ) 1 S. RUGULOSA HARV. (Note species mistakenly omitted from Edn 2,2) 303 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 9037010 -Serlphtum L. = ELYTROPAPPUS , STOEBE S. clnereum L. = STOEBE CINEREA 9053000 -MACOWANIA OLIV. 250 M. DEFLEXA HILLIARD & BURTT (Note species mistakenly omitted from Edn 2,2) 9339000 -MATRICARIA L. M. pilifera Thell. = CYMBOPAPPUS PILIFERUS M. zuurbergensls Oliv. = HILLIARDIA ZUURBERGENSIS 9339020 100 9391000 9391090 900 9357000 000 9366000 1975 9905010 9906000 900 9911000 10150 11650 126S5 19900 -HILLIARDIA B. NORD. 1. NORDENSTAM. 1987. OPERA BOT. 92: 197-151. H. ZUURBERGENSIS (OLIV.) B. NORD. < =Matr Icarla zuurbergensls Oliv.) 1 -CHRYSANTHEMUM L. C. laslopodum Hutch. = CYMBOPAPPUS PILIFERUS -CYMBOPAPPUS B. NORD. 2. NORDENSTAM. 1987. OPERA BOT. 92: 197-151. C. lasiopodus (Hutch.) B. Nord. = C. PILIFERUS C. PILIFERUS (THELL.) B. NORD. ( =Chrysanthemum laslopodum Hutch.) 2 ( =Cymbopappus laslopodus (Hutch.) B. Nord. ) 2 (=Matricaria pilifera Thell.) 1 -H1PPIA L. 9. HUTCHINSON. 1918. KEW BULL. 5: 179-182. 5. COMPTON. 1990. JL S. AFR. BOT. 6= 60. 6. MEPXMULLER. 1951. MITT. BOT. STSAMML. • MUNCH, l: 79. H. TRILOBATA HUTCH. -PENTZIA THUMB. 8. NORDENSTAM. 1987. BOT. JAHR3 . SYST. 108: 195. P. PfcDUNCULARIS B. NORD. -CRASSOCEPHALUM MOENCH C. bojeri (DC.) Robyns = SOLANECIO ANGULATUS C. subscandens (A. Rich.) S. Moore = SOLANECIO ANGULATUS -CINERARIA L. 9. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 930-931. C. DELTOIDEA SOND . (=C. monticola Hutch.) 9 C. monticola Hutch. = C. DELTOIDEA C. cissampelina DC. = MIKANIOPSIS CISSAMPELINA -SENECIO L. 36. HUTCHINSON. 1917. ANN. S. AFR. MUS. 9,6: 398-399. 37. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 93,2: 198-199. 38. HILLIARD A BURTT. 1986. NOTES R. BOT. GDN EDINB. 93,3: 352-353. 39. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 903. S. cephalophorus (Compt.) Jacobs. = KLEINIA CEPHALOPHOPA S. clssampelinus (DC.) Sch. Blp. = MIKANIOPSIS CISSAMPELINA S. dinterl Muschl. ex Dlnter = EMILIA AMBIFARIA S. FLANAGANII PHILL. S. fulgens (Hook, f.) Nlch. = KLEINIA FULGENS S. galpini i (Hook. f. = KLEINIA GALPINII S. GREGATUS HILLIARD (=S. serratuloldes DC. var. dleterlenll Thell. ) 38 ( =S. serratuloldes DC. var. gracilis Harv. ) 38 (=S. serratuloldes DC. var. holubll Thell. ) 38 (=S. serratuloldes DC. var. rehmannll Thell. ) 33 S. HOCHSTETTERI SCH. BIP. EX A. RICH. S. hookerlanus Jacobsen = KLEINIA FULGENS S. llmosus O. Hoffra. = EMILIA LIMOSA S. longiflorus (DC.) Sch. Bip. = KLEINIA L0NC-IFL0RA S. marlothianus O. Hoffm. = EMILIA MARLOTHIANA S. mlkanioldes Otto ex Harv. - DELAIREA ODORATA S. PEARSQNII HUTCH. S. scandens DC. - DELAIPEA ODORATA S. schinzll O. Hoffm. = EMILIA AMBIFARIA S. serratuloldes DC. var. dleterlenll Thell. = S. GREGATUS S. serratuloldes DC. var. gracilis Harv. = S. GREGATUS S. serratuloldes DC. var. holubll Thell. = S. GREGATUS S. serratuloldes DC. var. rehmannli Thell. = S. GREGATUS S. stapell Ifornls Phlll. = KLEINIA STAPELIIFORMIS 9911010 50 100 150 300 900 9911020 9911030 9911050 100 200 300 900 500 9911080 100 9911090 100 9911100 100 9911110 100 9920000 2750 7050 S. tenellulus S. Moore = EMILIA TENELLULA S. transvaalensis H. Bol. = EMILIA TPANSVAALENSIS S. vl r 1 d 1 f lorus Hutch. = EMILIA MARLOTHIANA S. we lwl tsch 1 1 O. Hoffm. = KLEINIA FULGENS -EMILIA CASS. 2. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 903-920. #. PRE HERBARIUM PRACTICE, FOLLOWING WELMAN. E. a lbocostata Hlern = E. MARLOTHIANA E. AMBIFARIA (S. MOORE) C. JEFFREY ( =Othonna amblfaria S. Moore) 2 ( =Othonna polycephala Klatt) * (=Othonna rosea Klatt) S (=Senec1o dlnteri Muschl. ex Dlnter) • (=Senecio schinzii O. Hoffm.) 2 E. LIMOSA (O. HOFFM.) C. JEFFREY (=Senec1o llmosus O. Hoffm.) 2 E. MARLOTHIANA (O. HOFFM.) C. JEFFREY (=E. albocostata Hlern) 9 ( =Othonna glauca Klatt) S (=Senecio marlothianus O. Hoffm.) 2 ( =Senec o vl r 1 d 1 f lorus Hutch.) * E. TENELLULA (5. MOORE) C. JEFFREY (=Senecio tenellulus S. Moore) 2 E. TRANSVAALENSIS (H. BOL.) C. JEFFREY (=Senec1o transvaalensis H. Bol.) 2 -NOTONIA DC. Southern African species moved to KLEINIA N. fulgens (Hook, f.) Gulllaumin = KLEINIA FULGENS N. welwl tschl 1 (0. Hoffm.) Hlern = KLEINIA FULGENS - NOTON IOP5 IS B. NOPDENSTAM Southern African species moved to KLEINIA N. fulgens (Hook, f.) B. Nord. = KLEINIA FULGENS N. galpini i (Hook, f.) B. Nord. = KLEINIA GALPINII -KLEINIA MILL. 1. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 935-936. K. CEPHALOPHOPA COMPTON (=Senecio cephalophorus (Compt.) Jacobs . ) 1 K. FULGENS HOOK. F. (=Notonia fulgens (Hook, f.) Gulllaumin) 1 <=Noton1a welwltschll (O. Hoffm.) Hlern) 1 ( =Notoniops1s fulgens (Hook, f.) B. Nord . ) 1 (=Senec1o fulgens (Hook, f.) Nlch.) 1 (-Senecio hookerlanus Jacobsen) 1 (=Senec1o welwltschll O. Hoffm.) 1 K. GALPINII (HOOK. F.) A. BERGER ( =Noton1 ops i s galplnii (Hook, f.) B. Nord. ) 1 <=Senec1o galplnii Hook, f.) 1 K. LONGIFLOPA DC. (^Senecio longiflorus (DC.) Sch. Bip) 1 K. STAPELIIFORMIS (PHILL.) STAPF <=Senec1o stape 1 1 1 f orml s Phlll.) 1 -LAMPROCEPHALUS B. NORD. 1. NOPDENSTAM. 1975. BOT. NOTISEP 128: 323- 326. L. MONTANUS B. NORD. -DELAIREA LEM. 1. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 933. D. ODORATA LEM. (=Senec1o mlkanioldes Otto ex Harv.) 1 (=5enec1o scandens DC.) 29 -MIKANIOPSIS MILNE-REDH. 1. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 878-879. M. CISSAMPELINA (DC.) C. JEFFREY (=Cacalia cissampelina DC.) 1 (=Senecio clssampelinus (DC.) Sch. Bip.) 1 -SOLANECIO (SCH. BIP.) WALP. 1. JEFFREY. 1986. KEW BULL. 91,9: 920-923. S. ANGULATUS (VAHL) C. JEFFREY ( ^Crassocephalum bojeri (DC.) Robyns) 1 ( ^Crassocephalum subscandens (A. Rich.) S. Moore) 1 -OTHONNA L. 6. HUTCHINSON. 1917. ANN. S. AFR. MUS. 9: 909-912. O. amblfaria S. Moore = EMILIA AMBIFARIA O. DIVARICATA HUTCH. O. glauca Klatt = EMILIA MARLOTHIANA O. polycephala Klatt = EMILIA AMBIFARIA 0. OVALIFOLI A HUTCH. 304 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 9432020 35 0 0. rosea Klatt - EMILIA AMBIFARIA A. prostrata Salisb. = ARCTOTHECA PROSTRATA A. Edn 2,2) repens Wendl. = A. PROSTRATA 9500000 -OLDENBURGIA LESS. -ARCTOTHECA WENDL. A. grandiflora Schrad. = A. PP05TRATA A. PROSTRATA (SALISB.) BRITTEN O. 1. BOND. 1967. S. AFR. J. BOT. 500. arbuscula DC. = O. GRANDIS (=A. grandiflora Schrad.) 2 150 O. GRAND IS (THUNB.) BAILL . (=A. repens Wendl.) 1 (=Arctotis prostrata Salisb.) 1 (Note species mistakenly omitted from 175 O. (=Arnica grandis Thunb . ) 1 (=0. arbuscula DC.) 1 INTERMEDIA BOND : 493- Bothalia 18,2: 305-324 (1988) ANNUAL REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE 1987/1988 1st April 1987— 31st March 1988 CONTENTS Introduction 305 Reports of divisions 306 Staff list 318 Publications by the staff 322 INTRODUCTION Much progress has been made on several fronts during the year under review, in spite of the unsettling effect of the uncertainty about the future of the Botanical Re- search Institute (BRI). The efforts of the Advisory Com- mittee for Botanical Research (Figure 1), supported by the Management of the BRI and National Botanic Gardens of South Africa (NBG), towards rationalizing state and semi-state botanical activities in South Africa, have re- ceived a setback as a result of recommendations made in the Commission for Administration’s report to which the Department of Agriculture and Water Supply has reacted. Even though the matter could still be regarded as sub judice it has become general knowledge that the BRI may be fragmented and that it may cease to exist as one of the major botanical research organizations of interna- tional importance in the Southern Hemisphere. The fragmentation of the BRI would be a major disaster and would cripple the development of botany in this country. There is little doubt on the other hand, that the proposed process of rationalization of existing botanical activities in state and state-supported organizations, including the amalgamation of the BRI and the NBG to form a new national botanical organization, would produce major benefits for all concerned. It is to be hoped that a solution compatible with national interests will be found. A positive, but nevertheless very disruptive event during this year was the installation of air-conditioning and a gas-flooding system to protect the extremely valuable and irreplaceable collections of the National Herbarium against fire. This major operation took nine months to complete and caused much disruption. It can only be ascribed to the diligence of the staff and the ex- cellent co-operation between our staff and the builders that work could be continued and that productivity was only slightly affected. The greater safety of the collections as well as the improvement in our accommo- dation, due to other minor works which are being com- pleted, are advances which will benefit the Institute for many years to come. The development of a computerized control system for the National Herbarium has already produced major benefits. Together with PRECIS (National Herbarium [PRE] Computerized Information System), this control system places the National Herbarium in Pretoria at the forefront of computer applications to herbarium collec- tions world- wide. As a result of the restrictions placed on the creation of new posts by the State, the plant identification service, which is severely understaffed, works under great stress. In order to restrict the use of this gratis service to essen- tial operations, it was decided to introduce a handling charge for identifications. A user survey made, high- lighted many problems, particularly due to the insuffi- cient time allowed to users to budget for the additional expense. The implementation of the measure will there- fore be postponed to April 1989. Research has continued, with a few exceptions, at a steady pace. The main barometer for research output is our publications. All four journals published by the Institute appeared on schedule. The general house journal Bothalia, was well supported by staff as well as by outside contributors. In 1987 the 49th volume of The Flowering Plants of Africa was published and the fiftieth volume (in press) will be celebrated by adopting an attractive illustrated cover and including an editorial. Some signifi- cant volumes have appeared in the Memoirs of the Bo- tanical Survey of South Africa series. Number 55, Barrier plants of southern Africa, summarizes our knowledge of plants which are suitable for use as hedges or as planted barriers to human and animal incursions, a topical subject in these security-conscious times. The second part of edition two of the List of species of southern African plants appeared as Number 56 in the series. The signifi- cance and usefulness of these catalogues is not sufficiently realized. The second edition of this work lists the ap- proximately 24000 taxa, and the synonyms applied to them in the last fifty years, of the flowering plants as well as mosses and ferns. The existence of this type of publication, at least at this scale, is unique, as far as known, to southern Africa. The magnitude of the task accomplished is only evident when contrasted with the situation in other parts of the world. It is equivalent to the listing of all the plants in Europe, including the Balkans, or of the North American continent excluding Mexico, or of the whole of the Australian continent. The fact that computer-produced lists of names of new species and records as well as name changes appear annually for use by those interested in plants, is yet another unique feature. Publications by individual Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 306 FIGURE 1. — Members of the Advisory Committee for Botanical Research in Agri- culture (ACBRA), who at- tended the annual meeting of the Committee held on 21st October 1987 in Hol- land House in the grounds of the Botanical Research Institute, Pretoria. Left to right: Mr P. van Wyk, Prof. H.P. van der Schijff, Prof. J.N. Eloff, Prof. J.J.A. van der Walt, Dr D.J.B. Killick, Dr O.A. Leistner (Secretary), Dr W.P. Grob- belaar. Prof. H.A. van de Venter, Prof. G.K. Theron and Dr B. de Winter (Chair- man). researchers reached a total of approximately ninety, maintaining the high level achieved during the last four or five years. During the year, a series of public seminars was held at which the species concept in plants was exhaustively discussed. These were well attended by scientists from other organizations and are worth repeating as an excer- cise in public relations. Several of our scientists attended overseas congresses by invitation. The application of computers to the re- search in the Botanical Research Institute was particularly well presented and had a marked impact at the Inter- national Botanical Congress held in West Berlin in 1987. Two of the staff who attended were appointed to sub- committees of the Nomenclature Committee of the IAPT. The Institute can therefore look back on a very pro- ductive year, a fact which is in stark contrast to the threats to its future existence. The country cannot afford the disappearance of a research organization which con- tributes so significantly to the botanical knowledge essential for maintaining a viable environment. HERBARIUM DIVISION Under-staffing and a heavy workload remain serious problems for the four herbaria of the Institute affecting all major functions, namely, curation, research and herbarium services. Although every effort is being made to resolve this situation, it is unlikely that any meaning- ful solution will be forthcoming for some time into the future. National Herbarium, Pretoria (PRE) Curation Approximately 187 scientific journals are scanned annually for taxonomic and nomenclatural changes FIGURE 2. — Details of a plant specimen loan, requested by an herbarium in Europe, being typed into the com- puter by Mrs M. Heyman. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) covering the Flora of southern Africa region. These contained 134 articles of direct relevance to southern Africa. A total of 678 changes was recorded affecting about 2,8% of the flora. These include: 230 new names (130 new taxa, 85 names brought back into use and 15 species new to the region), 172 names reduced to synonymy, 51 new combinations, 27 orthographic cor- rections and six names removed because the taxa were mistakenly recorded from southern Africa. The updating of the PRECIS database continued with more than 4000 specimens having undergone name changes and over 3 000 having had their grid references added or corrected, and 600 specimens were deleted from the database. Other miscellaneous changes affected 1 100 specimens. Distribution records were significantly extended for 56 taxa, mostly at the provincial level (Transvaal, seven new taxa, OFS 10, Natal eight, Cape 19, Transkei five, Lesotho two and Swaziland one) with four new records for southern Africa. Computerization Applications have been developed on the Herbarium’s Burroughs B28 multi-user computer system to record and manage all records involving plant identifications, specimen loans (Figure 2) and exchanges as well as the maintenance of an up-to-date list of plant names used by PRE. These applications have been operational since July, 1987 and, in the 9 months to date, have greatly improved the efficiency of these services. Although initially somewhat apprehensive, herbarium staff, after very little training, adapted readily to computerization. Accommodation The National Herbarium and Mary Gunn Library, together with other parts of the BRI (Figure 3), under- went major disruptive changes with the installation of fire protection (halon flooding) and air conditioning (Figure 4). These alterations should be complete by 1 April, 1988. This will be followed immediately by FIGURE 3. — Hoisting a roof sky-light into position above the east well of the main building. three further additions to the Herbarium, namely, the installation of three working bays on the south side of each herbarium wing, a special room for decontaminating and drying specimens and a new SEM room and various other rooms adjacent to the moss Herbarium. These additions should be complete by July, 1988. In spite of the considerable disruption caused by the building FIGURE 4. — The newly instal- led air-conditioning plant situated on the roof of the main building of the Insti- tute. 308 operations during the last nine months productivity remained on par due only to the concerted efforts of all staff concerned. Visitors In addition to numerous local visitors from various universities, Government institutes, nature conservation departments etc., together with members of the general public, the herbarium was also consulted by officers and personnel from Lesotho, Botswana, Swaziland, Bophu- thatswana, Venda and the Transkei. A number of overseas botanists visited the Institute and Herbarium. These included: Dr N. Jurgens (Hamburg, W. Germany); Miss S. Liede (Hamburg, W. Germany); Prof. O.H. Volk (Wurzburg, W. Germany); Dr G. Davidse (St Louis, USA); Mr S. Hammer (New Mexico, USA); Dr R. Mithen (Harare, Zimbabwe); Dr J. Scott (Austra- lia); Prof. V.H. Heywood (Kew, England); Prof. C. Wu (Tamshui, Taiwan). Collecting expeditions These included trips to the north-western OFS (general collecting), Richtersveld ( Asclepias , various legumes and general collecting); south-western Cape (lichens), central Karoo (general collecting); Natal — Itala Game Reserve (general collecting); Namaqualand (Car ex, Hepaticae and general collecting) and the north-eastern OFS (general collecting). Herbarium services Plant identifications numbering 273 batches and 1 5 620 specimens were undertaken for officers of this Institute, various state departments, provincial admini- strations, universities and neighbouring states. The major users of the service were: universities, 30% of the material identified; the BRI 29%; botanic gardens 14%; museums 9%; private collectors 8%; nature conservation 5%; Forestry 3% and Agriculture 2%. Identifications for 152 visitors numbered 946. In addi- tion, backlogs totalling 8 501 specimens (mostly ex- changes which date back more than 15 years), were checked and, where necessary, named or renamed. En- quiries received by telephone totalled 978. New acces- sions to the herbarium numbered 19 618. Specimen loans sent to local and overseas herbaria numbered 84 (comprising 1 1 374 specimens) with exist- ing 74 loans (5 400 specimens) returned. The total num- ber of outstanding loans is 327 (35 357 specimens). 9 761 specimens were despatched as part of exchange agreements and 4 525 were received by PRE. Specimens received as gifts totalled 1001 while 1414 specimens were dispatched as gifts in return. Research and related activities The family Polygonaceae (G. Germishuizen). A revision of the genus Oxygonum was completed for southern Africa. Eight new taxa were described and an existing taxon reinstated. Work on the genera Fagopyrum, Emex and Rumex is still in progress. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) The family Ricciaceae (Hepaticae) (S.M. Perold). Descrip- tions of 35 Riccia taxa have been completed towards a revision of the genus. Three papers were published which included two new white-scaled species of Riccia. Two additional papers are in preparation, one describing a further two new white-scaled Riccia species. Revision o/Vigna (Fabaceae) (B.J. Pienaar). The taxon- omy of the two major species complexes, V. unguiculata and V. vexillata has been completed together with V. ner- vosa. Work on the remaining four taxa (V. frutescens, V. luteola, V. lobatifolia and V. oblongifolia) is in pro- gress. Revision of Carex (Cyperaceae) (C. Reid). 15 taxa have been delineated with five taxa, mainly from the winter rainfall region, still requiring further investigation. Two new species were identified and are being prepared for publication. Revision of the broad-leaved species of Asclepias (A. Nicholas). A review of the literature is under way. 847 selected specimens from local herbaria were loaned and examined. A preliminary assessment of the genus is that it is one of convenience and will probably have to be split into a number of smaller, more natural, genera. Contributions to the moss flora (J. van Rooy). The 2nd fascicle has been published. Fascicle three is nearing completion. Dr R.E. Magill has completed 12 families with two still outstanding and Mr J. van Rooy has com- pleted nine genera in the family Orthotrichaceae with a single genus outstanding. A start has also been made with the illustrations for this fascicle. Contributions to the lichen flora (F. Brusse). Sixty eight new lichen taxa were recorded for southern Africa. Two new genera, Schizodiscus and Lithoglypha, were publish- ed as well as eight new species of Parmelia and one of Porpidia. Transvaal wild flowers (Vol. 2) (G. Germishuizen). Work on this volume is progressing well with over 200 taxa (50%) having been illustrated with texts completed for 90 of these. Plant species and synonym list (various contributors). Edition 2, Part 2 (Dicotyledons) has now been published. Research support Scanning electron microscope (S.M. Perold). 3 384 micro- graphs were prepared for various BRI and outside work- ers. These include grass leaf surfaces, Oxygonum pollen, Vigna seeds and stigma surfaces, Coccinia leaf surface glands, lichen epicortex structure and Riccia spores and thalli. Expansion of collections from poorly represented areas (various contributors). Richtersveld — holdings for three V4° grids increased by 76% from 211 to 889 collections; Namaqualand — two V4° grids increased by 78% from 67 to 304 collections; north-western OFS — three V4° grids increased by 94% from 21 to 503 collections; north-eastern OFS — two V4° grids increased by 99% from three to 273 collections; Itala Game Reserve — 309 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) one V grid increased by 57% from 130 to 299 collec- tions: central Karoo — four V4° grids increased by 84% from 121 to 770 collections. The overall increase for the above fifteen V4° grids collected was 90% . Expansion of the fruit, seed and spirit collections (E. Retief and G. Germishuizen ) . This has been contributed to largely from material collected during fieldwork for other projects. The fruit collection was extended by 170 to 4 567 collections, the seed collections by 414 to 4 134 collections and the spirit collection by 371 to 3 726 col- lections. Publications 28 articles appeared in local (23) as well as overseas (5) journals. A further 24 articles are in press awaiting publication. Contributions to outside publications Various members of the Division contributed to the following publication by checking the text: I. Sinclair — A pocket guide to the butterflies of southern Africa. Natal Herbarium, Durban (NH) Mrs M. Jordaan, Curatrix of the herbarium and officer- in-charge of the unit for the past three years, was trans- ferred to the National Herbarium in July, 1987. Miss R. Williams, previously at the University Herbarium, Dur- ban-Westville, was appointed in her place. Mr D.B. Ntom- bela resigned at the beginning of March and a replace- ment for him has not yet been found. Continuity and considerable support were provided throughout the year by Mrs H. Noble and Mr A.M. Ngwenya. A steady flow of specimens (167-382 per month) was received for identification. The number of specimens identified totalled 3 439. This is significantly less than the previous year’s figure of 6 596. There were, however, noticeable increases in all other activities, namely, 437 visitors to the herbarium, four student groups, 1 296 tele- phone enquiries, 312 letters written, 738 specimens sent out on loan, 4 121 specimens mounted and 3 506 speci- mens accessioned. 3 501 specimens were renovated in an attempt to upgrade the condition of the older and more valuable collections. A single major collecting trip was undertaken to the Itala Nature Reserve and several shorter 1—2 day trips to localities closer to Durban. Mr Ngwenya assisted Dr Pablo Weisser of the BRI on two major trips to Zululand. Albany Museum Herbarium, Grahamstown (GRA) Mrs E. Brink continues to curate the herbarium. Miss S.A. Olivier was appointed as an Herbarium Assistant at the beginning of the year to assist with various curatorial functions. She, however, resigned again in November with the post remaining vacant to date. Mrs R. Hart, appointed by the Albany Museum to curate the Pocock Marine Algae collection, resigned in May. Her place was filled by Dr A. Jacot Guillarmod, who retired from the herbarium the previous year. Mr Neil Abrahams has continued his invaluable, voluntary assistance in labelling specimens and mounting reprints and articles. Despite the many upheavals, the herbarium continued to remain functional with 1 448 specimens identified, 573 visitors received, 480 telephone enquiries answered, 244 letters written, 1108 specimens mounted, 2 509 specimens accessioned, 136 specimens sent out on loan and 555 specimens sent out as gifts. Educational displays prepared during the year included nine for the Albany Museum and 19 for the herbarium. The garden which has always been associated with the herbarium is to be redesigned by a local horticulturist and will be renamed after Miss G.V. Britten who died in October, 1987, having devoted 63 years of her life to the herbarium. The removal of alien species from the Grahamstown Nature Reserve continued throughout the year. Clearing the infestation, which dates back to 1935, is an impos- sible task for one man. Mr R. Klaas and Mrs Brink his supervisor, who visited the reserve 40 times during the year, deserve considerable credit for their undaunted efforts in this regard. Government Herbarium, Stellenbosch (STE) The herbarium remains in the temporary accommoda- tion in the old Carnegie Library of the University while renovations are being undertaken in the Natural Sciences building. These are proceeding on schedule which should allow the herbarium to return to the building, but on the second floor, by the end of 1989. During the year 4 405 specimens were identified. These were mainly for the unit’s own staff, including ecologists in Stellenbosch and Cape Town, local state departments (Agriculture, Forestry, Nature Conservation) and small amounts for the Universities of Stellenbosch and Cape Town, private firms and individuals. Telephone enquiries during the year numbered 282, with 150 letters written. Accessions to the herbarium were 5 397 and loans sent out 25, comprising 2 629 specimens in 58 genera. The unit also received 320 individual visitors and two groups of students. A single general collecting trip was undertaken to a site at Houw Hoek to be developed by Houwteq. A pre- liminary collection of all flowering material was made. This work has now been taken over by the University of Stellenbosch. Mr E.G.H. Oliver made several trips to col- lect fruiting material of minor genera and type material of under-collected species of Erica. Mr Oliver continued his work on the minor genera of Ericaceae. With the inclusion of Philippia and Blaeria in Erica, the small African genus Ericinella has also had to be included. A problem now exists with the monotypic genus Bruckenthalia. The last complex of four genera is also proving extremely variable and difficult to unravel. 310 FLORA RESEARCH DIVISION Flora of southern Africa (FSA ) The FSA subproject has continued to co-ordinate taxonomic research on southern African plants. There are about 190 potential contributors to the FSA, the majority of whom are overseas specialists in their plant groups. Through them, the FSA maintains scientific contacts with other countries. The Department continued the research contract to the University of Cape Town for the Orchidaceae volume, with Dr H.P. Linder as the active researcher. The sixth meeting of the FSA working group was held during the Congress of the South African Asso- ciation of Botanists at Cape Town in January 1987. News of interest to FSA contributors was circulated in Forum Botanicum, the newsletter of SAAB. One Flora fascicle was published: Bryophyta, Part 1, Fascicle 2, covers 94 species and 32 genera in the 10 families Gigaspermaceae to Bartramiaceae, by Dr R.E. Magill of the Missouri Botanical Garden. To date, the total number of species treated in published parts of the FSA is 2 884, which is 13% of the total of 22 000 species in the southern African flora. Another fascicle is in press: Volume 16, Part 3, Fas- cicle 16, Fabaceae, Crotalarieae, Aspalathus, by the late Prof. R. Dahlgren of the University of Copenhagen, Den- mark. This fascicle, which was put in final form by Mrs E. du Plessis after the death of Prof. Dahlgren, covers the 278 species of the genus Aspalathus, and will be the largest FSA fascicle yet published. One ancillary volume was published: List of species of southern African plants, Edn 2, Part 2, covering di- cotyledons, by G.E. Gibbs Russell, W.G. Welman, E. Retief, K.L. Immelman, G. Germishuizen, B.J. Pienaar, M. van Wyk & A. Nicholas. The List of species is a pre- cursor to the FSA that presents up-to-date coverage of all taxa at increasing levels of approximation. Edition 2 includes for each genus the name and author, the current revisor and the literature necessary to identify specimens to species and to determine important synonymy; and for each species the name and authors of currently ac- cepted names and of important synonyms since the com- pletion of Flora capensis. During this half-century, about 1 2 000 commonly used names have gone into synonymy for our 24 000 taxa. Future editions will contain addi- tional species information, such as distribution, conser- vation status and life form. Dr B. de Winter and Dr G.E. Gibbs Russell attended the week-long Nomenclature Section preceeding the In- ternational Botanical Congress in Berlin. Dr De Winter was asked to serve on the General Committee, that governs all nomenclatural matters in the years between International Botanical Congresses. Dr Gibbs Russell was appointed to the Special Committee for Registration of Plant Names, that will try to achieve greater stability in nomenclature by controlling the effectiveness and validity of publication of plant names. Institute staff members, and outside contributors on contract and working voluntarily made the following progress with volumes and fascicles for the FSA : Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Bryophyta: Dr R.E. Magill of the Missouri Botanical Garden has completed 12 families for the third fas- cicle on mosses, and Mr J. van Rooy has completed eight genera in the family Orthotrichaceae. Illustra- tions for the third volume are being done by Miss G.C. Condy. Vol. 2: Poaceae — Oryzoideae, Centostecoideae and Bambusoideae. Two more species groups in Ehrharta have been completed by Dr Gibbs Russell and Dr R.P. Ellis and published in Bothalia. Revisionary studies in Arundinoideae have been un- dertaken by Dr Ellis in conjunction with Dr G. Davidse of the Missouri Botanical Garden ( Prionanthium , Tri- bolium and Urochlaena), Dr Linder of the Bolus Her- barium ( Pentaschistis and related genera) and Mr N.P. Barker ( Pentameris and Pseudopentameris). Miss M. Koekemoer is preparing single-page treatments of important pasture species illustrated with colour photographs of diagnostic features. These treatments are written in a simple style suitable for farmers, and information about pasture value will be contributed by staff of the Pasture Research Centre. A group consisting of Dr Gibbs Russell, Mrs L. Fish, Dr H.M. Anderson, Miss Koekemoer, Mr Barker and Mrs W.J.G. Roux are working on a manual for identi- fication of the 200 genera and 970 taxa of southern African grasses. Information is being recorded through the DELTA computer system, as a prototype for the next approximation of Taxon-PRECIS. As a result, computer-aided identification will be possible in addi- tion to identification in the traditional way by keys and illustrations. Vol. 5: Liliaceae — Aloinae. The FSA manuscript for Aloe by Dr H.F. Glen and Mr D.S. Hardy is with refer- ees. Dr Glen, assisted by Mrs S.M. Perold, has examined certain key tropical African species for leaf epidermal types using the scanning electron microscope. Five papers supporting or extending the FSA manuscript have been prepared, and several more are in prepara- tion. The manuscript of Kniphofia by Dr L.E. Codd is with the Editor, and Mr J. van Jaarsveld of the National Botanic Gardens, Kirstenbosch has produced a final version of his Gasteria treatment. Vol. 5: Liliaceae — Asparagoideae. Miss K.L. Immelman has taken over this fascicle, left incomplete at the retirement of Mrs A.A. Mauve (Obermeyer). The 70 species were accepted without change, but outstand- ing nomenclatural problems required much work, as did re-writing keys to the species and revising distri- bution maps. Vol. 8: Orchidaceae. Dr Linder has completed the first draft of the entire manuscript, except the genus Dis- peris, which will be contributed by Dr J. Stewart of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew. Miss C. Smith of Cape Town has completed most of the illustrations.The fascicle will cover about 50 genera and 440 species. Vol. 9: Salicaceae, Fagaceae, Urticaceae and Piperaceae. FSA manuscripts have been prepared by Miss Immel- man and Dr lb Friis of the Botanical Museum, Copen- Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 311 hagen, for all genera and a synopsis of Salix was published in Bothalia. Publication of the FSA fascicle awaits completion of Moraceae by Dr H. Baijnath of the University of Durban-Westville. Vol. 11: Mesembryanthemaceae. Dr H.E.K. Hartmann and her students at the University of Hamburg, West Germany, have completed several genera in Leipoldtii- nae. Vol. 16: Fabaceae. Mr B.D. Schrire’s account of the tribe Desmodieae, as well as a conspectus of Tephrosia subgenus Barbistyla in the tribe Millettieae, was published in Bothalia. He is now working in the tribe Indigoferae and has intensively studied species limits in lndigofera. Mr Schrire is world co-ordinator for Indigoferae for the ILDIS (International Leguminosae Database and Information Service) project and attend- ed a co-ordinator’s meeting in Edinburgh. Vol. 23: Lythraceae, Lecthidaceae and Rhizophoraceae. Miss Immelman undertook phenetic studies to clarify species limits in Ammonia using the DECORANA computer program package and presented a paper on her results at the 1988 SAAB Congress. Nesaea, Gal- pinia, Heimia and Lythrum showed fewer problems at species level. Vol. 24: Myrtales. Work is progressing at various levels in this group. Prof. E.F. Hennessy at the University of Durban-Westville is working on Combretum, Prof. A.E. van Wyk at the University of Pretoria is working on Myrtaceae and Melastomataceae. Manuscripts of Onagraceae by Dr P. Goldblatt of the Missouri Bota- nical Garden and of Trapaceae by Dr B. Verdcourt of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, are with the Editor. Vol. 25: Ericaceae. Mr E.G.H. Oliver has continued studies in the ‘minor genera’. The small southern tropical African genus Ericinella has also been in- cluded in Erica. He read a paper on problems of classification of capsular genera at the 1988 SAAB Congress. Vol. 28: Convolvulaceae. Prof. A.D.J. Meeuse of the University of Amsterdam has submitted a treatment of the 15 genera and 120 species in this family, and Miss W.G. Welman of the BRI is converting it for the FSA. Vol. 30: Pedaliaceae — Gesneriaceae. Prof. H-D. Ihlen- feldt and his students of the University of Hamburg, West Germany, are preparing the manuscript for the families Pedaliaceae, Martyniaceae and Orobanchaceae. Prof. O.M. Hilliard based at the Royal Botanic Gar- dens, Edinburgh, has completed an adaptation of her treatment of Streptocarpus for the FSA . Vol. 30: Acanthaceae — Justicieae. Miss Immelman’s completed FSA manuscript is with the editor, and Mrs J. Munday’s treatment of Monechma is finished. These two large genera await completion of small genera by several researchers from other institutions before the fascicle can be published. Included with it will be Myoporaceae and Plantaginaceae by Dr Glen. Pretoria Flora Dr O.A. Leistner completed the family Sterculiaceae and brought the text for all families (except Cyperaceae) up to date with the latest information. A total of 100 pages was translated by Mrs E. du Plessis and typeset by Mrs S.S. Brink. A further 149 pages were given a final check. Texts of 81 species must still be finalized, out of a total of 1 780. Namaqualand Flora Dr C. Boucher of the University of Stellenbosch was awarded a contract by the Department of Agriculture and Water Supply to produce an identification manual for the 3 500 species comprising this unique flora. Taxon- omic treatments will be contributed by specialists in particular families, with other groups being written up by Mrs G.D. Court of Grahamstown, who has begun her work with Lamiaceae. Contributions are co-ordinated by Miss A. le Roux of Cape Nature Conservation, Stellen- bosch. Palaeo flora of southern Africa Dr J.M. Anderson and Dr H.M. Anderson are in the final stages of completing the second volume in the Molteno Palaeoflora series. This study deals with the gymnosperms, and includes a revision of the taxa oc- curring throughout the Gondwana Triassic Realm. A total of 22 genera and 90 species (1 7 genera and 60 spe- cies from the Molteno Formation) are described. The work focusses particularly on exploring new metho- dologies in sampling, taxonomy and data presentation in the study of fossil floras. This has led to new insights on speciation processes, diversity trends and phyto- geographic patterns. Liaison Officer, Kew Mr Schrire is in his third year of duty as South Afri- can Liaison Officer. He has provided information about taxonomic and related subjects to 174 researchers on the southern African flora, and has pursued his research- es in Fabaceae, which are detailed above. He represented the PRECIS computer system for the Institute at the third meeting of the Taxonomic Databases Working Group held in Edinburgh in October 1987. DATA SUBDIVISION The subdivision co-ordinates the computer work of the Institute. Two large systems maintained on the B7900 mainframe are the taxonomic database PRECIS and the ecological database PHYTOTAB. Links are main- tained to IBM mainframes for the library (SABINET), the ecological bibliography and for typesetting. Several divisions now operate their own microcomputers: the Vegetation Ecology Division has the Hewlett-Packard 9845B; the Herbarium and Flora Research Divisions share a Burroughs 26 network linker to the B7900 main- frame; the Plant Structure and Function Division has two Olivetti PC’s, and the Experimental Ecology Divi- sion in Cape Town and the Stellenbosch Unit each have IBM PC’s. 312 PRECIS, managed by Mrs J.C. Komarovsky and Mr N.P. Barker, consists of four components. In this year, information from PRECIS was supplied to about 90 research projects throughout South Africa and overseas. Specimen-PRECIS contains herbarium specimen label data in 24 data fields for 643 000 specimens in PRE her- barium. About 12 000 specimens were added during the year. Taxon-PRECIS contains recent useful literature, synonymy, status as naturalized alien, and status of cur- rent taxonomic research for the 24 000 plant taxa in southern Africa. It served as the data source for the List of species of southern African plants, Edition 2, Part 2, Dicotyledons, and an index to the nearly 2 000 plates in volumes 1—49 of The Flowering Plants of Africa. Name changes for 1986 were published in Bothalia, and the lists of 1987 name changes were prepared. Future developments will include distribution, life form, distinguishing characters, flowering time and im- portance to man. Prototypes have been designed for Poaceae, Fabaceae and for the Namaqualand Flora. A paper on this aspect of PRECIS was presented at the 1988 SAAB Congress by Dr G.E. Gibbs Russell. No- menclature-PRECIS has begun as a prototype for Po- aceae, to be developed further when staff is available. Curatorial-PRECIS is being developed on the Burroughs 26 microcomputer network by Mr T.H. Arnold, and will link information from specimen-PRECIS to the curato- rial and administrative needs of Herbarium Division. Dr Gibbs Russell presented a seminar at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew and an invited paper at the 14th International Botanical Congress, Berlin, about practi- cal results from the PRECIS system. She also conducted a workshop to teach use of the DELTA system for recording descriptive information at the National Botani- cal Gardens, Kirstenbosch and demonstrated use of DELTA for grass identification at the 1988 SAAB and Grassland Society Congresses. PHYTOTAB, managed by Mr M.D. Panagos, includes 48 published ecological surveys and field data sets. Mrs C. Vermeulen is currently loading habitat descriptions, species names and community names into the database. Miss M. Morley is responsible for PHYTOTAB use at the Stellenbosch Botanical Research Unit. During the last year, extensive use of the system was made by Mrs D. Roberts and Mr H. Bailey of the University of Natal, Durban and Mr M. Peel and Mr D. Snyman of the Pas- ture Research Centre, Pretoria. New programs were developed by Mrs B.C. de Wet and Mr R.H. Westfall for automatic phytosociological classification and for habitat analysis. Smaller systems continuing on the B7900 include the Garden Records system, developed by Mrs de Wet and maintained by Mrs K. Clarke, for the plants in the botanic garden, and PHOTOS, developed by Miss A.P. Backer for photographic vegetation records for Vege- tation Ecology Division. STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION DIVISION In December 1987 Dr J.J. Spies became head of this division in succession to Dr R.P. Ellis, who is now a Specialist Scientist. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Dr Gerrit Davidse of the Missouri Botanical Garden, St Louis, USA, spent three months working in the Divi- sion as a recipient of a Department of Agriculture and Water Supply Research fellowship. During this period, the taxonomy and cytogenetics of the endemic Cape Fynbos arundinoid grasses were concentrated on, particularly the genera Prionanthium, Tribolium and Urochlaena. Cytogenetics Dr Spies and his team, in collaboration with Dr Davidse of the Missouri Botanical Garden, concentrated on chromosome numbers of the winter rainfall grasses. Approximately one-third of the world’s species belong- ing to the tribe Arundineae, is restricted to South Africa, the majority being endemic to the western Cape. This cytogenetic study presented an opportunity to study the chromosome numbers of many of these species, 43 in all, for the first time. The study further indicated that basic chromosome numbers of 6, 7 and 13 are found in the tribe. These findings support the anatomical sugges- tion- that Merxmuellera, Pentaschistis, Pentameris, Prionanthium and Pseudopentameris are related. Intensive studies on the genera Alloteropsis, Digitaria, Ehrharta, Heteropogon, Pentaschistis, Prionanthium, Tribolium and Urochlaena are progressing well. Pre- liminary studies on Digitaria eriantha indicate that the low seedset observed may be attributed to abnormal meiosis and the resultant gamete abortion. Comparative anatomy Dr Ellis concentrated on the genus Pentaschistis in conjunction with Dr H.P. Linder of the University of Cape Town and Dr G. Davidse of the Missouri Botanical Garden. An intensive fieldwork programme was under- taken with the objective of collecting and studying in the field as many of the ±60 species of Pentaschistis as possible. This was highly successful and 52 different species were located in this single growing season, in- cluding 17 new and undescribed taxa. To date, only three known species of Pentaschistis have not been col- lected for anatomical study. Preliminary indications of the leaf anatomy, morphology and biology are that Pentaschistis cannot be studied in isolation from Merx- muellera, Pentameris and Pseudopentameris and that all these genera may be artificial as presently constituted and that realignment of taxa is needed to reflect rela- tionships more naturally. Mary Gunn Library The future well-being and safety of the book and journal collection should be ensured by the installation of airconditioning and a fire detection and extinguishing system. These extensive renovations disrupted the work of our librarians, Mrs E. Potgieter and Mrs B.F. Lategan but, nevertheless, a valuable service was provided to many South African botanists. A total of 1 750 books and journals was borrowed, 2 123 interlibrary loans were handled, 2 629 enquiries dealt with, 28 360 photocopies made and 270 volumes were bound. During the year 224 new books were purchased, in addition to the 411 jour- nal titles to which the Institute subscribes. Botha lia 18,2 (1988) 313 VEGETATION ECOLOGY DIVISION The functions of the Vegetation Ecology Division under Dr J.C. Scheepers are to study the vegetation of South Africa and its ecological relations. This work in- volves three main aspects; the identification, descrip- tion, classification and mapping of the various kinds of vegetation; study of the ecological relationships between different kinds of vegetation — with one another and with the environment — and of the various processes and mechanisms that determine the behaviour of plant communities; and the application of such ecological knowledge to the management and utilization of vege- tational resources. Transvaal bushveld and forest studies Mr R.H. Westfall is studying the vegetation ecology of the Sour Bushveld of the Waterberg area of the central Transvaal. Fifty stands representing 10 different vegeta- tion types have been sampled. A new method for deter- mining species cover with greater precision than the usual scale-estimation methods was developed. Cover results now compare favourably with cover values ob- tained with the cover meter for structural analyses. The new method entails counting individuals within transects which are related to crown size and individual spacing and should be of interest to those who are inter- ested in determining cover quickly on a species basis. between Kosi Bay and Sodwana were produced from aerial photographs. They are currently being used for the drawing of conservation-priority maps. Vegetation monitoring on dunes continued (Figure 6). Mr M.G. O’Callaghan has laid out 22 permanent tran- sects across the salt marshes of four western Cape estua- rine systems to obtain a better understanding of their dynamics and environmental relationships. Variations in salinity and water depth were measured from March to September, soils were sampled in September, and vegetation was sampled on a bi-monthly basis between March and November. Data have not been fully analysed as yet. Preliminary indications are that inundation period, inundation regularity and salinity are important factors in determining vegetation patterns. Cape fynbos studies Research on the Mountain Fynbos in the Cederberg is making good progress. The preliminary checklist of the Cederberg flora, completed during the year, totals nearly 1 400 taxa. The list is being updated by further collections and from literature. The special study in the Welbedacht area, required by management prior to an experimental burn, was completed by the addition of 17 releves to last year’s data base. Another 40 releves have rounded off the northern sector; and analysis of the data has commenced. The Sabie transect has been extended by Mr G.B. Deall into the Montane and Subalpine Belts of the East- ern Transvaal Escarpment. Floristic analysis of these additional data yielded 1 1 new communities distributed amongst forest (three communities) (Figure 5), wood- land (three communities), shrubland (two communities), and grassland (three communities). A series of papers is being finalized for publication. Coastal studies The vegetation study of the KwaZulu coastal dunes between Richards Bay and the Mlalazi Lagoon by Dr P.J. Weisser was terminated after the main results were pub- lished. Twelve 1 :20 000 vegetation maps of the dune area Mr D.J. McDonald has finalized publications on the vegetation, environment and flora of the Swartbosch- kloof, Jonkershoek, near Stellenbosch. He is also making good progress on his studies of the fynbos and other vegetation in the mountain catchments of the Langeberg in the south-western Cape. The fieldwork on the Boos- mansbos transect is nearing completion and field data will be synthesized and compared with the results from the first transect. Grassland studies The field work for the survey of the vegetation in the Amersfoort area of the eastern Transvaal Highveld has been completed by Miss B.J. Turner. All field data have FIGURE 5. — Moist kloof forest of escarpment slopes in the Sabie area, eastern Trans- vaal. Conspicuous in the canopy are: Anthocleista grandiflora (Big-leaf Tree) and Combretum kraussii (Forest Bush Willow). 314 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) FIGURE 6. — Dune vegetation in the Mlalazi Nature Reserve on the north coast of Natal. The vegetation of this area is being studied and moni- tored by Dr P.J. Weisser of the Vegetation Ecology Division. The photograph shows very clearly the de- bris zone resulting from the September 1987 floods, followed by the dune ridge generated by colonization of the debris deposited by the Demoina floods of 1984. been loaded onto the Burroughs mainframe computer and production of the final classification table is nearing completion. Good progress is being made with the writing up of this study. Mr P.J.J. Breytenbach has completed preparatory work and commenced field work in the Grootvlei area of the south central Transvaal Highveld. Karoo studies A reconnaissance study of the karoo and other vege- tation in the Graaff-Reinet and Middelburg areas of the eastern Karoo Region by Mr A.R. Palmer is well advanced. He has prepared a hierarchical classification of the vegetation. A study of the soil gradient, which corres- ponds with this classification, has also been undertaken, and both are being prepared for publication. Other publications in preparation include a phytochorological account of the flora of the study area and an assessment of the use of LANDSAT MSS data to map the vegetation. Central technical support services Miss A.P. Backer has loaded bibliographic references from 1976 to 1986 onto ATMS and these have been transferred to STAIRS. The second ecological literature data base is now operational and literature searches can be undertaken. Further progress has been made on the ecological data bank by Mrs B.J. Vermeulen. Forty-seven literature data sets have been obtained comprising theses, publica- tions, reports and field data sets. From these sources the data have been compiled for the phytosociological data base. Thirty-five matrix data sets have been loaded onto the computer of which 24 sets have appeared in publish- ed versions and 1 1 sets are awaiting classification. EXPERIMENTAL ECOLOGY DIVISION Research emphasis of the Division, headed by DrM.C. Rutherford, has increased in Karoo systems and the Strandveld sectors of the Fynbos Biome, while maintain- ing levels of work in other parts of this biome. This is in keeping with the Division’s increased focus on prob- lems of the more arid, drought-stressed ecosystems, the alien invasive plant-stressed ecosytems as well as on the special stresses that develop in the Fynbos Biome through substrate disturbance. Various experimental perturba- tions have been initiated at field research sites through installation of replicated shade structures, irrigation plots and rain-out shelters. Since many of the expected effects of these applications are long-term, results are necessarily limited at this stage. Liaison with the Botany Department of the University of Cape Town has increased with, for example, various post graduate students tackling suggested mini-projects on aspects that directly complement some of the re- search facets of the Division. Various levels of active liaison have been maintained with other researchers within the co-operative Fynbos and Karoo Biome Pro- grammes. The Division’s experimental nursery area at Rosebank came under threat through the unexpected sale and re- development of part of the land that was being used. Partial relocation of structures has resulted in unsatis- factory conditions which are hopefully temporary. Fynbos reproductive ecology Dr C.F. Musil has found that densities of seedlings, in the first year of coastal fynbos vegetation recovery fol- lowing a late spring fire, were considerably higher than those of resprouting plants. In shaded conditions and in close proximity to burnt alien Acacia saligna, densities of fynbos seedlings decreased, whereas those of resprout- ing plants increased. Seedling recruitment of both A. sa- ligna and fynbos species was not confined to any one particular season, but was staggered over a period of several months from early autumn to late spring. Species with large seeds, such as A. saligna and certain members of the Proteaceae and Restionaceae emerged earlier and from greater depths than those with small seeds. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Fynbos - alien invasive plant interactions Dr M.C. Rutherford and Mr J. de W. Bosenberg have established that plant populations of the calcareous substrates of the West Coast Strandveld, South Coast Strandveld and Limestone Fynbos react in different ways to introduced Acacia cy clops. The largest proportion of positively affected species were annuals (including alien species such as Lolium temulentum) on the more arid consolidated sands in Strandveld. The highest proportion of negative species response occurred within typical Limestone Fynbos and included species such as Protea obtusifolia and Adenandra obtusata. Species that were positively associated with Acacia cy clops on the lime- stone substrates were mainly of Strandveld affinity and included Rhus glauca and R. laevigata. Decreasing soil moisture levels may reduce the tolerance of some Strand- veld species, such as R. glauca, to presence of Acacia cyclops. Fynbos transformation studies Mr G.W. Davis and Mr A.P. Flynn have found that physical disturbance of Mountain Fynbos by rotivation can reduce both floristic and micro-environmental vari- ability during the first two-and-a-half years of recovery. Multivariate and correlation analyses of data from an experimental site indicated that changes in the seasonal water and surface temperature regimes are significantly associated with these system changes. A trial on seeds of the dominant species, Leucadendron zanthoconus, showed that burial below 20 mm significantly reduced germination, a factor to be considered in interpreting the observed pattern of revegetation following rotivation. The increase in productivity of two introduced Protea species on the disturbed treatment, relative to the un- disturbed control, was not significant. Mr Davis has constructed a preliminary computer model which simulates the utilization of fynbos veld by a wildflower harvesting business. The current algorithm matches seasonal market demands (based on export trade figures) against the availability and retrieval costs of flowering material from a set of hypothetical popula- tions of suitable plant species. These can then be assess- ed'for levels of expected exploitation and possible de- gradation. Functional ecological studies in Karoo Mr G.F. Midgley’s water relations data from a small number of non-succulent shrubby plant forms in the winter rainfall Karoo suggest that there are a limited number of important structural and functional adap- tations which determine the success of these forms under arid conditions. The two most important structu- ral characteristics appear to relate to the root/shoot ratio and rooting habit. These probably determine sea- sonal patterns of plant water stress and, at least, the potential for plant growth, flowering and seed set. The functional ability to adjust leaf osmotic potential to minimize water stress, and the ability to withstand tissue water deficit may determine the success of ever- green non-succulent forms with limited root develop- ment. Mr L.W. Powrie has started to construct a computer database of important plant species population respon- 315 ses in Karoo using both formal and the largely untapped informal information sectors. The database pays special attention to plant responses to major events including episodic rainfall, drought, mass defoliation and selec- tive defoliation incidents. The database is multipurpose but will also allow for systematic sifting of information for the objective identification of key research problems concerning Karoo plants. PLANT EXPLORATION DIVISION The division, under Mr M.J. Wells, continued to con- centrate on weeds, plant invaders and food plant research. HighUghts were the publication of Declared weeds and alien invader plants in South Africa, Plant invaders of the Transvaal and Barrier plants of southern Africa. Conservation of germ plasm Mr T.H. Arnold and Mrs L.D. Jacobs made one col- lecting trip to KwaNdebele, during which 60 seed samples of tribal crop plants were obtained. In addition, 722 samples of previously collected material were split for distribution, labelled, packaged and stored in chest freezers. Thirty collections were sent to researchers at the Summer Grain Centre at Potchefstroom. Thirty samples of indigenous food plants, legumes and cucur- bits, collected by Miss S.E. Chadwick, were distributed to people who wished to experiment with growing them — including workers from the FAO, Israel and the USA. Mrs H. Joffe collected 106 seed and 29 vegetative samples of indigenous plants from the garden for distribution to interested nurserymen. Germination experiments are also being carried out to test the longevity of garden seed stored under our freezer conditions. Indigenous food plants Mr A.A. Balsinhas abstracted information from seven publications, bringing the references consulted for the national food plants data bank to a total of 224. The newly consulted references contributed information about 617 species and resulted in the addition of eight new names to the list of food plants which now includes 1 617 species. Miss Chadwick prepared manuscripts on nine of the 14 priority food plants of the veld that are being studied: Cucumis metuliferus, C. africanus, C. kalahariensis, Acanthosicyos horridus, Coccinia rehmannii, C. sessili- folia, C. adoensis, Bauhinia petersiana and Guibourtia coleosperma. These manuscripts are to be published as species brochures in the illustrated series Plants in south- ern Africa. Plants of these species have been grown in the nursery in order to replenish seed stocks — depleted as a result of providing researchers and entrepreneurs with material. Three lectures were presented: ‘The migh- ty cucumber’ to the Botanical Society of South Africa, ‘Edible fruits’ to college teachers and course advisers of the Department of Education and Training, and ‘A bo- tanist in southern Africa’ to the South African Associa- tion of Botanists. Primitive crop plants of African origin Twenty five crop frequency/preference question- naires were filled in with the help of local tribesmen in Kwa Ndebele by Mr Arnold and Mrs Jacobs. 316 The morphological characteristics of 267 Sorghum collections and 122Pennisetum collections were analysed, bringing the total number analysed to 2 266. The chlorox test for tannin content was applied to 122 samples, bring- ing the total to 1 132 samples tested. All of the Sorghum and Pennisetum material collected (except that from the last field trip) has now been processed and all records have been entered in the computer data bank. Field work has been completed and the next stage of the work will involve computer analyses of the data. Barrier plants Barrier plants of southern Africa, Memoirs of the Bo- tanical Survey of South Africa No. 55, was published. This memoir contains the results of a survey made whilst Miss L. Henderson, now of the Plant Protection Research Institute, was on our staff. It includes suggestions for in- digenous hedging and shelter belt plants to replace the often-used alien species, some of which have become invasive. Woody invaders The popular version of Miss Henderson and Mrs K.J. Musil’s survey of woody plant invaders of the Transvaal was published. Mr Wells completed a chapter on invaders of the fynbos for a publication on invaders of Mediter- ranean-type ecosystems of the world. He also presented a paper on medical problems possibly caused by the in- vasive alien Solatium mauritianum. Catalogue of problem plants This catalogue which appeared last year has sold well and is widely used by agricultural and conservation per- sonnel. More information about listed and additional species is being filed by Mr Wells for possible future editions. He reported on additions to the list at the 8th National Weeds Conference. The catalogue and file material has proved invaluable in providing background information on plants put forward for classification as declared weeds or invaders. Declared weeds and invader plants A bulletin on plants already declared as weeds or invaders (alien spp. only) under Act 43 of 1983 was published. Its preparation was co-ordinated by Mrs D.M.C. Fourie. Water conservation gardening Public interest in gardening under drought conditions continues. Mrs Fourie has been called on to give four lectures on the subject and to answer queries from as far afield as Majorca. Garden utilization Mrs H. Joffe, who was recently promoted to Senior Agricultural Research Technician, has significantly in- creased the level of garden utilization this year. In addi- tion to seed for propagative purposes, she collected 148 seed samples and 35 samples of vegetative material re- quested by various researchers, for illustration, educa- Bothalia 18,2 (1988) tional or display purposes. One hundred and four seed and fruit collections were cleaned and prepared for the herbarium carpological collection. A boost was given to the herbarium spirit collection with the in- clusion of 73 seed or fruit and 158 flowering collections from the garden. In all, 723 colour slides were taken of various parts or developmental stages of plants in the garden. These were supported by 218 voucher specimens for the herbarium. Research staff were assisted with finding or monitoring progress of garden collections. Garden staff were also assisted with germination experi- ments, and garden records staff with mapping and naming. New, more comprehensive garden utilization record forms were introduced and existing records were trans- ferred to them. Mr Wells assisted with the text of a brochure on the garden which is now ready for publica- tion. Scientific information service Mrs Fourie handled 324 written and 272 telephonic requests for material and information, and dealt with 47 individual visitors and 13 groups. She also obtained col- lecting permits from various authorities for both visitors and Institute staff. A layman ’s guide to botanical publications Over the years many requests have been received, especially from overseas visitors, regarding books dealing with various aspects of our flora and vegetation. Answers to these queries have been combined and amplified, resulting in a list of publications that can serve as a lay- man’s introduction to this vast subject. A draft of the list has been completed by Mrs Fourie and will now be circulated to publishers for suggested additions. It currently contains 350 references, classified according to the regions and plant groups that they cover. Publi- cation of this guide is scheduled for the coming year. Liaison service In the absence of a liaison officer, no facilities could be offered to visiting school groups but Mrs Fourie pro- vided or arranged lectures and/or tours for teachers, trainee teachers and a few special interest groups. A publicity and educational article on the Institute, by Mr Wells, appeared in Archimedes. PRETORIA NATIONAL BOTANICAL GARDEN The garden staff, under the direction of Mr D.H. Dry, divided their attention between building up the scientific and display collections and providing service facilities and public amenities. Mrs K. Clarke recorded 599 accessions, mainly seed and cuttings collected in the Fynbos and Succulent Karoo, by Mr D.F. Strydom, Mr N.A. Klapwijk and Mrs H. Joffe. Mrs Joffe and Mr Klapwijk are experimenting with various methods of germinating and establishing indigenous species that have proved difficult to grow in the past. Mr Klapwijk obtained the National Diploma in Horticul- ture and was appointed as an Agricultural Research Technician at the start of the year. He received the Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 317 FIGURE 7. — The northern side of the main glasshouse showing the recently in- stalled new extractor fans. Orchids, palms and ferns are housed in this glass- house. Pretoria Technikon’s prize as best horticulture student. His talents are being put to good use in re-developing the water garden in the general planting area. Mr N.F. van Zyl obtained his National Diploma in Horticulture, with six distinctions, at the end of the year. He has also been appointed as an Agricultural Research Technician and is responsible for the propagation of FIGURE 8. — Young visitors to the Pretoria National Botanical Garden walking along the nature trail running east-west along the ridge which bisects the Garden. material for mass plantings. Garden development, includ- ing mass planting, has had to be curtailed in favour of maintenance. This is due to the exceptionally heavy rains (over 600 mm) the last few months which have resulted in the need for weed control, road repairs and lawn maintenance. The nursery, under Mr D.S. Hardy, has benefited by renovation of the main glasshouse which has received a new wet wall and extractor fans (Figure 7). The old fan and wall fittings are being re-used in a smaller glass- house. The public has also not been neglected. Mr L.C. Steenkamp has been responsible for paving an additional 2 200 m of nature trails (Figure 8) and 26 new benches have been located in the garden. B 10 S Y STEM ATICS DIVISION Pending further developments this division has con- tinued to devote itself largely to the scientific and technical editing of the publications of the Institute. Dr O.A. Leistner is in control of the division, Mrs E. du Plessis assists with the editing of Die Flowering Plants of Africa /Die Blomplante van Afrika and Flora of southern Africa and she is responsible for most of the translations from English to Afrikaans required by the Institute, and Mrs B.A. Momberg assists with the editing of Bothalia and Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa. About one-third of the typesetting required by the In- stitute was done in-house, by Mrs S.S. Brink. Bothalia Numbers 1 and 2 of Vol. 17 and the index to Vol. 16 were published. It is planned to publish the first number of each volume in May and the second in October of each year. Flora of southern Africa (FSA ) Part 1 fascicle 2 of the Bryophyta was published (see Flora Research Division). Vol. 16,3,6 on the genus Aspalathus is in press and has reached the page-proof stage. 318 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) The Flowering Plants of Africa ( FPA )/Die Blomplante van Afrika Vol. 49,3 & 4 were published and 50,1 & 2 are in press. Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa The following were published after having been pre- sented to the printer in camera-ready form: No. 55, Barrier plants of southern Africa (L. Hender- son), and No. 56, List of species of southern African plants edn 2, part 2. No. 57, the third edition of Veld types of South Africa by J.P.H. Acocks will go to press in a few days. Palaeo flora of southern Africa Vol. 2 of the Molteno Formation is nearing comple- tion. The National List of Trees The third, revised and enlarged edition of this work by B. de Winter, J. Vahrmeijer and F. von Breitenbach was published. Plant invaders of the Transvaal /Indringerplante van die Transvaal (L. Henderson & K.J. Musil) and Verklaarde onkruide en uitheemse indringerplante in Suid-Afrika/ Declared weeds and alien invader plants in South Africa (M . Henderson, D.M.C . Fourie , M.J .Wells & L. Henderson) were published. SEMINARS During the year several interesting public seminars were held, two dealing with species concepts from dif- ferent viewpoints — these were a continuation of the series on the same subject held during 1986/87. Details of the seminars are as follows: 1987.03.25 Prof. G.J. Bredenkamp (PU vir CHO): Spesiebegrippe: ’n ekologiese standpunt. Dr J.J. Spies (NIP): Spesiebegrippe: ’n sitogenetiese standpunt. 1987.06.25 Dr J.M. Anderson (BRI): Species concepts: a palaeo- botanical viewpoint. Dr R.P. Ellis (BRI): Species concepts: an anatomical viewpoint. 1987.08.06 DrM.Zavada(USA): Evolution of Angiosperms: apalaeo- botanical perspective. 1987.09.10 Dr G. Davidse (USA): Fruit dispersal in grasses. 1987.09.24 Dr G.E. Gibbs Russell (BRI): Changes in the ICBN re- sulting from the Berlin Botanical Congress. 1988.02.25 Dr E. Kovacs-Endrody (Geological Survey): Two anta- gonistic approaches to the study of fossil plants. BOTANICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE Scientific, Technical and Administrative Staff (31st March 1988) Director B. de Winter, M.Sc., D.Sc. (Taxonomy of Poaceae, espe- cially Eragrostis, and of Hermannia ; plant geography) Deputy Director D.J.B. Killick, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.L.S. (General taxonomy; nomenclature; mountain ecology and editing) ADMINISTRATION DIVISION Chief Provisioning Ad- ministration Clerk . . . J.T.C. Snyman (Head of Division) State Accountant Mrs J. Rautenbach Senior Provisioning Ad- ministration Clerks . . . Mrs I.A. Ebersohn * Half-day Personal Secretary to Director Senior Registration Clerk Registration Clerk Accounting Clerk Receptionist Typists Miss W.J. Geldenhuys Mrs S. Swanepoel Mrs M.M. Vaughan Mrs M.M. Loots Mrs I.J.H. Joubert Miss A. Schinkel G. Herman Miss M. Francis Mrs S.S. Brink Mrs E.L. Bunton* Mrs J.M. Mulvenna Mrs S.M. Thiart* Mrs M.P.M.C. van der Merwe* HERBARIUM DIVISION Officer-in-Charge T.H. Arnold, M.Sc. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 319 NATIONAL HERBARIUM, PRETORIA (PRE) Assistant Director .... T.H. Arnold, M.Sc. (Curator; taxonomy of Ficinia ) Herbarium Assistant . . . Mrs C.J. van Niekerk Wing A (Pteridophytes-Monocotyledons) Senior Agricultural Researcher Miss C. Reid, B.Sc. Hons (Taxonomy of Car ex ; plant identifications) Chief Agricultural Research Technician . . Mrs L. Fish, B.Sc. (Plant identifications) Herbarium Assistant . . . Mrs S. Burger Wing B (Piperaceae-Oxalidaceae) Senior Agricultural Researcher G. Germishuizen, M.Sc. (Taxonomy of Polygonaceae; plant identifications) Senior Agricultural Researcher Mrs C.M. van Wyk, M.Sc. (Plant identifications) Chief Agricultural Research Technician . . Mrs B.J. Pienaar, B.Sc. Hons (Taxonomy of Vigna\ plant identifications) Administrative Assis- tant III C. Letsoalo Wing C (Linaceae— Asclepiadaceae) Senior Agricultural Researcher Miss E. Retief, M.Sc. (Plant identifications) Senior Agricultural Technician Agricultural Researcher . Agricultural Research Assistant Herbarium Assistant . . . Mrs M. Jordaan, B.Sc. (Plant identifications) A. Nicholas, M.Sc. (Taxonomy of Asclepiada- ceae; plant identifications) A.A. Balsinhas** (Plant identifications) Mrs J.L.M. Grobler* Wing D (Convolvulaceae-Asteraceae) Senior Agricultural Researcher Miss W.G. Welman, M.Sc. (Plant identifications) Senior Agricultural Researcher P.P.J. Herman, M.Sc. (Plant identifications) Principal Agricultural Research Technician .. Mrs M.J.A.W. Crosby*, B.Sc. (Plant identifications) Administrative Assis- tant III J. Phahla Cryptogamic Herbarium Agricultural Researcher . F.A. Brusse, M.Sc. (Lichens) * Half-day ** Part-time Assistant Agricultural Researcher . . J. van Rooy, B.Sc. Hons (Musci) Chief Agricultural Research Technician .. Mrs S.M. Perold*, B.Sc. (S.E.M. technician; taxon- omy of Ricciaceae) Herbarium Assistant . . . Mrs L. Filter* Herbarium Services Agricultural Researcher . Herbarium Assistants . . Typist Administrative Assis- tant III Mrs E. van Hoepen, M.Sc. (Controlling officer) Mrs M. Dednam* (Plant identification services) Mrs M.Z. Hey man* (Loans and exchanges) Mrs C.M. Havenga G. Lephaka (Preparation and packaging) NATAL HERBARIUM, DURBAN (NH) Assistant Agricultural Researcher Provisioning Admini- strative Clerk . . . Administrative Assis- tants III Administrative Assis- tants II Miss R. Williams, B.Sc. Hons (Curator; plant identifica- tions) Mrs H.E. Noble* A. M. Ngwenya D.B. Ntombela B. M. Mbonambi S.B. Nzimande (Gardener) GOVERNMENT HERBARIUM, GRAHAMSTOWN (GRA) Senior Agricultural Researcher Mrs E. Brink, B.Sc. (Curator; plant identifications) Administrative Assis- tants III A.D. Booi R. Klaas (Grahamstown Na- ture Reserve) Administrative Assis- tants I J. Zenzile GOVERNMENT HERBARIUM, STELLENBOSCH (STE) Senior Agricultural Researcher Assistant Agricultural Researcher Agricultural Research Technician Herbarium Assistants . . Administrative Assis- tants III E.G.H. Oliver, M.Sc. (Curator; taxonomy of Eri- caceae) Mrs J.B.P. Beyers, B.Sc. Hons (Plant identifications) Mrs A.C. Fellingham, B.Sc. (Plant identifications) Mrs G.M. Thai Miss H. Steensma Mrs J. Leith Miss E. van Wyk 320 FLORA RESEARCH DIVISION Officer-in-Charge Assistant Director . . . . Senior Agricultural Researcher Assistant Specialist Scientist Agricultural Researchers . Assistant Agricultural Researcher Agricultural Research Technician Graphic Artist .... Agricultural Research Assistant G.E. Gibbs Russell, Ph.D., F.L.S. G. E. Gibbs Russell, Ph.D., F.L.S. (Taxonomy of Po- aceae, plant geography, elec- tronic data processing) H. F. Glen, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Taxonomy of Aloe) J.M. Anderson, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Palaeobotany, plant geo- graphy) Miss K.L. Immelman, M.Sc. (Taxonomy, especially Acan- thaceae, Lythraceae, Urtica- ceae) B.D. Schrire, M.Sc. (Taxonomy of Fabaceae, electronic data processing) H.M. Anderson, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Palaeobotany) Miss M. Koekemoer, B.Sc. Hons (Grass species mono- graphs) Miss G.C. Condy, M.A. Mrs W.J.G. Roux* (Plant distributions, speci- men administration) DATA SUBDIVISION Data Officer G.E. Gibbs Russell, Ph.D., F.L.S. Datametricians N.P. Barker**, B.Sc. Hons (PRECIS, phenetic classifi- cation) Mrs B.C. de Wet*, B.Sc.,B.A., H.D.L.S.** (Garden records, programming for PHYTO- TAB and taxon-PRECIS) Agricultural Research Technician Mrs J.C. Komarovsky, B.Sc. (PRECIS Database manager) Agricultural Research Assistants Mrs E.B. Evenwel (Quality control for PRECIS) Mrs H. von Ronge (New spe- cimen encoder for PRECIS) PLANT STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION DIVISION Officer-in-Charge J.J. Spies, M.Sc., Ph.D. CYTOGENETICS Assistant Director .... J.J. Spies, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Cytogenetics of grasses) * Half-day ** Biometry and Datametries t Research Centre for Pasture Science % Library Services, Department of National Education Agricultural Researcher Senior Agricultural Research Technician . Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Mrs E. van der Merwe, M.Sc. (Cytogenetics of Digitaria )t Mrs H. du Plessis, B.Sc. Hons (Cytogenetics of grasses) Agricultural Research Technicians Mrs E.J.L. Saayman, B.Sc. Hons (Cytogenetics of gras- ses) Mrs S.C. Angelo, B.Sc. Agric. (Cytogenetics of Digitaria )+ COMPARATIVE PLANT ANATOMY Specialist Scientist .... R.P. Ellis, M.Sc., D.Sc. (Anatomy of grasses) Agricultural Research Assistant Mrs A.G. Botha (Microtechnique) PHOTOGRAPHIC SERVICES Photographer Mrs A.J. Romanowski MARY GUNN LIBRARY Senior Librarian Mrs E. Potgieter, B.Libr.* Clerical Library Assistant Mrs B.F. Lategan** VEGETATION ECOLOGY DIVISION Officer-in-Charge J.C. Scheepers, M.Sc., D.Sc. Assistant Director .... J.C. Scheepers, M.Sc., D.Sc. (Vegetation ecology, espe- cially of forest/woodland/ grassland relationships; con- servation and land-use plan- ning; phytogeography) Senior Agricultural Researchers D.J. McDonald, M.Sc. (Mountain fynbos ecology and phytosociology; Braun- Blanquet approach and tech- niques) A.R. Palmer, M.Sc. (Karoo ecology ; remote sens- ing; nature conservation; ve- getation mapping) H.C. Taylor, M.Sc. (Mountain fynbos and forest ecology; Braun-Blanquet ap- proach and techniques; con- servation) P.J. Weisser, Ph.D. (Forest ecology; air-photo interpretation and mapping; reedswamp ecology; Zulu- land coast dune vegetation; conservation) R.H. Westfall, M.Sc. (Ecology and phytosociol- ogy of Transvaal bush veld; ecological data and literature storage, retrieval and pro- cessing; syntaxonomic no- menclature) 321 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Agricultural Researchers Assistant Agricultural Researchers .... Principal Agricultural Research Technician . Research Technicians . Agricultural Research Technicians .... G.B. Deall, M.Sc. (Vegetation ecology of fo- rest/woodland/grassland in- terrelationships) M.G. O’Callaghan, M.Sc. (Estuarine ecology and phy- tosociology; land-use plan- ning and management; na- ture conservation) P.J.J. Breytenbach, B.Sc. Hons (Grassland ecology; pasture science; nature conserva- tion) Miss B.J. Turner, B.Sc. Hons (Grassland ecology ; pasture science; nature conserva- tion) J.F. van Blerk, B.Sc. Hons (Succulent Karoo ecology; ecological literature; pasture science; photography) M.D. Panagos, N. Dipl. Agric. (Bot. Res.) (Computer science; data processing; sampling and monitoring vegetation and environment) Miss A.P. Backer, B.Sc. (Ecological data processing and presentation; ecological literature; nature conserva- tion; air-photo interpreta- tion and cartography; pho- tography) Miss M. Morley, B.Sc. Agric. (Ecological data processing and presentation; ecological literature ; estuarine and fyn- bos vegetation; air-photo in- terpretation and cartogra- phy) Mrs J. Schaap, H.P.E.D. (Draughtsmanship and car- tography; artwork, layout and design) Mrs BJ.Vermeulen, B.Sc. For. (Nat. Cons.) (Ecological data banking; information systems; syn- taxonomic nomenclature) Mrs W. Jones, B.Sc. (Computer science; ecologi- cal data processing and pre- sentation; remote sensing; air-photo interpretation and cartography) W.J. Myburgh, B.Sc. (Grassland ecology; pasture science; nature conserva- tion) Agricultural Research Assistant C.M. van Ginkel, N.Dipl. (Nat. Cons.) (Karoo eco- logy; nature conservation; photography; remote sens- ing) Mrs H.M. Hills, T.H.E.D. (Technical, editorial and ad- ministrative support func- tions) EXPERIMENTAL ECOLOGY DIVISION Officer-in-Charge M.C. Rutherford, M.Sc., Ph.D., Dipl. Datamet. Assistant Director .... M.C. Rutherford, M.Sc., Ph.D., Dipl. Datamet. (Primary production ecology of terrestrial ecosystems; ex- perimental ecological studies in strandveld, fynbos and Karoo) Senior Agricultural Researcher C.F. Musil, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Reproductive ecophysiol- ogy in fynbos) Agricultural Researchers G.W. Davis, M.Sc. (Transformations of fynbos ecosystems by the wild . flower picking industry) G.F. Midgley, B.Sc. Hons (Plant stress ecology in Karoo ecosystems) L.W. Powrie, M.Sc. (Plant population response ecology in Karoo) Research Technicians . . A.P. Flynn, B.Sc. (Fynbos ecology; plant community development) J . de W. Bosenberg, B.Sc. Hons (Fynbos and Karoo ecology; monitoring effects of alien plants on strandveld and fynbos) Provisioning Admini- stration Clerk . . . Agricultural Research Assistant Miss C.H. Agnew D.M. de Witt (Laboratory, field and cura- torial assistance) PLANT EXPLORATION DIVISION Officer-in-Charge Assistant Director Assistant Agricultural Researcher Chief Agricultural Research Technician . . M J. Wells, M.Sc. M.J. Wells, M.Sc. (Weeds research, botanical horticulture, fynbos utiliza- tion and conservation) Miss S.E. Chadwick, B.Sc. Hons (Indigenous food plants and primitive crops) Mrs D.M.C. Fourie*, B.Sc. (Scientific information ser- vice) Half-day 322 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Senior Agricultural Research Technician . . Mrs H. Joffe*, B.Sc. (Garden utilization) Agricultural Research Technicians A.A. Balsinhas** (Indigenous food plant data bank) Mrs L.D. Jacobs, B.Sc. Hons (Crop plants of African origin) PRETORIA NATIONAL BOTANICAL GARDEN Chief Agricultural Research Technician . . D.H. Dry, NTC Dip. (Hort.) (Curator) First Agricultural Research Technicians . D.S. Hardy (Nursery supervision, succu- lents and orchids) D.J.F. Strydom, NTC Dip. (Hort.), Dip. Rec. P.A. (Supervision northern sec- tion of the garden) * Half-day ** Part-time Agricultural Research Technicians N.A. Klapwijk, NDH (Supervision southern sec- tion of garden) N.F. van Zyl, NDH (Propagation for main plant- ings) Agricultural Research Assistant Mrs K. Clarke (Garden records) Farm foremen L.C. Steenkamp (Supervision of labour) G.R. Lubbe (Workshop and stores) BIOSY STEM ATIC S DIVISION Officer-in -Charge Assistant Director Senior Liaison Officer O.A. Leistner, M.Sc., D.Sc., F.L.S. O.A. Leistner, M.Sc., D.Sc., F.L.S. (Editing) Mrs E. du Plessis, B.Sc. Hons, S.E.D. (Editing and trans- lating) Senior Agricultural Research Technician .. Mrs B.A. Momberg*, B.Sc. (Editing) PUBLICATIONS BY THE STAFF (1987.04.01-1988.03.31) BRINK, E. 1987. Grace Violet Britten (23.2.1904-10.10.1987). The Elephant’s Child 10,3: 34-35. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987a. Coronoplectrum, a new lichen genus from the Namib Desert, South West Africa/Namibia. Mycotaxon 28: 131-135. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987b. Two new brown subcrustose Parmelia species from southern Africa (lichenized Ascomycetes). Bothalia 17: 25-28. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987c. A new species of Gonohymenia from Etosha Pan limestone. Bothalia 17: 35-37. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987d. A new species of Thyrea from Otavi dolo- mite (Damara System). Bothalia 17: 37-40. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987e. Echidnocymbium (Biatoraceae), a new lichen genus from southern Africa. Mycotaxon 29: 173 — 176. BRUSSE, F.A. 1 9 8 7 f . Eremastrella montana (Psoraceae), a new lichen species from the Drakensberg, South Africa. Myco- taxon 29: 177-181. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987g. Schistoplaca (Lichenes, Biatoraceae) a new lichen genus. Mycotaxon 29: 245-249. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987h. A new yellow Acarospora (Lichenes) from the Waterberg, South West Africa/Namibia. Bothalia 17: 179-181. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987i. Psathyrophlyctis, a new lichen genus from southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 182-184. BRUSSE, F.A. 1987j. A new species of Trapelia (Lichenes) from southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 187-188. BRUSSE, F.A. 1988. Three new species of Parmelia (Lichenes) from southern Africa. Mycotaxon 31: 155-162. CHADWICK, S.E. 1987. Trichodesma scottiL The Flowering Plants of Africa 49: t. 1946. CODD, L.E. & JOFFE, H. 1987. X Ruttyruspolia (Acanthaceae) a natural intergeneric hybrid. Veld & Flora, Dec. 1987: 150-151. DAV1DSE, G. & ELLIS, R.P. 1987. Arundoclaytonia, a new ge- nus of the Steyermarkochloeae (Poaceae: Arundinoideae) from Brazil Annals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 74: 479-490. DAVIS, G.W. 1987. Performance of a laboratory-constructed anemometer under summer field conditions on a Mountain Fynbos experimental site. Bothalia 17: 136-138. DE WINTER, B. 1987. Review: Genera graminum — grasses of the world, by W.D. Clayton & S.A. Renvoize. Bothalia 17: 299-300. DRY, D.H. 1987a. Danie Dry says. Park Administration, Apr.: 30-31. DRY, D.H. 1987b. Danie Dry se. Park Administration, Jul.: 34- 36. DRY, D.H. 1987c. Danie Dry says. Park Administration, Oct.: 20-21. DRY, D.H. & DE VRIES, J. 1987. Landskapering met inheemse plante. Parks and Grounds No. 41 May: 61-65. DU PLESSIS, E. 1987. Obituary: John Frederick Vicars Phillips (1899-1987). Bothalia 17: 267-268. ELLIS,R.P. 1987a. Leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa: the Setacea group. Bothalia 17: 75- 89. ELLIS, R.P. 1987b. Leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa: the Villosa group. Bothalia 17: 195 — 204. ELLIS, R.P. 1987c. A review of comparative leaf blade anatomy in the systematics of the Poaceae: the past twenty-five years. In T.R. Soderstrom et al. Grass systematics and evolution: 3-10. Smithsonian Institution Press, Washing- ton. FRIIS, 1., IMMELMAN, K.L. & WILMOT-DEAR, C.M. 1987. New taxa and combinations in old world Urticaceae. Nordic Journal of Botany 7 : 125-126. GERMISHUIZEN, G. 1987a. A new species of lndigofera from Natal and Transkei (Fabaceae). Bothalia 17: 33-34. GERMISHUIZEN, G. 1987b. A new species of Oxygonum from Natal (Polygonaceae). Bothalia 17: 40-41. GERMISHUIZEN, G. 1987c. A new species of Rhynchosia from the Richtersveld (Fabaceae). Bothalia 17: 181-182. GERMISHUIZEN, G. 1987d. A new variety of Oxygonum alatum (Polygonaceae). Bothalia 17: 185-187. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987a. Taxonomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae): the Setacea group. Bothalia 17: 67-73. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987b. Taxonomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae): the Villosa group. Bothalia 17: 191-194. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987c. Preliminary floristic analysis of the major biomes in southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 213 — 228. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987d. Review: Gramineae for the Flora of Turkey, Vol. 9, edited by P.H. Davis. Australian grass genera, anatomy, morphology, keys and classification, 2nd edn, by L. Watson & M.J. Dallwitz. Bothalia 17: 297-298. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. 1987e. Review: Grasses, sedges, restiads and rushes, by O.M. Hilliard. South African Journal of Science 83: 501. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E. & ELLIS, R.P. 1987. Species groups in Ehrharta (Poaceae) of southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 51- 65. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., REID, C., FISH, L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., VAN WYK, M„ VAN ROOY, J. & STAFF 1987. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. Bothalia 17: 269-275. GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., WELMAN, W.G., RETIEF, E„ IMMELr MAN, K.L., GERMISHUIZEN, G., PIENAAR, B.J., VAN WYK, M. & NICHOLAS, A. 1987. List of species of south- ern African plants. Edn 2, part 2. Memoirs of the Botani- cal Survey of South Africa No. 56, pp. 270. HARDY, D.S. 1987a. Aloe compressa. Aloe 24: 4. HARDY, D.S. 1987b. The Namib, a living sea of sand. 6. Aloe 24: 6-7. HARDY, D.S. 1987c. For the love of an island. 15. Aloe 24: 8-9. HARDY, D.S. 1987d. Review: Flowers of southern Africa. Aloe 24: 10. HARDY, D.S. 1987e. The Namib, a living sea of sand. 6. Aloe 24: 29-30. HARDY, D.S. 1 987 f. Madagascar — the rescued ones. Aloe 24: 40-41. HARDY, D.S. 1987g. Pachycereus pringlei. Aloe 24: 42. HARDY, D.S. 1987h. Robert Allen Dyer, 1900-1987. Aloe 24: 44. HENDERSON, L. 1987. Barrier plants of southern Africa. Me- moirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa No. 55, pp. 97. HENDERSON, L. & MUSIL, K.J. 1987. Plant invaders of the Transvaal. Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Bulletin 412, Pretoria. HENDERSON, M., FOURIE, D.M.C., WELLS, M.J. & HENDER- SON, L. 1987. Verklaarde onkruide en uitheemse indringer- plante in Suid- A frikaj Declared weeds and alien invader plants in South Africa. Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Bulletin 413, Pretoria. HEYL, T„ GORST-ALLMAN, C.P., WELLS, M.J., FOURIE, D.M.C., SERVOIR, K„ KEENE, A.R. & STEYN, P.S. 1987. Smodingium dermatitis. South African Medical Journal 71: 440-441. IMMELMAN, K.L. 1987. Synopsis of the genus Salix (Salicaceae) in southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 171-177. LE ROUX, C.J.G., GRUNOW, J.O., MORRIS, J.W., BREDEN- KAMP, G.J. & SCHEEPERS, J.C. 1988. A classification of the vegetation of the Etosha National Park. South African Journal of Botany 54: 1—10. MACDONALD, I.A.W., CLARK, D.L. & TAYLOR, H.C. 1987. The alien flora of the Cape of Good Hope Nature Reserve. South African Journal of Botany 53: 398-404. MALAN, O.G. & WESTFALL, R.H. 1987. A new strategy for vegetation mapping with the aid of Landsat MSS data. Advances in Space Research 7, 11: 97-103. McDONALD, D.J. 1987a. Ordination by detrended correspon- dence analysis (DCA) of the vegetation of Swartbosch- kloof, Jonkershoek, Cape Province. Bothalia 17: 121 — 129. McDONALD, D.J. 1987b. The Marloth photographic collection — a legacy. Veld & Flora 73: 94—95. McDONALD, D.J. & OLIVER, E.G.H. 1987. Erica barrydalensis L. Bol. — a rediscovery of a rare species. Veld & Flora 73: 101-102. NICHOLAS, A. 1987a A new species and a new combination of Asclepias (Asclepiadaceae) in southern Africa Bothalia 17: 17-23. 323 NICHOLAS, A. 1987b. Notes on Asclepias diploglossa, A. cog- nata and A. flava. Bothalia 17: 29-32. NICHOLAS, A. 1987c. Review: Transvaal Lowveld and escarp- ment, South African Wild Flower Guide 4, by Jo Onder- stall. Bothalia 17: 297. OLIVER, E.G.H. 1987a. Studies in the Ericoideae (Ericaceae). V. The genus Coilostigma. Bothalia 17: 163-170. OLIVER, E.G.H. 1987b. Studies in the Ericoideae (Ericaceae). VII. The placing of the genus Philippia into synonymy under Erica ; the southern African species. South African Journal of Botany 53: 455-458. OLIVER, E.G.H. 1987c. Review: Hottentots Holland to Her- manus, South African Wild Flower Guide 5, by Lee Bur- man and Anne Bean. Bothalia 17: 297. POWRIE, L.W. 1987. Botanic gardens and environment aware- ness. Parks and Administration, Oct. 1987: 15-17. REBELO, A.G., COWLING, R.M., GIBBS RUSSELL, G.E., HOCKEY, P. A. R., JARMAN, M.L., BOUCHER, C. & HILTON-TAYLOR, C. 1987. Guidelines for the plant atlas of southern Africa. CSIR-FRD Ecosystem Program- me Occasional Report No. 23. REID, C. 1987a. Review: Flora of Australia (Vol. 46), Iridaceae to Dioscoreaceae, edited by Alexander S. George. Bothalia 17: 155. REID, C. 1987b. Review: The Moraeas of southern Africa, by Peter Goldblatt. Bothalia 17: 298. RETIEF, E. 1987. A new species of Zygophyllum from southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 189-190. RETIEF, E. & GLEN, H.F. 1987a. Cyphostemma oleraceum. The Flowering Plants of Africa 49: t. 1954. RETIEF, E. & GLEN, H.F. 1987b. Cyphostemma hardyi. The Flowering Plants of Africa 49: t. 1955. RETIEF, E. & GLEN, H.F. 1987c. Cyphostemma juttae. The Flowering Plants of A frica 49: t. 1956. RUTHERFORD, M.C. 1987. South African ecology: representa- tiveness of interests. Bulletin of the South African Institute of Ecologists 6: 37-42. SCHEEPERS, J.C. 1987. Grassland Biome Project: Proceedings of the Workshop on Classification and Mapping: 20 August 1985. Occasional Report No. 16: 1—31. Ecosystems Pro- grammes, Foundation for Research Development, CSIR, Pretoria. SCHRIRE, B.D. 1987a. A synopsis of Tephrosia subgenus Bar- bistyla (Fabaceae) in southern Africa. Bothalia 17: 7-15. SCHRIRE, B.D. 1987b. Orthographic ambiguity clarified (Cucur- bitaceae). Bothalia 17: 181. SODERSTROM, T.R. & ELLIS, R.P. 1987. The position of bam- boo genera and allies in a system of grass classification. In T.R. Soderstrom et al., Grass systematics and evolution: 225-238. Smithsonian Institution Press, Washington, D.C. SODERSTROM, T.R., ELLIS, R.P. & JUCZIEWICS, E.J. 1987. The Phareae and Streptogyneae of Sri Lanka: an anatomi- cal and morphological study. Smithsonian Contributions to Botany 65: 1-27. SPIES, J.J. 1987a. Lantana camara, gevaarlik in alle gedaantes. Landbouweekblad 476: 20-22. SPIES, J.J. 1987b. Beast disguised as beauty. Farmer’s Weekly 77018: 26-29. SPIES, J.J. & DU PLESSIS, H. 1987a Chromosome studies on African plants. 3. Bothalia 17: 131-135. SPIES, J.J. & DU PLESSIS, H. 1987b. Chromosome studies on African plants. 5. Bothalia 17: 257-259. SPIES, J.J. & DU PLESSIS, H. 1987c. Sterile Lantana camara: fact or theory. South A frican Journal of Plant and Soil 4: 171-174. SPIES, J.J. & JONKER, A. 1987. Chromosome studies on Afri- can plants. 4. Bothalia 17: 135-136. SPIES, J.J., STIRTON, C.H. & DU PLESSIS, H. 1987. The genus Rubus (Rosaceae) in South Africa. IV. Natural hybridiza- tion. Bothalia 17: 105-119. TAYLOR, H.C. 1987. Review: The ecology and management of biological invasions in southern Africa, edited by Mac- donald, Kruger & Ferrar. A frican Wildlife 4: 340. TURNER, B.J. 1987. Review: Grasses of South West Africa/ Namibia, by M.A.N. Muller. Bothalia 17: 155. VAN ROOY, J. & MAGILL, R.E. 1987. Bryaceae. In R.E. Magill, Flora of southern Africa , Bryophyta 1,2: 335-393. De- partment of Agriculture and Water Supply, Republic of South Africa. 324 VAN WYK, A.E. & PRINS, MARIE 1987. A new species of Catha (Celastraceae) from southern Natal and Pondoland. South African Journal of Botany 53: 202-205. WEISSER, P.J. 1987. Dune vegetation between Richards Bay and Mlalazi Lagoon and its conservation priorities in rela- tion to dune mining. Natal Town and Regional Planning Bothalia 18,2 (1988) Supplementary Report Vol. 19, pp. 71. WELLS, M.J. 1987. The Botanical Research Institute of the De- partment of Agriculture and Water Supply. Archimedes 29: 28-33. WELLS, M.J. & DE BEER, H. 1987. Nasella tussock/Nasella-pol- gras. Weeds/Onkruid A2 1/1987. Farming in South Africa. Bothalia 18,2: 325-327 (1988) OBITUARY HERMANN MERXMULLER (1920-1988) In the early hours of the morning of the 8th of Fe- bruary 1988 Prof. Dr Hermann Merxmuller passed away in the Polyclinic of the University of Munich after a long serious illness. He was at the time emeritus professor of systematic botany of the University of Munich as well as ex-director of the Botanic Garden of Munich and the Botanische Staatssammlung (State Herbarium), Munich. On his retirement he had thus combined under his control the entire research field of systematic botany in Munich. Hermann Merxmuller (Figure 1) was bom in Munich on the 30th of August 1920, the son of a teacher. The family had been resident in Bavaria for many generations. His interest in the diversity of the plant world developed very early and even as a pupil he was a keen plant collec- tor in the surroundings of Munich and in the Bavarian mountains. Sympathetic teachers helped promote these talents appreciably and at the age of 1 7 he became Mem- ber of the Bavarian Botanical Society in which he soon drew attention through his floristic knowledge which, even at that stage, was remarkable. After completion of his schooling at the renowned Ludwigs Gymnasium in Munich the 2nd World War broke out which temporarily made the study of biology impossible, and during the ensuing six years allowed little time for botany. Only after the war could Merxmuller take up a scholarship of the distinguished Maximilianeums Foundation which provided free study to highly gifted persons. In 1946 circumstances at last allowed him to com- mence the study of biology at the University of Munich, which he completed in a remarkably short time in 1951 with a doctoral dissertation for which he was awarded the highest mark, summa cum laude. His dissertation dealt with problems of plant distribution in the Alps and soon earned him high esteem in scientific circles. Since 1948 he had close ties with the Botanische Staatssamm- lung, which at the time was under the directorship of Karl Suessenguth, and shortly after his graduation he took up a position as scientific assistant at this institute. It was Suessenguth, who directed Merxmuller’s sights towards Africa, because he had decided relatively late in life to work on the flora of South West Africa in Munich and to compile a Prodromus for the region. This new goal of the Botanische Staatssammlung soon resulted in Merxmuller’s involvement in southern African plant groups. His early interest in complex genera led him to study the European tribes of Hieracium. Very soon he extended this interest to the whole family Compositae. His first publication dealing with southern African groups was his Compositenstudien I (1950) which was a treatise on the Compositae of the collections by Rehm from South West Africa, Transvaal and the Cape Province. During the following year a joint publication with his teacher Suessenguth appeared entitled ‘A contribution to the flora of the Marandellas District, Southern Rhode- sia’. It was the first joint ‘finger-warming exercise’ for the Prodromus einer Flora von Siidwestafrika. This pre- lude led to a long series of works on the flora of southern Africa which ended only with his Compositen-Studien XI (1984) in which all then known changes in the Com- positae treatment of the Prodromus are dealt with. This central theme of Merxmuller’s research work also comes to the fore in the second opus of his scientific career, his inaugural dissertation, an exacting treatise which has to be approved before admission can be gained to the teach- ing staff of a German university. To this end Merxmuller presented a revision of Geigeria, a southern African genus of the Compositae. The relatively early death of Suessenguth brought with it several significant changes for Hermann Merx- muller. He was appointed as head of the Botanische Staatssammlung, and he not only considered it his duty but it was with genuine scientific interest that he assumed responsibility for the huge project of the ‘Prodromus einer Flora von Siidwestafrika’. With his characteristic energy he succeeded in publishing this fundamental over- view in the course of six years (1966-1972). Several journeys to South Africa and especially South West Africa (1957/58, 1963, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1977) enabled him to gain valuable first-hand knowledge of the plant world of the region which became very dear to him (Figure 2). The rich plant collections with which he returned to Munich from these journeys formed the basis of many of his works and led to numerous investigations into the FIGURE 1. — Hermann Merxmiillei (1920-1988). 326 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) southern Africa flora by his collaborators. Even the first journey resulted in the acquaintance and friendship of many colleagues, links which lasted until his last days and which gave vital support to the progress of his scien- tific endeavours. In Munich he succeeded in founding the Institut fur Systematische Botanik at the University in 1958 and he became its first director. Previously he had been offered chairs of systematic botany at the renowned faculties of Berlin and Zurich. In the following years Merxmuller succeeded in purposefully promoting systematic research in Munich and in a short time this city had become an important centre for plant systematic research in central Europe. His cosmopolitan outlook and his high scientific repute soon led to a rapid increase in the international contacts of the institute and the collections grew con- siderably. Hermann Merxmuller was among those instru- mental in aiding German botany to break out of its isola- tion after the war and in establishing new or re-establishing old contacts world-wide. In addition to his research work Hermann Merxmuller was also an eminent lecturer. His lucid, well considered and precise delivery was highly esteemed by his students and colleagues alike and he helped to give form and con- tent to numerous national and international congresses. In the University of Munich he was a valued member of many important panels. From 1963 to 1965 he was Dean of the Faculty of Natural Sciences and from 1963 to 1968 a member of the Senate. In 1969 he decided to assume in addition the directorship of the Botanic Garden. Although he would probably rather have devoted his talents to science than to bureaucracy he saw the need for incorporating the botanic garden in the group of three institutes in Munich devoted to systematic botany. In the following year he could thus welcome many guests from all corners of the earth at the 7th congress of AETFAT as host of three houses. It gave him great pleasure to organize this congress which focussed on the heart of his scientific interest, the African flora. At this time of his most active scientific endeavour the two most prominent characteristics of Merxmuller were particularly well defined: his ability to recall almost every plant he had ever seen and his faculty for scientific synthesis, which, combined with his vast knowledge of literature, resulted in an extraordinary insight into cor- relations in the plant kingdom. Unfortunately he was not granted the opportunity to shape this knowledge into a lasting work for which he had drawn up plans. Only the recollections of many lectures, conversations and discussions therefore remain. Hermann Merxmuller has been honoured often and in various ways for his scientific achievements. Only the following will be singled out in the present context: the Bavarian Order of Merit (1983), the Jubilee Medal of the National Botanic Gardens of South Africa (1963) and the Special Award of the South African Association of Botanists (1982). Hermann Merxmuller was member of numerous scientific societies and of several academies. Since 1980 he suffered increasingly from chronic ailments. He therefore decided in 1985 to relinquish his positions at the University, in the State Herbarium and FIGURE 2.— Prof. H. Merxmul- ler in Sperrgebiet No. 1, SWA/Namibia, flats west of Buntfeldschuh, with a specimen of Othonna fur- cata (Lindl.) Druce in full flower, 1972.09.12. Photo: W. Giess. Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 327 in the Garden. Relieved of the burden of these positions he had hoped to devote his remaining strength exclusive- ly to botany. But unfortunately these hopes were not to be fulfilled. Every visit to the hospital during the last three years increasingly reduced his strength. Finally he even had to experience the loss of most of his eyesight, his most crucial contact with the world. To us who had to observe this development, it appeared to be a particu- larly cruel fate. Southern African botany has lost in Hermann Merx- miiller a scientist who has in the course of the past 25 years made significant contributions to its furtherance. He was always a true friend of this region to which he was emotionally strongly attached, an attachment that lasted unflinchingly till the very end. Selected literature on southern Africa MERXMULLER, H. 1950. Compositen-Studien I. Mitteilungen ms der Botanischen Staatssammlung, Munchen 1: 33-46. SUESSENGUTH, K. & MERXMULLER, H. 1951. A contribution to the flora of the Marandellas District, Southern Rhodesia. Transactions of the Rhodesia Scientific Association XLIII: 1-86. MERXMULLER, H. 1953. Compositen-Studien III. Revision der Gattung Geigeria Griesselich. Mitteilungen aus der Bota- nischen Staatssammlung, Munchen 1: 239-316. MERXMULLER, H. (ed.) 1966-1972. Prodromus einer Flora von Siidwestafrika. J. Cramer, Lehre. MERXMULLER, H. & ROESSLER, H. 1984. Compositen-Studien XI. Neue Ubersicht der Compositen Siidwestafrikas. Mit- teilungen aus der Botanischen Staatssammlung, Munchen 20: 61-96. JURKEGRAU* (Translation: O.A. Leistner) * Professor of Botany, Institut fur Systematische Botanik der Universitat Munchen, Menzinger Strasse 67, D-8000 Munchen 19, West Germany BRD. Bothalia 18,2: 329-332 (1988) Book Reviews THE ECOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT OF BIOLOGICAL IN- VASIONS IN SOUTHERN AFRICA by I.A.W. MACDONALD, F.J. KRUGER & A. A. FERRAR (eds). 1986. Oxford University Press, Harrington House, Barrack St, Cape Town 8001. Pp. 324 (+ xvi), 44 figures, 83 tables, 6 appendices, 2 indexes. Size 205 X 260 mm. Price: hard cover R45,00 +GST. This book is ‘the first attempt to synthesize available infor- mation on the invasion of southern Africa’s natural systems by introduced organisms.’ It represents the South African contri- bution to the international project co-ordinated by SCOPE (Scientific Committee on Problems of the Environment) to examine the global ecology of invasive plants, animals and micro-organisms. The book has been compiled in response to a rapidly increasing realization world-wide, but particularly in southern Africa, that certain introduced species present a real ecological and economic threat to agricultural and conservation activities. The idea for the project was originally conceived at the Third International Conference on Mediterranean Ecosystems held in South Africa in 1980. During the following years work- shops were convened to collate unpublished information and in November, 1985, a National Symposium on the Ecology of Biological Invasions was held in Stellenbosch. This book records the proceedings of the symposium. It says much for the industry and organization of the partici- pants, that a volume of this scope and magnitude has been pro- duced in the short space of five years. The editors, I.A.W. Mac- donald, F.J. Kruger and A.A. Ferrar, are South African bio- logists of standing. Their team of no less than 50 authors are leaders in their fields at South African universities and research institutes; the 45 specialist referees hail from a wide range of overseas countries with a few from South Africa. Together they have succeeded in producing a timely, uniquely South African work of high quaJity, interest and relevance. In these days when symposium papers are so often published in camera- ready form from a variety of typescripts, put together with a minimum of editing, it is a joy to come across a book that has uniform, clear, double-column print and is virtually free from printer’s devils — I spotted only two misprints! The book’s value as a work of reference is assured by the two comprehen- sive indexes, a biological index to every genus and species men- tioned in the text, and a subject index, amply cross-referenced and often subindexed under major topics such as birds, fire, weeds and the various biomes. One criticism here — the lack of a separate glossary. The brief explanation of terms given in the Introduction could, in my opinion, have been more crisply dealt with in a glossary, to which could have been added a num- ber of common words used in a circumscribed sense defined in the text, such as transformer species, pests and nuisance animals, processes, impacts and many more. The 25 chapters, mostly multi-authored, are grouped into six parts that deal with historical perspectives, faunal invasions, in- vasions at the biome level, understanding the ecology of inva- sions, impacts of invasions and finally managing invasive alien plants. Following this logical sequence we read first about the role of people in introducing new species to South Africa — ‘tracing what is known of the timing, location, rate and extent of spread, and the modes of and motivation for their introduction.’ It may surprise many to learn that Van Riebeeck’s oaks were by no means the first aliens. Domestic animals arrived with the Khoi pastoral peoples about 2000 years ago and Bantu-speaking farmers in the Early Iron Age, a thousand years before Van Rie- beeck, brought crop plants and perhaps weeds. But the principal introductions occurred after European settlement and especially during Victorian times. Indeed, leading figures of the day, in their zeal to clothe the treeless slopes and to improve the ameni- ties of the Cape, were often major but unwitting culprits. Baron von Ludwig and the Director of the Cape Town Botanical Garden between them probably imported many of the invasive Acacias, Hakeas and Leptospermum laevigatum, and Rhodes introduced the European Starling! Most of these introductions were, of course, for utilitarian purposes and, considering the enormous variety of plant species introduced, comparatively few of them have become invasive. Compared with plants, the number of terrestrial vertebrates that have invaded South African ecosystems, outside man- modified areas, is limited, probably because Africa’s large suite of indigenous animals makes it difficult for aliens to establish themselves. In southern Africa’s aquatic systems, however, ani- mal invasions have been significant. These and similar topics are discussed and speculated upon in the second part of the book. In part three, invasions are documented on a biome basis. This approach is of value because it brings out the contrasting suites of species characteristic of the different biomes and in so doing raises intriguing practical and theoretical questions, the solutions to which might usefully be extrapolated to similar biomes elsewhere in Africa and further afield. The next section reviews our current understanding of local biological invasions in order to try and predict suitable guide- lines for their future management and prevention. Processes and functional features of invasive plants and animals are discussed in detail but one concludes regretfully that we do not yet know enough to formulate really effective management principles. Little has been done to evaluate ecological and economic im- pacts, partly because it is difficult to find suitable control areas with the full range of densities that need testing. Also, monitor- ing has not yet been of sufficient duration to provide more than preliminary conclusions. Hence, authors have often had to turn to the long-term experiments in hydrology and sylviculture to find evidence for the impacts of plant invasions. Breytenbach, in his perceptive account of impacts on terrestrial ecosystems, points out that aliens are not effective invaders simply because of inherent traits of the alien itself but also because they disrupt ecological processes. Similarly some control measures may have a greater impact on processes than the alien has, therefore an effective control strategy should not merely get rid of the alien but should at the same time have minimal effect on the native community. In their paper on impacts in aquatic ecosystems, Ashton and co-authors discuss the special attributes and con- ditions that enable aquatic invasives to be so successfuL One of these is undoubtedly the growing number of dams, reser- voirs and inter-catchment transfer schemes that have created completely new habitats where aggressive invaders may have an advantage over native species in establishment and spread; another is the progressive deterioration in water quality in many rivers, enabling alien organisms suited to eutrophic conditions to flourish. To conservation practitioners, the last section of the book, on managing invasive alien plants, is most important. It is now accepted that eradication of invaders that have become firmly established is beyond our means. Moreover, some invaders are useful to man in certain circumstances, harmful in others. The wise course, then, is to learn to live with them, but on our terms. Hence, this part of the book considers methods of control. Mechanical and chemical control receive little attention, not because they lack merit but because each tends to be specific to a particular case, local in application, generating little in the way of general principles. Similarly, legislative control measures have not been dealt with, simply because no scientific study of the efficacy of existing laws has been made. Instead, these final chapters describe the biological control methods that have had a long and generally successful history in southern Africa, parti- cularly with woody and cactoid plant invaders. One of these chapters, by Neser & Kluge, deals specifically with the use of seed-attacking organisms. In the past, seed-attackers have rated poorly in comparison with organisms that inflict direct damage to the vital vascular or mechanical support systems of the target plant. More recent research has shown, however, that seed- attacking organisms, by reason of their great number and variety, 330 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) and their release from predator pressure when introduced to a new range, can make a positive contribution to biocontrol, parti- cularly as a means of reducing the invasions of potentially useful alien woody plants. One ingenious example is the proposed re- lease of bruchid beetles which destroy the seed of Prosopis velu- tina without affecting the fodder value of the pod. This would allow the continued use of the species while controlling its spread. The ultimate refinement in managing invasive species is, of course, to devise an integrated plan of control by drawing upon past experience and research in every relevant field. The final chapter of the book gives guidelines for such a plan. In the past there has been a preoccupation with the means or ‘options’ for control (mechanical, chemical, biological etc.) but latterly two other considerations are seen as being equally important. There must be, firstly, a thorough understanding of the biology of the target plant and, secondly, a careful consideration of all the possible consequences that the control measures may have. But no plan, however all-embracing, can be effective without the final ingredient — a well defined objective; and, since eradica- tion is now accepted as being generally unattainable, that ob- jective must be to define clearly the level of control required. Most chapters have good visual explanatory material: figures and tables are relevant, clearly presented and usually simple to understand. There are no photographs; indeed, in a volume of this nature they are unnecessary and would only have increased the cost of the book. At R45,00, this locally produced volume is still reasonably priced compared to texts published overseas today; and what’s more, in quality it surpasses many overseas productions. Considering the diverse authorship, the editors have succeed- ed in maintaining a fairly homogeneous format in the content of the papers. A certain amount of variation in style is unavoid- able but generally the standard of writing is good ‘sciencese.’ Gems such as ‘a considerable expansion of the data base will have to be made’ for ‘we need more facts’ are mercifully rare. I preferred the papers that formulated hypotheses (kite-fliers if you like) to those that were largely a recitation of statistics. A refrain that occurs with almost depressing regularity in the chapters that relate research findings is the need for more research. It’s true that we are now only beginning to under- stand the complexity of biological invasions; only beginning to realize that there is not one ‘optimal strategy’ but several. Until problems are further unravelled, ad hoc measures must be taken, but we need to be conservative, even cautious, in manage- ment and especially in introducing new organisms to the region. Some questions that the man in the street may ask, like ‘what’s wrong with aliens anyway?’ will be answered fully but not succinctly in this book; to others, such as ‘what will happen in the long term?’ no simple answer is yet in sight, and a study of this book will explain why. Indeed, this erudite volume contains something for everyone concerned about the conservation of the organisms, biotas and habitats of our land. [A shortened version of this review appeared in A frican Wildlife 41: 340 (1987).] H.C. TAYLOR FLORA OF AUSTRALIA (Vol. 45), Hydatellaceae to Liliaceae, edited by ALEXANDER S. GEORGE. 1987 . Australian Govern- ment Publishing Service, G.P.O. Box 84, Canberra, A.C.T. 2601. Pp. 521, line drawings and 20 colour photographs, 57 scanning electron micrographs, 477 maps. Price: soft cover edn $A 44.95; casebound edition $A 54.95. This volume, the eighth, is the largest to be published in the series thus far and completes the treatment of Liliales begun in Volume 46 (published 1986). The small orders Hydatellales, Typhales, Bromeliales and Zingiberales are also included, giving a total of 12 families, 98 genera and 404 species as well as many infraspecific taxa. There are 36 contributors. Because the Flora is arranged according to Cronquist, An integrated system of clas- sification of flowering plants (1981), the family Liliaceae is here treated in the very widest sense, and includes such well recognized families as Amaryllidaceae, Alstroemeriaceae and Hypoxidaceae as well as the numerous narrowly-defined families recognized by Dahlgren et al. in The Families of the Monocotyledons (1985). However, the reasons for adopting the former classification are clear, and there is a useful listing of the Liliaceae genera included in the Flora (pp. 149-151) with their equivalent families sensu Dahlgren et al. The uniqueness of Australia’s flora is illustrated by the follow- ing figures: of the 266 species of Liliaceae here recognized, 76% are endemic while an incredible 17% are naturalized introduc- tions, many from South Africa or South America. Only 7% of the species are common to neighbouring territories, including New Zealand and ‘Malesia’, i.e. the territories included in Flora Malesiana. As with preceding volumes, there is consistency in style and layout, with the use of simple descriptive terms, the grouping of distribution maps after the text, and new taxa, new combinations and lectotypifications placed in the appendix, followed by a useful supplementary glossary and list of abbreviations and con- tractions. The line drawings are of a consistently high standard and the five pages of colour photographs following the intro- duction, provide additional interest. The dust jacket and frontis- piece bear an attractive colour painting of Johnsonia lupulina R. Br., one of the included species. This is a well produced, concise and simple-to-use Flora and should stimulate worldwide interest in Australia’s unique floral wealth. C. REID THE BOTANY OF THE COMMELINS, by D.O. WIJNANDS. 1983. A.A. Balkema, P.O. Box 1675, Rotterdam, Netherlands. Pp. 232, 64 colour plates. Price: R70,00 +GST. It is rather late to review a book published in 1983, but since it is important to South African botany and has not yet been reviewed in this country and the author, Dr Wijnands, has per- sonally expressed surprise at this omission, the Editor felt that a review was desirable even at this late stage. The Botany of the Commelins deals with the exotic plants cultivated in the Hortus Medicus Amstelodamensis and illustrat- ed in the codex. Moninckx Atlas, and the four books produced by Jan and Caspar Commelin, namely the two volumes of Hortus Amstelodamensis, the Praeludia Botanica and Plantae Rariores et Exoticae. In the dust jacket blurb it is stated that the water- colours were painted between 1686—1709, but on the title page the' dates given are 1682-1710. Dr Wijnands’s task was to identify the plants depicted and to comment on their taxonomy, nomen- clature and history. Part 1 of the book is devoted to history and includes four chapters. In the first chapter, Wijnands describes the Hortus Medicus Amstelodamensis. He points out that although the garden was founded primarily for medical purposes, botanical interests played a conspicuous part in the development of the garden. In Chapters 2 and 3, biographies of Jan and Caspar Commelin are provided with particular reference to their asso- ciation with the garden. In Chapter 4 the nine volumes of the Moninckx Atlas are described in detail together with an account of the artists responsible for the illustrations. Of the nine volumes, only eight are related to the Commelin period. Part 2 covers the taxonomy and nomenclature and includes chapters on the influence of the Commelin books, notes on typification, presentation of the texts on the watercolours and engravings and, the major part of the book (172 pages), a dis- cussion of the plants. The plants are dealt with in alphabetical order by family. In Chapter 6 on typification, Wijnands points out that the choice of illustrations as nomenclatural types is common prac- tice today, but there is still diffidence among some botanists about designating illustrations as lectotypes, although the Code (Article 7.2) and ‘Guide for the determination of types (T4b)’ clearly permit this. Wijnands contests the preference given to Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 331 specimens over descriptions and illustrations (l.c. T4b) in cases where there is no concrete evidence that the author saw the specimens. Also in this chapter, Wijnands refers to the impor- tance of specimens in the Van Royen Herbarium in Leiden to Linnaean typification. This is in contrast to Steam’s opinion (Facsimile edition of Species plantarum, 105, 1957) that the Van Royen Herbarium is only indirectly relevant to Linnaeus’s work since it was not studied by him. Wijnands states that there are 2 000-3 000 specimens in the herbarium which are relevant to Linnaean typification, some 150 of which may even be holotypes. Wijnands points out that Linnaeus was familiar with the living collection at Leiden and that the Van Royen Herbarium was at Linnaeus’s disposal, since it is listed in his preface to Species plantarum. Following Part 2 are three appendices, the most useful prob- ably being Appendix C, the key to the Moninckx Atlas and Commelin volumes, where all the plant names are listed to- gether with the corresponding volume, page and figure/tab. numbers in the two sets of publications. Finally, there are 64 full-colour reproductions from the Moninckx Atlas. Why is this book so important to South African botany? The reason is simple: of the 420 plants illustrated from the Hortus Medicus Amstelodamensis, 229 species originated from South Africa — mainly introductions by Simon and Willem Adriaan van der Stel. Commelin plates are important in that Linnaeus cited 259 out of the toted of 305 plates published by the Commelins and therefore an understanding of these plates is of fundamental significance for the interpretation and some- times typification of many of the Linnaean species. A quick scan through Wijnands’s book shows that 41 South African species are typified by Commelin plates. Wijnands has made a very thorough investigation of the typi- fication of a great number of the species illustrated in the Com- melin works and his findings concerning the South African species reflect rather badly on South African taxonomy. A list of the South African botanists who have perpetrated blunders in typification would be most revealing. The reviewer shame- facedly admits to being one of the guilty parties, but fortunate- ly in one instance only. There is perhaps some consolation in the fact that one of the chief errors in typification probably con- cerns the uncritical designation of specimens in the Linnaean Herbarium (LINN) as types — an error committed world-wide in years gone by. For the reviewer, Wijnands’s book with its many cases of carefully worked out typification serves as an instructive course in the typification of Linnaean species. Rather than attempt to give a coherent account of the guidelines and principles adopted by Wijnands, the reviewer will merely enumerate important points with examples. 1. Wijnands clearly recognizes the importance of the nomen specificum legitimum (NSL), the phrase name, as many of his examples show. 2. He freely describes pre-Linnaean illustrations as holotypes, syntypes or lectotypes, whichever is applicable. (Although il- lustrations are acceptable type elements (Article 7.2 & 7.3), it is strange that the definition of a syntype in the Code (Article 7.7) refers only to specimens.) When two or more elements are cited in a protologue in Species plantarum , Wijnands treats them as syntypes — whether they are pre-Linnaean illustrations or vouching specimens (Wijnands’s term for specimens corresponding to pre-Linnaean references) — along with any available specimens in LINN. From these syn- types, he designates a lectotype. 3. One should only accept a specimen in LINN as type if the number on the sheet agrees with the serial number in Species plantarum. Ignorance of this requirement has undoubtedly been responsible for many of the errors in Linnaean typification in the past. 4. Many specimens in LINN were received by Linnaeus only after 1753 e.g. specimens from Patrick Browne and Tulbagh and are consequently ineligible as types. 5. Discrepancies between LINN specimens and the protologue in Species plantarum in the presence or absence of organs, should be taken into account. For example, in the case of Epiphyllum phyllanthus, p. 55, Wijnands rejects LINN 633.5, not definitely known to have been available in 1753, because it has a flower which is not mentioned in the diagnosis. However, in the case of Papaver orientale, p. 160, Wijnands accepts as correct the designation by Goldblatt of LINN 669.10 as lectotype even though the specimen has no fruits, which con- flicts with (1) Linnaeus’s descriptive note to the effect that the specimen has 16 stigmata and hispid capsules and (2) the NSL where the capsule is described as glabrous. This seems to be an inconsistent attitude to protologue-specimen discrepancy. 6. When the NSL is new and does not match phrase names in pre-Linnaean citations, Wijnands usually accepts the appropriate authentic specimen in LINN as the type, e.g. Justicia hyssopi- folia, p. 32. In the case of Physocarpus opulifolius, p. 183, where LINN 651.12(6) is proposed as the lectotype, the specimen in Hortus Siccus Cliffortianus (HSC) 190.3 is regarded as the para- type (or lectoparatype). Proiphys amboinensis, p. 40, has a new NSL, but no specimen is preserved in LINN, consequently the only element cited, a Commelin plate, is the holotype. Roella ciliata, p. 62, also has a new NSL, but there is no specimen in LINN nor is there a speci- men corresponding to Hort. Cliff. 492, so Wijnands has selected Ehret’s illustration in Hort. Cliff, t. 35, as lectotype. 7. If the NSL is repeated unchanged in the Species plantarum from one of the pre-Linnaean citations, then the corresponding vouching specimen for that citation is the obvious candidate for selection as lectotype. Frequently the NSL is copied directly from Hort. Cliff, and the corresponding specimen in HSC is then nominated as lectotype, e.g. Athanasia dentata, p. 69. In some cases, e.g. Diosma hirta , p. 184 and Cupressus disticha, p. 196, a duplicate specimen of the HSC lectotype, designated by Wijnands, exists in LINN and is treated as an isotype (or isolectotype). On occasions there is no vouching specimen corresponding to the copied pre-Linnaean citation and another syntype must then be designated as lectotype, e.g. Amaryllis zeylanica, p. 37, where there is no specimen in Herbarium Van Royen corresponding to Flora Leydensis prodromus etc. (1740) and a Commelin plate is designated as lectotype. Sometimes the vouching specimen has to be rejected because it does not agree with the NSL e.g. in the case of Lathy rus odo- ratus, p. 164, the specimen HSC 368.9 has no fruits whereas the NSL describes the fruits as hirsute. Therefore, Wijnands proposed LINN 905.12(11) with pods as lectotype. The decision whether to choose a vouching specimen from a pre-Linnaean citation or an available specimen in LINN, can sometimes be influenced by another element in the protologue. For example, in Clutia alatemoides, p. 95, the NSL is taken un- changed from Hort. Cliff , but Linnaeus used Commelin’s Alater- noides africana ...’ in Hort. Med. Amst. 2, p. 3, fig. 9 as epithet and the relevant plate, fig. 9, certainly contributed to Linnaeus’s concept of the species. There is an available specimen in LINN 1206.2 with correct serial number 1, but it does not match Com- melin’s plate all that closely. Therefore, since the NSL comes from Hort. Cliff, Wijnands chooses HSC 444.1 as lectotype. However, this must be a mistake because HSC 500 is the speci- men corresponding to Hort. Cliff. 500 from which the phrase- name is taken — not HSC 444.1. Also, Wijnands clearly states that ‘the last specimen (HSC 500) matches the Commelin plate’. 8. When a pre-Linnaean illustration is used as lectotype, Wijnands usually tries to locate the typotype e.g. Conocarpus erecta, p. 66. Wijnands’s interpretation of the typification undertaken by some taxonomists is sometimes difficult to accept. For example, in the case of Felicia fruticosa (L.) Nichols., p. 275, Grau who revised the genus, cited two types for Aster fruticosus L., the basionym, namely LINN 997.6 & 7, which he had not seen. Wijnands rejects this typification because it was not based on a single specimen and therefore designates the specimen HSC 332 Bothalia 18,2 (1988) 409.17 corresponding to the Hort. Cliff, citation (from which the NSL was taken unchanged) as type. If Grau intended lecto- typifying A. fruticosus by the two specimens, he was clearly contravening the Code which states (Article 7.5) that a lecto- type is ‘a specimen or other element’ i.e. a single element. How- ever, it is not at all clear that Grau was in fact designating the LINN specimens as lectotypes. Elsewhere in his revision, he clearly indicates lectotypification by writing ‘lecto.’ in brackets after the specimen designated. It would appear, therefore, that Grau was merely citing what in his opinion were two syntypes, though strangely enough in his whole revision, there is no other instance where he cites two specimens as types. Whatever the situation, Wijnands was correct in designating the HSC specimen as type, because neither of the two LINN specimens bears the serial number 5 given in Species plantarum and is therefore eligible as a type element. An obvious misinterpretation of the Code is made by Wijnands on p. 192. He states that the combination Agathelpis dubia (L.) Hutch. (1946) is not validly published, because Hutchinson did not cite the basionym Selago dubia L. Wijnands rectifies the omis- sion by citing the basionym and adding ‘ex Wijnands’ to the author citation. However, Article 33.2 of the Code states that the citation of the basionym is only obligatory after 1953, there- fore Hutchinson’s combination is validly published. My only criticism of the book is that I had to search the text to ascertain which four books by the Commelins, apart from the Moninckx Atlas, were covered in Wijnands’s treatment. This in- formation was not provided in the dust jacket blurb, on the title page, or in the introduction. Not even in Chapter 5, where Wijnands discusses the influence of the Commelin books, is this information available. Eventually I found the information scat- tered through the text, but spelt out in Appendix C. Surely such information, part of the subject of the book, should be made known early and clearly. An incredible amount of in-depth research has gone into the preparation of this book and Dr Wijnands is to be congratulated on a book which is bound to become a classic in its own right. D.J.B. KILLICK BOTHALIA Volume 18,2 CONTENTS— INHOUD Oct./Okt. 1988 1. A revision of the genus Prionanthium (Poaceae: Arundineae). GERRIT DAVIDSE 143 2. Studies in the genus Riccia (Marchantiales) from southern Africa. 10. Two new white-scaled species of the group ‘Squamatae’: R. argenteolimbata and R. albomata. O.H. VOLK, S.M. PEROLD and T. BORNEFELD 155 3. Taxonomy and leaf anatomy of the genus Ehrharta (Poaceae) in southern Africa: the Dura group. G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL and R.P. ELLIS 165 4. The Oxygonum dregeanum complex (Polygonaceae). G. GERMISHUIZEN 173 5. Notes on African plants: Brassicaceae. Heliophila cornellsbergia , a new species from the Richtersveld. B.J. PIENAAR and A. NICHOLAS 183 Ericaceae. Coilostigma zeyherianum — a correction. E.G.H. OLIVER 185 Geraniaceae. The correct author citation for Pelargonium section Otidia. P. VORSTER 186 Orchidaceae. Additions to the synonymy of Eulophia schweinfurthii. A. V. HALL 186 Polygonaceae. Reinstatement of Oxygonum acetosella Welw. G. GERMISHUIZEN 187 6. Fusarium tricinctum (Fungi: Hyphomycetes) in South Africa — morphology and pathogenicity. SANDRA C. LAMPRECHT, W.F.O. MARASAS, P.S. VAN WYK and P.S. KNOX-DAVIES 189 7. Leaf anatomy of the South African Danthonieae (Poaceae). XVII. The genus Chaetobromus . R.P. ELLIS 195 8. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park; 1. Characterization of major vegetation units. B-E. VAN WYK, P.A. NOVELLIE and C.M. VAN WYK 211 9. Flora of the Zuurberg National Park. 2. An annotated checklist of ferns and seed plants. B-E. VAN WYK, C.M. VAN WYK and P.A. NOVELLIE 221 10. A synopsis of the plant communities of Swartboschkloof, Jonkershoek, Cape Province. D.J. McDONALD 233 11. A checklist of the flowering plants and ferns of Swartboschkloof, Jonkershoek, Cape Province. D.J. McDONALD and M. MORLEY 261 12. Threatened plants of the eastern Cape: a synthesis of collection records. D.A. EVERARD 271 13. Description of a proteoid-restioid stand in Mesic Mountain Fynbos of the south-western Cape and some aspects of its ecology. G. DAVIS 279 14. Miscellaneous notes: The plant number scale — an improved method of cover estimation using variable -sized belt tran- sects. R.H. WESTFALL and M.D. PANAGOS : . . . 289 15. New taxa, new records and name changes for southern African plants. G.E. GIBBS RUSSELL, W.G. WELMAN, G. GERMISHUIZEN, E. RETIEF, B.J. PIENAAR, C. REID, L. FISH, J. VAN ROOY, C.M. VAN WYK, E. KALAKE and STAFF 293 16. Annual report of the Botanical Research Institute 1987/88 305 17. Obituary: Hermann Merxmuller (1920— 1988). JURKE GRAU (Translation: O.A. Leistner) 325 18. Book reviews 329 Abstracted, indexed or listed in Biological Abstracts, Current Advances in Plant Science, Current Contents, Field Crop Abstracts, Forestry Abstracts, Herbage Abstracts, Excerpta Botanica, Revue of Plant Pathology, Revue of Medical and Veterinary Mycology and The Kew Record of Taxonomic Literature. ISSN 0006 8241 PRICE R15.00 (GST excL) © and published by Botanical Research Institute, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X101, Pretoria 0001, South Africa. Printed by the Government Printer, Bosman Street, Private Bag X85, Pretoria 0001. Tel. 323-9731 X 267. Obtainable from the Division of Agricultural Information, Department of Agriculture and Water Supply, Private Bag X144, Pretoria 0001, South Africa.